att ek: Coda es mee eo eee eee eimai oe ae "ge dans oa ; : POS SY rs Sar i” . : = na bee ana eb -? as bib On barr 8-09 Ore O80 a NAP Aarenaecer seers a ane ae 5-2 o- fie 6-816 One > teld as oe ee «~~ Onde 0nd: 20 nea ibne— BO ; mee ab oe tevthdete te tnt tbe pratense Tanne ‘ - Smathers 0:0) heh oom ie apabiatbetebready eae oro mah Seer sot eters ee fe Are VEAP ul & 7 pe 7 - , “ . ‘ — : : <. wie oe mad f ant Rd b ete RN eee net nn beeen ote Rae err se ae dtr ee a iM 4 ut : By TRANSACTIONS OF THE \ AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. VOL. V—NEW SERIES. Pas ss ae nN \ isQ La>s fi 2” is \ | } \ iy ba 22 ARY iy SS axe pe PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY. Bhilavelphia : PRINTED: BY JAMES KAY, JUN. & BROTHER, PRINTERS TO THE SOCIETY. No. 122, Cuestnut STREET. 1837. JzyIHSONje> a mel . a Cuan On ? og eas linia Radeon x | vPaayse Fanrlens Bi Aye ie EXTRACT FROM THE LAWS OF THE SOCIETY RELATING TO THE TRANSACTIONS. 1. The Transactions shall be published in numbers, at short intervals, under the direction of the Committee of Publication. 2. Every communication to the Society, which may be considered as intended for a place in the Transactions, shall immediately be referred to a committee to consider and report thereon. 3. If the committee shall report in favour of publishing the communication, they shall make such corrections therein, as they may judge necessary to fit it for the press; or if they shall judge the publication of an abstract or extracts from the paper to be most eligible, they shall accompany their report with such abstract or extracts. But if the author do not approve of the corrections, abstract, or extracts, reported by the committee, he shall be at liberty to withdraw his paper. 4. The order in which papers are read before the Society shall determine their places in the Transactions, priority of date giving priority of location. COMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION. Isaac Lea. Isaac Hays, M.D. R. Eglesfeld Griffith, M.D. oS oe its ee re : jong Saree abe, h tyne. iit ped iat oy tet: Tas ati ins brat iin ie ‘hows Labi rom .OF laian, 'g ce Sos vad ele rx 3 Lee = ‘ : ‘ P . * ‘ Sisipagni ute, vols ‘apr rin e seus “i Pa ue ye 3 saz sat Ri afi Fiat we: . tibia : wise of4 ny “ae a ee " ie sa sen ay 2 Lerine jai bog off yohie ott Tia sae Bisa ig g rt “gt ae dt heen vi inte fee a uses’ jae ea ai ne “aie Meaney iat lence |W Pale W. Teun’ | State of the Weather and Remarks. Deg. Min. |Deg. Min. Deg. Min. | Deg. Aug. 29th. Ber Ma \ 3, 2916)| 3 (25.7 13:9] 3° 27.6 | "743 Yi Moon near first quarter. seMP AMC 3028-3 3 25°0)) 923° | 2 26.6 | 762 2 PME 3 25.1 |S) 2432 4 1029 193) 24.6 1782 3 P.M.) 3 23.5] 3 21.8 | 1.7 | 3. 22.6 | 784} Cumulus. Clear before sun. 1 Sun striking on end of needle. 43 P.M} 3 22.613 21.8|0.8|3 22.2 ; een Penne eae Fee Sle Stl seek O.\eO%s8 1138 21.4) | 76 GSeEeME 3 20:21 3) W7.9)) 2.9 13 18.7 Sun sets at 6 h. 33 m. Hee eeviee se 202 S73) er95S 187.) 742)! Clear. Sebel 382226010 3 21.8 | OFS.\.9). 22.2 | 74 Clear. SOP Ma Se 2853 8) Soll ay 8 O77 Clear. 10 P.M. 3 27.5 | 3 26.4 | 1.1 | 3 26.9 | 693} Clear. MOP VES. 27. Se) 3 2624: |b 1S 26,9 684 Clear. 12 m. B Bsbe || 8 B72 | wi yo See I G66 || Clear PeeAe MS 28:3 | 3° 27.28 11-1 3627-7 | i66x! Clear. Aug. 30th. | Clear. Needle vibrating. 2 AM] 3 26.7] 3 25.7] 1.0] 3 26.2 ; Gee rosian conte BAe oon Sasol 9 12256 | OLoIh os 25.0 | 66s Hazy. EAM: S, 2001 3 2053510: 70 312056 663 Clear. 5 A.M.) 3 21.0 | 3 20:3) 0.7 | 3 20:6 662 Dense fog. 52 A.M.) 3 21.0; 3 20.3 | 0.7 | 3 20.6 | 663} Dense fog. Time of sunrise. 6 A.M.) 3 21.8|3 21.0] 0.8 | 3 21.4 | 66 Fog less dense. 7% A.M.) 3 21.8] 3 21.0] 0.8] 3 21.4 672 Foggy. 8% A.M.) 3 20.2 | 3 19.6 | 0.6] 3 19.9 Foggy. Sea viEon 2120) 9. 18.9 | 20 | 3. 29.9 | 70x Fog clearing off. OM AACIVE 3 | 25.9) |/'3\ 24.2) | 1.7 | 3) 25:0 |}! 72 Cumulus. Sun out. Fog gone. Poe Wve Ss) 25.9 1° 325.0 | 0/9 1325.4 1s Cumulus. 12 M 3 27.5 | 3 25.0 | 2.5 | 3 26.2 | 783 Cumulus. VOL. Y.—B 6 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION The greatest difference of the numbers of the second and third column in the foregoing table is at the beginning, as might have been expected, where it amounts to nearly four minutes, and shows that the first two observations are of little value; the greatest subsequent varia- tion from the mean difference is about one minute and a half. To have a perspicuous view of the results of the observations for every twenty-four hours, I traced, at the close of each series, a curve, the ordinates of which represented the variation, and the equidistant abscisse the hours. By writing, at the side of each ordinate, the remarks on the weather, the view was rendered more complete. To compare the progress of the variation with that of the temperature, a curve was traced below the former, in which the ordinates represented the temperatures. The crude observations suggested by the visible representation of the day’s results, given in chart No. 1, (see Plate I.*) are not here added; it may not be amiss, however, to state, that my object at this time in tracing the curve of temperature, as well as that of variation, was to ascertain whether the directive force underwent correlative changes with the temperature, as the intensities were sup- posed to do by M. Kupffer from his first experiments.* Two maxima of westerly variation, and two minima were distinctly seen in this day’s results. ‘The first maximum was at noon day; the second between midnight and 1 A.M. The first minimum was be- tween 64 and 7 in the afternoon, and the second between 84 and 9 in the morning. There is, on the contrary, but one tide of temperature, rising until between 2 and 3 in the afternoon, descending with vari- able rapidity until 6 in the morning, half an hour after sunrise. The descent of the curve is interrupted by the fog, and it was not unnatural to suppose this to have its effect on the hour of the minimum. The hour of evening minimum variation differs, it will be observed, from that obtained by Canton and Gilpin, suggesting a close attention to the results furnished by the subsequent observations. In the following tables the mean of the observed variations shown by the north and south pole of the needle is given. ‘The hours from * Recherches sur les Variations de la durée Moyenne des oscillations horizontales de |’ai- guille aimenté, &c. A. 'T. Kupffer, Annales de Chim. et de Phys. vol. 35 (1827). OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. c! noon to midnight of the 30th of August are in one column; and in the parallel column, those from midnight to noon of the 31st. TABLE II. Variation. N. Pole W. Temp. Remarks, Hour. | Hour. aration. Temp. Remarks. — —$— Deg. Min. } Deg. Deg. Min. | Deg. 12 M. | 3 26.2 | 78% | Aug. 30. Clear.12 m. 326:9 Ws | Auge 3.) Hog. (Fog. Thermom. Sun under cloud. ‘ | hungnear needle 1 P.M. 3 25.8 | 803 Sky generally 1 A.M.) 3 25.4 | 70% |< box. Temp. the clear. | same as before | removal. eee wa) 3 25.8 | 7192-) Clear: Qe IVE 3 2368) ile 3 P.M.| 3 27.0 | 80 Clear. SAMS 2252) (ahs 43 P.M.| 3 23.9 | 812 |. Clear. 4 A.M.) 3 22.2 | 71% SAM 3- 21501) |--73 53 P.M.| 3 23.9 | 79% | Clear. 53 A.M.) 3 20.3 | 724 |Hazy. 6 GAG MES 2007 | 723 62 P.M.) 3 21.9 | 752 | Clear. 63 A.M] 3 19.9 | 72 {Mist 7 P.M. 3 19.9 | 733 Clear. 73 A.M.) 3 18.7 | 72% So) 2-M) 3 26.2 | 73 Sky cloudless. SPAS Ss a19..2 9 P.M. 3 28.5 | 713 | Sky cloudless. OF TASVIN StS 7 Heals, Sun gleams out. 10 P.M. 3 28.5 | 703 | Sky cloudless, {10 A.M. 3 19.9 | 77% Therm. remoy- Stars not visible Gly Cee 11 P.M. 3 26.9 | 702 through fog.11 A.M.| 3 23.8 | 808 ; ey nana | is) P.M : A es 2 Vartan greater 3 P.M] 3 26.9 | 712 113 A.M. ; earn 2m, P 20.9 | 718 | Secokeca| ies sored The curves in No. 2, Plate I.*, are those of the variation and tem- perature from the table just given. We see that the general features are the same, but the details vary very much. We may trace the causes of these variations in the curves of temperature, though the knowledge which we possess on the subject of the variation of the needle does not permit us to doso for it. Both days were clear about noon, with flying clouds (cumulus); the second was a day of settled weather succeeding the first, and the maximum temperature was higher ; but about noon in No. 2, the sun was frequently obscured by clouds, and the hour of maximum was removed to between 4 and 5 P.M. No. 1 was de- NS ey ante 8 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION scending to the sunrise minimum, when the observation at 3 A.M. showed a rise of temperature, and a haze is noted at the same time; No. 2 in like manner is descending to the same minimum, when, at between 10 and 11 P.M., an irregular rise commences, and a fog is noted, varying only in density, until late in the morning: this fog checked more or less completely the powerful radiation from the earth, which was going on before the screen of fog was interposed between the earth and sky. It is worthy of note, that in No. 1, at the observation preceding the remark “ hazy,” we find the memorandum, “ needle vibrating.” TABLE III. Hour. N. Pole W./Temp. Remarks. Hour. N. Pole W. |Temp. Remarks. Deg. Min. | Deg. Deg. Min. | Deg. i2°>M. | 3 26:3 |s8i51)¢ Aug. Si. Sept. 1. ( Showercomesup, | Jasts4m.;recom- 842} mences at 2h. | 1lm. and rains until 2h. 27m. Ceases to rain for 843 an instant, then recommences. 823} Sun out. 854{ Sununderacloud. 842 Sununderacloud. = Gust to N. of W. 79% | Rain just begun. Heavy part of 718% gust has passed. 2.00PM: 3 26.0 Thunder to S.E. ( Needlevibrating. A Ga 32.0 i: No rain. Much 7 P.M ‘3 ape 773 thunder and L lightning. Raining steadily. Gust has entire-/ 8 A.M.| 3 23.8 | 712| Clear. ly passed. Cloudy. Therm. 9 P.M] 3 31.7 | 773 Be raining. 9 A.M.) 3 18.3 |} 64 ? placed in com- oudy. pass box. 10 P.M. 3 32.0] 75 | Cloudy. 10 A.M| 3 19.1 | 65 |$Cumulus. Sky generally clear. 75 Raining slightly.|/11 A.M.| 3 19.9 Approximate 71 Wind Ui es 12 M. | 3 20.4 | 67 calculated from tats that at 124 P.M. 2) am. 3 2602 OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. 9 The meteorological phenomena of this day were particularly inter- esting, and will be referred to in detail: the curves of observations are on No. 3, Plate I.* The variation evidently diminishing at mid- night, and the sky being clear, the observations were intermitted until 8 A.M. Great pains were bestowed in noting the fluctuations before, during, and after the shower and the gust in the afternoon; the periods of change being seized for observation. TABLE IV. Hour. |N. Pole W.|Temp. Remarks. Hour. |N. Pole W./Temp. Remarks, Deg. Min. | Deg. be Deg. Min. | Deg. Sept. 2. eePiaat REO 2m. 3 34.9 | 58 5 Cleudless night. 123 P.M.| 3 21.0 | 67% on the platform||123 A.M. Cloudless. with needle. 1 P.M. 1 A.M.) 3..3832 | 58 Cloudless. 13 P.M.) 3 21.9 } 68 Clear. 13 A.M. 20 PM: 2 A.M.) 3-.3250 | 56 Cloudless. 94 P.M.| 3 21.4 | 70 Stratus to west. || 22 A.M. 3 P.M.) 3 22.2 | 662] Clear. 3 A.M] 3 32.0 | 48 Cloudless. 4 P.M. 4 A.M.) 3 32.0 | 47 Cloudless. 5 P.M] 3 22.6 Clear. 5 A.M.) 3 31.7 | 463] Cloudless. 53 P.M. 53 A.M.| 3 32.0 | 44 Cloudless. 6 P.M.) 3 15.1 | 69 Clear. 6 A.M.| 3 30.8 | 47 Clear. 62 P.M. Sun sets. 63 A.M.| 3 21.9 | 48 Clear. 7 P.M.) 3 14.7 | 67% | Cloudless. 7 A.M. 72 P.M. i "7 73 A.M.| 3 19.1 | 58 Clear. yi loudless. Moon 8 P.M.) 3 16.0 | 623 in first quarter. § A.M. 3 12.6 |} 61 Clear. 82 P.M. 83 A.M.) 3 10.6 | 64 Clear. 9 P.M.) 3 28.5 Cloudless. 9 A.M. 3 12.6 | 66 Clear. 10 P.M.| 3 28.9 | 60 Cloudless. 10 A.M.| 3 138.5 | 72 Clear. 11 P.M. 3 34.9 | 592 | § Moon sets. 11 A.M} 3 15.1176 | Clear i 2 | 2Cloudless night. ; f i 113 A.M.| 3 12.7 | 76 Clear. The weather of the first part of this twenty-four hours was slightly affected by the storm of the day before; there wasa stratus to the west at 25 in the afternoon, which, when it disappeared, left a cloudless day, succeeded by a perfectly clear and still night. The thermometer was, throughout the observations, placed in the inclosure containing VOL. V.—C ee eee 10 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION the platform, and half hourly observations were resorted to about some of the times remarked by former observations as containing maxima or minima of variation. The curves given by these observations are traced on No. 4, Plate I.* The free radiation of heat during the night frem the earth, caused a great depression in the temperature of the air near to it, the sunrise minimum of the thermometer being as low as 44°, the maximum of the day having been 692°. Hour. N. Pole W./Temp. Deg. Min. | Deg. 12 MM. [3 18:7 P76 122 P.Mees's19/9 1773 1 P.M.) 3 25.4 | 802 13 P.M.) 3 25.4 | 80 2 P.M. 3 25.4] 81 23 P.M.) 3 26.9 | 793 3 P.M.) 3 26.9 | 793 33 P.M.| 3 26.9 | 793 4 P.M. 3 26.9 | 793 5 P.M.| 3 25.4 | 76 6 P.M.) 3 23.0 | 70 63 P.M.) 3 23.0 TABLE V. Remarks. Hour. Sept. 2. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. Clear. { Sun sets. Sky generally clear. } Cirrus and light L cumulus. Clear. [ Cloudy. Moon wading through i dark cirro-cu- 8 A.M. mulus. Cloudy. 9 A.M. Clouds more dense. 10 A.M. Moon dips be- hind hill. 11 AM. resi N. Pole W. |Temp. Remarks. Deg. Min. | Deg. Sept. 3. (Therm. near 3 26.2 | 64 { house. Cloudy. Dark L_ stratus. Cloudy. 3 21.9 | 64 1 NE 3 22.6 Cloudy. 3 23.0 | 652} Cloudy. 3 22.6 | 653] Raining. cumulo- Wind OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. 11 The night maximum having decidedly passed before 11 P.M., the observations were not made after that hour during the night. The curves of variation and temperature are traced on No. 5, Plate II.* TABLE VI. U Hour. N. Pole W. |Temp. Remarks. Hour. N. Pole W.|T mp. Remarks. 4 ice hitee EDL Deg. Min. | Deg. i 12 M. | 3 22.6 | 653 | Sept.3. Raining|12 m. | 3 30.1 | 603 | Sept. 4. ‘I Rain ceased. Raining fast. H 1 P.M. 3 23.0 | 654 Rain recom- || 1 A.M.) 3 29.3 | 602 Wind draws menced. more to south. Not raining. 2 P.M] 3 26.9 | 66 ; imnis heh: 32 P.M.) 3 26.9 | 642 Not raining. SP MVE 3) 26.2) | 66 6 P.M.| 3 21.9 | 65 63 P.M.) 3 23.4 | 65 74 P.M.) 3 24.6 | 64 Smee Vin 8 A.M.) 3 16.0 | 642 Nimbus. 83 P.M.) 3 26.2 | 63 83 A.M. 9 P.M) 3 24.6 | 63 9% A.M.| 3 16.8 | 663 Drizzle. 103 P.M| 3 27.7| 62 ee Wind) o3 A.M. i P.M: 11 A.M.| 3 18.3 | 672 Slight rain. Slight rain. 12 m. | 3 30.1 | 603 TemMiyalaureico!| ese |), coves lighter than at last ob- servation. t This table will be found interesting, as showing the effect of asteady rain upon the variation. The maximum being passed at 1 A.M., the observations were discontinued until 8 in the morning. The results are traced on No. 6, Plate II.* The thermometer was not in the needle inclosure, but in a fair exposure on the outside of the house. 12 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION | TABLE VII. Hour. |N. Pole W. (Temp. Remarks. Hour. |N. Pole W.| Temp. Remarks. Deg. Min. Te Deg. Min. | Deg. Sana Sept. 5. 12 M. | 3 21.0 | 683 Bisse 12 m. | 3 26.9 | 69 Fog less dense. Gentle rain. 2 | Wind N. of W. ( Needle vibrating Not raining. slightly. Fog 1 P.Mi 321.4 602 Ninbus. Y *ALM. 3:°26.2 1168 eanrctienen ae 2.) eM. almost still. 23 P.M.) 3 21:8 | 712 Nimbus. Cumu- lus. Wind S.W. A Cumulus. Cu- ; mulo-stratus. | s gleams out. 4 P.M.) 3 25.5 5 P.M.| 3 25.8 ~I +l 32] Cumulus. Cumulus. Sun { | ia aaa ; sets in clouds. | 7 PM! 3 25.8 Clear. Cumulus / ci ; B16 seat en Needle vibrati Clear. Fog col- : ppeapedh aie: 8 P.M.| 3 25.8 | 68 § A.M.) 3 24.9 | 623 Cloudless. Wind lecting in valley. N. W. 9 P.M.| 3 26.6 | 68 | Fogin valley. |} 9 AM 3 20.3 | 63 Clear Gea a 10 P.M.| 3 26.6 | 68 i aes ee 10 A.M. 3 22.2 | 64 | Clear generally. ¢ Dense fog. Wind 11 P.M.| 3 26.2 | 68 ; hauling to W. | Fog less dense. 12 m. | 3 26.9 | 69 } Wind N. of W. 11 A.M.| 3 24.3 | 643] Clear generally. Scattered cumu- 12 M. | 3 24.6 | 652 wir The weather was very unsettled during these twenty-four hours; there was a rain, then the sky cleared ; a fog, which occupied the former part of the night, was dispersed before 8 o’clock in the evening. ‘The wind, at first S. E., shifted to S. W., gradually drew more to the W. and N., and finally settled at N. W. ‘The thermometer was observed on the outside of the house. The curves of variation and temperature are traced on No. 7, Plate II.* | The weather now became settled, and the observations for every hour are given in the following table. ~— . —— S OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. i TABLE VIII. Hour. N. Pole W.| Temp. 13 Hour. |N. Pole W. |Temp. Remarks. Remarks. Deg. Min. | Deg. Deg. Min. | Deg. Sept. 5. 6 Sept. 6. 12 M. 3 24.6 | 652 |< Scattered Cumu-|12 m. 3 34.9 | 54 Aiea lus. WindN.W. i ; 1 P.M.) 3 25.5 | 66 | Ditto. A.M.| 3 30.1 | 53 ee tact 2 P.M.| 3 25.8 | 663| Ditto. 2 AMS Siet tea25 Cloudless. Therm. 3 P.M.| 3 25.8 | 672| Ditto. 3 A.M.) 3 32.8 | 453 in inclosure with needle box. 4 P.M.| 3 26.5 | 68 Ditto. 4 A.M.) 3 32.8 | 443 42 P.M.| 3 26.2 | 672) Ditto. 5 A.M.) 3 31.7 | 44 Wind has lulled. fi 63,P.M.| 3 21.0] 64 |3 gop eena hit| © A-M| 3 30.5 | 473 7 P.M.| 3 19.9 | 632 7 AM).3 21.7 | 55 Therm. removed 8 P.M.| 3 25.8 | 603 | Cloudless. 8 A.M.) 3 21.4 | 62 to house, where it stood at 593. §3 P.M. 83 A.M.) 3 22.2 9 P.M.| 3 26.2 | 57 | Cloudless. 9 A.M 3 21.0 | 603 cee plage (ane TO EVMeeom2658) | 57 Cloudless. 10 A.M.) 3 21.7] 62 Ditto. 11 P.M.) 3 32.1 | 553 os CU ition ARM. 63 lus to S. 12m | 3) 34.9..| 54 |) 2CTeart 12 M. | 3 22.2| 64 | § Stratus. Cumu- lus. Wind W. | From 3 until 8 A.M. the thermometer was in the inclosure with the needle. On its removal to the house, it fell 24° below its tem- perature at the former station. These curves are given in No. 8, Plate II.* The afternoon of September 6th was clear, with occasional cirrus and collecting cumulus; dew was deposited immediately at sun set, and a dense fog occupied a part of the morning of the 7th. It was proposed to make at least one day’s observations with the needle exposed to the direct action of the sun, and by mistake the covering was removed before twelve o'clock on the 7th, as will be seen by the remark in the subjoined table. ‘The curve (No. 9, Plate III.*) repre- senting the observations of this day, terminates at the observation for 95 A.M. VOL. V.—D et — Oa 14 Hour. N. Pole W. |Temp. Deg. Min. | Deg. oo 22.2 TABLE IX. Remarks. Hour. ‘ Deg. Min. Sept. 6. 64 Stratus. Cumu-||12 m. 3 26.6 lus. Wind W. 65 1 A.M.) 3 26.2 66 67 ¢Dark cumulo-| ,, ou 2. stratus to W. 53 A.M 3 24.1 643 Cirrus. 622 Dew deposited at sunset. 58 ett Rare Cu- mulus. 8 A.M.) 3 22.2 54 Cloudless. 9 A.M.| 3 23.3 93 A.M.| 3 23.5 9% A.M.| 2 57.8 54 10 A.M.| 2 58.2 52 Very slight haze./11 A.M.| 3 16.0 Cumulo-stratus to W. Wind draw-||12 ™. 3 33.2 “} ON THE DIURNAL YARIATION ing to S. of W. N. Pole W./Temp. Deg. 54 53 Remarks. Sept. 7. ing fr. E. High Low stratus driv- 54 60 64 cumulusfr.S.W. Dense fog. mee has peared. { Clear. Cumulus sometimes over ) sun. Roof removed, variation dimin- ished rapidly, and at 92 had increased again to 2 57.8. disap- | ie Foe Vibrating. On the removal of the covering from the needle, much water was evaporated from the bottom and sides of the box, collecting in drops on the glass at the N. and S. ends of the box; this was wiped off as it collected, by removing the glass. and its rapid increase, are points worthy of remark. The sudden diminution of variation, The remaining observations were made with the sun upon the needle, a thermometer being inclosed in the box so as to have, hourly, the temperature of the needle. A day intervened between the last observations and tuose in the table which follows; during that day the OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. 15 box became thoroughly dry, and at night the needle was covered over to prevent a reduction of temperature which would have produced a deposit of dew upon it. The effects shown in the following table are therefore due to comparatively sudden variations of temperature.* The broken lines representing the observations will be found on No. 10, Plate III.* TABLE X. Hour. N. Pole W. Temp. Remarks. Deg. Min. Deg. S 1 ept. 8. Ugo ele Force Needle covered. 3 A.M 3 06.0 Needle uncovered. 93 A.M By GES) Hazy. Cumulus. Vibrating between 3° 20’.6 and 3° 23’.8. 10 A.M. 2 fous ce The eain needle box. 11 A.M 3 39.6 104 Scattered cumulus. Vibrating between 3° 38'.3 and 3° 26’.2. 12 M. 3 32.2 Scattered cumulus. Sun occasionally clouded. RSI EE Seis. Siar Ditto. @ PIM Cone 94 3 P.M. 2 59.2 86 Sun under a cloud. 4 P.M. 2 59.2 82 Cloudy. 62 P.M. 2 26.0 67 Sun has set clear. 8 P.M. 2 44.9 60 Cumulus. Cumulo-stratus. HOP eae 2 52.0 The first conclusion which I would draw from a review of the entire series of observations is, that there were, for the time embraced by them, two maxima and two minima of westerly variation, within every twenty-four hours. ‘This fact is distinctly shown in each of the curves, and will be pointed out particularly by endeavouring to determine the hours of maximum and minimum variation. This result agrees with that obtained by Mr Canton, from his ex- tended series of observations, and subsequently by Mr Gilpin. Col. Beaufoy, still later (1813 to 1822), had evidence of the occurrence of the same maxima and minima, though he seems not to have been able to fix the time of the evening minimum. * Very little consideration will serve to show that these effects cannot be ranked with those recorded by Mr Fox in the Philosophical Magazine for October 1833. SS 16 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION The observations of Capt. Parry and Lieut. Foster at Port Bowen, are of the more interest, that, from the peculiarity of their situation, there was but one point of maximum and one of minimum variation during twenty-four hours. These observations were made nearly every hour of the day and night. 'The latitude of Port Bowen is 73° 14’ N., and the variation of the needle 124° W. As far as the observations of Lieut. Hood, at Fort Enterprize, war- rant any conclusion, it is coincident with that just noticed; the point of maximum easterly variation and that of minimum easterly varia- tion are clearly shown in his observations. Fort Enterprize is in lati- tude 64° 28’ N., and the mean variation is about 36° 24’ E. The second conclusion which the foregoing observations seem to me to warrant is, that, through the irregularities which they present, there is shown @ general horary variation as the primary phenomenon and the effects of meteorological changes as modifying causes ; often over- coming the diurnal variation, and impressing their own alterations upon the variation of the needle. To examine the first part of this deduction, I will follow, in their general features, the several curves traced to represent the observations, omitting No. 3 on account of its peculiarities. 1. The variation is at its maximum during the day, at or near the hour of highest temperature. The greatest difference between these times is two hours and a half. But the day maximum seems subject to great changes of position ; in one case occurring at noon, in another not until 5 P.M. These deductions are shown in the tabular view which follows. ; | Number of | Hour of Maxi- | Hour of Maxi- Curve. mum Variations mum Temp. General character of the weather. No.1. |12 M. 21 P.M. itaee before noon, and clear just before noon. Po. 2s for pee 43 P.M. Clear, with floating clouds. No. 4. 3to5 P.M. | 23 P.M. Generally clear, follows unsettled weather. No. 5. 22to4P.M.|2 P.M Clear. Needle stationary from 23 to 4 Oi raise P.M. No proper maximum. No. 6. | 2 to 33 P.M.| 23 to4 P.M.| Rainingin the morning. Weather variable. No. 7. | 43 P.M. 4 P.M. Cloudy. Weather variable. No. 8. 4 P.M. 32 P.M. Clear. No.9. |1to4P.M.|]4 P.M. aks The observation of the needle at 4 P.M. was uncertain. OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. 17 2. The westerly variation decreases from this variable maximum to a minimum, which is near the hour of sunset. The time of this minimum is included within the narrow limits of 52 and 7 o’clock.* Hour of Minimum i Number of Curve. Hour of Sunset. Remarks. | Variation. H. Min. H. Min ’ No, 1. 6 45 P.M. | 6 33 P.M Clear in the afternoon and at sunset. No. 2. 700 P.M. | 6 32 P.M. Sun sets clear. No. 4. 7100) Pe 76929) (2M. Sun sets clear. No. 5. 6 20 P.M. } 6 28 P.M Cirrus. | No. 6. 6 00 P.M. | 6 27 P.M. | Cloudy. Weather variable. | No. 7. 6 CO P.M. | 6 26 P.M. Sun sets in clouds. Noe. Be Tah | aaa aban Pup sete clear. Sinks below hill at No. 9. 5 45 P.M. | 6 23 P.Mz Sun sets in clouds. No. 10. TAG PMS {76 -21" P. WE is calculated, the observations show Sun sets clear. The hourof minimum | that it was after 62h. 3. The variation increases from the minimum just determined to a variable maximum which is reached at or about midnight. On the nights when the weather was not variable, this appears, from the fol- lowing table, to be true. Number of Curve. pow a emu Remarks. | | H. Min. No: 12 40 A.M. | Clear. Wo: 2. 9 25 P.M. | Succeeded by a fog. No. 4. 11 10 P.M. } Clear. No. 5. 8 15 P.M. | Cloudy. Clouds increase in density after this hour. } No. 6. 12 00 m. Raining before and after this hour. | No. 7. 12 00 m. Fog. No. 8. 11 40 P.M. | Clear. | No...9. Stationary from 9 until 12. | 4, From this maximum there is a descent, more or less irregular, to a morning minimum, between 8 and 9 o'clock. * This places the evening minimum at a much earlier hour than that given by other ob- servers, and from results which I have obtained since, in the city of Philadelphia, I am inclined to suppose it to have resulted from some peculiarity in the locality or season. VOL. V.—E es al : 18 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION Hour of minimum Number of Curve. westerly variation. Remarks. H. Min. No. 1. 8 52 Fog clearing away. No. 2. 9 00 Fog not breaking until near ten. No. 3. 9 00 Cloudy. Pao { 8 30 Clear. The curve seems to indicate that the true is 8 02 minimum was earlier than 8h. 30 m. or at 8h. 2m. No. 5. 9 00 Cloudy. . NEG Syl Nimbus. There is a doubt if the true minimum was} wee: ; observed. No: 7: 9 00 Cloudless. No. 8. 9 00 Slight haziness. No. 9. 8 00 Dense fog, which entirely disappeared before 9 o’clock. ‘It cannot be affirmed that this minimum was not placed at this particu- lar hour, by the effect of the weather, for there are but two observations when the weather was clear, and but three when it was steady, in one of which (No. 6) the minimum may have occurred before any obser- vation was made. It agrees, however, with the recorded observations of others. The observed minima did not depart in any two observa- tions more than one hour from each other. In order to determine these points still more unexceptionably, and with the further view of observing the effect of meteorological causes, I have taken the mean of the results of eight of the days of observa- — tion, including No. 3, for each hour. They are givenin the following table ; and curve No. 11, Plate III.* is traced fromthem. The last co- lumn of the table shows the number of observations from which each mean has been deduced, giving, therefore, the relative authority of each. When the observations were made at the half hours, the mean of half an hour before and half an hour after was taken, as the number for the variation or temperature at the hour. A similar calculation was made for the variation at any particular hour, when no observa- tion had been made, whenever the interval between two observations did not exceed an hour and a half. The mean temperature of the day having varied considerably in the changes of weather, it was thought more correct to enter into the columns of temperature, at the several hours on which observations were not made, an average of the next preceding and succeeding observation, whenever the intervals OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. 19 were considerable. After making this correction, the daily maximum appears to be nearly at the hour on which it occured in clear weather. Table of Mean Variation and Temperature from noon of August 29th to noon of September 7th, 1882. No. of | Temp. | No. of No. of } Temp. | No. of EIS NoEcleswy, Obs. Fah, Obs. Hour: N. Pole W. Obs. | Fahr. | Obs. a) oe Deg. Min. Deg. Deg. Min. Deg. Bite Vie. 3) 23%s | 9 ot Tei) 9 | 12m SeZONSP |e Sin 63/0) | 178 IPM S24 Mee Ota er iain 9 ACME Sh28i3 [eT i616 |) 7 eeMa \sn2do | ol 73.5,\e ol 2AM | os ee.4 | 4 60: | 3 Spe Nie) (3) 24 O010h 9) tarsus 72S ANNIE) 3) 27725) 45 157.8) | 4 4P.M. | 3 24.7| 9 | 74.0] 6 | 4A.M.| 3 26.9] 4 | 57.4] 4 5PM." |3) 24.4) 8\ |. 73.5'| 6 |) 5 A.M.| 3 26.2 | 4 | 57.0} 4 Byler 55a 20FoN |) (lhl, 7055) |) 8 GRACE) oP 250le|) Are 6853) 74 fol Me | 322.8519) | G84) 9p bla AME) 3/20.7)|)'4,°| 63.31) 4 SP.M. | 3 25.4} 9 | 66.3} 9 | SA.M.} 320.7} 9 | 65.4] 8 | Ope MEMS 2 7.89)" 92116425.) OPACINIEG | 3 eNO. 27192" 66325 > 9 HOVE M3) 27.8 u) Obu i 63-n-9 vi 1O/ALM.198 20:27).1)8 | 67:9 [072 -| 11 P.M. | 3 28.3] 9 | 632] 9 | 11A.M.) 3214] 7 | 67.7] 8 | The two tides of variation appear distinctly from the mean results, and with but slight irregularities in their increase or decrease. The day maximum is at 3 P.M. The evening minimum at 7, or with pro- bably more truth, as shown by the dotted lines in No. 11, Plate ITI.*, at Gh. 26m. The night maximum is at midnight. The morning minimum at 9 o’clock. The mean variation, according to this table, for the place of obser- vation, is 3° 24'.7. The greatest observed variation 3° 34’.9, and the least 3° 10/.6 in- cluding all the curves traced. The first of these is the midnight maximum of No. 8, and the second the morning minimum of No. 4. The latitude of the place, which was about one mile from the village of West Chester, is about 39° 58’, and its longitude about 21 miles west from Philadelphia. The effect of ordinary meteorological phenomena upon the variation was first noticed, I believe, by Mr Christie, who gives a table illustra- tive of the effect produced by the occurrence of a rain; he has not, that I am aware, followed up the observation to which I allude. Lieut. Foster infers that ordinary meteorological phenomena do not affect the variation of the needle; a result which the different nature of the 20 ON THE DIURNAL VARIATION instruments used or the localities of observation may perhaps be found to explain. In regard to the latter point, there was of course a marked difference in the nature of the meteorological phenomena at the two places. In the whole of the abstract of the meteorological observa- tions given by Lieut. Foster, there is no record of rain, and no notice of thunder storms, while my results, obtained during part of the last month of summer and of the first of autumn, were diversified by steady rains, showers, fogs, &c. In showing the effects of meteorological phenomena on the varia- tion, I purpose to appeal to the direct evidence afforded by curve No. 3 (Plate I.*); the peculiarities of the other curves may afford collateral testimony, but comparatively of less value. The morning of August 31st was clear with flying white clouds ; towards two o’clock a dark cloud came up from the westward and a shower fell; this was not accom- panied by thunder or lightning, and soon passed over. Just at the beginning of this shower the variation was 8° 26’.5 W., and as soon as it had ceased, the needle was again observed and was found but 3°10'.7 W. Insaying that there was no extraordinary electrical excite- ment during this shower, I do not mean to assert that the changes of the variation were not due to the usual electrical changes which al- ways attend such phenomena. Seing unprovided with means of esti- mating electrical changes, I only refer to the visible indications of lightning. The sun now shone out, and at 3 P.M. the variation had increased to 3° 25'.8. ‘Towards 4 P.M. clouds began to gather, and at 5h. 20 m. black clouds to the N. W. indicated an approaching gust. At the moment the rain commenced the needle was noted, the varia- tion had decreased, between 5h. 30 m., the time of the last observa- tion, and 5h. 48m., 13 minutes. The rain was violent, accompa- nied by thunderand lightning. At 7 P.M. the rain had ceased, and the gust had passed to the eastward, the needle vibrated violently between 3° 32’ W. and 3° 37’ W. Such irregularities are conclusive as to the influence of the phenomena attending a shower and a gust. ‘The va- riations noticed will be seen, from curve No. 3, to precede the effects produced on the thermometer; after a general coincidence, the curves depart from each other, the curve of variation rising abruptly, and that of temperature but slightly. OF THE HORIZONTAL NEEDLE. . 21 The ill sustained nightly maximum of No. 2 was accompanied by a fog ; so was the variable nightly part of curve No. 7, where a fog began to collect at eight in the evening. The nightly rise of curves No. 5 and No. 9, ceased with the coming up of clouds and of haze. The well sustained height of No. 2 was during a clear night, as was the case with No. 4. The steady rain of Sept. 3d and 4th, does not seem materially to have affected the regularity of the curve. In conclusion, ! would make two brief remarks. The first relates to the observation of two tides of variation while there is but one of temperature. ‘This would seem to be adverse to the supposed influ- ence of heat were it not that we find the same agent producing two fluctuations of the barometer ; when we shall be as well acquainted with the effects of local and of general variation of temperature upon the magnet, as we are of its effects upon atmospheric air, the question will be near to its solution. The second remark relates to the effect of the electrical changes in the atmosphere, or of changes of temperature upon the needle; the meteorological phenomena noticed to affect the variation, probably act through, if they are not produced by one or both of these changes. The experiments of Cavallo have shown, at least with regard to the parts of the atmosphere not very far from the earth’s surface, that there is perpetual electrical excitement, and frequent change. If his experiments had led to any conclusions other than the most general, they might perhaps have thrown light upon our subject. Where so much yet remains to be known, even the imperfect labour here pre- sented may not be without its fruits. VOL. Y.—F i wi i reliant 6 i Pe Crieore = a ikeUG ' i Pan. Haig egal “oir e oe Ad Tuam ixen! \Bifint sai “WP oa £ ia arnt PR oFt sTivo Wo Hee Be ‘oldaitey * ay ene et i Li pstige te colt yEdpie off -pititia’. 5 op a t ‘tk thsith ors vigil Ste an. Bits wiike ‘io. GU yairoy att Cary eG | ie find 8 ~ aa Mae ae IY TAgld B ae MA & ra te idgisa henuin tel oy | aor, ih i ; EO she de foi, hy Sh! Hi bo eee me tint heh te 1 SE OES Tee EP ee adh lose vet wy eters yok ow) ‘dont: Blow U rnp | stent Sitti noitatiny. 1 ob bEr Over Yo “holes 1S ie corutiia SAF GF anravhs wd of mae blineave aii” pe: feb: ebuig Sime sts ofh 7 att ov) Indh tan Wi sie set TOS ine ttn tu Hede avi 52 for 7 vetsarotae od?’ WW Sata re if a srrwamat le Mosher ris. naw to Barr fegil be efoalis’ ad ah i rt 18,9 badqnnn is. & tose AH pants Bi lo S18 Her oe Volta! “7 at? OF Tease as 4 Lioeiiaale sid o jou Fil OF estalay danas ions SH ibegi: Got anda: vy cites We rately os ‘noth ldgcot? tet hee itt. hae sta) ny Bitiion RSL pv Ie get Wee etL na: 1 Ya find to genet, yet Neer od Soi sin, eont ie = ott ob Binur, oie tenst ti of ee Gavi Ofte my To wriocnbeites teat ontina qlee ac} eit ‘tal ey 200 YT siege Siete py pie ee ue Wh Zt) i aangts tnatp bt ik Sisrdoteias (otis: sf barr} ea As Jetssen.teog: off aki wilio amoleniagng ve 1d DAT Dad Wise iW dosidia th fea del away vee nti: ‘Ital we uodal tag ‘tag net "ad ae2 0) (som _ (H atinntst Ve ua ni bicuelbey ad Ke a uote f k Ar op ah ; | 1; wl? 23 ARTICLE ITI. Observations on the Naiades ; and Descriptions of New Species of thai, and other Families. By Isaac Lea. Read before the American Philosophical Society March 16 , 1832. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. In presenting myself again before the Society with a new memoir in that department of conchology which has so much engaged my atten- tion for some years, an apology would seem almost necessary. My zeal and love for the science generally will, I trust, be sufficient for my present intrusion on its time. The family (aiades seems to have excited very little interest with the older writers on natural history, and not much more among mo- dern zoologists until within the present century. The progress of general knowledge, and the improvements in the mechanic arts, have recently been greatly accelerated, and the disco- veries and improvements in the study of natural science, have gone on “pari passu” with them; and we have every reason to believe that the momentum which they have acquired wilf not be diminished, for, to use the words of one of the most successful writers of the present day. “there is growing up an enlightened public opinion” which no power is likely to arrest, and which must carry us far towards a perfect state Q4 ON THE NAIADES, of knowledge, while there is such a “ diffusion of existing knowledge among the mass of mankind” as we have at present. We can only account for the almost total neglect of the family LVaiades by writers on natural history of the last century, in the fact that the fresh waters of Europe produce so few species that they had then scarcely attracted attention. ‘The habits of these animals have been there so little studied and known, that some recent writers of reputation assert that they move with the beaks of the shell “ down- ward,” which is equivalent to saying they walk on their backs. The anterior part has been called the posterior part, which is as much as to say, that their locomotion is backward. These facts display a great want of attention to the animal in its ‘ element,—where it would be observed to possess many curious and striking characteristi¢s. ‘The great systematist, the immortal Linneus, whose name will be found recorded in the book of the last student of natural history, knew so few members of this family that he classed them indiscriminately with two marine genera, Mya and Mytilus. It was the rich and splendid productions of the rivers of the United States, and particularly those which are tributary to the Mississippi, which first roused the attention of the zoologist to their extraordinary characters; and they have within a few years become sought after by collectors as eagerly as the “ most precious jewels of the ocean.” Urged by the solicitations of numerous scientific friends, I have continued my efforts to obtain such specimens as appeared to me to be new and undescribed, and they are now submitted to the consideration of the Society. In my communications I have heretofore said little on the geogra- phical position of our Naiades. It has, however, been to me an inte- resting branch of the subject, and engaged much of my attention. The great dividing ridge or chain of mountains, the Alleghanies, which seems so completely to separate our eastern from our western waters, almost as completely separates the species of this family inhabiting those parts lying east and west of it. It is a matter of doubt if there be more than two or three species of all the genera of this family ex- isting in the eastern waters which have their analogues in the western waters. That shell, which we have considered the Unio cariosus of AND OTHER FAMILIES. 95 the Ohio, certainly has a different aspect from that of our eastern rivers, and might with great propriety be referred to the name which Mr Say gave it long since, viz. U. crassus.* ‘There is another shell, however, in the Ohio, which has a stronger resemblance than this, and I believe it to be the analogue of the Mlasmodonta marginata (Say). I have examined numerous specimens of this species frequently and attentively, but cannot distinguish any difference except in the size, the western shell being generally much larger. Of the numerous species and genera of the families Lymneana, Melaniana and Peristomiana, \ have never seen a single species common to both waters. ‘To the genus Cyclas I have given but little attention, but believe the same observa- tions may be extended to this species. What an interesting field do these facts spread open to the inquiring philosopher! Why should the streams which flow down the sides of the same range of mountains, east and west, differ so essentially in their productions? Let us now examine the extremities of this great chain. 'To the north, where it is lost in the high lands which spread out along the southern boundaries of the small lakes in the state of New York, great difficulty naturally occurs in defining the line of separation. So faras my observation has extended, the shells of the river Mohawk and its tributaries are the same with those of the Delaware, Potomac, &c. with the exception of a single species Symphynota compressa (nobis), which is found near Albany, and which exists also in the Ohio. The tribu- taries of the lakes Erie, Michigan, &c., with few exceptions, produce the western species, and consequently the lakes do also.t+ The great river Niagara, or rather strait connecting the lakes Erie and Ontario, furnishes us with the U. triangularis (Barnes), and other species, which are so peculiarly characteristic of our western waters. Never having visited the shores of lake Ontario, I cannot pronounce on its productions. The shells of the river St Lawrence are, I believe, * A shell which I have always considered as a truncated variety of U. crassus of the Ohio, has by this naturalist been made a new species under the name of U. abruptus. + Since writing the above I have received the U. complanatus (Soland.) from Lac Vaseux, which empties into Green Bay; and more recently the same species from lake Champlain. The U. nasutus (Say) has been observed in Grand river, which disembogues into lake Erie. VOL. V.—G 26 ON THE NAIADES, impressed with the character of those of the lake. In this river there is, however, little to my knowledge interesting to the conchologist. Lake Champlain, which empties its waters into the St Lawrence, is prolific in some of the western species. 'The Symphynota alata, the Unio occidens and the Unio rectus, with some other western species, are found there in great perfection, but none of the tuberculated or undulated species. The southern extremity of the Alleghany ridge is supposed to reach into the upper part of the state of Alabama, where it terminates by spreading out into high lands east of the river Tennessee, and near to that part where the river makes its most eastern angle. ‘The sources of the Alabama and Tombeckbee rivers, which discharge themselves into the Gulf of Mexico, are situated in these high lands, and the char- acter of the shells of these rivers is completely the same with those of the western waters. In no instance have I observed a shell from these rivers, or the Mississippi, which possessed the characters of those of our eastern rivers. ‘To draw the exact line of distinction here, in the present state of our knowledge, is impossible; but that such a line does exist there can scarcely be a doubt. The great difficulty experienced by naturalists in procuring speci- mens from newly settled and distant parts of the United States is such, as to deprive us of much desirable information. This impediment will, it is hoped, be overcome in time, and the natural history of our country become universally known. In the present state of our knowledge, we can only place this line somewhere between the Alabama and the Altamaha rivers. From the latter, I have seen but a single valve, which I owe to the kindness of Mr Nuttall. This is the U. complanatus (Soland.), and marks dis- tinctly the character of the shells of this river to appertain to that of the eastern waters. From the river Appalachicola I have never been able to procure a single specimen, and it remains yet to be proved whether it produces shells of the eastern or western character. As, however, it disembogues in the Gulf of Mexico, it is more than proba- ble that it possesses the same species as the western waters, and its neighbour the Alabama. In regard to the shells of the soil, it will naturally be asked if they AND OTHER FAMILIES. Q7 also differ so completely as those of the rivers on the two sides of the great ridge? In these the distinction does not exist, for we find almost every species which is common on the eastern, equally common on the western side. ‘There are, however, some species which are not uncommon on the western side, but which do not exist, so far as my information extends, on this side. If it be demanded why the line of demarcation should not be as perfect for terrestrial as fluviatile shells, we might say in answer, that the barrier of a mountain could in time be overcome even by the slowly travelling snail. Surely in the lapse of time the progeny of those which accidentally began to climb the steeps, might descend into the valleys of the opposite side. {In finishing these introductory remarks, I wish to call the attention of those naturalists who are conveniently located, to make further ob- servations on this branch of the science, which certainly has great in- terest. In describing the Valvata arenifera in my last memoir, Vol. IV. page 104, I was impressed with the idea, from the circumstance of finding a true operculum combined with a spiral tube, that the animal must have belonged to the family Peristomiana. I have reason, how- ever, since, to doubt the truth of my conclusions. Professor Troost, now at Nashville, Tennessee, originally sent the specimens from that neighbourhood ; and from his description of the animal, which he has recently communicated to me, I am induced to believe it to be a spe- cies of Linnean Phrygania. 28 ON THE NAIADES, Unto Nicxuimranus. Plate I. fig. 1. Testa subtrigond, inxquilaterali, obliqua, maxime undulatd, usque ad natium apices ; valvulis crassissimis ; dentibus lateralibus crassis curvisque ; cardinalibus maxime crassis; margarité alba et iridescente. Shell subtriangular, inequilateral, oblique, very much undulated, even to the point of the beak; valves very thick; cardinal teeth very thick; lateral teeth thick and curved; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. China. My Cabinet. Diam. 2, Length 5, Breadth 5-8 inches. Shell subtriangular, oblique, very much spread out, with an elevated wing, flattened towards the beaks, the greatest diameter being near the posterior basal margin, covered with numerous undulations, except on the anterior and basal margins; undulations diverge from the beak, and are largest near the posterior margin: substance of the shell very thick in the region of the basal margin; beaks pointed but not elevated, coy- ered with numerous beautiful literations to the very point; epidermis dark brown ; cardinal teeth very large, thick and sulcate ; lateral teeth thick and curved ; anterior cicatrices rough and distinct; posterior cica- trices slight and confiuent; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under side of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks angular; nacre pearly white, very iridescent on the posterior part, where the undulations are visible from without. Remarks.—I met with this very interesting species in the autumn of 1831 at a dealer’s in New York. I was informed that it was supposed to be from China. A single valve only could be obtained, and this unfortunately not entirely perfect. The characters are, however, so distinct from any species I have seen, that I have not hesitated to give it a place among my new species. It is remarkable for its great extent from the top of the wing to the basal margin, and for its numerous undulations. In outline and diameter it resembles the Symphynota complanata (nobis) (4lasmodonta complanata of Barnes), but differs in being less transverse, higher in the wing, and more thickly covered AND OTHER FAMILIES. 89 with undulations. In the possession of many folds, it resembles the U. multiplicatus (nobis), but differs in outline (being much less trans- verse ),as well as in the size of the undulations, which are much smaller. The point of its greatest diameter is much nearer the posterior basal margin than in the multiplicaius. The imperfect state of this speci- men has prevented me from describing the ligament. Judging from its elevated wing, Iam much inclined to believe that when perfect specimens are procured they will be found to be connate. Jf so, it will belong toa natural division removed from Unio, viz. Symphynota. I have dedicated this fine species to my friend P. H. Nicklin, Esq., of Philadelphia. Unio carimuaris. Plate II. fig. 2. Testé suborbiculatd, ventricosd, subequilaterali, postice subangulatd; valvulis subcrassis; natibus prominentibus; enidermide nitide rugatad; radiis numerosis capillaribusque ; dentibus cardinalibus valde elevatis ; lateralibus lamellatis et sur- sum subreclivis ; margaritd albd et iridescente. Shell suborbicular, ventricose, subequilateral, subangular posteriorly; valves rather thick ; beaks elevated; epidermis finely wrinkled; rays numerous and capillary ; car- dinal teeth much elevated ; lateral teeth Jameilar, and inclined to curve upwards; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam 1:2, Length 1-5, Breadth 1-9 inches. Shell suborbicular, ventricose, subequilateral, subangular posteriorly ; substance of the shell rather thick anteriorly; thinner posteriorly ; beaks thick and elevated; ligament short and thick; epidermis dark and finely wrinkled, smoother towards the beaks; rays numerous, capillary, and spreading over nearly the whole disk; cardinal teeth elevated, crenate, deeply cleft in the left valve, and rising from a pit in the right; lateral teeth lamellar, crenate, inclined to turn upwards; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cica- VOL. V.—H 30 ON THE NAIADES, trices situated on the under side of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks obtusely angular; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—1 have had a single specimen of this shell for some years, and although satisfied it differed from any described species, I deferred bringing it forward until I should have an opportunity of examining more. In the fine collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences I found a second specimen, which so completely coincided in all its characters with mine, that I deemed it unnecessary to hesitate erecting it into a species. Both the specimens have that enlargement of the inferior portion of the umbonial slope mentioned in the remarks on the U. Haysianus herein described, which usually causes a remarkable and curious denticulation of the margin, and a poverty of the deposition of the nacre in that region. It has, perhaps, a stronger resemblance to Y. ellipsis (nobis) than to any other species. It is however more rotund, more minutely rayed, and less oblique. Unio suscioposus. Plate II. fig. 3. Testé subglobosd, subxquilaterali, inflaté et postice subangulatad; valvulis crassis ; natibus prominulis rotundatisque ; dentibus cardinalibus latis striatis- que, lateralibus subcurvis ; margarité subrufd, vel colore caryophylli tinctd. Shell subglobose, nearly equilateral, inflated, subangular behind; valves thick ; beaks slightly prominent, rounded; cardinal teeth wide and striated ; lateral teeth somewhat curved ; nacre pearly and pink coloured. Hab. Bayou Teche, Louisiana. W. M. Stewart. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Stewart. Cabinet of William Hyde. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. 1°6, Length 2-1, Breadth 2-9 inches. Shell subglobose, subequilateral, subangular behind, inflated; sub- stance of the shell thick; umbonial slope carinate; beaks slightly pro- AND OTHER FAMILIES. 3l minent, rounded; ligament rather short and thick; epidermis dark brown or black; cardinal teeth wide, striate, but not divided; lateral teeth somewhat curved, serrate and separated from the cardinal teeth by the absence of a plate; anterior cicatrices distinct, posterior cica- trices confluent and large; dorsal cicatrices situated across the cavity of the beaks and very distinct; cavity of the beaks large and rounded ; nacre pearly and pink coloured. Remarks.—This very distinct species is one of the many fine shells collected by Mr Stewart in the Bayou Teche. It perhaps most re- sembles an inflated specimen of U. cuneatus (Barnes). It may, how- ever, at once be distinguished from that species by its peculiarly beau- tiful pinky lustre and striate cardinal teeth, as well by its globosity. The strie of the cardinal teeth diverge from a point beneath the point of the beaks, and in its flatness and absence of a cleft these teeth resemble those of the U. rubiginosus (nobis). Unio capszFormis. Plate II. fig. 4. Testé ellipticd, transversd, inequilaterali, subinflatd, postice subtriangulaté ; valvulis antice crassioribus ; natibus prominulis ; dentibus utriusque valvule car- dinalibus, elevatis duplicibusque ; lateralibus elevatis et lamellatis ; margarité alba e€ iridescente. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, somewhat inflated, sub-biangulate poste- riorly ; valves thicker anteriorly ; beaks slightly elevated ; cardinal teeth elevated and double in both valves ; lateral teeth elevated and lamellar ; nacre pearly white and iri- descent. Hab. Cumberland River. W. Cooper. My Cabinet. Cabinet of W. Cooper. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. .9, Length 1.3, Breadth 1.9 inches. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, somewhat inflated, flattish before the umbonial slope, sub-biangulate posteriorly ; substance of the 32 ON THE NAIADES, shell thick anteriorly and thin posteriorly; beaks slightly elevated and rounded ; ligament short and thick; epidermis yellow, with numerous small green rays; cardinal teeth elevated, double and crested in both valves; lateral teeth elevated and lamellar; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated within the cavity of the shell on the plate between the cardinal and lateral teeth and on the base of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks wide and obtusely angulate; nacre white on the anterior and iridescent on the posterior portion. Remarks.—While engaged in my last memoir, this shell attracted my attention. Ihad not, however, then, an opportunity of examining more than two or three specimens, and finding they differed much in some characters, I deferred noticing them. I owe to Mr Cooper the advantage of examining his specimens, which convinced me the species was distinct. ‘This is one of those species which sometimes dilate or increase about the region of the umbonial slope, and in this and its rays it resembles, in a slight degree, the U. perplexus (nobis). The enlargement of this porticn of the shell, which is generally a deep green, causes it to have a different outline, being there more rounded and causing the basal margin to be arcuate. Unio Rayenevianus. Plate III. fig. 5. Testé late ovatd, obliquad, inequilaterali, postice subangulutéd ; valvulis antice crassioribus ; dentibus cardinalibus crassis brevibusque; luteralibus crassis rec- tisque; margaritd alba et iridescente. Shell widely ovate, oblique, inequilateral, subangulate posteriorly; valves thicker anteriorly ; cardinal teeth short and thick; lateral teeth straight and thick ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. French Broad River, tributary to the Tennessee, near Ashe- ville, N. C. Professor Ravenel. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 33 Cabinet of Professor Ravenel, Charleston, 8S. C. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of Professor Vanuxem. Diam. °7, Length °9, Breadth 1-5 inches. Shell widely ovate, oblique, inequilateral, subangulate posteriorly, slightly inflated, compressed at posterior and inferior margins; substance of the shell thick and white anteriorly, thin and iridescent posteriorly ; ligament short and thick ; epidermis dark brown and finely wrinkled ; cardinal tooth short, thick and deeply divided in the left valve, single and rising from a pit in the right valve; lateral teeth oblique, straight and thick, having a direction over the lateral tooth; anterior and pos- terior cicatrices both distinct; dorsal cicatrices situated within the cavity of the shell on the plate between the cardinal and lateral teeth ; cavity of the beaks shallow and rounded; nacre white in the anterior, and iridescent in the posterior portion. Remarks.—This shell, which I owe to the kindness of Professor Ravenel, has, I believe, been first noticed by that gentleman, who, sup- posing it to be new, sent it to me about a year since. It differs in its outline from any of our eastern species, as it does also in its obliquity. In these characters it most resembles the U. patulus (nobis) ; it is, how- ever, more dilated,—in some specimens the margin being subrotund. The only specimens obtained by Professor Ravenel being imperfect, and much eroded at the beaks, I have not described that part, leaving it for future observation. ‘There are no rays to be observed on the specimens I have. In young or fine specimens, it is very possible they may exist. Unio Murcuisonianvs. Plate III. fig. 6. Testé angulato-ellipticd, transversd, inxquilaterali, valvulis tenuiculis ; natibus perplicatis ; dentibus cardinalibus in valvuld utrdque duplicibus, lateralibus rectis ; margarita pulchrda, iridescente, et salmonis colore subtinctd. Shell narrow-elliptical, transverse, inequilateral; valyes rather thin; beaks much VOL. V.—I 34 ON THE NAIADES, plicated ; cardinal teeth double in both valves; lateral teeth straight; nacre splendidly pearly, slightly salmon coloured, and beautifully iridescent. Hab. China. Mrs Murchison. My Cabinet. Diam. -7, Length °8, Breadth 1-9 inches. Shell narrow-elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, angular behind, and slightly emarginate at basal margin; substance of the shell rather thin; beaks and umbones beautifully plicated; umbonial slope subcarinate and rough with the angles of the folds; posterior slope finely plicate ; ligament yellow and narrow; epidermis dark green; cardinal teeth double in both valves; lateral teeth straight ; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks shallow; nacre rich, and splen- didly pearly, slightly salmon coloured, and beautifully iridescent. Remarks.—This splendid species I owe to the great kindness of Mrs Murchison, the wife of the present learned president of the Geo- logical Society of London. Among many fine and rare shells received from her I found this, which appears not to have been before de- scribed. It perhaps most resembles the U. ceruleus (nobis), particu- larly in the outline: it is, however, rather more transverse. It differs greatly from the cwruleus in the number and size of the folds. These, behind the umbonial slope, are parallel to the ligament; while those on the anterior margin are oblique. ‘The acute angles formed by the folds on the umbonial slope are very remarkable. The inferior part of the shell is free from folds: this may not, however. prove a constant character. Its nacre is without exception finer than any I have ever seen, and rich beyond description. The folds being visible from the interior, add greatly to its lustre.* * Since writing these remarks I have seen several specimens of this shell in Europe. At the Jardin des Plantes, Monsieur de Blainville showed me two or three specimens recently received, and not yet placed in the cabinet. He considered the shell undescribed, until I mentioned the name I had given it. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 35 Unio Haystanus. Plate III. fig. 7. TestGd subrotundd, subventricosd, ad baseos marginem posteriorem dentatd ; valvulis subcrassis ; natibus prominentibus ; epidermide luteo-fuscd levissimaque ; radiis obsoletis ; dentibus cardinalibus in lobos divisis, lateralibus crassis rectisque ; margarité cacao colore tinctd. Shell subrotund, slightly ventricose, dentate at posterior basal margin ; valves scarcely thick ; beaks elevated; epidermis yellowish brown and very smooth; rays obsolete ; eardinal teeth lobed; lateral teeth thick and straight; nacre chocolate coloured. Hab. Cumberland River. Professor Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Cooper. Cabinet of Professor Troost, Nashville. Diam. -6, Length °8, Breadth 1 inch. Shell subrotund, nearly equilateral, slightly ventricose, dentate at posterior margin, depressed before the umbonial slope ; substance of the shell scarcely thick ; beaks thick and elevated; epidermis yellowish- brown, very smooth and shining; rays obsolete; cardinal teeth lobed, double in the left valve, single and rising from a pit in the right valve ; lateral teeth short, thick and straight; posterior and anterior cicatrices both distinct; dorsal cicatrices situated within the cavity of the shell on the plate between the cardinal and lateral teeth; cavity of the beaks deep and angulated ; nacre chocolate coloured and iridescent posteriorly. Remarks.—It has been in my power to examine only four or five specimens of this exceedingly interesting shell. In each of these there is more or less of a dentate appearance, which is so unusual among the Noiades that it may, perhaps with propriety, be said to belong to some American species only. In the earlystages of growth there is no den- tate appearance. The U. sulcatus (nobis) and the U. arceformis (nobis), are frequently furnished with this curious appendage. The dentate variety, mentioned in my description of U. sulcatus, has been, by Mr Say, erected into a separate species, under the name of ridi- bundus ; in the propriety of which, however, I cannot agree with that naturalist. In outline the present species resembles the U. subrotun- 36 ON THE NAIADES, dus; it is, however, more oblique, and in the epidermis more shining. It is not so oblique as the sulcatus, but has a furrow anterior to the umbonial slope similar to that species. In the epidermis it differs very much, the sulcatus being finely wrinkled and finely rayed. In some specimens the successive rows of teeth along the posterior margin cause that portion of the shell to swell out, which gives it a rich and beauti- ful appearance. It is, though small, among the most interesting of our species. The specimen here represented, I owe to the kindness of Mr Cooper. It is with pleasure I dedicate this species to my friend, Isaac Hays, M.D., whose talents have been actively and successfully engaged many years in the promotion of natural as well as medical science. Unio Hitpreturanus. Plate III. fig. 8. Testé angusto-ellipticd, subcylindraced, valde transversd, inequilaterali ; valvu- lis tenuibus; dente cardinali in valvuldé utrdque unico, laterali nullo; margarita superne fuscd, inferne alba et tridescente. Shell narrow-elliptical, subcylindrical, very transverse, inequilateral; valves thin; cardinal teeth single in each valve; without lateral teeth; nacre, above brown, below white and iridescent. Hab. Ohio, near Marietta. Dr Hildreth. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Hildreth. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Diam °5, Length -7, Breadth 1-6 inches. Shell narrow-elliptical, subcylindrical, very transverse, inequilateral, somewhat compressed at basal margin; substance of the shel! thin be- hind, thicker before; beaks slightly elevated; ligament long and thin; epidermis dark brown; cardinal teeth lobed, single in each valve, larger and wider in the left valve; lateral teeth none; anterior and posterior cicatrices both confluent; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks shallow and tinged with dull purple; nacre white and iridescent. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 37 Remarks.—Among the Uniones there is a group to which this species naturally belongs. This group is characterized by the imperfection of the hinge, the cardinal teeth being so immature as to present scarcely any thing but lobes. Like the soleniformis it lives under stones and other protected places. In the present species the tooth of the right valve shuts before that of the left, and the lateral teeth, if not entirely want- ing, are obsolete. ‘The group, as far as I know it at present, consists of the U. oriens (nobis), U. soleniformis (nobis), and the present species. In size and outline of the margin, this species resembles the U. iris (nobis). It has not, however, the brilliant nacre, nor the fine rays of that species, and in the conformation of the teeth it differs very much. Some individuals vary from the cylindrical form, being somewhat com- pressed. As a mark of respect for the talents of Dr Hildreth, and his assiduity in promoting a knowledge of the natural history of his vici- nity, I dedicate this species to him. Unto ScuootcraFrrensis. Plate III. fig. 9. Testé subrotundatd, subequilateralh, compressa, post clivum umboniale subtu- berculatd ; valvulis subcrassis; natibus prominentibus ; epidermide fulvd, lato- radiata ; dentibus cardinalibus prominentibus, lateralibus laminatis rectisgue ; margarita alba et iridescente. Shell subrotund, nearly equilateral, compressed, slightly tuberculated behind the umbonial slope; valves rather thick; beaks elevated; epidermis yellow with broad rays ; cardinal teeth elevated ; lateral teeth straight and lamellar; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. Fox River of Green Bay. Mr Schoolcraft. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. -7, Length 1-1, Breadth 1-3 inches. Shell subrotund, somewhat angular at posterior dorsal margin, nearly equilateral, compressed, slightly tuberculated posterior to umbonial slope; substance of the shell rather thick ; beaks elevated; ligament short ; epidermis smooth, somewhat yellow, with several broad green rays—that over the centre of the disk being broadest; cardinal teeth VOL. Y.—K 38 ON THE NAIADES, elevated and cleft in the left valve, single and rising from a pit in the right; lateral teeth elevated, straight and lamellar; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices within the cavity of the shell on the base of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks angular and deep; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—Among the many fine shells presented to the Acade- my of Natural Sciences by Mr Schoolcraft from the region of the upper lakes, there was a single specimen of the present species. It does not seem referable to any described species, and I have conse- quently been induced to give it a separate place in the genus. It re- sembles most the U. rubiginosus (nobis) in outline, but differs from it in being more rounded on the inferior and posterior portions of the margins, as well as in the cardinal tooth being more elevated and more deeply cleft. In the rays it differs very much from that species. In this specimen they are very remarkable, there being a very distinct broad one anterior to the umbonial slope, covering one third of the side of the disk, and two smaller, posterior to the umbonial slope. When there is but a single specimen to describe from, it should be remem- bered that many characters are not permanent, and I should not be surprised if specimens of this species be found without a single ray, although they are so striking in this. The tubercles, which are so indistinct, may in other specimens be more distinct and more numerous. In this case it will approach so closely to the asperrimus (nobis), that it may prove to be only a variety. Unio ceometricus. Plate IV. fig. 10. Testé trapezoidali, valde inequilaterali, transversd, compress ; valvulis tenui- bus; nalibus prominulis, rugis concentricis; dentibus cardinalibus in valvula utrdque obliquis duplicibusque, lateralibus subrectis ; margaritéd purpured. Shell trapezoidal, very inequilateral, transverse, compressed; valves thin; beaks slightly prominent and concentrically wrinkled; cardinal teeth oblique and double in both valves; lateral teeth nearly straight ; nacre purple. Hab. Bayou Teche, Louisiana. W. M. Stewart. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 39 My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Stewart. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Diam. :9, Length 1°4, Breadth 2-7 inches. Shell trapezoidal, very inequilateral, transverse, compressed, angular behind; substance of the shell rather thin; umbonial slope subcarinate ; beaks slightly prominent, placed near the anterior margin and concen- trically wrinkled; carina much elevated; ligament long, narrow and nearly straight; epidermis dark brown, wrinkled and sometimes ob- scurely rayed ; cardinal teeth oblique and double in both valves; lateral teeth nearly straight and lamelliform ; anterior cicatrices distinct, pos- terior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks shallow: nacre purple and iridescent. Remarks.—This interesting species is one of the collection made by Mr Stewart in the Bayou Teche. It is a very distinct and beautiful species. Its form is more like a trapezium than that of any other spe- cies with which I am acquainted. It resembles most the U. compla- natus (Soland.). It differs from it, however, in its remarkable outline, in its teeth, in the concentric wrinkles of the beaks, and in the beaks being placed nearer to the anterior margin. The angle of the poste- rior margin is also more acute. In the deep brown colour of the epi- dermis and in outline of the margin it approaches the U. obesus (nobis). It is, however, much less inflated. Unto Tarrianus. Plate IV. fig. 11. Testa subtriangulari, obliqua crassdque ; valvulis antice crassioribus ; dentibus cardinalibus grandibus et elevatis, lateralibus crassis et subcurvis; margaritd alba. Shell subtriangular, thick and oblique; valves thicker anteriorly ; cardinal teeth large and elevated ; lateral teeth thick and slightly curved; nacre pearly white. 40 ON THE NAIADES, Hab. Alabama River. Judge Tait. My Cabinet. Diam. 1:1, Length 1-5, Breadth 1-5 inches. Shell subtriangular, thick, oblique. depressed anterior to umbonial slope ; substance of the shell very thick anteriorly and thin posteriorly ; beaks very thick and much elevated ; epidermis dark brown and wrin- kled; cardinal teeth large, crenate and deeply cleft in the left valve, and emerging from a pit in the right; lateral teeth thick, slightly curved and nearly parallel with the line of the cardinal teeth; anterior cica- trices distinct, the great one forming a deep pit; posterior cicatrices distinct, the smaller one being placed at the end of the lateral tooth; dorsal cicatrices situated on the plate between the cardinal and lateral teeth ; cavity of the beaks shallow; nacre pearly white. Remarks.—There is no species which this so closely resembles as the scalenius (Rafin.). It is, however, less oblique and more expanded along the posterior basal margin, and the posterior margin forms a more obtuse angle. It is with great pleasure I name it after my friend, Judge Tait of Claiborne, Alabama, to whom science is greatly indebted for his exertions in making known the natural history of his vicinity. Unio tactrouus. Plate VIII. fig. 19. Testé ellipticd, transversd, inequilaterali, subinflaté ; valvulis subcrassis ; nati- bus radiatis, plicis brevibus ; dentibus cardinalibus in valvulé utrdque duplicibus longisque ; lateralibus longis, a cardinalibus separatis ; margaritd lacteold. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, somewhat inflated ; valves not thick ; beaks having short radiating folds; cardinal teeth long and double in both valves; lateral teeth long and separate from the cardinal teeth; nacre pearly and milk white. Hab. Rio de la Plata. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of W. Hyde. Unio delodonta? Lam. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 41 Diam. 1-2, Length 2, Breadth 3-2 inches. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, somewhat inflated ; substance of the shell not thick; beaks rounded, having short radiating folds; ligament rather short; epidermis dark brown and wrinkled; cardinal teeth long, oblique, nearly parallel with the margin and double in both valves; lateral teeth long, slightly curved and separated from the car- dinal teeth by the absence of a plate; anterior and posterior cicatrices both confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated across the cavity of the beaks ; cavity of the beaks rounded and not deep; nacre very pearly, milk white, iridescent behind. Remarks.—I am indebted to the kindness of Dr Ward of Salem, for a perfect specimen of this species. In outline it approaches the U. marginalis (am.), but is less transverse. In the characters of its teeth it closely resembles that species. It differs from it in being more inflated, more wrinkled and in having a thicker nacre. In the possession of radiated folds on the beaks it differs altogether. On the base of the cardinal tooth, near to the great cicatrix, there is a small deeply impressed cicatrix, resembling in its characters that of the Hyria avicularis (Lam.), mentioned at page 67, Vol. IV. The specimen here figured belongs to the fine cabinet of Mr Hyde. SYMPHYNOTA GLOBOsA. Plate IV. fig. 12. Testé valde globosd, inxquilaterali, pellucida ; valvulis tenuiculis, natibus ro- tundissimis, incurvis ; epidermide luted, levissimd ; dentibus cardinalibus lami- natis, lateralibus elevatis et laminatis ; margaritd albé et iridescente. Shell very globose, inequilateral, translucent ; valves.rather thin ; beaks very round, incurved ; epidermis very smooth and pale yellow; cardinal teeth lamellar ; lateral teeth elevated and lamellar ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. River Ohio, 150 miles below Louisville. Col. Long. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Peale’s Museum. VOL. V.—L 42 ON THE NAIADES, Diam 2-4, Length 2:5, Breadth 3-5 inches. Shell very globose, inequilateral, translucent, very smooth and bright; connate before and behind the beaks; substance of the shell rather thin; beaks very round, incurved; epidermis very smooth, and pale yellow or straw colour; umbones very round; cardinal teeth very lamellar, elevated, double in the right valve, and very crenate and single in the left; the line of the lateral and cardinal teeth form two curves; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated in the cavity of the beaks on the under side of the cardinal teeth; palleal cicatrix deeply impressed; cavity of the beaks very round and very deep; nacre thicker near the margin, beautifully pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—We owe to Col. Long and Mr T. Peale the knowledge of this singular and distinct species. Without a tubercle and almost rayless, for those on the posterior slope are obsolete, it is among the most beautiful and interesting species known. The Academy is in possession of four fine specimens, making a complete suite of different ages. Three of them are perfect enough to display the character of this genus, Symphynota, notwithstanding their great globosity. It is more capacious than any of the JVaiades I have seen, and the light yellow or straw coloured epidermis is very peculiar—in form it most resembles, perhaps, the Unio occidens (nobis), but it has no rays. In the younger individuals there is a transverse rib-like appearance which I have noticed in no other species of the family. SympHynoTa Woopiana. Plate V. fig. 13. Testa subpentagond, postice angulatd, super umbones turgidd, inequilaterali, transversad; valvulis tenuibus; epidermide tenebroso-fuscdé et obscuro-radiaté ; natibus undulatis ; margarilé alba et iridescente. Shell subpentagonal, angular behind, turgid over the umbones, inequilateral, trans- verse ; valves thin; epidermis dark brown and obscurely rayed; beaks undulated ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 43 Hab. China... W. W. Wood. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. 1:5, . Length 2-2, Breadth 3-5 inches. Shell subpentagonal, angular behind, transverse, inequilateral, irre- gularly swollen over the umbones, slightly compressed somewhat be- fore and below the umbones, posterior slope carinate; substance of the shell thin; epidermis wrinkled, dark brown with obsolete rays; liga- ment long and somewhat thick ; beaks slightly inflated and undulated ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible posteriorly, more deeply impressed ante- riorly; cavity of the beaks shallow; cavity of the disk impressed im- mediately under the umbo; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—This species was first, I believe, brought to this city from Canton by Mr Wood* about five years since. ‘To him I owe the first specimen I have seen. A younger and fine specimen I owe to the kindness of an estimable friend and accomplished conchologist, Mrs Corrie, who sent it to me from England about two years since, with a label “From China.” It closely resembles the preceding species in many characters. All the specimens, however, which I have seen, perhaps half a dozen, retain the distinctive characteristics—the greater transverseness—the subpentagonal form—the slight compression ante- rior to the umbones—the dark epidermis—the absence almost entirely of rays and its want of a rich nacre—in all these it differs from the mag- nifica herein described. It is usually larger than the specimen figured. SYMPHYNOTA MAGNIFICA. Pilate V. fig. 14. Testa subrotundd, prope nates valde inflatd, inequilaterali, postice obtuso- angulaté ; valvulis tenuibus 3 epidermide luted, multis radiis viridibus ; natibus * On my return from Europe I found a box of shells sent to me by Mr Wood from Canton, in which were several specimens of a tuberculated Unio, which, on examination, I perceived immediately to be a new species, which the distinguished naturalist, John Edward Gray, Esq., of London, did me the honour, while in that city last June, to name Leanus. 44 ON THE NAIADES, inflatis, prope apices undulatis ; cicatricibus via cernendis ; margarita pulchré et iridescente. Shell subrotund, much inflated near the beaks, inequilateral, obtusely angular behind; valves thin; epidermis yellow, with numerous green rays ; beaks inflated, near the tip undulated ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; nacre beautifully pearly and iridescent. Hab. China. W. W. Wood. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Diam. 1°6, Length 2:3, Breadth. 3-4 inches. Shell subrotund, much inflated in the region of the beaks, inequi- lateral, connate before and behind the beaks, obtusely angular behind, rounded before, posterior slope carinate; substance of the shell thin; epidermis smooth, yellow with numerous beautiful green rays over the whole disk, which are darker on the posterior part and obsolete on the umbones; ligament long and thin; beaks inflated and terminated with about six nearly parallel undulations; teeth, none; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; cavity of the beaks shailow and rounded ; nacre beautifully pearly and highly iridescent, sometimes tinged with salmon and pink. Remarks.—Several specimens of this species have been within a few years received from Canton, and Mr Wood, to whom I owe one of mine, informed me that he believes it to be a native of that country, and most probably dwelling in the waters of the neighbourhood of Canton. It is certainly among the most beautiful of the genus which has come under my notice, and is remarkable for its great area, its inflation of the region of the beaks, its smooth epidermis, its splendid rays and ex- quisitely beautiful nacre, which no pencil can imitate. I have it of several different ages—when very young it is less rotund, being some- what trapezoidal, the dorsal margin nearly straight and the rays obso- lete. The specimen figured is not half the size of the largest specimen in my cabinet, but I have chosen it for its great perfection in having the valves completely connate before and behind the beaks. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 45 Anoponta Frrussacrana. Plate VI. fig. 15. Testa subcylindraced, inequilaterali, inflata; margine dorsali sub natium apices curva ; valvulis tenuibus ; epidermide fulgidd, obsolete radiata, olive colorem tenebrosum habente ; natibus prominulis, binis ternisve undulis exiguis ad apices ; cicatricibus conspicuis; margarité ceruleo.alba et iridescente. Shell subcylindrical, inequilateral, inflated ; dorsal margin curved immediately under the point of the beak ; valves thin ; epidermis dark olive, shining, with obsolete rays ; beaks somewhat prominent with two or three small undulations at tip ; cicatrices perceptible; nacre bluish white and iridescent. Hab. Ohio River, near Cincinnati. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Nicklin. Cabinet of Professor Vanuxem. Cabinet of the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia. Diam. 1-4, Length 1:8, Breadth 3-5 inches. Shell subcylindrical, inequilateral, much inflated, more angular behind than before; dorsal margin curved immediately under the point of the beak; basal margin disposed to be emarginate ; substance of the shell thin; epidermis dark olive, shining, with numerous obso- lete rays, near the beaks lighter and destitute of rays ; ligament rather short and thin; beaks somewhat prominent with two or three small undulations at tip; cicatrices perceptible; cavity of the beaks shallow; cavity of the disk deep and rounded ; nacre bluish white and iridescent. Remarks.—This species was received with the 4. incerta, here- in described, from the Ohio river. It differs from that species in having prominent beaks, in being more cylindrical, in its dark colour, and in the curve which exists immediately under the beaks, in which it resembles the 4. areolus (Swainson). In the latter this curve is so strong and thick as to resemble an incipient tooth. In young speci- mens the epidermis is more on the yellow, and the rays greenish and bright.* * Since the above description was made and the figure printed, I am in possession of sev- eral specimens from Illinois, beautifully and very distinctly rayed. VOL. V.—M 46 ON THE NAIADES, ANODONTA INCERTA. Plate VI. fig. 16. Testa lato-ellipticd, postice subangulatd, inflata, margine dorsali subrecté ; val- vulis tenuissimis ; epidermide subviride, obsolete radiata ; natibus complanatis et minute undulatis ; cicatricibus viz cernendis ; margarita ceruleo-albé et iridescente. Shell wide-elliptical, subangular behind, inflated, nearly straight on the dorsal mar- gin; valves very thin; epidermis greenish with obsolete rays, beaks flattened and minutely undulated ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible ; nacre bluish white and iridescent. Hab. Ohio River near Cincinnati. 'T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Professor Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. 1:2, Length 1:5, Breadth 3-2 inches. Shell wide-elliptical, subangular behind, inequilatera!, inflated, dor- sal margin nearly straight, rounded before; substance of the shell very thin; epidermis very smooth, green and olive green with obsolete rays, three being more distinct on the posterior part of each valve; lig- ament long and thin; beaks flattened, minutely undulated near the tip which terminates with a minute point from which an indistinct line runs towards the posterior margin; cicatrices scarcely perceptible ; cavity of the beaks scarcely perceptible; cavity of the disk deep and rounded; nacre bluish white and iridescent. Remarks.—Among the earliest shells I procured from the Ohio, many years since, were several specimens of this fragile nodonta. The difficulty of separating the species of a genus with so few tangible characters induced me to lay this aside with some other species until more leisure would permit a thorough examination. It perhaps most closely resembles the .2. cataracta of Say, but differs from it peculiarly in the flatness ef the beaks. It is generally more inflated, particu- larly near the umbonial slope. Itresembles the 2. Ferussaciana (nobis), the description of which see. The young differ from the old in being much compressed and in having rays only on the posterior part of the shell, where the three on each valve are distinctly visible—they are AND OTHER FAMILIES. 47 also more straight on the dorsal margin. The smoothness and polish, as well as the brightness of the green of some of the specimens are very remarkable. ANODONTA STEWARTIANA. Plate VI. fig. 17. Testé rotundato-ovatd, valde inflaté ; valvulis pertenuibus ; epidermide subas- perd, tenebroso-viridi, natibus prominentibus, apicibus granulatis ; cicatricibus subobsoletis aut vix perspicuis ; margarita ceruleo-albd. Shell rotundo-ovate, much inflated; valves very thin; epidermis roughish, olive green; beaks prominent and granulate at tip; cicatrices scarcely perceptible ; nacre bluish white. Hab. River Teche, Louisiana. W. M. Stewart. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Stewart. Diam. 1°8, Length 2, Breadth 3-1 inches. Shell rotundo-ovate, much inflated, subangular behind; dorsal line slightly curved; substance of the shell thin; epidermis somewhat rough, olive green and obsoletely rayed; beaks prominent, granulate at tip in a short double series; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; cavity of the beaks deep and incurved ; cavity of the disk deep and rounded; nacre bluish white and iridescent, sometimes tinged with salmon co- lour about the region of the beaks. Remarks.—I owe this species with numerous others to my friend Mr Stewart who procured and gave it to me more than two years since. I did not then describe it, although I believed it to be new, intending it to accompany some others which are now embodied in this memoir. It is an interesting species, being much inflated—the young specimens approached the globose form. It is most similar in form to the gibbosa (Say), but is perhaps less inflated, does not possess a polished epidermis, and has granulations at the termination of the beaks, while the gibbosa has undulations. The inflation of the Sfewartiana is more 48 ON THE NAIADES, spherical, the other is gibbous. ‘The posterior slope of the young specimen is decorated with six distinct green rays, there being three on each valve. AnoponTa PALNA. Plate VII. fig. 18. Testa subovatd, inequilaterali, subcompressa ; valvulis subcrassis ; epidermide olivaced et obsolete radiaté ; natibus prominentibus ; apicibus granulatis ; cica- tricibus perspicuis ; margaritd alba ; sed in natium cavo interdum colore salmo- nis tinctd. Shell subovate, inequilateral, rather compressed ; valves somewhat thick; epidermis olive with obsolete rays; beaks prominent and granulate at tip ; cicatrices perceptible ; nacre white, sometimes salmon in the cavity of the beaks. Hab. Bear Grass Creek, near Louisville. Mr T. H. Taylor. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Ronaldson. Diam. 2:3, Length 3:1, Breadth 5-6 inches. Shell subovate, inequilateral, rather compressed, subangular behind ; dorsal line slightly curved; substance of the shell thick; epidermis smooth, olive to dark green, brighter on the beaks; rays obsolete; ligament long and thick; beaks elevated, granulate at tip; cicatrices perceptible; cavity of the beaks rather deep and rounded; cavity of the disk somewhat flattened ; nacre white, sometimes salmon coloured in and about the cavity of the beaks. Remarks.—This species of Anodonta offers quite a large area in the circumference of the disk. Some specimens are, however, more transverse than the one here described. It has a predisposition to salmon colour in the region of the cavity of the beaks, and this is sometimes of a very deep tint. The colour is irregularly distributed, sometimes quite in spots, and a roughness, apparently a disease, often accompanies it and produces a carious state of the nacre. It perhaps most closely resembles the 4. cataracta (Say); but is usually less in- flated, is thicker in the substance of the shell, and less transverse. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 49 Hexicina tens. Plate XIX. fig. 56. Testéd parva, lenticulari, supra luted, subtus rufa; anfractibus tribus, quorum inferior carinato ; spird plano-convexd ; apertura dilatata ; labro crasso ; columellé subcallosa et luteold. Shell small, lenticular, yellow above and red below; whorls three, inferior one earinate ; spire plano-conyex ; aperture dilated ; outer lip thick ; columella thinly coated and yellowish. Hab. Feejee Islands. W. W. Wood. My Cabinet. Diam. 5-20ths, Length 4-20ths of an inch. The smaller figure is of the size of nature. Remarks.—The lenticular form and sharp carina of the body whorl distinguish this species. Within it is orange, and about the base of the shell there is a disposition to yellow. HELICINA PULCHERRIMA. Plate XIX. fig. 57. Testd subviridi, subglobosd, crassé, minute striata; anfractibus quaternis, quorum infimo fascié albo-fuscd induto; spira obtusdé; apertura dilatatd ; labro albo et reflexo ; columella callosd, alba, fulgenti, tuberculo parvo ad basim. Shell subglobose, greenish, thick, finely striate ; whorls four, the body whorl having an indistinct white and brown band; spire obtuse ; aperture dilated ; outer lip white and reflected ; columella white, thickly coated and shining, with a small tubercle at the - bottom. Hab. Java? My Cabinet. Diam. °8, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—This is perhaps the finest species yet known of the VOL. V.—N 50 ON THE NAIADES, genus. It is remarkable for its size and weight, and the strong and wide callus on the columella. Under the epidermis it varies from a dark orange to lemon yellow. A depauperated specimen in my pos- session would scarcely be recognized as the same species, owing to the density of the orange colour. ‘The apex of the perfect shell, having but a thin epidermis, presents an orange appearance,—this colour may also be observed on the inside of the shell. At the base of the colum- ella there is an obsolete tubercle. ‘The band sometimes consists of a single white line only. It is believed these specimens formed part of the collection brought from Java by Mr Shillaber. HeEicrna virGinEA. Plate XIX. fig. 58. Testa subconicd, apice acutd, subtus inflata, crassa, transversim multisulcatda ; anfractibus senis; spira elevatd; aperturd valde dilatatd; labro effuso; colu- mellé subcallosd. Shell subconical, acutely pointed, inflated below, thick, with many transverse fur- rows ; whorls six ; spire elevated ; aperture much dilated ; outer lip effuse ; columella thinly coated. Hab. Java? Helicina striata? Lam. My Cabinet. Diam. ‘8, Length -8 of an inch. Remarks.—This species came in the same collection as that de- scribed last. It is nearly of the same diameter. It differs from it altogether inform and colour. It is remarkable for its acutely pointed apex, its milk-white appearance, and its numerous furrows. ‘The outer lip may, with propriety, be said to be effuse rather than re- flected. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 51 Hewix muscarum. Plate XIX. fig. 59. Testé globosd, crassa, politd, longitudinaliter nitide striatd, subfuscd ; maculis numerosis irregularibus minutis, et fasciis albis subnigris e¢ fuscis indutd ; an- Sractibus ternis; spird rotundatd ; apice albd; apertura subrotunddé; labro acuto, intus crassescenti; labio subrufo ; columella levi albdque. Shell globose, thick, polished, longitudinally and finely striated, light brown, fur- nished with numerous irregular minute spots, and blackish brown and white bands; whorls three ; spire rounded ; apex white; aperture nearly round; right lip sharp, growing thicker within ; left lip light red ; columella smooth and white. Hab. Society Islands, Pacific Ocean. Lieutenant Dornin. My Cabinet. Diam. °8, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—This curiously and elegantly painted shell I owe to Lieu- tenant Dornin, who, when on board the sloop of war Vincennes on her voyage round the world, very kindly collected for me many rare and fine specimens. It is eminently distinguished by its compound band, its globosity, and its innumerable minute spots. The columella is somewhat thickened by a dark pink deposit. HELIX PURPURAGULA. Plate XIX. fig. 60. Testa obtuso-conicd, crassa, inferne planulatd, politd, longitudinaliter minute striald, superne luted et fusco-virgatd, inferne luted, in medium anfractum ob- scuro-fasciatd, subsuturam maculatd, imperforatd ; anfractibus quinis ; spird obtuso-conicd ; aperturd ovata, intus purpured ; labro reflexo, prope basim ma- Jjori ; columella levi, ad basim subconcava. Shell obtusely conical, thick, flattened below, polished, minutely and longitudinally striate, above yellow and striped with brown, below yellow, obscurely banded on the middle of the whorl, irregularly spotted on the inferior part of the suture, imperforate ; whorls five; spire obtusely conical; aperture oval, purple inside; outer lip sub- reflected, enlarged towards the base ; columella smooth and impressed at base. 52 ON THE NAIADES, Hab. Java? My Cabinet. Diam. :9, Length °6 of an inch. Remarks.—The solidity, smoothness and purple colour of this spe- cies, which is supposed to have been of Mr Shillaber’s collection, will serve to distinguish it. Like the mamiila, herein described, it has a thick lip and is impressed at the base of the columella. The two specimens which I have differ much in the arrangement of’ colour. In one the inferior portion is almost white, and a dark interrupted band encircles the middle of the whorl. HeELIx ovum REGuLI. Plate XIX. fig. 61. Testd super et subtus planulatd, colore columbino tinctd, minutis irregularibus maculis numerosis, imperforatd ; anfractibus quaternis; spird valde depressé ; apertura subovatd, intus purpurascenti ; labro acuto, subrefiexo ; columelild lzvi, ad basin subconcavd. Shell flattened above and below, dove coloured, with numerous irregular minute dots, imperforate ; whorls four; spire much flattened; aperture suboval, purplish inside ; outer lip somewhat reflected but sharp; columella smooth, at base impressed. Hab. Java? My Cabinet. Diam. °8, . Length 4 of an inch. Remarks.—The very peculiar colour and the minute dots of this beautiful and interesting species eminently distinguish it from all other species which haye come under my notice. ‘The line of the superior part of the lip is almost parallel with the corresponding inferior part, and the outer posterior is consequently more round. In my specimens there are two very indistinct bands, rather lighter than the ground. In colour it greatly resembles a spotted small egg of a bird. It is sup- posed to have come from Mr Shillaber’s collection. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 53 Hewix monoponta. Plate XIX. fig. 62. Testéi superne subconicd, inferne inflatd, levi, alba, fasciis duabus fuscis, im- perforata; anfractibus ternis ; spird obtusa; apertura subrotunda ; labro acuto, subreflexo, sublus unico dente induto ; columella levi. Shell subconical above, inflated below, smooth, white, with two brown bands, im- perforate ; whorls three ; spire obtuse ; aperture nearly reund; outer lip somewhat re- flected but sharp, having a single tooth on the lower limb ; columella smooth. Hab. Java? My Cabinet. Diam. 9-20ths, Length 7-20ths of an inch. Remarks.—The two brown bands and single tooth of this species, together with the absence of an umbilicus, may serve to distinguish it. The superior termination of the lip is bent down towards the base of the columella. It is supposed to be from the collection of Mr Shillaber. Hewix cycLostomorsis. Plate XIX. fig. 63. Testa subglobosa, superne depressd, inferne inflata, longitudinaliter et minute striata, pellucida, corned, late umbilicata ; anfractibus quaternis ; spird depressa ; apertura subcirculari ; labro crassoet reflexo ; columellé levi, ad basin crassescenti. Shell subglobose, depressed above, inflated below, longitudinally and minutely striate, translucent, horn coloured, widely umbilicate; whorls four ; spire depressed ; aperture nearly a circle; outer lip thick and reflected ; columella smooth, at the base thickened. Hab. °.. .). My Cabinet. Diam °9, Length -6 of an inch. Remarks.—In its aperture this species has a strong resemblance to a Cyclostoma. 'The superior and inferior portions of the lip do not, however, join by one-fifth of a circle—the resemblance is strong in the VOL. V.—o , 54 ON THE NAIADES, thickness and reflection of the lip. The last whorl is very round— the umbilicus large and partly covered. Heix MAMILLA. Plate XIX. fig. 64. Testa solida, elevata, obtuso-conica, inferne rotundatd, imperforata, colore colum- bino tinctd, longitudinaliler nitide striata, fasciis duabus obsoletis indutd, apice subrufo ; anfractibus quinis, rotundatis ; spird exserta ; apertura subrufa, ovate ; labro subreflexo, crasso, prope basin majori ; columella levi, ad basin subconcava. Shell sclid, elevated, obtusely conical, rounded below, imperforate, dove coloured, transversely and finely striate, with two obsolete bands, pink at the apex ; whorls five and rounded ; spire elevated ; aperture pink, oval ; outer lip somewhat reflected, thick, enlarged towards the base; columella smooth, at the base impressed. Fiabe) (203 My Cabinet. Diam. -8, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—I have rarely met with a more beautiful and interesting species of the genus than the above. It is eminently distinguished by its solidity, its thick, smooth and beautifully coloured lip, its fine deli- cate colour, and its elevated and red tipped spire. ‘The columella is somewhat thickened and deeply impressed at the base. It is to be regretted that the habitat of this species is not known. It was met with accidentally at a dealer’s. HELIX DIAPHANA. Plate XIX. fig. 65. Testa lata, superne depressd, inferne inflata, longitudinaliter et nitide striata ; sublutea, obscure bifasciata super medium anfractum, umbilicatd ; anfractibus quaternis ; spira planulata ; apertura magna et subrotundd ; labro simplici ; colum- ella brevissima lxvique. Shell wide, depressed above, inflated below, longitudinally and finely striate, pale yellow, obscurely banded above the centre of the whorl, umbilicated; whorls four ; AND OTHER FAMILIES. 55 spire flattened ; aperture large and nearly round ; outer lip simple ; columella very short and smooth. Eas 2s 6: My Cabinet. Diam. 1-4, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—This species has a strong resemblance to H. citrina. It may be distinguished from that species by its colour, which is more pale, being almost a light horn colour; byits being more flattened, and by its band, which is white bordered on each side by a delicate brown line. ‘The umbilicus is small. Hexix Himauana. Plate XIX. fig. 66. Testa sinistrosa, subcarinata, tenut, subdiaphand, umbilicatd, superne subcon- vexd, inferne inflata, longitudinaliter et transversim minute striata, superne fusco- lutea, inferne fuscd, prope carinam tenebrosiori ; anfractibus quaternis; spird obtusa ; apertura late rotundata ; labro simplict et acuto; columella brevi. Shell sinistral, subcarinate, thin, translucent, umbilicated, obtusely convex above, inflated below, longitudinally, transversely and minutely striate, superior part brown- ish yellow, inferior part brown, being more intense near the carina ; whorls four ; spire obtuse ; aperture widely rounded ; outer lip simple and sharp ; columella short. Hab. Himalaya Mountains. Dr Burrough. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Diam. 1:1, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—In the splendid collection of objects of natural history brought from India and other countries by Dr Burrough was this spe- cies, which Dr B. procured himself among the Himalaya mountains. It is easily distinguished from any species I am acquainted with, and approaches most closely to the H levipes(Fer.). Its sinistral opening, 56 ON THE NAIADES, its translucency, and its colours are very characteristic. On the infe- rior part of the carina, which is obtuse, the brown colour is more in- tense—on the superior part the yellow is brightest. Heuix vesica. Plate XIX. fig. 67. Testa tenui, pellucidd, superne elevatd et fusco-luted, inferne inflatd albdque, transversim minute striatd, umbilicald, anfractibus quinis ; spird obtuso-conicé ; apertura subrotunda ; labro tenui et reflexo, inferne crassescenti ; columella levi. Shell thin, transparent, elevated and brownish yellow above, inflated and white be- low, longitudinally and minutely striate, umbilicated; whorls five; spire obtusely conical ; aperture nearly round ; outer lip thin and reflected, on the lower part slightly thickened ; columella smooth. (ef 0 eee My Cabinet. Diam. -7, Length -5 of an inch. Remarks.—This species is peculiarly transparent, and very strongly resembles the cuticle of a blister or the bladder of a fish. This char- acter, and its pale brownish-yellow superior portion, and white inferior portion, together with its longitudinal striz, eminently distinguish it. The lower part of the reflected lip is so much thickened as almost to form a tooth. Heurx cincta. Plate XIX. fig. 68. Testd superne depressd, inferne inflatd, longitudinaliter striatd, umbilicaté, rufo-fuscd, fasciam fuscam aut nigram super medios anfractus habente; anfrac- tibus qualernis ; spird plunulald, apertura subrotundatd ; labro simplici ; colum- ella lxvi. Shell depressed above, inflated below, longitudinally striate, umbilicated, reddish brown, with a dark brown or black band above the middle of the whorls ; whorls four ; spire flattened ; aperture nearly round ; outer lip simple ; columella smooth. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 57 Hab. Java? My Cabinet. Diam. -9, Length °6 of an inch. Remarks.—The fine reddish-brown ground and intensely dark band distinguish this fine Helix. In my specimen, which is the only one I have seen, the inferior margin of the band has, adjoining it, an obscure band, of a tint somewhat lighter than the ground. It should be ob- served, that when other specimens may be examined, the bands may not prove so regular as in the present specimen. Around the umbili- cus the colour is more pale. Hetix Wooprana. Plate XIX. fig. 69. Testa supra obtuso-conicd, inferne inflata, longitudinaliter et nitide striata, albida, pellucida, fascia unicd in medium anfractum, late umbilicatd; anfractibus guaternis ; spira obtusd, apertura rotundata latdque ; labro reflexo; columella lzvi. Shell obtusely conical above, inflated below, longitudinally and finely striate, pale and translucent, with a single band on the centre of the whorl, widely umbilicate ; whorls four; spire obtuse ; aperture wide and round ; outer lip reflected; columella smooth. Hab. China near Canton. W. W. Wood. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. -6, Length -4 of an inch. Remarks.—Among a number of fine shells taken by Mr Wood, who devoted himself much to natural history during some years’ residence in China, was this species and the globula herein described, both from the neighbourhood of Canton. It may be distinguished by its brown band, its round aperture and enlarged umbilicus. VO L. V.—P 58 ON THE NAIADES, Her Guopuna. Plate XIX. fig. 70. Testa globosd, tenebroso-corned, pellucida, umbilicatd, longitudinaliter striaté ; anfractibus quinis ; spird obtuso-elevatd ; apertura latd et subrotunddé ; labro sim- plicit ; columella levi. Shell globose, dark horn colour, translucent, umbilicated, longitudinally striate ; whorls five; spire obtusely elevated ; aperture wide and round; outer lip simple ; columella smooth. Hab. China, near Canton. W. W. Wood. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Diam. ‘6, Length -5 of an inch. Remarks.—I owe to the kindness of Mr Wood the specimen which is here figured. It is remarkable for its globular form and its dark horn-coloured epidermis. It has somewhat the aspect of a Paludina. PALUDINA BI-MONILIFERA. Plate XIX. fig. 71. Testa abbreviato-turritd, tenebroso-corned, apice obtusé ; anfractibus seriebus duabus nodulorum circumdatis ; nodulis seriet inferioris anfractuum superior- um suturd celatis ; nodulis seriet superioris majoribus, et super omnes anfrac- tus conspicuis ; suturis profyans et irregularibus ; labro sub-biangulato ; basi subangulatd. Shell obtusely turrited, dark horn colour ; apex obtuse ; whorls furnished with two rows of nodules ; the nodules of the lower row of the upper whorls hidden by the su- ture, those of the upper row larger, and visible on all the whorls ; sutures deep and irregular ; outer lip sub-biangular ; base subangular. Hab. Alabama River. Judge Tait. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Vanuxem. Cabinet of the American Philosophical Society. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 59 Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of Baron Ferussac. Diam. 1:1, Length 1-8 inches. Remarks.—This superb Paludina, which far surpasses in point of beauty any of our species yet known, I owe to the kindness of Judge Tait. Its beautiful double tuberculated cincture at once distinguishes it from all described species. Some specimens are furnished with dark purple bands which beautifully decorate the interior of the shell, and give a dark rich green colour to its fine epidermis. In the others these are wanting, and the epidermis then has a clear and more yel- low appearance. ‘The sutures being formed immediately over the lower row of tubercles, they cause its line to be very irregular; and this row itself is hidden on the upper whorls. SUPPLEMENT. Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 15th, 1833. SINCE I had the pleasure to present to this Society, nearly a year since, a Memoir on the Naiades and some other families, I have had it in my power to procure several interesting species, hitherto unnoticed by naturalists. In the large collection of rare shells which I procured in Europe while there last year, some of these were discovered; and most of them are, perhaps, the only specimens known, being now first described. The observations on, and corrections of, Lamarck’s Naiades, it is hoped, will prove useful to the American conchologist. VOL. V.—P 2 60 ON THE NATADES. Unio PARALLELOPIPEDON. Plate VIII. fig. 20. Testa oblonga, subcylindraced, transversd, valde inxquilaterali, postice angu- lutd, inflatd, marginibus dorsi et baseos parallelis ; valvulis subcrassis ; natibus prominulis, retusis; epidermide fere nigra; dentibus cardinalibus obliquis, cris- lutis ; lateralibus longis rectisque ; margarita albd et iridescente. Shell oblong, subcylindrical, dorsal and basal margins parallel, transverse, very in- equilateral, angular behind, inflated; valves rather thick ; beaks somewhat elevated, retuse ; epidermis almost black ; cardinal teeth oblique, crested ; lateral teeth long and straight ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. River Parana, Province of Corrientes. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. -9, Length 1-2, Breadth 2-7 inches. Shell oblong, subeylindrical, dorsal and basal margins parallel, trans- verse, very inequilateral, flattish on the s.des, angular behind, inflated; substance of the shell rather thick; beaks rather elevated and placed near the anterior margin; ligament long and thin; umbones flattened ; umbonial slope carinate ; posterior slope elevated into a carina; epider- mis finely wrinkled and almost black; cardinal teeth oblique and crested, larger in the right valve; lateral teeth long and straight; anterior cica- trices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices placed in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks shallow; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—This species is from the Burrough collection, and is dis- tinct from any I have seen. It resembles somewhat, in the outline of the margin, the masuftus of Say. The posterior slope does not, how- ever, decline so much, the dorsal and basal margins being nearly parallel. In being subcylindrical it resembles the eylindricus of Say ; it has not, however, either tubercles or arrow-headed markings. The very dark colour of its epidermis is peculiar.* * Since the above description and the figure were made, I have seen a more perfect specimen in the possession of Dr Burrough, which has the beaks but little eroded. In AND OTHER FAMILIES. 61 Unio Coorrrianus. Plate VIII. fig. 21. Testa suborbiculatd, nonnihil obliqud, inequilaterd, dimidio postico tuberculata ; valvulis crassis; natibus prominentibus ; dentibus cardinalibus subgrandibus ; lateralibus subbrevibus, crassis rectisque ; margarita alba et carnis colore tinctd. Shell suborbicular, somewhat oblique, inequilateral, tuberculated on posterior half; valves thick; beaks elevated; cardinal teeth rather large; lateral teeth rather short, thick and straight ; nacre flesh coloured and white. Hab. River Ohio. 'T. G. Lea. __ My Cabinet. ar Cabinet of Mr Cooper. ‘Diam. 1:9, : Length 2:8, Breadth 3-2 inches. Shell suborbicular, somewhat oblique, inequilateral, irregularly tuberculated on the posterior half; substance of the shell thick ; beaks thick and elevated; ligament rather short and thick; epidermis wrin- kled, dark rusty brown; rays scarcely visible; cardinal tooth rather large and widely cleft in the left valve, single and emerging from a pit in the right valve; lateral teeth rather short, thick and straight; anterior and posterior cicatrices both distinct ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks deep and angulated; nacre flesh coloured and white, the white usually forming a broad border between the palleal cicatrix and the margin. Remarks.—This species very closely resembles, in most of its char- acters, both the verrucosus (Barnes) and pustulosus (nobis). It differs from the first in never being chocolate coloured. — It is rarely, I believe, entirely white like the latter. _The epidermis is dark, and when rays can be seen on it, they will be found to be pencilled, and not one broad this I found a characier not perceptible in the eroded one from which the description was made, the beaks being furnished with radiated folds. nearly similar to those of the lacteolus and Burroughianus described herein. This character seems to prevail very much in the South American Uniones. Among the numerous species described from North America, none yet have been observed to possess this character. VOL. V.—Q ~ ere 62 ON THE NATIADES, interrupted one like the pustulosus. There is a great peculiarity in the flesh or pink colour of the nacre, which is disposed to be clouded, and to be of a stronger hue about the teeth, while the cavity of the beak is nearly white. I dedicate this species to my friend, William Cooper, Ksq., as a slight acknowledgement of the many ies received in the way of commu- nications, and the loan of specimens. Unto pMARGINATUS. Plate IX. fig. 22. Testa sub-ellipticd, ad basim emarginaté et compressa, transversissimd, valde inequilaterd, postice sub-triangulatd; valvulis subcrassis; natibus prominulis, apicibus undulatis ; epidermide viridi-luted ; dentibus cardinalibus parvis, obliquis, et in valvula utrdque duplicibus ; lateralibus longis subcurvisque ; margarita alba et tridescente. Shell sub-elliptical, emarginate and compressed at base, very transverse, very inequi- lateral, sub-biangular behind ; valves somewhat thick; beaks rather elevated and undu- lated at tip; epidermis greenish yellow ; cardinal teeth small, oblique and double in both valves ; lateral teeth long and slightly curved ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. My Cabinet. Diam. 1, Length 1:3, Breadth 2°8 inches. Shell subelliptical, emarginate and compressed at base, very trans- verse, very inequilateral, sub-biangular behind, elevated along the um- benial slope, flattened on the umbones; substance of the shell somewhat thick ; beaks rather elevated, retuse and undulate at the tip; ligament long and thin; epidermis finely wrinkled, greenish yellow, along the posterior slope green; cardinal teeth small, oblique and double in both valves; lateral teeth long and slightly curved; anterior cicatrices dis- tinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks subangular and wide; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—I procured two opposed valves of different individuals of this species, which nearly match, of Mr Stutchbury, a well known and AND OTHER FAMILIES. 63 extensive dealer in London. He could not give me the least idea of its native country. From its general appearance I should presume it to come from a southern latitude, perhaps from New Holland. It is rather peculiar in its outline, being more emarginate at base than any species with which I am acquainted. The emargination is not, how- ever, so great as in the Mya margaritifera (Lin. ), Alasmodonta arcuata (Barnes). It approaches most closely the Unio subtentus (Say), but differs from it in the total absence of folds or “ribs” on the posterior slope. In the two valves which I possess there appear to be no rays, unless the green of the posterior slope be denominated a single broad one. ‘The emargination and compression of the base cause the poste- rior part of the cavity of the shell to be effuse. Unto Conrapicus. Plate IX. fig. 23. Testa elliptica, transversd, inequilaterd, parte posteriori plicaté ; valuulis tenui- bus; natibus ad.apices nitide undulatis ; dentibus cardinalibus parvis et erectis ; lateralibus indistinctis ; margarité antice alba, postice iridescente et in cavo fusco purpured. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, folded on the posterior parts ; valves thin ; beaks finely undulated at tip ; cardinal teeth small and erect ; lateral teeth not perfectly defined ; nacre white anteriorly, iridescent posteriorly, and brownish purple in the cavity. Hab..... Professor Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Troost. Diam -6, Length -8, Breadth 1-8 inches. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, indistinctly folded on the posterior parts; substance of the shell thin behind, thicker before ; beaks slightly elevated and finely undulated at tip; ligament rather long and thin; epidermis finely wrinkled, yellowish brown, with nu- merous indistinct greenish rays, which on the posterior part are dis- posed to be clouded; cardinal teeth small, erect, disposed to be lobed; lateral teeth long, slightly curved, not perfectly defined, having but a small cleft in the left valve ; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cica- | 64 ON THE NAIADES, trices confluent; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks shallow and tinged with brownish purple; nacre white anteriorly, thinner and very iridescent posteriorly. Remarks.—I owe to the kindness of professor Troost this little species, and name it after an indefatigable naturalist, Mr T. A. Con- rad. It belongs to that group which is distinguished by an imma- ture hinge, and which I have noticed in my remarks on the U. Hil- drethius. 'The U. Conradius certainly resembles that shell closely. It is, however, less cylindrical, and has the teeth more perfect. It also has rays and undulations which I have not observed on the other. In outline it more closely resembles the U. iris (nobis), but differs in the teeth and in the rays. Having but two specimens of this species to examine, some of the characters may be found to differ in other speci- mens. One of these is slightly emarginate at the basal margin. Unio pivaricatus. Plate IX. fig. 24. Testa ellipticd, transversd, subcompressd, valde inxquilaterd ; valvulis tenuibus ; natibus plicis pulchris divaricatis; dentibus cardinalibus parvis, compressis ; lateralibus longis et subtenuibus ; margarité alba et iridescente. Shell elliptical, transverse, rather compressed, very inequilateral ; valves thin ; beaks with beautiful divaricating folds ; cardinal teeth small, compressed ; lateral teeth long and rather thin ; nacre white and iridescent. Hab. Egypt. Duke de Rivoli. My Cabinet. Diam. °5, Length -9, Breadth 1-4 inches. Shell elliptical, transverse, somewhat compressed, very inequilate- ral; substance of the shell thin; beaks covered with beautiful folds diverging from their apex; ligament rather short and slender; epi- dermis greenish, smooth; cardinal teeth small, compressed, double in the right valve, and single in the left; lateral teeth long, rather thin and nearly straight; anterior cicatrices slightly confluent ; pos- terior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated in the centre of AND OTHER FAMILIES. 65 « the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks shallow and subangular ; nacre white and iridescent. Remarks.—This beautiful little species I procured from the cabinet of the Duke de Rivoli in Paris. It appears to me to be inedited, and may perhaps have been considered a transverse variety of the corru- gatus (Lam.). It ought not to be confounded with that species, being much more transverse, and the folds of the beaks differing. Lamarck, in his description of the corrugatus, says, “rugis angulato- flexuosis.” The folds of the divaricatus are well marked, without an- gles, and diverge from the point of the beaks. Unto Corrranus. Plate IX. fig. 25. Testé angusto-ellipticd, transversissima, valde inequilaterd, postice subangu- laté ; valvulis tenuissimis ; natibus viz prominulis ; dentibus cardinalibus tenuibus et laminatis ; lateralibus longis, tenuibus, subrectisque; margaritd alba et irides- cente. Shell narrow-elliptical, very transverse, very inequilateral, subangular behind ; valves very thin ; beaks scarcely prominent ; cardinal teeth thin and bladed ; lateral teeth long, thin and nearly straight ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. India. Mrs Corrie. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. -6, Length 1, Breadth 2-1 inches. Shell narrow elliptical, very transverse, very inequilateral, subangu- lar behind ; dorsal line nearly straight ; substance of the shell very thin; beaks very slightly elevated and minutely waved at the tip; ligament long and slender; epidermis smooth, dark brown; rays none; cardinal teeth thin, bladed, single in the left valve and double in the right; lateral teeth long, thin, bladed and nearly straight; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices situated nearly in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks exceed- ingly shallow; nacre.pearly white and iridescent. VOL. V.—R Ee eer wr eer re a re, ee 66 ON THE NAIADES, - Remarks.—I am indebted to an amiable and intelligent friend, Mrs Corrie of Birmingham, England, for this new species, which comes from Calcutta; and to her I dedicate it, as a mark of sincere friendship. It closely resembles the U. marginalis of Lamarck, but differs from that species in being more transverse, in the beaks being more retuse, in the dorsal line being nearly straight, and in its not being possessed of a light border along the margin. The cardinal teeth are remark- ably thin, and form nearly a line with the lateral teeth. Unio Grayanus. Plate IX. fig. 26. Testa lanceolata, transversissima, antice rotundata et postice acutissime angu- lata, prope nates et partem posticam plicata; lateribus planulatis ; clivo umboniali subcarinato; valvulis tenuibus; natibus prope marginem anticam locatis, de- pressis ; epidermide luteolé, obsolete radiata ; dentibus cardinalibus in valvulé utrdque duplicibus et erectis ; lateralibus longissimis, tenuibus, sub-erectisque ; margarita pulchra et iridescente. Shell lanceolate, very transverse, rounded before and very acutely. angular behind, plicate about the beaks and posterior part of the shell, flattened on the sides ; umbonial slope ridged ; valves thin; beaks depressed, placed near the anterior margin ; epidermis yellowish with obsolete rays; cardinal teeth double in both valves and erect; lateral teeth very long, thin and nearly straight ; nacre beautifully pearly and iridescent. Hab. China. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Cabinet of Mr Gray, London. Diam. °6, Length °8, Breadth 3-3 inches. Shell lanceolate, very transverse, very inequilateral, rounded before and very acutely angular behind, irregularly folded in the region of the beaks, several larger folds on the anterior slope, on the poste- rior portion the folds are parallel being nearly perpendicular to the basal margin, flattened on the sides; umbonial slope elevated into a ridge, green; substance of the shell thin; beaks depressed, placed very near to the anterior margin; ligament thin, not very long; epidermis finely wrinkled, yellowish with obsolete rays, disposed to be greenish AND OTHER FAMILIES. 67 on the posterior part; cardinal teeth double in both valves, compressed and erect; lateral teeth very long, thin and nearly straight; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices. confluent; dorsal cicatrices situ- ated in the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks very small; nacre beautifully pearly and iridescent. Remarks.—This is perhaps the most extraordinary Unio that has yet fallen to the lot of a naturalist to describe. . When we cast our eyes over all the species, and then rest them on this, we shall be ready to exclaim, that nothing hereafter belonging to this genus can astonish us. Its latitude is so great, that one at first sight can scarcely believe it to belong to the family Naiades. Its great transverseness causes the lateral teeth to be exceedingly long, and that character, together with the acutely angular posterior margin, gives the shell the form of a crane’s beak. In outline it does not approach any species I know, and therefore there can be no comparison made. I procured it of a dealer in London, and dedicate it to my friend, John Edward Gray, Esq. of the British Museum, one of the most distinguished naturalists in Great Britain, and to whose great kindness and attention while in London I am much indebted. I know of no zoologist who has, in that country, pursued our fayourite science with more ardour or more success, and it is only due to him, while it gives me great pleasure to render him this tribute of respect in placing his name to one of the most inte- resting species of the whole family. Unio Burroveuranus. Plate X. fig. 27. Testa subrotunda, inequilaterali, compressa, postice subangulata ; natibus obli- que plicatis, prominulis ; valvulis subcrassis ; epidermide tenebroso-fuscd ; dentibus cardinalibus magnis, elevatis et laminatis, lateralibus subrectis ; margarité albé et iridescente. Shell subrotund, inequilateral, compressed, subangular behind, with oblique folds on the beaks ; valves rather thick ; beaks somewhat elevated and much plicate ; epidermis dark brown ; cardinal teeth large, elevated and lamelliform ; lateral teeth nearly straight; nacre pearly white and iridescent. x " , » 68 ON THE NAIADES, Hab. River Parana, Province of Corrientes. Dr Burrough. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. :1, “Length 1:8, Breadth 2:4 inches. Shell subrotund, inequilateral, compressed, subangular behind, with large oblique folds on the beaks; substance of the shell rather thick; beaks somewhat elevated and distinctly plicate as far as the umbones; ligament short and thin ; epidermis smooth, dark brown with transverse -. yellow marks of growth; cardinal teeth large, elevated, lamelliform atid double in both valves; lateral teeth lamelliform and nearly straight ; anterior cicatrices and posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks subangular and shallow; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—This is of the collection of Dr Burrough, sent by him to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. To this gentle- man natural science is much indebted for his unwearied industry in contributing to the knowledge of the Fauna—of the numerous countries through which he has travelled, in Asia, as well as on this continent. This species resembles most, perhaps, the Jacteo/us (nobis), but differs from it in being more round in the outline, in having longer and larger folds on the beaks, and in being more compressed. In the beaks it has some resemblance to the corrugatus (am.), as well also as in the outline ; but the folds being nearly parallel to each other, it differs from the corrugatus in these, which are usually zig zag in the latter shell. I owe to the kindness of Dr Burrough the specimen in my cabinet, and I have great pleasure in dedicating the species to him. Unio Sowrersianus. Plate X. fig. 28. Testé subtriangulari, inflata, parte posticd peculiariter compressé et striatd ; valvulis crassissimis ; natibus valde prominentibus, dentibus cardinalibus magnis ; lateralibus crassis subrectisque ; margaritd in cavo albido-purpured. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 69 Shell subtriangular, inflated, singularly compressed on the posterior part, which is striate ; valves remarkably thick; beaks very prominent ; cardinal teeth large ; late- ral teeth thick and nearly straight ; nacre in the cavity very light purple. Hab. Tennessee. G. B. Sowerby. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Sowerby. Diam. 1°5, Length 1-7, Breadth 1-8 inches. Shell subtriangular, inflated, singularly compressed on the posterior part, which is filled with striz passing from the beak to the posterior and posterior-basal margins, the anterior part being inflated and smooth ; slightly emarginate at posterior basal margin; substance of the shell very remarkably thick, less so on the posterior part; beaks large and very prominent; ligament short and thick; epidermis bright brown, smooth and shining before, striate behind ; cardinal teeth large, sulcate, elevated and cleft in the left valve, and emerging from a pit in the right valve; lateral teeth thick, short and nearly straight; anterior and posterior cicatrices both distinct ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal teeth ; cavity of the beaks shallow and subangular; nacre very light purple in the cavity, and white on the anterior margin. Remarks.—To the kindness of G. B. Sowerby, Esq., one of the most distinguished writers on conchology in England, I owe the pos- session of this truly interesting shell, and to him I with great pleasure dedicate it. He received it from the state of Tennessee, but from what river I do not know. In general outline it resembles somewhat the frigonus (nobis), but differs from it in being more rotund, in hay- ing the posterior part compressed and striate, and in being coloured inside. It has a stronger resemblance to the Haysianus (nobis) than to any other species known to me, but differs frem it in being more com- pressed behind, in being more striate, in being much larger (to judge from the few specimens I have seen of both), and in the difference of the colour of the nacre, the Haysianus being dark chocolate, while the Sowerbianus is of a very light purple, approaching to flesh colour. VOL. Vos 70 ON THE NAIADES, Unio promas. Plate X. fig. 29. Testa subtriangulari, subobliqud, gibbd, irregulariter transversimque plicatd, punctiunculis passim radiaté; valvulis crassissimis; natibus prominentibus ; dentibus cardinalibus latis, lateralibus crassis brevibusque; margarita alba. Shell subtriangular, somewhat oblique, hunch-backed, irregularly and transversely folded, with dotted rays over the whole disk ; valves very thick; beaks elevated ; car- dinal teeth wide ; lateral teeth short and thick ; nacre pearly white. Hab. Harpeth River, Tennessee. Professor Conrad. Hab. Cumberland River, near Nashville. Professor Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Professor Troost. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam 1-6, Length 1-8, Breadth 1-9 inches. Shell subtriangular, somewhat oblique, hunch-backed, irregularly and transversely folded at the separate stages of growth, furnished with an oblique furrow before the umbonial slope, substance of the shell very thick; beaks thick and elevated; ligament short, thick and dark coloured; umbones furnished with a hump; epidermis yellow, with numerous dark green dotted rays, on the anterior part furnished with about six somewhat broad rays; cardinal tooth wide and sulcate; lateral tooth short and thick, having a flat plate between it and the cardinal tooth; anterior and posterior cicatrices both distinct; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under side of the cardinal tooth; cavity of the beaks deep and angulated; nacre pearly white, on the posterior part some- times golden. Remarks.—I have had for some years in my cabinet two specimens of this beautiful and curious species, the first of which, a young one, I owe to the kindness of the late professor Conrad. Having recently received a complete suite from professor Troost, I have perfectly satis- fied myself of (what I before doubted) its being distinct from the irroratus (nobis). The manner in which the hump is formed is very remarkable. As far as the third or fourth stage of growth the disks AND OTHER FAMILIES. 71 are almost flat. The deposit of the nacre after this forms an angle of nearly 45° with the surface which it has left, thus forming a hump, or obtuse angle point, directly on the umbo. This causes the curious result, that when the shell is from one third to three fourths grown, it will rest, when so placed, on the portion of surface between the point of the beak and the umbo, the basal margin remaining in the air. In its general characters it resembles the zrroratus, but may at once be distinguished by the hump. It is devoid of tubercles, while the iro- ratus is sometimes covered with them, particularly on the posterior part. It differs somewhat also in the rays, the spots in those of the dromas being larger, and generally better defined. The outline differs in being less elongated, being disposed to be more oblique or more transverse. In regard to the structure of the animal, I am not prepared to say that it differs from that of the irrorafus.* Not having had an opportunity to examine the animal, I can only judge by analogy, which would, I think, induce one to conclude that the same curious pendent oviducts would be found in both. I hope to be able to procure from professor Troost a specimen in that period of gestation. Unto TroosteEnsis. Plate X. fig. 30. Testd scalend, cuneatd, obliqud, valde inxquilaterali ; valvulis antice crassiori- bus; natibus subterminalibus ; epidermide luteold, radiis capillaribus multis ; den- tibus cardinalibus elevatis, cristatis ; lateralibus subrectis ; margarité albéd et iri- descente. Shell sealeniform, wedge shaped, oblique, very inequilateral ; valves thicker ante- riorly ; beaks nearly terminal ; epidermis yellowish, filled with numerous capillary rays ; cardinal teeth elevated, crested ; lateral teeth nearly straight ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. Cumberland River. Professor Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Troost. * See vol. iii. p. 271. 72 ON THE NAIADES, Diam. °8, Length -1, Breadth 1-9 inches. Shell scaleniform, cuneated, oblique, very inequilateral, angular be- hind; substance of the shell thick before, thinner behind; beaks ele- vated and rounded ; epidermis very finely wrinkled, shining, yellowish brown with numerous green flexuous capillary rays over the whole disk ; ligament rather short and thick ; cardinal teeth elevated, crenate, deeply cleft in the left valve, and emerging from a pit in the right valve ; lateral teeth long and nearly straight; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices nearly distinct; dersal cicatrices situated in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks very shallow; nacre beautifully pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—1i owe to the great kindness of professor Troost the ex- amination of his select specimens, which he most obligingly sent to me for that purpose. Among them were two specimens of this rare and beautiful species, unsurpassed by any other in the delicacy and exquisite beauty of its rays. In general form it approaches the scale- nius (Rafinesque), but differs from it in the form of the rays altogether. It differs also in colour and in having the beaks less retuse. In dedi- cating this rare and beautiful species to my friend, professor Troost, I do him but an act of simple justice. His constant efforts in the pro- motion of the physical sciences are known and acknowledged, and his investigation in this branch of conchology will do much to illustrate its history in his adopted state. Unio rerpix. Plate XI. fig. 31. Testa ellipticd, postice subangulatd, subequilaterali, inflatd, transversd ; valvu- lis subcrassis ; epidermide luteold, radiis irregulariter interruptis ; dentibus car- dinalibus elevatis ; lateralibus prope eorum fines majoribus ; margaritaé albé et tridescente. Shell elliptical, subangular behind, nearly equilateral, inflated, transverse ; valves rather thick ; epidermis yellowish with irregularly interrupted rays; cardinal teeth elevated ; lateral teeth larger near their termination; nacre pearly white and iri- descent. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 73 Hab. Harpeth River, Tennessee. Professor 'Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Troost, Nashville. © Diam. 1-4, Length 1-9, - Breadth 3-1 inches. Shell elliptical, subangular behind, nearly equilateral, inflated, trans- verse ; substance of the shell rather thick; beaks slightly elevated and without undulations at tip; ligament short and thick; epidermis yel- owish with irregularly interrupted rays over the whole disk; cardinal teeth elevated, double in the left valve and single in the right; lateral teeth enlarged and disposed to be bladed at the termination; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situ- ated along the base of the cardinal tooth and under the plate between the cardinal and lateral teeth; cavity of the beaks wide and obtusely angulate; nacre pearly white, extending only far enough to leave a broad horn coloured border. Remarks.—This species was among the shells sent to me by professor Troost. ‘To judge from the few specimens I have seen, I should sup- pose it varied much from age as well as locality. One of my speci- mens is old and very large, scarcely presenting a ray. In this state it closely resembles the U. obovatus (nobis), but is rather more trans- verse. ‘The younger and more perfect specimens approach more closely to the U. crassus (Say), but are more inflated, and differ in the rays, which are broken into irregular spots, not entirely dissimilar to the plumage of the partridge. It has some resemblance to the U. pic- fus herein described, but is not compressed like that species, and differs in the rays. In some specimens the teeth are disposed to be pinkish. Unio Picrus. Plate XI. fig. 32. Testa ellipticd, compressa, inequilaterali ; valvulis subtenuibus ; natibus com- pressis et ad apices undulatis ; epidermide luted, radiis tenebroso-viridibus inter- ruptis ; dentibus cardinalibus parvis ; lateralibus longis et subcurvis ; margarita alba et iridescente. VOL. V.—T Pa nh ea, es Ce 74 ON THE NAIADES, Shell elliptical, compressed, inequilateral ; valves rather thin ; beaks compressed and undulated at tip ; epidermis yellow with interrupted dark green rays; cardinal teeth small; lateral teeth long and slightly curved ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. Harpeth River, Tennessee. Professor Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Troost. Diam. °8, Length 1-6, Breadth 2°6 inches. Shell elliptical, compressed, inequilateral; substance of the shell rather thin, thicker before; beaks compressed and finely undulated at the tip; ligament short and rather thick; epidermis fine yellow with numerous oblique interrupted rays, which are strongly pencilled at the commencement of each stage of growth; cardinal teeth very small and erect; lateral teeth long and slightly curved, in the left valve enlarged near the termination; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks. and deeply impressed ; cavity of the beaks very shallow and rounded; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—This species, so beautiful and so peculiar in its painted exterior, [ owe to the kindness of professor Troost. ‘The fine specimen figured belongs to the museum of that gentleman in Nashville, and I am indebted to him for the loan of it to insert it here. It belongs to a group, the peculiar character of which seems to be in the singular interruption of the rays, which are obsolete, except at the commence- ment of each stage of growth, where they are strongly pencilled with green. The U. planulatus (nobis), U. patulus (nobis) and U. perdix (herein described) belong to this group. The U. pictus has some re- semblance to the U. cariosus (Say), but differs in being. more com- pressed, and in having rays over the whole disk. It perhaps more closely resembles the younger specimens of U. crassus (Say). It dif- fers, however, in being thinner, smaller, and in the character of the rays. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 75 SyMPHYNOTA DISCcOIDEA. Plate XI. fig. 33. Testa subrhombed, compressa, transversd, inequilateral, valvulis tenuissimis, postice connatis; natibus paulum undulatis, compressis ; dentibus in valvula utrdque lineam simplicem facientibus ; margaritd albé et tridescente. Shell subrhomboidal, compressed, transverse, inequilateral ; valves very thin, con- nate behind ; beaks slightly undulated, compressed ; teeth in both valves forming a simple line ; nacre white and iridescent. aby...“ * G. B. Sowerby. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Cabinet of W. Hyde. Diam. 1-2, Length 2:4, Breadth 3-9 inches. Shell subrhomboidal, compressed, transverse, inequilateral, finely wrinkled; substance of the shell very thin; posterior slope elevated into a moderately high wing, which is connate; beaks very slightly undulated, compressed ; ligament linear; epidermis dark brown; teeth in both valves forming a simple, continuous, fine curve line; anterior and posterior cicatrices both distinct; dorsal cicatrices situated in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks almost none: nacre white and iridescent. Kemarks.—I owe to the kindness of G. B. Sowerby, Esq. the spe- cimen here described. He procured it of “a dealer from Holland,” and its habitat is unknown. It has the characters of an eastern shell. and probably came from Java. In the outline of the margin it resem- bles the Symphynota magnifica (described in this memoir), but differs from it in being compressed and in the possession of teeth. In the teeth it has a stronger resemblance to the S. bialata (nobis) than to any other species. It is, however, less defined, and the curve is less regular, the posterior portion being nearly straight. In the elevation of the wing it differs totally. Our present shell forms an interesting * Dr Burrough has recently obtained it in the rivers of China, and to him I owe the fine specimen figured. 76 ON THE NAIADES, link in the gradual change of the characters of the teeth. It ap- proaches that division of the Maiades which do not possess teeth, more closely than any species which has come under my notice. ANODONTA LATO-MARGINATA. Plate XII. fig. 34. Testa obovata, transversa, inequilaterali ; intus margine laté et corned; sinu longo et in partem internam disci vergente ; valvulis crassis ; epidermide rubido- Susca ; margarita alba et iridescente. Shell obovate, transverse, inequilateral, interior with a broad horn coloured border; sinus long, and pointed towards the interior of the disk ; valves thick ; epidermis red- dish brown; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. River Parana, South America. Dr Burrough. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. 1°5, Length 2°5, Breadth 3-5 inches. Shell obovate, transverse, inequilateral, inflated, interior with a broad horn coloured border; sinus long, and pointed to the interior of the disk ; substance of the shell thick ; beaks somewhat elevated ; ligament long and thick; epidermis reddish brown, finely wrinkled, and some- times obscurely rayed; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent ; palleal cicatrices almost imperceptible; dorsal cicatrices ap- parently none; cavity of the beaks shallow and subangular; nacre pearly white and iridescent, extending only to the broad horn coloured border. Remarks.—In the collection of Dr Burrough there are several spe- cimens of this species, some of which are young and more rotund than that figured here. It presents several characters unusual in the species of this genus, so far as our knowledge extends. The horn coloured border is even broader than that of the fenebricosa herein described, and the apparent absence of the dorsal cicatrices I have never noticed before in any species of the family. The sinus of this species is very remarkable, as well as that of the fenebricosa. It does not, however, AND OTHER FAMILIES. 77 like that species, curve towards the cavity of the beaks; it stretches in a point towards the centre of the cavity of the disk. In general out- line it resembles the An. Patagonia (Lam.), but differs in being less rotund, less inflated, and in the nacre being white. Anoponta Buarnvitiiana. Plate XII. fig. 35. Testa ovatd, inflata, valde inequilaterali, antice angulatd, postice latissimd, ad marginem anteriorem hianti; cicatrice marginali lata et postice valde incurvé ; _valvulis subcrassis; natibus prominulis; margine dorsali rectd; margaritd sal- monis colore tinctd. Shell ovate, inflated, very inequilateral, angular before, very wide posteriorly, gaping at the anterior and posterior margins; palleal cicatrix broad and much incurved poste- riorly; valves rather thick; beaks somewhat prominent; dorsal line straight; nacre salmon and pearly. Hab. Chili? My Cabinet. Diam. 1:3, Length 1-9, Breadth 3 inches. Shell ovate, inflated, very inequilateral, angular before, very wide posteriorly, the greatest length being perpendicular from the extreme posterior end of the ligament to the basal margin, gaping much at the anterior margin, and rather less at the posterior margin; substance of the shell somewhat thick; beaks rather prominent; dorsal line straight, having a slight elevation under the beak like an incipient tooth; ante- rior cicatrices complicated but distinct; posterior cicatrices wide and confluent; dorsal cicatrices numerous and stretched in a line across the cavity of the beaks; marginal cicatrix wide, deep and much incurved near to the posterior cicatrix; nacre salmon, beautifully pearly and iri- descent. Remarks.—I accidentally met with this interesting shell at a shop in Havre last October, a few days previously to my embarkation. The two valves belong to different individuals, but they very nearly match. They have both been slightly mutilated by an attempt to beautify VOL. Y.—U ee ee ee 78 ON THE NATADES, them, the epidermis having been almost completely removed. What remains indicates it to be greenish, and is sufficient to warrant its being represented in the figure with a perfect epidermis—the ligament has also been destroyed. I was informed by the dealer that it came from Chili; such authority cannot, however, be entirely relied on. The cicatrices of this interesting species are very remarkable, particularly that of the mantle near the margin; the palleal impression is wide, deeply impressed, and in the posterior part of the shell deflected towards the centre of the cavity, somewhat similar to the excavation of the palleal cicatrix of the genera Galathea and Mactra. ‘The character of this cicatrix is different from that of any species of the family Naiades J have seen, and this peculiarity induces me to believe that the animal, when found, may prove to be different from that of the Anodonta. Should this be the case, it will belong of course to a new genus, for which I propose the name of Columba. It somewhat resembles the An. exotica (Lam.). It is, however, narrower before and broader be- hind than that shell. It gapes anteriorly and posteriorly more than any of the Vaiades with which I am acquainted. It is perhaps most nearly allied to the MAnodon crassus (Swainson), but differs in the dor- sal line being straight, the nacre being pearly salmon, as well also in the peculiar character of the palleal cicatrix. ANODONTA TENEBRIcCosA. Plate XII. fig. 36. Testa ellipticd, transversd, inequilaterd, intus margine lata et corned; sinu incurvo; valvulis crassis ; epidermide tenebroso fuscéd ; margaritd alba subceruled purpura nubild, iridescente. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, interior with a broad horn coloured border; sinus incurved ; valves thick; epidermis dark brown; nacre pearly white, clouded with bluish purple, iridescent. Hab. River Parana, South America. Dr Burrough. My Cabinet. > Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 719 Diam. 1°5, Length 1:9, Breadth 3-3 inches. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral, with a broad horn coloured border, emarginate at base; sinus incurved; substance of the shell thick ; beaks scarcely prominent; ligament long and thick; epidermis dark olive brown, wrinkled, obscurely rayed on the posterior slope; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; palleal cicatrix large and partially tinted with bluish purple; dorsal cicatrix situated in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks very shallow; nacre pearly white clouded with bluish purple, extending only to the broad horn coloured border, iridescent. Remarks.—This curious species is from the collection sent to the Academy of Natural Sciences by Dr Burrough. It differs distinctly from any species known to me. ‘The horn coloured broad border, and the absence of nacreous matter on this part is very remarkable, as is also the close approximation to a perfect ellipsis, the posterior and an- terior margins being nearly of the same curve. The clouded bluish purple colour I have never seen in the nacre of any other species. ‘The sinus is so peculiar in the two specimens examined, that I would impress it as important in the character of this species. In the An. exotica (Lam.),a South American species, the sinus is generally of _ the form of an equilateral triangle, the inferior angle being sharp and well defined. In the present species the sinus is still more remark- able, curving in towards the cavity of the beak and terminating with quite an acute angle. ‘The line of the opening of the two specimens is curved and not a plane, as usual with the Naiades ; and the right beak and margin anterior to it, overwrap in a small degree the left beak and valve. In the old specimen this extension of the margin passes the other more than an eighth of an inch—consequently the shell might almost be said to be inequivalve. In its general characters this species most resembles the sinwosa of Lamarck. i. seal 80 ON THE NAIADES, Anoponta Mortoniana. Plate XIII. fig. 37. Testa subelliptica, postice sub-biangulata, transversd, valde inequilaterali ; val- vulis crassis ; epidermide perfuscd ; clivo umboniali sulcato ; margarita argented et tridescentt. Shell subelliptical, sub-biangular behind, transverse, very inequilateral ; valves thick ; epidermis intensely brown ; umbonial slope furrowed ; nacre silvery and iri- descent. Hab. River Parana, South America. Dr Burrough. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Diam. 1-2, Length 1:6, Breadth 3 inches. Shell subelliptical, sub-biangulate behind; transverse, very inequi- lateral, somewhat inflated, furrowed from the beak to the posterior margin along the umbonial slope; substance of the shell thick; beaks retuse and scarcely prominent; ligament long and narrow; epidermis intensely brown and finely wrinkled ; anterior cicatrices distinct; pos- terior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices apparently none; cavity of ‘the beaks subangular and shallow; nacre silvery white and iridescent. Remarks.—A single specimen of this species, which is distinct from any described Anodonta I have seen, was sent to the Academy by Dr Burrough. It is remarkably thick, silvery and iridescent, and has an exceedingly dark epidermis. It most resembles, perhaps, the elon- gatus of Swainson. It is less transverse than that shell, rounded only anteriorly; it differs in not having “a strong flesh coloured tinge,” and is by no means so bright a brown as his beautiful figure. Named after 8. G. Morton, M.D., corresponding secretary of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 81 + MELANIA ACULEUS. Plate XIX. fig. 72. Testa acuto-elevata, levissimd, tenebroso-corned ; apice acutissimo ; anfractibus circiter duodecim, subconvexis ; labro expasso. Shell acutely elevated, very smooth, dark horn colour; apex very acute ; whorls about twelve, somewhat convex ; labrum spread out. Hab. Java? My Cabinet. Diam °6, Length 2 inches. Remarks.—I purchased this, with some other of the shells described in this memoir, from the collection brought from Java by Mr Shilla- ber. It is remarkable for its attenuated form and tapering spire. It is more than usually spread out at the base. The substance of the shell is thin and bluish white. ‘The last whorl is much enlarged. The aperture occupies about one-third of the length of the shell. LyMN#ZA IMPERIALIS. Plate XIX. fig. 73. Testa ovato-ventricosd, pellucida, tenuissimd, albido-corned, subcoronaté ; apice obtuso ; anfractibus quaternis, inflatis, ultimo maximo ; aperturd magna, ovata : labro valde extenso. Shell ovato-ventricose, diaphanous, very thin, light horn colour, subcoronate ; apex obtuse ; whorls four, inflated, the last very large; aperture large, ovate; outer lip much extended, Hab. South America? My Cabinet. Diam. -9, Length 1:4 inches. Remarks.—I accidentally met with this rare and interesting shell at a dealer’s in Paris. I saw no other specimen in any of the great collections in Europe. The person from whom I obtained it informed me it came from South America. It is more inflated than any spe- VOL. Y.—V 82 ON THE NAIADES, cies with which I am acquainted; but what eminently distinguishes it is the subcoronate apex which, as far as we yet know, is peculiar to this species. ‘The body whorl nearly envelopes the superior ones. When examined by the microscope, transverse strie are observed to cause numerous minute depressions on its surface. MELANOPSIS PRINCEPS. Plate XIX. fig. 74. Testdé acuto-elevatd, levi, rufo-fuscd, obsolete multimaculata; inferior anfractu carinato, dimidio basalt transversim striato ; apice acuto ; anfractibus plus minus guatuordecim, planis ; apertura quintd parte teste. Shell acutely elevated, smooth, transversely striate on the lower half of the body whorl, which is carinate, reddish brown, with numerous indistinct spots ; apex acute ; whorls about fourteen, flat aperture one-fifth the length of the shell. Hab. Cape of Good Hope. My Cabinet. Diam. -6, Length 2-1 inches. Remarks.—This is the most remarkable species of the genus which I have examined. It differs from any described species in its great elevation, in the flatness of its whorls, in its being covered with indis- tinct spots, and in the absence of a large callus on the superior part of the inner lip, as well also as in the great number of its whorls. The spots are peculiar in being chain-like, alternately darker and lighter. The operculum is horny, like that of the genus Melania. MELANOPSIS MACULATA. Plate XIX. fig. 75. Testa fusiformi, tenebroso-olivaced, intus fasciatd ; epidermide maculata ; an- Sractibus quaternis ; basi subtruncatd ; columella sine callo superno. Shell fusiform, dark olive, banded on the inside, and spotted in the epidermis ; whorls four ; base but slightly truncate; columella not thickened above. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 83 Hab. Peru. Lieutenant Humphreys. My Cabinet. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. °3, Length -5 inches. Remarks.—The genus Melanopsis, a few years since, presented, to our knowledge, only twospecies. ‘These were described by Lamarck. The rapid advancement of our science has recently brought to light many new ones. I have eight species in my own cabinet, and in this memoir I add two species to the ten now known. ‘These two are peculiarly and beautifully spotted in the epidermis. The two specimens brought by lieutenant Humphreys have each four transverse purple bands on the inside, and the dark olive epidermis is filled with very distinct in- tensely dark brown quadrate spots. ‘This species, and the princeps herein described, form a division in the genus Melanopsis of Lamarck which genus should be altered, leaving out the character of the callus on the upper part of the columella. Neither of these has that char- acter, but, notwithstanding, should not be removed to a new genus, as it is, independent of that, a perfectly natural one. AURICULA FUSCAGULA. Plate XIX. fig. 76. Testa fusiformi, albidd, pellucidé ; suturis impressis et albo-lineatis ; labro late refleco ; guld fuscdé et dentibus novenis munitda. Shell fusiforny, whitish, diaphanous ; sutures impressed and presenting a white line ; outer lip widely reflected ; throat dark brown and furnished with nine teeth. Hab. Brazil. My Cabinet. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. °4, Length 1-1 inches. Remarks.—This is a very remarkable and interesting species. In its general form and aperture it resembles a Clausilia. Like some species of that genus its mouth is studded with teeth. Of the nine, a 84 ON THE NAIADES, seven are on the outer lip—the last of these and the first on the colum- ella are the largest. The deep brown of the throat is visible through the shell. In some specimens there is a finely mottled appearance over the lower whorls of the shell. The white line along the suture is placed on the upper part of the whorl. The outline of the shell is remarkably fusiform. CycLosTomMa sTRIATA. Plate XIX. fig. 77. Testa depressd, planulatd, multistriatd, alba, pellucida, latissime umbilicaté ; anfractibus quaternis; apice acuminato, rufo; labro acuto; operculo corneo tenuique. Shell depressed, flattened, much striate, white, translucent, very widely umbilicate ; whorls four ; apex red and pointed ; lip sharp; operculum thin and horny. Hab. Peru. Lieutenant Humphreys. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. -9, Length -5 of an inch. Remarks,—This shell was brought by lieutenant Humphreys from South America, and presented, with many other fine specimens, to the Academy. It resembles the C. Jamaicensis (Fer.); but is much larger, and has finer strie. The rotundity of the mouth is slightly modified by the junction of the superior part with the columella. AcHATINA VANUXEMENSIS. Plate XIX. fig. 78. Testa fusiformi, tenut, pellucida, longitudinaliter et transversim striatd, luted, in anfractum infernum obsolete albo-maculatd ; suturis granulatis ; canali baseos curvo. Shell fusiform, thin, pellucid, longitudinally and transversely striate, ochre coloured, with indistinct white spots on the body whorl; sutures granulate ; channel curved at the base. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 85 Hab. Mexico. Professor Vanuxem. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Vanuxem. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. 1:2, Length 2°5 inches. Remarks.—Among the shells brought from Mexico by professor Vanuxem, was this fine chatina, which belongs to Lamarck’s second division of this genus. It very closely resembles the Buccinum striatum (Chem.), Polyphemus glans* (Say), Glandina (Say). It differs from it in having crenulated sutures, and in having fine transverse lines, as well as longitudinal striz. The indistinct opake white spots, which are more frequent on the front of the body whorl, are, I believe, pecu- liar to this species. It is larger by one-third than any individual of the striata which I have seen. In concluding these descriptions and observations, I will take ad- vantage of the opportunity to express my thanks to those gentlemen who have kindly assisted me with new shells and rendcred other friendly offices. Among these I have been particularly obliged by Philip H. Nicklin, Esq., William Cooper, Esq. and professor ‘Troost. To the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia an acknowledge- ment is due, for the liberal and unhesitating vote which it passed, to permit me to describe for our Transactions the new species in their splendid and highly useful collection. I will take this opportunity also to correct the habitat of the Unio brevidens (Vol. IV. page 75), which professor Troost thinks has not been found in the Ohio, but only in the Cumberland. The specimen which Mr Cooper kindly gave to me to be described, came, I believe, originally from professor Troost. The specimen figured was not more than half grown. ‘The older individuals usually have an arched ridge along the * Cochlicopa rosea (Fer.). It should now be called chatina striata, unless the generic name be changed, the propriety of which I doubt. VOL. V.—W 86 ON THE NAIADES, umbonial slope near to the margin, the edges of each growth being there dentate. In some specimens this is so strongly marked as to resemble athick cord. The 2rceformis, professor 'T. doubts being in Tennessee river. He found it only in the Cumberland. He was, I believe, the first person who sent this species to New York and this city. Some fine old specimens, recently received from that gentleman, exhibit a diameter of a most extraordinary nature, as well also an almost perfect flatness of the posterior slope. My oldest specimen, when placed on a plane, will rest both on the base and on that slope. ‘The specimen figured by me, was not more than two-thirds grown, and was then the best specimen I had seen, and I supposed it to be an adult. OBSERVATIONS ON LAMARCK’S NAIADES. Havine had the opportunity while in Paris recently, to inspect most of the cabinets to which Lamarck refers in his description of the Naiades, I seized the opportunity to examine the individual specimens from which he made his descriptions; and having made notes on the spot, I feel great confidence as to the facts, and trust that my judgment as to the decisions on his species will be found to be correct. In pointing out the errors of this great zoologist, we must not be astonished at their number, nor should the slightest shadow fall upon his merited and exalted reputation. We should rather think of the means within his power, the poverty of the materials with which he worked, and above all, the unfortunate ophthalmia which afflicted his declining years, and which he deplores in the advertisement of the sixth volume of his Hist. Nat. des Animaux sans Vertébres. Unio sinuata. This is a true species, but Klein is entitled to the name which he gave first to it, viz. crassissima.* It has been consi- dered by the conchologists of this country (and I certainly was of the * See Transactions of the Linnean Society of Bourdeaux, Vol. II. p. 42. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 87 same opinion) to be the Mya margaritifera of Linneus. It has all the characters of this species, with the exception of the addition of the thick lateral tooth, which our author does not describe, but could scarcely have failed to have observed. Being possessed of this tooth, it is of course a true Unio. Pfeiffer describes an old margaritifera under the name of sinuata. He says “dente cardinali valido, subcon- ico, laterali nullo.” In the north of Europe, (for the sinuata exists only in the south) he had not, perhaps, like ourselves, until recently, an opportunity of examining the true sinwata of Lamarck. Unio elongata. ‘This is the true Mya margaritifera of Linnzus and other authors. ‘The Alasmodonta arcuata of Barnes is its ana- logue in this country. It inhabits the north of Europe, lake Ladoga, Norway, &ce. Unio crassidens. 'The specimen quoted from Lamarck’s own col- lection, which is now in the possession of the Duke de Rivoli, is the cuneatus of Barnes. Var. a is the frapezoides (nobis), a shell very different in its general characters, being always folded. Crassidens therefore has precedence of cuneatus. Unio Peruviana. 'This is the plicatus of Le Sueur, now so well known in all our collections. Valenciennes says, Dombey’s shell re- mains in the museum, and that Lamarck described a North American shell in error. The figure referred to by Lamarck, in the Ency. Methodique, is certainly the well known plicatus of our western waters. Unio purpurata. Lamarck supposed the specimens he examined to have come from Africa. I examined the specimen cited, in the Duke de Rivoli’s collection, as well, also, one in that of Baron de Ferussac. ‘These specimens have been polished, and have, most pro- bably, been in the cabinet of Paris for twenty or thirty years; for, few Uniones were admitted into the cabinet, at that time, without the loss of their superficial protection. It is the afer (nobis), and, most pro- bably, was taken from the neighbourhood of New Orleans, while in possession of the French. The specimen described and figured in one of my former memoirs, came from Port Gibson, below Natchez; and I subsequently received some from the vicinity of New Orleans and from Claiborne, Alabama. IJ therefore, willingly yield the name to Lamarck.* * In the “ American Conchology,”’ No. V., Mr Say re-describes and re-figures the Unio 88 ON THE NAIADES, Unio ligdmentina. 'The specimen in the Garden of Plants is the U. crassus of Say. Unio obliqua, in the same collection is the U. undafus of Barnes. Unio retusa. This is the U. torsus(Rafinesque). The locality given is Nova Scotia; the correctness of which I doubt much. It is, as yet, known to exist only in our western waters. Unio rarisuleata. 'The specimen in the Garden of Plants is the complanatus (Soland.), purpureus of Say. Unio coarctata. 'The specimen in the collection of the Duke de Rivoli is the complanatus (Soland.). ‘The observation of Lamarck, that “it is the analogue of our U. margaritifera,’ (he ought to have said elongata, for he does not use the name of margarilifera) must be an error. The American shell, described by Barnes as 4lasmodonta ar- cuata, is the unquestionable analogue of the true Mya margaritifera (Linn.), and a very different shell, not having a lateral tooth, and belonging to Schumacker’s genus Margaritana (Say’s /lasmodonta). Unio purpurascens. ‘This is also a complanatus, in the museum of the Garden of Plants. Unio radiata. The specimen at the Garden of Plants is the true radiatus. 'The Unio ochraceus (Say), given as a synonyme, is a very distinct species. Unio brevialis. 'The specimen at the Garden of Plants resembles so closely the U. littoralis, that Iam induced to believe it never came from the Isle of France, and that it is of European origin. That in Baron de Ferussac’s cabinet is certainly an old Jiftoralis. The shell figured by Crouch, under the name brevialis, is entirely distinct. Unio rhombula. The specimen now in the cabinet of the Dukede Rivoli* is a young and bad specimen of the complanatus, and certainly from the United States, and not Senegal. Var. 6, in: the cabinet of Valenciennes, I did not see. ater, under the name of U. lugubris, alleging that the name ater is ‘* preoccupied by Nilsson for a very distinct species.”” Mr S. does not seem to be aware, that Nilsson’s ater is only a variety of U. Batava, of Maton and Racket; and, therefore, could not affect my claim. We must both yield to the prior claim of Lamarck. * T ought to say that the Duke keeps the cabinet of Lamarck intact, as much as possible, and, therefore, the shells quoted may be relied on as being the same as described by Lamarck. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 89 Unio carinifera is also the complanatus, which inhabits so large a space of our country east and west of the Alleghany mountains. Unio Georgina is also from the mine complanatus. Unio clava. This is the scalenia of Rafinesque: modioliformis of Say. -Unio recta is Barnes’s prelongus. Lamarck has precedence. Unio naviformis. ‘This is the cylindricus of Say, who has prece- dence. Unio glabrata. 'This is the complanatus. 'The specimen in the Duke de Rivoli’s cabinet is most likely from our eastern waters. Unio nasuta. The specimen from which this description was made, is nowin the museum of the Garden of Plants. It is a young gibbosus of Barnes. It is not the same with Say’s nasutus, as Lamarck sus- pected it to be. As Lamarck described the shell before Barnes, he has a claim for the species; but having used a name pre-occupied by another shell, he loses it. I therefore would continue Mr Barnes’s name gibbosus. Unio ovata is the ovatus of Say. Var. b, I was not enabled to see —from the description I presume it to be a variety of occidens (nobis). Unio rotundata. 'The specimen shown to me by Baron de Ferussac, whose cabinet is cited for one of the two specimens seen by Lamarck, is a small suborbiculata (Lam.), a large specimen of which the baron had the goodness to give me, and I have reason to believe it to be the individual cited by Lamarck. It is the subglobosus (nobis), and the glebulus of Say. Unio littoralis. 'This interesting species inhabits most parts of Eu- rope. It has been brought also from the Tigris by some of the French scientific expeditions, and I owe to the kindness of the administration of the Garden of Plants a fine specimen from Bagdad. ‘The specimens from this locality are less transverse, and Lamarck considered the dif- ference sufficient to found a species, semirugata, by which name they are labelled in that institution. After examining carefully suites from Europe and Asia with Baron de Ferussac, he accorded with me in opinion, that there was not sufficient difference to warrant their sepa- ration. VOL. V.—xX 90 ON THE NAIADES, After examining numerous specimens in Europe of the Mifforalis, I have strong doubts if the shell described by me in a former memoir, under the name of incurvus, be not a peculiar variety of it. It cer- tainly has a marked similarity to a fine transverse specimen of liltoralts. The specimen from which my description was made, was sent to me as a “non descript from Gibraltar,” by Mrs Mawe. I had not at that time seen very fine specimens of the Jitforalis, and it did not strike me that there was a similarity to such as. I had. While in London, that excellent conchologist, Mr G. B. Sowerby, showed me a specimen precisely similar to mine, and which I think he informed me was from the collection of the veteran Humphreys. In one valve was marked in ink “Brazil;’ in the other the name of the person who is supposed to have brought it from that country. ’ Unio semirugata. 'The specimen which I examined in the Duke de Rivoli’s cabinet, is the one mentioned as being in Lamarck’s own cabinet. It is a young /iétoralis, with rather more undulations than usual. | | Unio nana. I saw this species only in the collection of Baron de Ferussac. All the specimens were old and depauperated, and their similarity to lifforalis so great, as to induce me to believe that when better individuals are procured, they will easily be referred to that species. Unio delodonta. The specimen cited, and which I examined in the cabinet of the Duke de Rivoli, I suspect to be the /acteolus (nobis). It has the beaks eroded, and therefore does not present the peculiar character of radiating folds at the point of the beaks, which is conse- quently omitted in Lamarck’s description. Unio sulcidens. In the Duke de Rivoli’s collection—it is a com- pressed complanatus (Soland.), from the Connecticut River, where this species is more disposed to assume that character than in any river in the United States with which I am acquainted. Unio rostrata. 'This is one of the numerous species made from the pictorum of authors. It is merely an elongated variety of that species in all the cabinets where I have seen it in Europe, Unio Batava. This is a distinct species from pictorum. Baron de Ferussac thinks that Maton and Racket are entitled to the species. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 91 Lamarck cites Schroeter first. I have not an opportunity to examine Schroeter’s work. Unio nodulosa. This is a young individual of the ovata of Dono- van, and no doubt the specimen cited never was out of Europe. The ovata is emphatically an European shell, and has served, like the pic- forum, to which it has some resemblance, to make numerous pyeeics: Lamarck’s habitat (lake Champlain) i is certainly an error. Unio varicosa. The specimen described by Lamarck is still in his original cabinet. It is a young and bad specimen of the lasmodonta marginata (Say). From the description I formerly supposed it to be Alas. undulata (Say). Unio granosa. ‘The only specimen of this beautiful and distinct species I saw in Europe, is in the Garden of Plants. It is unique in the possession of disks completely covered with minute granular ele- vations. Unio Oye The specimen in the Duke de Rivoli’s collection is marked “from Peru,” and is a very different species from one which I procured in Paris, magked by Lesson as depressa from New Holland. Lamarck’s description is so extremely vague, that it almost equally well applies to both. The shell from Peru, of which I have several specimens, is more transverse. than that from New Holland, which I presume should be considered the true depressa. Unio Virginiana. ‘This isa bad specimen of radiatus, in the Duke de Rivoli’s collection. Unio luteola. From the description and locality, I formerly sup- posed this to be Say’s cariosus. On examining the specimen at the Garden of Plants, cited by Lamarck, I found it to be a true siliquoi- deus of Barnes, which sometimes approaches the cariosus. ‘There must be an error in the locality given by Lamarck, as this species does not inhabit the waters east of the Alleghany mountains. Lamarck’s name has precedence to that of Mr Barnes. Unio angusta. This isa distinct and interesting species. Its habi- tat is unknown, and the only specimen I have seen is in the collection at the Garden of Plants. Unio manca. I examined the original specimen in the cabinet of 92 ON THE NAIADES, Baron de Ferussac, which Lamarck described, and I convinced the Baron that it was only a pictorum. Unio cariosa. 'The two specimens described are both in the cabi- net of the Duke de Rivoli. The first is a bad specimen of Say’s cario- sus. 'The other (Var. 2) is a bad specimen of the Alasmodonta mar- ginata (Say).. One of the habitats, Lake Erie, is an error; it is found only in our waters east of the Alleghany mountains. Unio spuria. This species is mentioned by Lamarck as being in the museum of the Garden of Plants. I did not see it there, nor do I know it to be in any other collection. Unio australis. ‘The same remarks apply to this species. Unio anodontina. I examined the individual described under this name in the collection of the Duke de Rivoli. It proved to be a spe- cimen of U. marginalis, which species is yet known to inhabit only the fresh waters of India. Lamarck says it comes from Virginia, which is certainly an error. Unio suborbiculata. 'This is only a rofundata, as mentioned before in my observations on that species. e Hyria avicularis. This is the Mya syrmatophora of Gronovius, Gmel., Dill., &c.: avicularis should therefore be abandoned. Lamarck is not certain of the habitat of his specimen, but believes it to be from Brazil. I have seen in Paris a specimen brought by Spix from that country.* Hyria corrugata is remarkable for the folds on the umbones, and is a very distinct species —They are both in my cabinet. Anodonta cygnea. 'The well known Mytilus cygneus of Linnzus and others. Of the various forms of this there have been created per- haps a dozen different species. /nodonta anatina resembles very closely the cygnea, but is most probably a distinct species. Poiret asserts that this species is ovipa- * This traveller brought also the Castalia ambigua, whrtch, Lamarck says, seems to be flu- viatile, but which he nevertheless separates from the Naiades, to which it naturally belongs, and not to the family Zrigoniana. Both the shells are figured in Spix’s beautiful work, but described with too little attention to previous writers. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 93 rous, while the cygnea is viviparous. Should this prove true, they must of course be considered distinct. Anodonta sulcata. saw in the Duke de Rivoli’s cabinet the spe- cimen described by Lamarck. It is a variety of the 2. cygnea, and I presume is from Europe. ‘The cygnea has no analogue in the United States, with which I am acquainted. /modonta fragilis. Baron de Ferussac gave me a specimen of this species, brought by Monsieur Lapylaie from Newfoundland. When I first saw it in Paris, I recognized it instantly to be similar to speci- mens I had found in lake Skaneateles, nearly six years since, but which I had not yet published. Anodonta rubens. 'This interesting species is perhaps the most pon- derous of the genus. It inhabits the Nile as well as the Senegal. My specimen, from the latter river, is heavier and more inflated than those which I have from the Nile. Deshayes places it in the genus Zridina, asserting that the animal differs from the Anodonta, and is similar to that of the Lridina. ‘Anodonta crispata. 'This is a distinct and beautiful species, peculiar for its transverse furrows. lowe tothe kindness of Baron de Ferussac the possession of this rare shell, the habitat of which is Cayenne. Lamarck says, “ dans les riviéres des regions australes ?” Anodonta uniopsis is a distinct species, and probably from New Holland. ‘Inodonta Pennsylvanica. I examined the specimen described by Lamarck. It is in the cabinet of the Duke de Rivoli, and is the same with the undulata of Say, rugosus of Swainson. “lnodonta intermedia is a variety of anatina. The intermedia of Pfeiffer is a variety of cygnea. Anodonta trapezialis. 'The specimen described by Lamarck is in the Garden of Plants. It is the giganfeus of Spix, who figures it in his beautiful work. Its habitat is Brazil. Lamarck says, “des eaux douces étrangéres a celles de Europe?” It is less transverse, and has more volume than the following, which it closely resembles. Anodonta exotica. I examined specimens of this species in the cabinets of the Duke de Rivoli, Baron de Ferussac and the Garden of Plants. Lamarck’s habitat says, “les riviéres de Inde?” TI believe VOL. Y.—yY 94 ON THE NAIADES, it comes only from the more southern rivers of South America. My specimens, and those I saw in Europe, came from the river La Plata. It has a peculiar character, which Lamarck does not notice, in the deposit of epidermal matter at different stages of growth, with the nacre extending in waved lines, generally from one great cicatrix to the other. forming curves parallel with the palleal cicatrix. Anodonta glauca is a distinct species, inhabiting Mexico, and figured in a recent number of Humboldt’s great work. ‘Anodonta sinuosa. I saw the specimen described, in Baron de Ferussac’s cabinet. It is very distinct, and very peculiar in the sinuous dorsal line. This species is in my cabinet. Anodonta Patagonica. - This isalso a distinct and very rare species. The possession of a specimen I owe to the kindness of Mr G. B. Sowerby. Tridina exotica. 'To Baron de Ferussac I owe the possession of this species. It appears to differ from the Milotica in being tuberculated along the dorsal line, which is one of Lamarck’s generic characters. The Milotica, which I received from the African traveller Monsieur Cailliaud, has no crenulations along the dorsal line, but I have seen specimens on which a few could be observed. The Clappertoni of Denman is a young Milotica. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 95 SECOND SUPPLEMENT. Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 7th, 1834. Unio SHEeparDIANus. Plate XIII. fig. 38. Testé sublanceolata, transversissimd, valde inezquilaterali, antice rotundatd, postice obtuso-angulatd, inferne emarginatd, ad latera planulatd ; clivo umboniali elevato; valvulis subcrassis; natibus parvis, prope marginem anteriorem positis ; a 3 oO epidermide tenebroso-fuscd, obsolete radiata; dente cardinal obliquo, in valvuld dextrd unico, in sinistrad duplicit; dente laterali longissimo rectoque; margarita b) (2) a S purpurea et rridescente. Shell sublanceolate, very transverse, very inequilateral, rounded before, obtusely angular behind, emarginate at base, flattened on the sides; umbonial slope elevated ; valves somewhat thick ; beaks small and placed near the anterior margin ; epidermis dark brown with obsolete rays; cardinal teeth oblique, single in the right and double in the left valve ; lateral teeth very long and straight ; nacre purple and iridescent. Hab. Hopeton, near Darien, Georgia. Professor Shepard. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Shepard. Diam. 1, Length 1-4, Breadth 5 inches. Shell sublanceolate, very transverse, very inequilateral, rounded be- fore, obtusely angular behind, emarginate at base, flattened over the umbones and sides; umbonial slope forming an oblique ridge ; substance of the shell rather thick; beaks small and placed near to the anterior margin ; ligament thin and long; epidermis dark brown, almost black, with obsolete rays on the more perfect individuals; cardinal teeth erect, single in the right valve and double in the left; lateral teeth very long and straight; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks: cavity of the beaks very shallow ; cavity of the shell deep under the umbonial slope ; nacre beautifully purple and iridescent. ees 4 “> 96 ON THE NAIADES, Remarks.—This remarkable species, in its great transverseness and outline, has some resemblance to U. Grayanus (nobis). It is much more transverse than any species heretofore discovered from this coun- try. The purple of the interior is like that of the complanatus (Soland. ). In one specimen there is a muscular impression near the centre of the cavity of the shell, similar to that of the U. trapezoides (nobis). In another specimen there are obsolete marks of an impression. ‘The third has none that can be distinguished. I am indebted to the great kindness of professor Shepard of New Haven for this interesting and curious species, and it is with pleasure I dedicate it to him. Unio Frutyus. Plate XIII. fig. 39. Testa angusto-ellipticd, inequilaterali, transversd, posticé subangulatd ; clivo umboniali rotundato ; valvulis tenuiculis ; natibus prominulis ; epidermide luted ; dente cardinali obliquo, laierali subcurvo ; margarita salmonis colore tinctd. Shell narrow-elliptical, inequilateral, transverse, subangular behind ; umbonial slope rounded ; valves rather thin ; beaks slightly elevated ; epidermis yellow; cardinal teeth oblique ; lateral teeth somewhat curved ; nacre salmon. Hab... . . , South Carolina. Dr Blanding. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Blanding. Diam. °6, Length °9, Breadth 1-6 inches. Shell narrow-elliptical, inequilateral, transverse, slightly inflated ; umbonial slope rounded; substance of the shell rather thin; beaks slightly elevated, placed towards the anterior margin; ligament thin and rather short; epidermis yellow and yellowish brown; cardinal teeth oblique, short, disposed to be lobed, single in the right and double in the left valve ; lateral teeth slightly curved, rather long; anterior cica- trices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices placed in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks very shallow; cavity of the shell somewhat deep; nacre salmon. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 97 Remarks.—This species has, perhaps, most resemblance in its exte- rior to the marginalis (Lamarck), which comes from the great rivers of India. In the interior, however, it differs much. Our shell is of a very dark salmon colour. It is also a thicker shell, and the teeth are much thicker. In the colour of the epidermis it somewhat resembles the lanceolatus (nobis). Unto mopiotirormis. Plate XIII. fig. 40. Testé ovatd, transversd, inxquilaterali, inflata, antice angustd, postice lata ; valvulis tenuissimis ; natibus minutis et fere terminalibus ; dentibus cardinalibus parvis, compressis, lateralibus longis curvisque; margaritd subpurpured, valde iridescenti. Shell ovate, transverse, very inequilateral, inflated, narrow before and broad behind ; valves very thin; beaks small, nearly terminal ; cardinal teeth small, compressed ; lateral teeth long and curved ; nacre slightly purple, very iridescent. Hab. Santee Canal, South Carolina. Professor Ravenel. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Ravenel. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. 1:1, Length 1:5, Breadth 2:7 inches. Shell reversely ovate, transverse, very inequilateral, inflated, narrow before and broad behind, emarginate at basal margin; substance of the shell very thin, diaphanous; beaks small, nearly terminal, slightly un- dulated ; ligament rather long and thin; epidermis brown, shining ; rays indistinct; cardinal teeth small, compressed, disposed to be double in the left and single in the right valve; lateral teeth long, curved and ele- vated in their direction ; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices small, situated in the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the shell deep; cavity of the beaks shallow; nacre slightly purple, very iridescent. Remarks.—The spreading out of the posterior portion of the shell, and the narrowness of the anterior portion, is very striking in this spe- VOL. V.—Z 98 ON THE NAIADES, cies. I know of no other species which has its lateral teeth so much elevated, following, as they do, the widened margin of the valve. ‘The cardinal teeth are generally double in the left valve, but not always. They will always be found to be compressed in both valves, and gene- rally more elevated in the right.- The nacre is so very thin as to be diaphanous, and the play of iridescent colours is very beautiful. As the individual advances in age the marks of growth form large wrin- kles, and it then becomes more cylindrical. Unto Kirtuanpianvs. Plate XIV. fig. 41. Testa subrotundd, compressa ; valvulis crassis ; natibus subprominentibus ; epi- dermide circa nates luted, juxta marginem fusca ; radiis interruptis ; dentibus cardinalibus subcrassis, lateralibus subcurvis brevibusque ; margarita albé et iri- descente. Shell rather round, compressed ; valves thick ; beaks somewhat elevated ; epidermis yellowish about the beaks, brown towards the margin ; rays interrupted ; cardinal teeth rather thick ; lateral teeth short and slightly curved ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. Mahoning, Ohio. J. P. Kirtland, M.D. My Cabinet. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. 1, Length 2, Breadth 2-3 inches. Shell rather round, compressed ; substance of the shell thick, some- what thinner behind ; beaks rather elevated ; ligament rather short and thick; epidermis wrinkled, dark brown, smooth and yellowish in the region of the beaks; interrupted rays pass from the beaks and are very visible over the umbones, but are lost in the wrinkles before they reach the margin; cardinal teeth rather thick; lateral teeth short, thick and slightly curved; posterior and anterior cicatrices both distinct; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under side of the cardinal teeth; cavity of the shell flat and shallow; cavity of the beaks rather deep and angu- lated ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—I owe this new species to the kindness of Dr Kirtland of AND OTHER FAMILIES. 99 Poland, Ohio. It is very nearly allied to the sbrotundus (nobis), and when I first received a few specimens, I doubted if it was more than a variety of that species. Subsequently receiving from the same natu- ralist more and better specimens, I was satisfied that it was specifically different. Specimens of the true swbrotundus having accompanied these, it could not be, of course, a variety occasioned, as is sometimes the case, by mere locality. It differs from the subrotundus in being much flatter, in having smaller beaks, and in being of a darker brown— the beaks are less yellow—the rays, interrupted like that shell, tend generally nearer to the margin. In older specimens than the one figured, the posterior part becomes protruded, which gives an oblique- ness to the shell. Unto Paranensis. Plate XIV. fig. 42. Testé subrotundatd, inequiluterali, compressé; valvulis subcrassis ; natibus plicatis retusis ; dentibus cardinalibus recurvis, in valvulé utrdque duplicibus ; lateralibus sublongis curvisque ; margaritd albé et iridescente. Shell subrotund, inequilateral, compressed ; valves somewhat thick; beaks folded, retuse ; cardinal teeth recurved, double in both valves; lateral teeth rather long and curved ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. River Parana. Dr Burrough. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Diam. 1:3, Length 3, Breadth 3-5 inches. Shell subrotund, disposed to be pentagonal, inequilateral, compressed towards the margin, emarginate on the posterior dorsal margin; um- bonial slope flattened ; substance of the shell somewhat thick; beaks rather elevated, longitudinally folded, retuse ; ligament rather long and thin; epidermis wrinkled, shining, greenish on the beaks and brown towards the margin, furnished with very obscure curved rays, which sweep from the beak towards the anterior part; cardinal teeth recurved, compressed, double in both valves; lateral teeth lamellar, rather long and curved ; anterior cicatrices confluent; posterior cicatrices confluent ; <— ee ee 100 ON THE NAIADES, dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; palleal im- pression small and distant from the margin; cavity of the shell very shallow; cavity of the beaks small, subangular; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks.—I am indebted to the kindness of Dr Burrough for the advantage of examining and describing this interesting species. It was procured by him, during kis late voyage round the world, at Buenos Ayres, having been brought from the river Parana. It is remarkable for its outline, its expanded basal margin and folded beaks. Unto Nasuvititanus. Plate XIV. fig. 43. Testa ellipticd, transversd, inzquilaterali ; valvulis subcrassis; natibus promi- nulis et minute undulatis ; dentibus cardinalibus laminatis et in valvuld utraque duplicibus, lateralibus subrectis ; margarité alba. Shell elliptical, transverse, inequilateral ; valves somewhat thick ; beaks slightly ele- vated and minutely undulated ; cardinal teeth lamelliform and double in both valves ; lateral teeth nearly straight ; nacre pearly white. Hab. Cumberland River. Professor Troost. Ohio, at Louisville. Dr Fitch. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Troost. Diam. °9, Length 1:4, Breadth 2-5 inches. Shell elliptical, sometimes truncate behind, transverse, inequilateral ; substance of the shell somewhat thick; beaks slightly elevated and minutely undulated at the tip; ligament rather short and straight; epidermis dark brown, obscurely rayed; cardinal teeth lamelliform, disposed to be crenulate, double in both valves; lateral teeth nearly straight, the inferior section in the left valve being enlarged towards the posterior end ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks angular, rather shallow; nacre beautifully pearly white, disposed in many individuals to be pinkish on the posterior part of the shell. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 101 Remarks.—This species has most resemblance in its general charac- ters to the parvus (Barnes). It is, however, a larger shell, and in the undulations of the beaks it is very different. Like the parvus, the sili- quoideus, the cariosus and crassus, it is sometimes very much truncated behind. In this state it might be mistaken for a different species, did not, as in the abovementioned species, the other characters strictly iden- tify it. Unio Buanpineranus. Plate XV. fig. 44. Testé subtrapezoided, transversd, inxquilaterali, subinflatd; valvulis tenuibus ; natibus prominulis; dentibus cardinalibus compressis; lateralibus longis cur- visque; margarild purpured. Shell subtrapezoidal, transverse, inequilateral, somewhat inflated ; valves thin; beaks somewhat prominent; cardinal teeth compressed ; lateral teeth long and curved ; nacre purple. Hab. St John’s river, ? Florida. Dr Blanding. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Blanding. Diam. :9, Length 1:5, Breadth 2-3 inches. Shell subtrapezoidal, transverse, very inequilateral, somewhat in- flated; substance of the shell thin; beaks somewhat prominent, placed near to the anterior margin; ligament rather long and narrow; epidermis fuscous, wrinkled ; cardinal teeth compressed, double in the left valve and single in the right; lateral teeth long, curved and some- what lamellar; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices conflu- ent; dorsal cicatrices placed in the centre of the cavity of the beaks; eavity of the shell rather deep; cavity of the beaks wide and shallow; nacre dull purple. Remarks.—I owe to the kindness of Dr Blanding the specimens of this species which are in my cabinet. They were procured by this naturalist while in St Augustine, from an Indian whom he had directed to collect for him, and it is presumed they came from St John’s river VOL. V.—2 A 102 ON THE NAIADES, or some of its tributaries. This species has somewhat the characters of the obesus (nobis), and the complanatus (Solander). It is not so much inflated as the former, and is more so than the latter. My oldest specimen is subemarginate on the basal margin. In all those procured by Dr Blanding, the beaks were much eroded. Unio cametus. Pilate XV. fig. 45. Testé subtriangulari, inezquilaterali, complanatd per umbones a natibus usque ad marginem inferiorem ; valvulis crassis ; radiis spursis capillaribusque ; dente cardinali parvo, laterali magno, crasso, curvato ; margarita alba. Shell subtriangular, inequilateral, flattened over the umbones from the beaks to the basal margin; valves thick; rays scattered and capillary; cardinal teeth small; lateral teeth large, thick and curved; nacre white. Hab. Ohio river. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Diam. 1:4, Length 2°3, Breadth 3-4 inches. Shell subtriangular, inequilateral, angular behind, flattened over the umbones from the beaks to the basal margin; substance of the shell thick; ligament thick; epidermis yellow brown, with capillary rays; cardinal teeth small; lateral teeth very large, thick and curved; ante- rior and posterior cicatrices both distinct; dorsal-cicatrices situated on the inferior part of the cardinal teeth; cavity of the shell shallow, welted ; cavity of the beaks very shallow. Remarks.—This species seems to possess partly the characters of the gibbosus (Barnes), and partly those of the planuldatus (nobis). It may be distinguished from them by its high dorsal margin, its very remarkably thick lateral tooth and its capillary rays. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 103 Unio Grirriraranus. Plate XV. fig. 46. Testé ellipticd, exzpansd, transversd, inequilaterali, lateribus subplanulatis ; clivo umboniali rotundato ; valvulis subcrassis ; natibus parvis ; epidermide luteold viridi-radiaté ; dente cardinali parvo et lobis instructo ; laterali longo, curvo et ad terminum posteriorem aucto; margarita purpured, alba, vel salmonis colore tincta. Shell elliptical, spread out, transverse, inequilateral, somewhat flattened on the sides ; umbonial slope rounded ; valves somewhat thick ; beaks small; epidermis yellowish, with green rays ; cardinal teeth small, lobed ; lateral teeth long, curved and enlarged at posterior end ; nacre purple, salmon or white. Hab. South Carolina. Professor Ravenel. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Ravenel, Charleston, South Carolina. Diam. -6, - Length 1-2, Breadth 2-2 inches. Shell elliptical, spread out, transverse, inequilateral ; somewhat flat- tened on the sides, rounded on the umbonial slope; substance of the shell somewhat thick; beaks small, scarcely elevated; ligament some- what long and narrow; epidermis yellowish, with green diverging rays ; cardinal teeth small, lobed, disposed to be double in both valves; lateral teeth long, curved and enlarged at the posterior end ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated across the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the beaks rather shallow; cavity of the shell shallow; nacre purple, salmon or white. Remarks.— Although this shell is very like the complanatus (Soland. ), I have thought it sufficiently distinct to separate it. It is more rounded before, and more spread out, forming a more perfect ellipsis. In the nacre it is very much the same. I name it after my friend R. E. Griffith, M.D. Unio conrertTus. Plate XVI. fig. 47. Testa trapezoided, transversd, inequilaterali, inflata ; valvulis subcrassis ; nati- bus prominulis et transversim rugatis ; dentibus cardinalibus compressis, et in 104 ON THE NAIADES, valuulé utraque duplicibus ; lateralibus longis curvisque; margaritd purpured, aut salmonis colore tinctd. Shell trapezoidal, transverse, inequilateral, inflated ; valves rather thick; beaks slightly elevated and transversely wrinkled ; cardinal teeth compressed and double in both valves ; lateral teeth long and curved ; nacre purple or salmon. Hab. Santee Canal, South Carolina. Professor Ravenel. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Ravenel. Diam. 1:1, Length 1-3, Breadth 2:4 inches. Shell trapezoidal, transverse, inequilateral, inflated ; substance of the shell rather thick ; beaks slightly elevated, incurved, transversely wrin- kled ; umbones very much swollen; ligament rather short and thin; epidermis dark brown, shining; cardinal teeth very much compressed ; lateral teeth long and slightly curved ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; pos- terior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices on the superior part of the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the shell very deep; cavity of the beaks full and rounded ; nacre purple or salmon. Remarks.—The confertus, in its general characters, resembles the complanatus (Solander). It is, however, much more inflated, and dif- fers in having teeth more compressed. The specimens in my cabinet I owe to the kindness of professor Ravenel. ‘These are all without rays. In young specimens they may exist. SympHyNoTA BenepicTensis. Plate XVI. fig. 48. Testé trapezio simili, inequilatera, transversd, subcompressd, margine dorsali subrecta ; valvulis pertenuibus; natibus subprominentibus, apicibus granulatis ; cicatricibus viz cernendis ; margarita ceruleo-albd et iridescente. Shell trapezoidal, inequilateral, transverse, rather compressed, nearly straight on the dorsal margin; valves very thin; beaks somewhat prominent, and granulate at tip ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible ; nacre bluish white and iridescent. Hab. Lake Champlain. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 105 My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Benedict, Burlington, Vermont. Diam. 1°4, Length 2-2, Breadth 3:6 inches. _ Shell trapezoidal, inequilateral, transverse, rather compressed, nearly straight on the dorsal margin; substance of the shell very thin; epi- dermis shining, yellowish olive, with rather strong lines of growth; beaks somewhat prominent and granulate at tip; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; cavity of the beaks shallow; cavity of the disk rather shal- low ; nacre bluish white and iridescent. Remarks.—On my way to Quebec, in the summer of 1829, I spent a few minutes on the shore of lake Champlain, nearly opposite to fort Ticonderoga, waiting for the steamboat. ‘These minutes were im- proved in the search of the shells near the edge of the water. Among others hastily seized, was a single individual of the present species, which, though an alive specimen, was much decorticated. Unwilling to describe it asa new species, without better individuals for examina- tion, I have endeavoured in vain to procure them until the present time. I owe to the kindness of professor Benedict a suite of different ages which verify my previous impression, and to him I dedicate the species. In outline (except the wings) it resembles the Symphynota bi-alata (nobis). It is not, however, so large or so thick a shell, and has neither tooth nor undulations. AnoponTa Burrovenrana. Plate XVI. fig. 49. Testé ovatd, valde inzquilaterali, subinflata ; valvulis tenuibus ; natibus pro- minulis ; lined dorsali curva ; margarité purpured. Shell ovate, very inequilateral, slightly inflated ; valves thin; beaks slightly elevated; dorsal line curved ; nacre purple. Hab. Island of Luconia, near Manilla. Dr Burrough. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. VOL. V.— 2 B 106 ON THE NAIADES, Diam. °8, Length 1-3, Breadth 2-1 inches. Shell reversely ovate, very inequilateral, slightly inflated, rather straight on the basal margin and elevated on the posterior dorsal mar- gin; substance of the shell thin; beaks slightly elevated ; ligament long and narrow; epidermis dark brown and rather smooth; anterior and posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices situated in the cavity of the beaks; cavity of the shell wide and rather deep; cavity of the beaks very shallow; nacre purple. Remarks.—To the kindness of Dr Burrough I am indebted for the privilege of describing this species. Jt is with pleasure I take the op- portunity of placing his name upon it. It was procured by him near the city of Manilla. It resembles, in outline and colour, the Unio euprinus (nobis), but has no trace of teeth. It is most remarkable perhaps for its deep colour. MaArGariTANA* Raveneviana. Plate XVII. fig. 50. Testé subcylindraced, valde transversé et inequilaterali, inflata ; valvulis tenui- bus; natibus exiguis; dentibus cardinalibus parvis, subcompressis; margarita ceruleo-albd. Shell subcylindrical, very transverse, inequilateral, inflated; valves thin; beaks small ; cardinal teeth small, rather compressed ; nacre bluish white. Hab. French Broad and Swananoe rivers, North Carolina. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Ravenel. Diam. ‘9, Length 1:1, Breadth 2-2 inches. Shell subcylindrical, very transverse, inequilateral, inflated, disposed to be compressed near the basal margin, where it is often emarginate ; substance of the shell thin; beaks small; ligament rather short; epi- dermis brown, with rays on the posterior part; umbonial slope large, rounded ; cardinal teeth consisting in each valve of a small compressed * See note at page 429, Vol. III. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 107 lobe ; anterior cicatrices confluent; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices placed under the cardinal teeth; cavity of the shell deep; cavity of the beaks shallow; nacre bluish white. Remarks.—This species most resembles the Zlasmodonta marginata (Say), but may be distinguished by its more cylindrical form, and its want of undulations on the posterior slope. Tt differs also in the round- ness of the umbonial slope, and in the rays. In the marginata the rays are more interrupted and scattered, being sometimes quite spotted. CyrENA ROoTUNDATA. Plate XVII. fig. 51. Testa rotundatd, sublenticulari, subequilaterali, transversim rugatd ; clivo pos- teriori rugoso ; valvulis crassis; natibus parvis, acutis, contiguis ; dentibus car- dinalibus subbifidis, lateralibus longis, minute serratis, rectisque ; margarita alba et purpurea. Shell round, sublenticular, nearly equilateral, transversely wrinkled, rugose on the posterior slope ; valves thick; beaks small, pointed, touching ; cardinal teeth disposed to be bifid ; lateral teeth long, straight and minutely serrulate ; nacre white and pinkish. My Cabinet. Diam. 1-5, Length 2:9, Breadth 3-3 inches. Shell round, sublenticular, nearly equilateral, transversely and rather minutely wrinkled, rugose on the posterior slope; substance of the shell thick; beaks small, pointed, touching; ligament very short and thick; epidermis yellowish brown before and dark brown behind; anterior slope furnished with a lanceolate mark formed by two curved yellow lines, which pass from the beaks to the anterior margin; pos- terior slope rugose, furnished with obsolete oblique folds; cardinal teeth disposed to be bifid; lateral teeth long, straight and very minutely ser- rulate; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; cavity of the shell rather shallow: cavity of the beaks subangular; nacre white and pinkish. Remarks.—This beautiful and fine large species was sent to me =... 108 ON THE NAIADES, some years since by a dealer in Paris. It perhaps most resembles the Zeylanica (Lamarck). It differs, however, in being more compressed, more rotund, in having longer lateral teeth, and in these being serru- late. ‘The nacre is rather thinner, and is coloured. On comparison it will be observed that the anterior tooth of the Zeylanica is merely a tubercle, while that of rofundata is long and lamellar. The nacre is disposed to be pinkish on the posterior part. Cyrena Jayensis. Plate XVII. fig. 52. Testa subrotunda, subxquilaterali, antice rugosa ; valvulis crassis; natibus par- vis, elevatis; dentibus cardinalibus bifidis, lateralibus longis, minute serratis, rectisque; margaritd purpured. Shell subrotund, nearly equilateral, transversely wrinkled on the anterior part ; valves rather thick ; beaks small, elevated ; cardinal teeth bifid; lateral teeth long, nearly straight, and minutely serrulate ; nacre purple. Hab. Batavia? J.C. Jay, M.D. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Jay. Diam. 1°1, Length 2-2, Breadth 2°3 inches. Shell subrotund, nearly equilateral, furnished with transverse rather large wrinkles on the anterior part ; substance of the shell rather thick ; beaks small, elevated, retuse ; ligament very short and thick; epidermis dark brown, shining; cardinal teeth bifid, long, nearly straight and minutely serrulate ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; cavity of the shell shallow ; cavity of the beaks subangular; nacre dark purple, sometimes whitish. Remarks.—lIt is to the kindness of Dr Jay I am indebted for the specimen figured. That of his cabinet is rather more oblique than this. The Jayensis has some resemblance to the rofundata, described herein, but differs in having rather large wrinkles on the anterior part, in having more elevated beaks, and in the dark purple colour of the nacre. AND OTHER FAMILIES. : 109 Cyrena TurciwA. Plate XVIII. fig. 53. Testa trigond, inflata, parte antica turgidd, rugosa, inequilaterd, transversim rugaté ; valvulis crassis ; natibus elevatis, recurvis ; dentibus cardinalibus sub-bi- jidis, dente anteriore laterali brevi et elevato, posteriore longo et laminato ; mar- garité alba. Shell triangular, inflated, swollen on the anterior part, rugose, inequilateral, trans- versely wrinkled ; valves thick ; beaks elevated, recurved ; cardinal teeth disposed to be bifid ; anterior lateral tooth short and elevated ; posterior lateral tooth long and lam- ellar; nacre white. Hab....., India. Rev. William Carey. My Cabinet. Diam. 1-2, Length 1:7, Breadth 2-1 inches. Shell triangular, inflated, swollen on the anterior part, rugose, in- equilateral, transversely wrinkled ; substance of the shell thick; beaks elevated, recurved; ligament rather long and narrow; epidermis yel- lowish brown, darker towards the margin; cardinal teeth disposed to be bifid; anterior lateral tooth short and elevated, somewhat conical; posterior lateral tooth long and lamellar ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible ; cavity of the shell deep and rounded; cavity of the beaks angular; nacre white. Remarks.—To the kindness of Dr Carey of Calcutta I owe several specimens of this species. In the teeth it resembles the C. Zeylanica (Lamarck), and the C. papua (Lesson). It differs from both in being more triangular, more inflated, as well as in being a smaller species. In the enlargement of the anterior part, which seems to be turgid or swollen, it differs from any Cyrena with which I am acquainted. Being without serrulate teeth, it belongs to Lamarck’s second divi- sion—“ dents latérales entiéres. VOL. y.—2 C 110 ON THE NAIADES, Cyrena Woopiana. Plate XVIII. fig. 55. Testa subtrigond, subinflatd, micante, subequilaterah, transversim rugaté ; val- vulis crassis; natibus magnis et rotundatis ; dentibus cardinalibus sub-bifidis, lateralibus longis, serratis, rectisque; margarita alba. Shell subtriangular, somewhat inflated, shining, nearly equilateral, transversely wrin- kled ; valves thick ; beaks large and rounded ; cardinal teeth disposed to be bifid ; late- ral teeth long, straight, serrulate ; nacre white. Hab. Canton. W. W. Wood. My Cabinet. Diam. 1:4, Length 2:4, Breadth 2-9 inches. Shell subtriangular, obtusely angular behind, somewhat inflated, shining, nearly equilateral, transversely and rather largely wrinkled; substance of the shell thick; beaks large, rounded, not very approxi- mate; ligament rather short and thick; epidermis blackish brown, polished, except on posterior slope; wrinkles larger near to the margin ; cardinal teeth disposed to be bifid ; lateral teeth long, straight, serrulate ; cicatrices scarcely perceptible; cavity of the shell deep; cavity of the beaks angular; nacre white. Remarks.—In the intenseness of colour of the epidermis, and its high polish, this species differs from any I am acquainted with. It is more inflated and less rotund than the rofundata herein described. Its lateral teeth are longer and not so minutely serrulate. In its triangular form it resembles the C. papua (Lesson). 'The nacre has not the clear white usual in this genus. In this specimen, below the palleal impression, it is yellowish white. Mr Wood, to whose great kindness I owe this fine and interesting species, informed me he procured it from a boat on the river below Canton, it having been fished up by accident, when the fishermen were engaged in catching other shell fish. Owing the possession of it to him, I with great pleasure dedicate it to him. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 111 GENUS APHRODITE (nobis). Testa xquivalvt, subtrigona, inequilaterali ; dente cardinal subnullo ; dentibus lateralibus binis, sublongis ; ligamento externo. Shell equivalve, subtriangular, inequilateral ; hinge with a very imperfect or no car- dinal tooth ; lateral teeth two, rather long ; ligament external. Remarks.—The genus Aphrodite is proposed for a single species which I am unable to place with any established genus. I suspect it to be an estuary shell, and should it prove so, its proper place will be after the genus Cyrena. ‘The lateral teeth are placed somewhat like those in that genus, but the epidermis and substance of the shell differ entirely, being more like the genus Mactra. A. couumBa. Plate XVIII. fig. 54. Testé subcompressd, longitudinaliter et obsolete striatd, transversim et minute rugatd, colore columbe tinctd, super umbones subrufis maculis ungulatis munita ; valvulis tenuibus ; natibus elevatis, acutis ; dentibus cardinalibus obsoletis, laterali- bus binis ; margarité luteo-albd. Shell rather compressed, longitudinally and obsoletely striate, transversely and mi- nutely wrinkled, dove ccloured, en the umbones furnished with reddish angular marks ; valves thin ; beaks elevated, pointed ; cardinal teeth obsolete ; lateral teeth two ; nacre yellowish white. My Cabinet. Diam. 1°4, Length 2:9, Breadth 3-4 inches. Shell subtriangular, nearly equilateral, rather compressed, longi- tudinally and obsoletely striate, transversely and minutely wrinkled, dove coloured. furnished on the umbones with reddish angular marks; substance of the shell thin and fragile; beaks elevated, pointed, touch- ing; ligament short and thick; epidermis thin; cardinal teeth obsolete or wanting ; lateral teeth two, rather long, straight, and disposed to be 112 ON THE NAIADES, lamellar; cicatrices smooth, impressed, showing the mark of their ad- vancement; palleal impression indistinct, broad; cavity of the shell rather shallow ; cavity of the beaks angular; nacre yellowish white and shining. Remarks.—This is certainly a very interesting shell. It is difficult to find any one to compare it with. On the inside of the anterior margin there appears to be a disposition to crenulation, caused by the longitudinal strie. Its habitat I am not acquainted with, having pur- chased my specimens at a dealer’s in Europe, who could not inform me from what country they came. To spinosa. Plate XIX. fig. 79. Testé obtuse turritd, lata, corned, sub epidermide fasciatd, spinis magnis; an- Sractibus septenis ; aperturé elongata, dimidium longitudinis testz habente. Shell obtusely turrited, wide, horn colour, under the epidermis banded, furnished with large spines ; whorls seven ; mouth elongate, one half the length of the shell. Hab. Holston River, Washington County, Virginia. Professor Troost. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Troost. Diam. 1:2, Length 2-2 inches. Remarks.—This species resembles very much the Jo fusiformis (nobis), Fusus fluviatilis (Say), but may be distinguished by its large transversely compressed spines, the fusiformis having somewhat longi- tudinal tubercles. I am not acquainted with any fluviatile shell which has such large spines (there being about seven on each whorl), nor any which has such a general resemblance to a marine shell. Professor Troost informs me they are rare in the river, that they had been observed in the graves of the aborigines; and as it was generally be- AND OTHER FAMILIES. 113 lieved that these were “conch shells,” consequently coming from the sea, it was urged that the inhabitants who possessed them must have come over the sea. It does not appear that they had been observed in their native element, though living at the very doors of the persons who had remarked them in the tumuli. Patupina Burroventana. Plate XIX. fig. 80. Testé turritd, tenebroso-corned, transversim striata, strits majoribus duabus vel tribus circiter medium anfractum ; suturis profundis; anfractibus senis, valde convexis ; apertura rotundatd, albd. Shell turrited, dark horn colour, transversely striated, having two or three large striz about the middle of the whorl; sutures very deep; whorls six, very convex ; mouth round, white. Hab. Island of Luconia. Dr Burrough. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Dr Burrough. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Diam. 1-2, Length 1-8 inches. Operculum thin, light brown. Remarks.—This is perhaps the largest species of Paludina which has yet been observed. It is remarkable for the numerous fine trans- verse strize which are subgranose or undulated, and which cover, in some specimens, the whole of the whorls. About the middle of the whorls there are several larger stric, the largest being always, in the specimens examined by me, immediately above the suture. lowe to Dr Bur- rough’s great kindness the opportunity of describing this species. During his late voyage he procured it, with many other fine shells, from the vicinity of Manilla, in the island of Luconia. VOL. v.—2 D 114 ON THE NATADES, _ Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 18th, 1834. Lymnza acuta. Plate XIX. fig. 81. Testa elongato-turritd, tenui, levi, fusco-nigricante; spird attenuata; anfrac- tibus senis ; aperturdé subovatd. Shell elevated, turrited, thin, smooth, dark brown; spire attenuate; whorls six ; aperture subovate. _ Hab. pond four miles north of Philadelphia. Diam. °3, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—This delicate species, although attenuate, is not so much so as the exilis herein described. Its whorls are more convex and the body whorl larger, the aperture being about one half the length of the shell. Several specimens were found by me some years since, in a very small pond near to the Falls of Schuylkill. Since then this pond has occasionally dried up, and I have not been able to find others. Although there are other ponds near to this, which other species in- habit, I have never been able to discover the acuta in any other spot. Lymnza Exiuis. Plate XIX. fig. 82. Testa attenuata, tenuissimd, longitudinaliter striaté; anfractibus septenis, plano-convexis ; columella reflexd ; apertura ovato-oblongda. Shell attenuated, very thin, longitudinally striate ; whorls seven, plano-convex ; columella reflected ; aperture ovato-oblong. Hab. Ohio, T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Diam. 4, Length 1-5 inches. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 115 Remarks.—This is perhaps the most attenuated Lymnza yet ob- served in this country. It approaches most to the reflexus (Say), but is more elongate than that species. ‘The most remarkable character of the exils is, perhaps, the reflection of its labium, which is not laid on the body of the whorl. Where it joins above with the labrum, the angle is quite acute, and is separated from the body whorl. ‘The spe- cimen figured was not taken alive, and the epidermis being destroyed, the description and representation are partially defective. The aper- ture is about two-fifths the length of the shell. Puysa ELLIPTICA. Plate XIX. fig. 83. Testa sinistrosd, ellipticd, tenuissimd, pellucida, castaned, nitidd; spira brevius- culé ; anfractibus quaternis ; labro marginato; apertura angustatd. Shell sinister, elliptical, very thin, pellucid, chesnut coloured, shining; spire rather short ; whorls four; outer lip margined ; aperture narrow. Habs eves DsG Lea: My Cabinet. Diam. -2, Length -5 of an inch Remarks.—This species is less inflated and more of a chestnut colour than any I am acquainted with. Its colour is almost reddish, and the light coloured margin of the outer lip is remarkable. ‘The aperture is rather contracted, and the whole shell somewhat elongate. AMPULLARIA HopetTonensis. Plate XIX. fig. 84. Testa subventricosd, levi, superne subplanulatd, perforata, luteo-fuscescente, fasciata ; suturis impressis ; anfractibus quinis ; apertura subovata, alba. Shell subventricose, smooth, flattened above, umbilicate, yellowish-brown, banded ; sutures impressed ; whorls five; aperture subovate, white. # 116 ON THE NATADES, Hab. Hopeton, near Darien, Georgia. Professor Shepard. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Shepard. Diam. 1°4, Length 1-7 inches. Remarks.—I owe to the kindness of professor Shepard of New Haven this interesting shell. It was procured by him during his late geological investigations in our southern states, with other shells, de- scriptions of which will be found in these memoirs. It resembles the 4. fasciata (Lam.), but is less globose, the whorls of our species being somewhat flattened on the side and top. It differs from the .2. depressa (Say), described in major Long’s expedition to St Peter’s river (subse- quently changed to .4. padudosa in the Disseminator), in being less globose, and in being flatter on the side and superior part of the whorls. Patupina Grorerana. Plate XIX. fig. 85. Testé ventricoso-conoided, tenui, tenebroso-corned, levi; suturis valde impressis ; anfractibus instar quinis, Convexis ; apertura subrotundatd, alba. Shell ventricoso-conical, thin, dark horn coloured, smooth ; sutures very much im- pressed ; whorls about five, convex; aperture nearly round, white. Hab. Hopeton, near Darien, Georgia. Professor Shepard. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Professor Shepard. Diam. -7, Length 1:1 inches. Remarks.—This species, in form, resembles most, perhaps, the P. vivipara. It is not quite so large, nor has it bands. It is rather more elevated, and the body whorl is smaller and rounder than the P. decisa (Say). The aperture at the base recedes more than is usual with this genus. AND OTHER FAMILIES. 117 SuccineA RETUSA. Plate XIX. fig. 86. Testé ovato-oblongd, tenuissima, pellucida, flaviduld ; spird brevi; anfractibus ternis ; apertura inferne dilataid et retractd. Shell ovately oblong, very thin, pellucid, yellowish; spire short ; whorls three ; aperture below dilate and drawn back. Hab. Ohio, near Cincinnati. T. G. Lea. Diam. °3, Length -7 of an inch. Remarks.—A single specimen only of this species has come into my possession. It differs so much from any of the described species, in the dilatation and retraction of the inferior part of the aperture, that I have not hesitated to consider it new. VOL. y.—2 BE SYSTEMATIC INDEX THE SHELLS DESCRIBED IN MR LEA’S MEMOIRS: VOLUMES IIl., IV. AND V. Unio acutissimus - - Vol. IV. 89 Unio formosus - - Vol. IV. 111 anodontoides - - DV. 8 fulvus - - - Vv. 96 angustatus- - = EVs 114 geometricus - - - V... 38 arceformis - - py VIS glans - - - - IV. 82 asper - - - aie Vs 85 Grayanus~ - - - V. 66 aspelTimus) - - : Deak Griffithianus - . V. 103 ater - - - - » Hil. 426 Haysianus - - V. 35 Blandingianus - - V. 101 heterodon~ - - - III. 428 brevidens - - = AV Hildrethianus - - V. 36 Burroughianus - - Woe? incurvus - - - IV: 397 calceclus - - - Ill. 265 iris - - - - III. 439 camelus - - - V. 102 irroratus . - - Ill. 269 eapillaris - - - V. 29 Kirtlandianus - - Vv. 98 capseformis - - Vv. 31 lacteolus = - - - Vv. 40 eastaneus —- - Si aod lacrymosus - - Ill. 272 circulus - - - III. 433 lanceolatus - - III. 266 cceeruleus - - - IV. . 95 lens - - - - IV. 80 Congareus - - eben A apete/2) modioliformis - - V. 97 confertus - - - V. 103 multiplicatus - - LV. 70 Conradicus - - - V. 63 multiradiatus - - III. 434 Cooperianus - - Wa multistriatus . : IVewnou Corrianus”- - - V. 65 Murchisonianus - S Vee cuprinus - - - IV: 94 Nashvillianus . - V. 100 decisus - - - IV. 92 Nicklinianus - - V. 28 divaricatus - - - Vv. 64 obesus - - - IV: 96 donaciformis - - III. 267 occidens = - - . III. 435 dromas - - - Wo 7k) olivarius - - - IV. 108 ebenus - - - IV. 84 : oriens - - - TVonics elegans - - - IV. 83 Paranensis - - - Vows ellipsis - - - III. 268 parallelopipedon - Vv. 60 emarginatus - - V. 62 patulus - - - III. 441 fabalis = - = IV. 86 perdix : = = Vie 72 SYSTEMATIC INDEX OF MR LEA’S MEMOIRS. Unio perplexus - - pileus - - pictus - - planulatus - - pustulatus pustulosus pyramidatus - Ravenelianus - rubiginosus - Schoolcraftensis securis - - Shepardianus - soleniformis - Sowerbianus - sulcatus - - stapes = 2 subovatus - - subglobosus - subrotundus - Taitianus — - - trapezoides - trigonus - 2 Troostensis - varicosus = - - Zig-Zag - - Anodonta Blainvilliana Burroughiana Ferussaciana incerta - lato-marginata Mortoniana - plana - - Stewartiana - tenebricosa - Margaritana Raveneliana Symphynota alata - Benedictensis bi-alata bi-lineata - compressa cygnea- complanata discoidea - globosas- gracilis - inflata - levissima magnifica Vol. IV. IV. ) 148 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS nated, 3-nerved, shortly awned, sericeously ciliated towards the base; florets stipitate, the stipe sericeous; stamina three; anthers small, pale yellow; stigmas white, filiform and simply plumose.—AHab. On the sands of the ocean. along the sea coast of New Jersey, &c., and on the sand-bars of the Arkansas for more than a thousand miles. The whole aspect of this plant is at variance with Festuca, and it ought, apparently. to constitute a distinct genus. 1. Korverta fuberosa? Persoon (Aira cristata, Smith).—Obs. Root perennial, fibrous ; leaves smooth or pubescent ; stipules membranaceous ; panicle in the form of a spike, from four to six inches in length; rachis pubescent; flowers crowded; calix oblong, 2 to 3-flowered, greenish and shining.—Hab. On the plains of Arkansas and Red rivers.—Com- mon. K. nitida, Nuttall’s Genera Am. vol. 1, p. 74. 2. K. paniculata, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. Appendix: (Aira truncata, Muhlenberg ; Aira obtusata, Elliott, not of Michaux?) Bromus purgans (B. ciliatus, Lin.).—Obs. Leaves partly distichal. 1. Untowa latifolia. 2. U. gracilis. 3. U. *multiflora. Panicula subspicata rigida; spiculis longissimis lanceolato-linearibus numerosissime floris; culmo brevi, a basi ramosa; foliis subdistichis subulatis brevibus.—AHab. On the sand beaches of the Arkansas, above the garrison.—Ods. Perennial; culm terete, radi- cant and divided towards the base; leaves alternate, distichally spread- ing, rather short and subulate, pale green; sheaths short, commonly pilose at the orifice; stipules obsolete; panicle spiked, branchlets short and appressed ; calix 2-valved; spikelets often an inch long, and scarcely more than a line and a half wide, containing from sixteen to twenty- four florets; external corolla, valves ovate-acute, concave, opaque and smooth, numerously striate and scariose along the margin; anthers three, yellow; many of the glumes abortive of seed. This species possesses all the habit of U. spicata, but differs essentially by the magnitude and paucity of the spikelets. I have a specimen which I collected on the plains of the Missouri, apparently referable to this species, but the spikelets are ovate, and not more than about 1 2-flowered. 1. Mexica glabra, Mich. (M. racemosa, Muhl. Gram. Descript. p- 88). 2. M. *scabra. Foliis latis subpubescentibus asperis; panicula A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 149 ramosa, multiflora, ramis subsimplicibus ; floribus secundis nutantibus; calicibus trifloris; floribus glabriusculis exsertis.—Hab. In the humid shady woods of Cedar prairie, ten miles from Fort Smith. Flowering in May.—Obs. Perennial. Culm two to three feet high ; stipules lacerate ; panicle many flowered, secund, partly branched to the summit; calix mostly 3-flowered, besides the neutral rudiment, which is pediceilate ; valves ovate, obtuse and coloured, with the margin scariose; spikelets sublanceolate, the flowers being exserted beyond the calix; flower glumes striated, merely smooth to the naked eye; inner valve (seen through a common lens) pubescent along the margin, as in M. glabra, to which this species is proximately related; stamens three; styles two, pubes- cent. This species appears to be somewhat related to M. aspera of Barbary. ; 1. Mrscra gigantea (M. macrosperma, Pursh).—Ramis floriferis, spiculis paucifloris (S—10), purpureis, glabris, acuminatis; caule fruti- coso altissimo.—Hab. From Great Sandy river on the northern confines of Kentucky, along the alluvial borders of the Ohio to its confluence; on the banks of the Mississippi, from Kaskaskia to the Gulf of Mexico; on the borders of the Arkansas, a few miles above the Verdigris; on Red river to the L’eau Bleu; in the Atlantic states to the confines of Vir- ginia. When, after a lapse of years, arrived at the period of flowering, it often sends up ina period of two months a stem’ of thirty-five or forty feet in height, which in the following year flowers and dies. This species rarely survives after being cut down, while the smaller or dwarf cane springs up again from the remaining root. 2. M. *pumila. Panicula radicali; spiculis pubescentibus, multi- floris (12—20), valvulis longe acuminatis.—Hab. At the confluence of Kiamesha and Red rivers, in alluvial lands\—Obs. Culm three or four feet high, shrubby and slender; leaves as in the preceding, but somewhat broader; flowering panicles radical, two to three feet high, slender, and often refracted towards the summit; spikelets slenderly pedunculate, and attenuated at the base, two to three inches long and pubescent, containing from ten to twenty conspicuously acuminated or cuspidate flowers ; calix small, with very unequal valves; stamina three; stigmas three; sheaths of the leaves pubescent along the margin; the orifice surrounded by setose tufts. Iam not certain that this plant is VOL. V.—2 N Se a 150 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS the dwarf cane commonly noticed by the colonists, which indeed appears to be nothing more than a variety of the M. gigantea. Cuuoris *verticillata. Spicis plurimis verticillatis, radiatis, filiformi- bus; calicibus acuminatis bifloris; flosculis longe aristatis; gluma exte- riore subbarbata; caule compresso.— Hab. On the sandy banks of the Arkansas, near Fort Smith; rare. Flowering in June.—Obs. Peren- nial. Culm compressed, branched from the base, about twelve inches high; leaves pale green, narrowish and flat; sheaths carinately compressed ; stipules obsolete, hairy; spikes mostly verticillated in two series, the first ageregation consisting of from seven to nine spikes; spikes filiform and stellately spreading, pilose at the base, about six inches long; flowers unilateral, alternating in, two rows; calix acuminate, 2-flowered, one of the flowers perfect, the other neuter, the dorsal valves of both gibbous, obtuse and awned, the awn more than twice the length of the flower, that of the hermaphrodite bearded ; seed triangular, smooth and even; anthers three; stigmas two, brown. ‘There are few grasses in America more curious and elegant. Its aspect is that of the tropical species. OxypEents atfenuata (Eleusine sparsa, Muhl. Gram. Descript. p. 135). The Chloris mucronata of Michaux appears to belong to this genus, and is evidently distinct from the plant of Pursh and Muhlen- berg, which has digitate spikes, is more nearly related to Chloris, and forms the genus Dactyloctenium of Wildenow and Sprengel. Exeusine Indica.—Hab. The banks of the western rivers in the United States appear to be the only genuine locality of this intrusive grass, which, from the coast of the Atlantic to the garrison of the Arkansas, uniformly infests gardens, court yards, and in the towns even the pavements of the streets. Bearing to be trampled upon without injury, it thus occupies places where scarcely any other vegetable can subsist. As it is equally common to India, the West India islands and North America, it probably extends through both hemispheres. ° 1. AruEropocon apludoides (Chloris curtipendula, Michaux).— Throughout the western country in elevated prairies. 2. A. olygostachyum, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 78.—Obs. The spikes in these more perfect specimens than those which I collected in the Missouri territory, are commonly three in number, and, after the manner of the genus, alternately disposed along the rachis for a distance of about three inches, including the terminating one. This species A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 151 possesses very much the appearance of the Monocera of Elliott (Chloris monostachya, Mich.). Horpeuom pusillum, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 87. The speci- mens which I collected in Cedar prairie, a few miles from Fort Smith, are scarcely less than twelve inches high, while those of the arid plains of the Missouri were not more than five or six. 1. Exymus Canadensis. 2. E. virginicus. 1. Aspretia * Americana. Spica erecta, spiculis patentibus, supe- rioribus subunisetis—Obs. In the American plant the upper spikelets are subtended by one or two longish setaceous portions of an involu- crum, entirely wanting in the Eurepean species. 2. A. *angustifoha. Spiculis pubescentibus, involucrum nullum. Spartina polystachya (Limnetis polystachya, Persoon, and appa- rently L. cynosuroides of the same). This grass, though common on the sea coast, exists in wet prairies throughout the Missouri and Arkan- _ sas territories to their utmost limits. Rorrsorntia *campestris. Spica solitaria subcylindrica glabra; floribus subsecundis geminis sterilibus pedicellatis; valvula calyeina ovata, punctata; corolla trivalvi— Hab. In open grassy prairies, abun- dant. Flowering in June.—Obs. Perennial. Culm two to three feet high, smooth and erect, rarely terminating in more than a single spike ; leaves narrow and rather short, commonly smooth to the naked eye; ligules minute and membranaceous ; spike pedunculate, about six inches long, nearly cylindric; rachis flexuose and scrobiculate; calix of the perfect flower consisting of one external and one internal valve; corolla of three membranaceous valves. ‘The rudimental flower minute and neutral, its pedicell appressed to the scrobiculum of the rachis; an- thers three; styles two, brown and plumose. ‘This species appears to be allied to R. coalorachis of the isle of Tanna, according to the description of Forster, which is not sufficiently complete to admit of decision. It appertains to the section which, in my account of the North American genera, is termed Apogon, from their affinity to An- dropogon. As in R. rugosa there described, the corolla consists of three valves.* * By an oversight in the printing of the above mentioned book, in the fourth line of the specific description, page 84, the word “ corolla,” which ought to precede ‘ 3-valved,”’ has 152 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS Lerturvs paniculatus, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 81.—In denu- dated places in the open prairies; common, and rather larger than the Missouri plant. 1, AnrHorocon Jepturoides (Andropogon ambiguum, Michaux). Racemis e basi floriferis ; calicibus subbifloris; floribus nudis longe aris- tatis ; foliis ovato-lanceolatis—Hab. Near the Cadron, in open woods.— Obs. In the most perfect natural specimens the calix contains two flowers besides the rudiment. 2. A. *filiforme, racemis gracillimis superne floriferis; calicibus unifloris; valvula exteriore ad marginem barbata, arista brevissima; foliis sublanceolatis brevibus.— Hab. In shrubby prairies near the banks of the Arkansas. I first detected this very distinct species on the bushy margins of swamps in Sussex county, Delaware, a few miles from Lewistown, in September 1818.—Obs. Perennial; culm slender, below the panicle, as in the other species, rather crowded with some- what distichally disposed leaves, which are, however, much shorter and narrower; panicle virgate, and the branchlets very slenderly filiform (about fifteen to twenty, in the preceding species often thirty), pro- ducing flowers only towards the summit; flowers minutely pedicellate, appressed to the rachis; calix acuminate, scabrous, 1-flowered; corolla glume lanceolate, the margin of the outer glume bearded; the awn scarcely half the length of the valve; neutral rudiment setiform and included. 1. Ertantuus alopecuroides. 2. EK. contortus, Baldwyn in Elliott’s Sketches Bot. Carol. p. 40.—Hab. On shelving rocks along the banks of the Arkansas. 1. ANDROPOGON virginicum. 2. A. macrourum. 3. A. avenaceum.—This species is very generally considered the been omitted ; for which casualty I conceive myself by no means deserving of the injurious sarcasms which it has occasioned. In the detailed description of the same plant I had also ventured to consider the third valve of the corolla as a neutral rudiment of a second flower, an inference which numerous analogies in the vegetable kingdom, and particularly in the Grami- NEAE, sufficiently warrant as just and accurate. In the genus Panicum this abortion of the sexual organs is even the essential character of the genus. But to answer every ill-natured cavil which might be brought against the descriptions of natural objects, or to expect an uniformity of conception, any more than in the characters of the objects themselves, would be attempting something more than human and only adding folly to weakness. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 153 same as the A. nutans; it appears, however, to be sufficiently distinct, and occupies a more northern range. The panicle of the A.avenaceum of Michaux is erect and fewer flowered, the flowers are larger and the awn about half the length of that of A. nutans, the rufescent colour also described by Michaux is very constant and belongs to the pubes- cence, which in the other species is yellowish. A. avenaceum is the A. ciliatus of Mr Elliott. Although these two species differ in habit, yet they agree in structure precisely with the genus Andropogon. I can perceive no possible reason to refer A. nutans to the genus An- thisteria, as has been done by Persoon. 14. Leprsta virginica. 2. L. oryzoides. 1. Zizanta aquatica. 2. Z. miliacea. ‘his species is to me very rare. I first recognized it near to the Great Salt river of the Arkansas. Although there is an admixture of fertile and infertile flowers, yet the former, as in the common species, pretty generally occupy the summit of the panicle. JUNCEAE. 1. Juncus effusus. 2. J. bicornis. 3. J. *heteranthos. (Culmis foliosis); foliis planis glabris, corymbo terminali prolifero, capitulis subtrifloris; foliolis calicinis exterioribus brevioribus acutis, interioribus obtusis, capsulam obtusam aequantibus ; stamina tria.—Hab. In the woods of the Arkansas.— Obs. Culm slen- der and compressed, about three feet high; leaves very smooth, flat, longitudinally nerved and acute, scattered to the summit of the culm; panicle small, consisting of several corymbose and proliferous branch- lets; flowers mostly by threes and triandrous; stamina coming out from the base of the three shorter and acute segments of the calix; seeds numerous and minute. Closely allied to J. marginatus. 4. J. polycephalus. 5. J. acuminatus. 6. J. tenuis. 7. J. bufo- nis. 8. J. repens. Luzuxa campestris—Hab. Near the town of Arkansas. Torrepia glabra, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 235 (T. glaber- rima? Elliott, Flor. Carol. p. 424).—Hab. In the prairies near Arkan- sas. Tam by no means certain whether the plant discovered by the VOL. V.—2 0 154 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS late Mr M’Bride, and described by Mr Elliott, be the same with that which I found in the vicinity of Wilmington, North Carolina. The T. glaberrima attains the height of two or three feet, and bears a spike five or six inches in length; the petals are also oblong instead of ovate, and the styles distinct. As far as I yet know, they appear to be dis- tinct species. 1. Hexvontas erythrosperma.—Hab. Near Arkansas, in prairies. 2. H. angustifolia.—Root bulbous, leaves not remarkably long; sta- mens exserted; anthers yellow; seeds angular, subovate—Hab. Near Fort Smith. MELANTHIUM virginicum. 1. Veratrum luteum? 2. V. angustifolium.—Hab. In the woods of Arkansas and Red rivers. PALMAE. SaBaL dansoni (Rhapis acaulis, Willd. vol. 4, p. 1093). This palm first makes its appearance a few miles below the southern boun- dary of the Arkansas territory, along the banks of the Mississippi. There is a variety of it which forms a caudex twelve or eighteen inches above ground, bearing leaves of nearly double the usual dimensions, and a proportionably tall spadix. SMILACEAE. 1. Sminax rofundifolia. 2. 8. sarsaparilla. 3.8. tamnoides. 4. S. lanceolata. 5. 8. herbacea. Droscorea quaternata. Gyromia virginica (Medeola virginica, Linn.). 1. Triniium sessile. —Obs. Of this species there are a northern and southern variety, which vary in their time of flowering and magni- tude. @ praecox, petals cuneate-ovate, about the length of the calix. —Hab. From Louisiana to North Carolina. + boreale, petals lance- olate, longer than the calix, flowers later. T’. sessile, Pursh, 1, p. 244. — Hab. In Pennsylvania. 2. T. *unguiculatum. Flore sessili, erecto; petalis ovatis, ungui- culatis; calicibus reflexis; foliis peticlatis, lato-ovatis, acutis.—Hab. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 155 In the shady woods on the banks of the Arkansas.—Obs. Leaves blotched, flowers brown, and the whole aspect, specific character ex- cepted, that of 'T. sessile. 3. T. *viridescens. Flore sessili, erecto; petalis lineari-lanceolatis longissimis, calicibus patentibus; foliis sessilibus lato-ovalibus, subtus ad basin puberulis.— Hab. In shady woods at the Dardanelle settle- ment. Flowering in April.—Obs. Stem purple, pubescent near the juncture with the leaves; leaves large, broad-oval and acute, mostly blotched, closely sessile, beneath towards the base of the nerves pubes- cent; calix spreading, not reflected as in the preceding, segments ovate-lanceolate, greenish, the lower part inclining to brown, one and a half to one and three-fourths inches in length; petals lanceolate- linear, purplish-green, the claws brown, two to three inches in length ; anthers linear, adnate to the filaments, which are short; germ lanceo- late-ovate, the angles (after the manner of T. sessile and the preced- ing) grooved; styles three. ‘This is, hitherto, the largest species of the genus. Uvuxarta sessiliflora.— Hab. Near Little Rock. 1. Smracina sfellata. 2. S. racemosa. 1. Potyconatum multiflorum. 2. P. pubescens. LILIACEAE. 1. Linum superbum. 2. L. Philadelphicum. 1. Eryruronium Americanum. 2. E. albidum, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 223.—Obs. Leaves maculate; petals white, with a yellow spot at the base, externally bluish; stigma trifid, pubescent, reflected. Scmua esculenta (Phalangium esculentum, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 219).— Hab. Common throughout the prairies of Arkansas and Red river. 1. AveTris farinosa. 2. A. aurea. AGAVE virginica. SPATHACEAE. 1. Aturum Canadense. 2. A. angulosum, @ *leucorhizum. Scapo nudo teretiusculo ; foliis linearibus, subtus convexis; umbella fastigiata ; 156 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS filamentis subulatis—Hab. On the margins of brooks, in the prairies of Red river.—Obs. The plant commonly twice the ordinary size of A. angulosum; the flowers also white, as well as the root, which in the other is covered with dark coloured reticulated sphacelous coatings ; spatha in both 3-valved, and the cells of the capsule 1-seeded. 3. A. *ochroleucum. Scapo nudo subtereti; foliis linearibus angus- tis rectis, subtus subconvexis; umbella pauciflora ; corolla subeampanu- lata; filamentis subulatis—Hab. In elevated prairies throughout the Arkansas territory.—Obs. Nearly allied to A. fragrans, the flowers also equally odorous, and the whole plant destitute of the characteristic alliaceous scent and taste; bulb covered with brown unreticulated sphacelous coatings, similar to that of a Scilla; scape four or five inches high ; spathe 2-valved, obtuse; flowers from six to nine in the umbell, turbinate-campanulate, greenish white, and of a delicate fragrance; the filaments subulate and simple, not flat and linear as in A. fragrans; the leaves not half the breadth which they attain in that species, shorter than the scape, and a little convex beneath. Yucca recurvifolia ?—On the hills a few miles from Fort Smith.* Pancratium maritimum.—Near Arkansas. Crinum Americanum.—Throughout the Arkansas territory, in ri- ver marshes and wet prairies, often in great abundance, particularly near Red river. Hyroxts erecta.—Near the Cadron settlement. IRIDEAE. SisyrincuruM anceps.—In the prairies this plant often occurs in extensive masses with the flowers of unusual magnitude. 1. Irts versicolor. 2. I. hexagona. 3. I. cuprea? * In the Royal Botanic Garden at Paris, there was in 1814 a species of Yucca cultivated, called Y. Boscii, discovered by M. Bose in Upper Carolina, and very nearly allied to Y. angustifolia of the Missouri, but distinguished by its subcarinately convex leaves, which were green and not glaucous, but they were equally narrow and filamentiferous. » A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 157 *Nemastyuis.* Corolla hexapetala patens, tubo nullo; laciniis subaequalibus; stamina libera; stigmata sex, filiformia ; capsula oblonga, truncata.—Radix bulbosa; folia ensiformia plicata; caulis uni aut pau- ciflorus; flores geminati; spatha bivalvis. 1. N. coelestina (Ixia coelestina, Bartram, it. 152, t. 3; Willd. Sp. pl. 1, p. 200). Caule unifloro, stigmatibus brevibus, seminibus an- gulatis. Descript. Root a small and roundish tunicated bulb, covered with numerous dark brown sphacelous coats; radical leaves few, very long, ensiform and plaited, sheathing at the base; stem eighteen inches to two feet, partly terete, commonly producing a single leaf below the middle, -and three or four other ones diminished to the size of sheath- ing bracts; the flowers (as far as I have seen) of a pale blue,t terminal and solitary; corolla superior, partly spreading, without tube; petaloid divisions oblong-obovate, nearly equal in size; stamina three; anthers - Jinear; style one, short; stigmas three, filiform, bifid, white; capsule subclavate, oblong, obtusely 3-cornered, 3-celled, partitions medial ; seeds numerous, angular and brown, a little smaller than those of the common onion. Flowering time from May to the close of June.— Hab. In the hilly prairies of the Arkansas territory, betwixt the sources of the Pottoe of Arkansas and the Kiamesha of Redriver. First found in South Carolina by W. Bartram, whose figure appears to be very accurate. 2. N. *geminiflora. Caule ramoso, ramis subtrifloris; stigmatibus longissimis; semina subrotunda. Descript. Root a blackish tunicated bulb, covered with a great num- ber of sphacelous coatings; scape about twelve inches high, nearly terete, 2-leaved, with one of them ionger than the scape; radical leaves mostly three, equitant, ensiform and plaited, as in 'Tigridia, the central one double the length of the others (twelve to fourteen inches), the point attenuated, the colour light green, and with both surfaces nearly similar; branches of the scape mostly three, rarely two or four, subtri- * From viize a thread, and erdace a column (or the style as employed in botany). This name is chosen by way of distinction from the structure of the same organ in Moraea. t Those seen by my aged friend, William Bartram, in South Carolina, were of a bright azure blue, and of greater magnitude. VOL. V.—2 P | 158 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS quetrous, 2-flowered ; spathe 2-valved, 2-flowered, one of the peduncles and spathes above the other (within the conspicuous ovate spathes are one or two other filmy sheaths); corolla superior, partly pelviform, of six petals, and without a tube (about the size of a quarter dollar), of a bright azure blue, and white at the base, the divisions oblong- obovate, the three interior somewhat smaller; stamina three; anthers linear, yellow, rolling inwards after the opening of the flower, separate at the base, arising from the claws of the three larger divisions; stigmas six, filiform, alternating by pairs with the stamina, of a deep blue colour, and pubescent at the summits; capsule inferior, oblong, obtusely tri- quetrous, attenuated at the base, 3-celled, many-seeded; seeds subey- lindric-obovate, obsoletely triquetrous, and attached horizontally in several rows.—Hab. The prairies, from near Fort Smith on the Ar- kansas to the banks of Red river; abundant. Flowering in May and June. This genus, notwithstanding the artificial character, is more nearly related to Ixia than Moraea; it possesses nothing of that affinity to Iris, either in the inequality of the divisions of the corolla, or the petaloid nature of the stigma, with which the stamina also alternate. In natu- ral aspect, the latter species of this genus approaches to 'Tigridia, but differs essentially in the uncombined stamens, and the approaching equality and conformity of the petaloid segments. The bulbs, the leaves, the stem, the general form of the flower, and that of the capsule, are néarly the same. The nearest affinity of this genus appears to be to Marica paludosa, from which it differs in the stigma and relative magnitude of the segments of the corolla. COMMELINEAE. 1. CommELiInA communis. 2. C. erecta. 3.C. angustifolia. 1. TRADESCANTIA virginica, i B ao Calicibus glabris, glau- cescentibus. 2. T. rosea. BROMELIAE. Tintanpsia usneoides. The first appearance of this plant, com- monly called long-moss, along the banks of the Mississippi, is in the Cypress-bend, near the southern confines of the territory of Arkansas. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 159 -HYDROCHARIDEAE. VaLLisneRtA spiralis (V. Americana, Willd.). Upora Canadensis. *PONTEDEREAE. ScHouuera graminifolia. In ponds near the banks of the Arkan- sas; rare. HeETERANTHERA limosa. Pontrepertia cordata.—Rare. Obs. These three genera, inseparable in natural affinity, appear to form a distinct section, better referable to this order than any other with which I am acquainted. * ALISMOIDEAE. 1. Auisma plantago. _ 2. A. *rosirata. Foliis cordatis obtusis; scapo subsimplici, pauci- floro; capsulis ovatis, rostratis—Hab. In the ponds of the Verdigris river of Arkansas. Flowering in June and July.—Obs. The plant much smaller than A. plantago, twelve to sixteen inches high; the scape triquetrous, frequently simple, or with at most two or three branches at the base, as in the inflorescence of Sagittaria; the leaves 5 to 7-nerved; peduncles three together, more than an inch in length; bracts linear; stamina about nine; rostrum of the fruit almost its length. Nearly allied. apparently, to A. cordifolia of South Ame- rica. 1. Sacitraria sagittifolia. 2. 8. graminea.—Obs. The leaves, as in most aquatics, variable in form and magnitude, in place of linear and gramineous often long and lanceolate, with as many as five nerves ; The peduncles of the scape are all remarkably long and slender, and the capitulum of fruit smaller than usual. 3. 8. *radicans. Foliis cordato-ovatis, undulatis, obtusis; scapo an- gulato, prostrato, longissimo; floribus subverticillatis, verticillis radi- cantibus——Hab. In ponds near Fort Smith. Flowering in June and July.—Obs. The plant rather large, with the petioles, scape and calix 160 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS slightly scabrous; leaves somewhat rigid, 7-nerved, four or five inches long and three or four wide; scape triangular, often growing out to the length of two or three feet, inclining downwards and sending out radicles and leaves at the verticills; verticills 6 to 9-flowered; bracts lanceolate-acuminate ; calix striated, a little scabrous; peduncles rather long; flowers hermaphrodite; stamina about twenty; fruit subfalcate. This curious plant appears to be considerably allied to Alisma repens, of the south of Europe. NYMPHAEACEAE. Nympuaera adorata. Nupwar advena. Brasenta peltata. All of these plants, so common within the limits of the tide water, are in this inland territory extremely rare. Cyamus luteus (Nelumbium luteum, Willd.).—The Osages and other western natives employ the roots of this plant, which is of com- mon occurrence, for food, preparing them by boiling. In form, the tubers resemble those of the Batata (or sweet potato), and are traversed internally by from five to eight longitudinal cavities. They are found at the depth of twelve to eighteen inches beneath the surface of the earth, and are connected by means of running roots. The tubers arrive at maturity about the time thaf the seeds begin to ripen; before that period they abound with a milky juice, in common with the whole plant, and indeed with several other genera of aquatics, as Alisma and Sagittaria, allied to the Nymphaeaceae. When fully ripe, after a consi- derable boiling, they become as farinaceous, agreeable and wholesome a diet as the potato. This same species, which, according to the rela- tion of Pallas, appears also to be indigenous to Persia, is every where made use of by the natives, who collect both the nuts and roots, as was practised with the xvauos of Theophrastus* by the Hindoos and Chinese from the remotest antiquity. * Cyamus Indicus. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 161 SCITAMINEAE. Canna jflaccida.—On the banks of the Mississippi, a few miles below New Orleans. TuHawia dealbata.—In the ponds of the Pottoe river, and the Lesser North Branch of the Canadian; Arkansas; but not common. ORCHIDEAE. 1. Orcuts psycodes. 2. O. spectabilis. With the flowers mostly white, instead of particoloured. 3. O. *leucophoea. Labello tripartito, laciniato, maximo; laciniis lateralibus internis obovatis crenulatis ; cornu filiformi clavato, germine longiore.—Hab. In moist prairies near Kiamesha, Red river. Flow- ering in June.—Obs. Probably the largest species in the United States ; the stem being from eighteen inches to two and a half feet high; leaves oblong-lanceolate, diminishing into narrow lanceolate bracts, about the length of the germ; flowers white, a little tinged with green ; the lateral segments of the petaloid calix ovate, and less than half the length of the lip, which is divided into three dilated segments, divided nearly to the base into many capillary portions. It is more nearly allied to O. incisa than psycodes, but differs from the former in the laciniated lip, and from the latter by the multiplicity of its segments, and the obovate, instead of linear form of the two internal petaloid divisions. 4. O.*scutellata. Labellosubovali-oblongo, emarginato, basi utrinque ad medium dentato, cornu filiformi vix longitudine germinis; floribus sparsis; caule bifolio, foliis distantibus. Descript. Root ; Stem angular, about a foot high, bearing two distant, unequal, lanceolate, acute leaves, and two or three bracts below the commencement of the spike; floral bracts acute and sheathing, each about the length of the germ; flowers somewhat remote, forming a scattered spike three or four inches long; the three exterior or cali- cine segments obtuse and oblong, the two lateral, as usual, reflected ; the two interior petaloid segments broader, more obtuse and connivent, VOL. V.—2 Q 162 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS a little crenulated along the margin in common with the lip, and both of a yellowish green colour; spur curving upwards, a little thicker towards the base, and scarcely the length of the germ; the lip some- what longer than the lateral segments, partly oblong-oval, emarginate at the extremity, and at its commencement producing a denture on either side, and one protuberant or centra! elevation.—Obs. In this species the lip is much the broadest portion ef the corolla, and the widest at its base, from which, as well as the two leaves upon the stem, and its uneven margin, it is readily distinguishable from O. tridentata, but approaches O. fuscescens, and cannot be O. clavellata of Michaux, which in several characters agrees nearly with O. tridentata. The name I have employed, is in reference to the form of the lip, which is very much like that of an armorial shield.—Hab. In grassy swamps, in the prairies near Fort Smith, and also throughout Pennsylvania and New Jersey, not uncommon. Trievora pendula, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 192 (Arethusa pendula, Willd. 4, p. 82). Caxorocon pulchellum (Cymbidium pulchellum, Willd.). Trieuarra discolor, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 195 (Orchis discolor, Ph. 2, p. 586). Maxaxis (Microstylis) ophioglossoides, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 196. CoratLoruiza (Aplectrum) hiemalis (Cymbidium hiemale, Willd. ). Cyprirepium pubescens, Willd. Sp. vol. 4, p. 143. ARISTOLOCHIAE. 1. ArtstoLtocuta tomentosa. 2. A. hastata, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 200. 3. A. *reticulata. Hirsuta; caule pumilo erecto; foliis subsessili- bus, cordato-ovatis, obtusis, coriaceis, reticulatis ; pedunculis radicalibus, racemosis, foliolosis; corolla labio retuso.— Hab. In woods, and on the shelvings of rocks on the banks of Arkansas and Red rivers; common. Flowering in June.—Obds. Root fibrous and aromatic, and entirely similar, in sensible qualities, to that of A. serpentaria. Stem scarcely a foot high, divided from the base, the upper part hirsutely pilose; . leaves nearly sessile, roundish cordate or cordate-ovate, coriaceous and A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 163 partly sempervirent, the under surface conspicuously reticulated ; peduncles radical, sometimes only 1-flowered, but more commonly several disposed in a leafy raceme; bracts oval; corolla pubescent, retorted, of a dark brown colour; the border trifid, the segments broad and retuse. Asarum Canadense. COTYLEDONES. Cotyledons or germinal leaves generally two, dissimilar to the perfect foliage; in Pinus and Abies three to twelve.* CONIFERAE. i. Pinus inops. 2. P. variabilis. 2. P. rigida. Juniperus Virginiana. Cupressus disticha, @ imbricaria.—Obs. Floriferous branchlets covered with imbricated scales; staminiferous flowers collected into turbinated aments; the scales numerous, dilated and adnate at the base; staminiferous column filiform; anthers ten to fifteen, excentri- cally peltate; fructiferous aments two or three together at the base of the branches, roundish, the scales also adnate at the base, with one or two germs under each, marked with a concave point. POLYGONEAE. 1. Potyveonum aviculare. 2. P. erectum, Lin.; Persoon, vol. 1, p- 439 (P. aviculare, @ latifolium, Mich. Flor. Amer. vol. 1, p. 237; Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 254). PP. floribus pentandris trigynis axillaribus, foliis ovalibus obtusis, caule suberecto herbaceo.—QObs. A * In Pinus there exist three stages of foliation; as first, the cotyledons, which are followed during the year of germination by single naked leaves, and afterwards by the adult leaves, collected from two to five together in common sheaths. The reverse of this takes place in most of the Acacias of New Holland, whose adult leaves are simple and imperfect, while the incipient foliage, or that which immediately succeeds the cotyledons, is compound, as in most other species of the genus. 164 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS very distinct species from P. aviculare, and a much larger plant.— Common to many parts of the United States in similar situations. 3. P. tenue, Mich. Flor. Am. vol. 1, p. 238; Ph. vol. 1, p. 270. 4. P. hydropiperoides. 5. P. hirsutum. 6. P. Virginianum. 7 P. articulatum. 8. P. parvifolium (P. polygamum, Vent. ).—On the sand hills of Red river. 9. P. convolvulus. 1. Erroconum *longifolium. Caulescens; foliis oblongo-lanceolatis striatis subtus tomentosis, caulinis solitariis alternis; ramis floriferis fastigiatis corymbosis.—Hab. On the ledges of the Cadron rocks, and in denudated prairies from Arkansas to Red river.—Obs. Root partly fusiform, brownish red, astringent and bitter to the taste, in some measure resembling rhubarb ; leaves cespitose, a span long, often slightly and superficially plaited, above villous and green, beneath white and ~ tomentose; stem simple, bearing alternate and remote leaves, which diminish to a very small size towards the summit of the stem ; flower- ing branches forming a compound corymb. Involucrum cyathiform, many-flowered ; pedicells pilose ; flowers whitish, externally tomentose and shining; stamens nine; styles three; germ lanuginous. A very distinct species, allied to E. tomentosum of Michaux. 2. E. *annuum. Caulescens; foliis alternis oblongo-lanceolatis sub- tus tomentosis; ramis floriferis nudis cymosis ; floribus glabris dioicis. — Hah. On the banks ef the Great Salt river of Arkansas, and near the confluence of the Kiamesha and Red rivers. Descript. Root brownish, perpendicular, sending out few fibres, and of annual duration (all the other species of the genus hitherto dis- covered are perennial); radical leaves crowded, distantly and irregu- larly crenulate, oblong lanceolate and acute, upper surface lanuginous, the under white and tomentose (after the manner of the genus) ; veins transverse and branching (in the preceding species longitudinal and parallel); stem terete and tomentose, often simple, sometimes consider- ably branched, the upper part naked, the lower often thickly set with leaves, destitute of nodes or swellings, as well as the preceding, the stature varying from one to three feet; cyme compound; involucres and flowers cyathiform ; flowers of the clusters numerous, whitish, and, as in no other species, smooth and dioicous, extremely deciduous; seg- ments of the petaloid calix unequal, the three larger in the styliferous A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 165 flower obovate and emarginate, in the staminiferous oval and dilated, internally towards the base lanuginous; stamens nine; styles three; germ and seed smooth; radicle of the embryo incurved; this is by far the most extraordinary species of the genus, and in the flowers some- what allied to E. parviflorum. 14. Rumex verticillatus. 2. R. persicarioides. 3. R. acetosella— Hab. On the hills of Masard prairie, six miles from Fort Smith, in- dubitably native. Brunnicuta cirrhosa.—On the overflowed banks of the Arkansas ; common. CHENOPODEAE. 1. Cuenoronium hybridum.—At the confluence of Verdigris and Arkansas rivers. 2. C. ambrosioides. Arrieiex hortensis.—Introduced. Kocuta dentata.—Common on all the sand beaches of the Arkansas, and remarkable by its almost innumerable branches. CorisPpernum */mericanum (C. hyssopifolium, Ph. Nutt. Gen. Am.).—In similar situations with Kochia; common.t AMARANTHEAE. 1. Amarantuus albus. 2. A. hybridus. 3. A. *tamariscinus. Racemis supradecompositis nudis erectis glabris, foliis lanceolatis.—Hab. On the sand beaches of the Arkansas and Grand rivers; abundant; possessing, in some respect, the aspect of A. albus.—Obs. Stem three or four feet high and much branched, and as well as every other part of the plant perfectly smooth; flowering branches very compound and destitute of leaves, so as almost to re- sembie branches of Tamarix gallicus, the bracts being green, minute, imbricated and spinulose. ALTERNANTHERA repens, Elliott—On the banks of the Mississippi, and in the streets of New Orleans.—Obs. Heads of flowers roundish- ovate, sessile; bracts three; calix rigid, 5-parted, two or three of the + Camphorosma ought to be excluded from the American Flora, having been inserted without sufficient authority. VoL. V.—2 R 166 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS segments smaller, externally pubescent towards the base, the pubescence consisting of barbed and numerously articulated hairs ; stamina united into a small cup at the base, the filaments ten, of which five are with- out anthers; anthers 1-celled; stigma very short, partly capitate and undivided ; utriculus, 1-seeded. AcuyrantuEs *l/anuginosa. Caulibus prostratis diffusis, floribus sparsis cum foliolis congestis lanuginosis obvallatis, foliis subrotundo- ovatis.— Hab. On the sand-beaches of Great Salt river, Arkansas. Flowering in September.—Obds. Annual and every where densely lanuginous, the pubescence consisting of verticillately ramified hairs: leaves alternate, petiolate, roundish-ovate, obtuse and attenuated at the base; those of the branchlets crowded and sessile, amidst which are situated the scattered flowers, each mostly subtended by three small bracts; calix rigid, 5-parted, the segments somewhat linear and unequal, pubescent at the summits; stamina five, united into a small cup at the base; intercalary filaments none; anthers 1-celled; stigma capitate, undivided; utriculus 1-seeded, not valvular. A much larger species than the preceding, often spreading over a circumference of five or six feet. Possessing a good deal the habit of [llecebrum frutescens. IrEsInE ce/osioides—On the alluvial banks of the Arkansas.— Obs. Perennial. Flowers dioicous, collected into paniculated spikes ; calix 5-parted, membranaceous, subtended by three paleaceous bracts ; corolla none, nor any petaloid process ; stamens five, all fertile ; anthers 2-celled; calix of the fruit-bearing flower only, subtended by long copious woolly hairs; stile one; stigmas two, filiform; fruit a 1-seeded membranaceous utriculus; the seed dark brown, containing an incurved embryo. This description, which so materially differs from that of others, proves an essential affinity to the genus Amaranthus, from which it merely differs in the utriculus, which bursts irregularly, and in the singular wool, which subtends the base of the female calix. Paronycuia dichotoma, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 159 (Illecebrum di- chotomum, Willd.).—On the denudated prairies of the Arkansas and Red rivers. 1. Anycnta dichotoma. 2. A. capillacea, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 159. Perfectly distinct from the preceding, whose place it wholly occupies in the northern states. OrtotHeca floridana, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 78, 79.—Obs. Root A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 167 annual; stem branched from the base; leaves thick and somewhat suc- culent, no way scabrous in a living state. Flowers spirally imbricated, in five ? rows. Puyroxuacca decandra. Rivina *portulaccoides. Racemis simplicibus; floribus tetrandris; foliis ovatis subundulatis acuminatis glabris; caule sulcato herbaceo ; baccis siccis.— Hab. On the alluvial lands of the Verdigris river, near its confluence with the Arkansas.— Obs. Plant smooth, three or four feet high; racemes many-flowered, erect, axillary and terminal; calix rosaceous, becoming green in the fruit; utriculus greenish and juice- less; seed lunate, on one side convex. Nearly allied to R. laevis. SANTALACEAE. Comannra .umbellata, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 157 (Thesium umbel- latum, Lin.). Hamitronta oleifera, Willd. (Pyrularia, Mich.). 1. Nyssa biflora. 2. N. candicans. THYMELEAE. Drreca palustris.—In the alluvial lands of the Pecannery settle- ment. LAURINEAE. 1. Laurus sassafras and @ albida. 2. Li. benzoin. AMENTACEAE. 1. Sauix conifera. 2.8. nigra. 3.8. longifolia. 1. Poruius monilifera.—Abundant in the inundated banks of the Arkansas and Red river. The bark always appears whiter and smoother than in the following, and the branches are not angular; in other re- spects they are precisely alike. 2. P. angulata. Myrica cerifera.—Hab. On the pine cliffs contiguous to the Ar- kansas. 168 - COLLECTIONS TOWARDS Betuxa populifolia.—On the banks of Grand river of the Arkansas; rare. Carrinus Americana. Ostrya virginica.—Banks of the Arkansas. Facus sylvatica.—Not met with to the south of the river St Francis. 1. Castanea pumila.—Chiefly on the summits of hills and moun- tains. 2. C. nana, foliis oblongis, acutis, mucronato-serratis, glabris; nucibus solitariis— Hab. On the pine-hills of the Arkansas; a shrubby species, allied to C. pumila (C. nana, Muhl. Catal. et Herb.). The younger leaves are sometimes slightly pubescent. This species also grows abundantly around Tallahassee, in West Florida. It is always more dwarf than C. pumila. 1. Quercus phellos. 2. Q. imbricaria. 3. Q. aquatica. 4. Q. nigra. 5. Q. tinctoria. 6. Q. coccinea, 7. Q. rubra. 8. Q. fal- cata. 9. Q. obtusiloba. 10. Q. macrocarpa. 11. Q. lyrata. 12. Q. alba. 13. Q. bicolor. 14. Q. montana. 15. Q. castanea. 16. Q. chinquapin.—On the hills contiguous to the Great Salt river, and on the summits of the mountains of the Pottoe. Corvus Americana.—On the banks of the Salaiseau and Spadrie creeks of the Arkansas; rare. LiquIpDAMBAR styraciflua—Obs. Masculine ament conic, each flower polyandrous; proper calix 5-leaved, the exterior leaflets larger. In this country, as in South Carolina, it affords storax by incision. Puatanvs occidentalis. In this country it is not large, and appears to be on the verge of its southern limit. 1. JueLans nigra. 2. J. cinerea. 1. Carya (Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 220) olivaeformis. 2. C. alba. 3. C. tomentosa. 4. C. amara. 5. C. porcina. 6. C. aquatica. 1. Fraxinus quadrangulata. 2. F. Caroliniana. 3. F. sambuci- foiia.— Obs. Leaves and petioles before expansion covered with glandu- lar scales, emitting the odour of the walnut; branches glabrous, the bark of the trunk reticulately rimose. URTICAE. 1. Urtica urens. 2. U. procera.—This species often attains the height of eight or ten feet. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 169 3. U. *purpurascens. Pumila, hirsuta; foliis oppositis cordato-ovatis dentatis longe petiolatis; floribus monoicis glomeratis subsessilibus.— Hab. In the shady alluvial and overflown forests of the Mississippi and Arkansas. Flowering in February.—Obs. Perennial and urent. Stem quadrangular, six to ten inches high, grooved, purple and hispid ; petiole of the lower leaves as long as the lamina (one inch) ; leaf hispid, roundish-cordate, dentate, on the lower part of the stem obtuse, higher up acute, partly 5-nerved, beneath commonly purple; stipules linear, reflected ; flowers axillary, in shortly pedunculated conglomerate clus- ters, shorter than the petiole, and coming out by pairs; stamens four, elastic; gland depressed; female calix 2-leaved; seed elliptic, com- pressed. 4. U. Canadensis. Borumertia cylindrica. ParieTaria Pennsylvanica. Crexitis *integrifolia. Foliis oblique ovatis acuminatis integris membranaceis glabriusculis, pedunculis adnatis subbifloris—Hab. On the banks of the Mississippi, White, Red and Arkansas rivers, &c. forming a tree of moderate magnitude, with the bark even or rimose ; branches flexuous; leaves smaller than usual; stipules oblong and mem- branaceous, caducous; flowers dioicous, often ternate, with two of the pedicells frequently conjoined ; stamina mostly five, rarely six; berries solitary, fulvous brown, and of a saccharine taste. Flowering in March. C. occidentalis, 8 integrifolia, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 202. 1. Uumus Americana. 2. U. *erassifoha. Foliis parvulis confertis oblongo-ovatis obtusis serratis, basi inaequalibus; ramis teretibus.—Hab. On the prairies of Red river. A species bearing some resemblance to U. alata, but much more nearly related to U. pumila of Siberia—Obs. A tree of moderate magnitude, crowded with small, thick and opaque. scabrous leaves and intricate spreading branches, affording a dense shade, and of a very deep verdure. ‘The leaves are moreover somewhat pubescent beneath, scarcely an inch long, and about five lines wide, with the margin for the most part simply serrated and the serratures obtuse. The flowers and fruit I have never seen. 1. Morus rubra. 2. M. scabra. Mac ivura aurantiaca.—Hab. In two or three localities on the banks von. V.—2 5 170 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS of the Arkansas, as, near the Cadron settlement, and on the banks of the Pottoe, a few miles from Fort Smith; but only abundant on the banks of Red river and the Washita.—Obs. Not being acquainted with the stameniferous flowers of this genus when I published it in the Genera of North American Plants, vol. 2, p. 233, I shall now add a description of them, so as to complete the character. The male flowers, which I obtained near the confluence of Red river and the Kiamesha, in a withered and persistent state, appeared to have been in flower early in the month of May. They are quite small, and of a greenish. colour, collected into roundish, clustered and pedunculated racemes, after the manner of beech flowers of the same sex, each being fur- nished with a proper filiform peduncle. ‘The calix, as in Morus, is 4-parted, with oblong segments, and not more conspicuous or larger than the ordinary flower of a nettle; the stamens are commonly four in number, sometimes less; the filaments, which are pubescent at the base, appear longer than the calix, and by their structure, in all proba- bility, spring forward elastically after the opening of the flower, as is common with Urtica and some neighbouring genera.. The 2-celled anthers, as well as the filaments, are also persistent. The wood of this tree appears almost precisely similar to that of the Fustick (Morus tinctoria) of commerce, but does not afford a perma- nent dye. From the true Fustick this plant is perfectly distinct; its fruit is vastly larger, and not, as in that, composed of distinct acini, but of germs which naturally ingraft themselves into a simple many-seeded berry like the orange, &c. Humuuvs Jupulus. EUPHORBIACEAE. 1. Kvpnorsra cyathophora.—Near Fort Smith. This species, in the United States, is always herbaceous and annual. In the West Indies it appears to be shrubby. 2. E. graminifolia.—Agreeing with Michaux’s description, except in being perfectly smooth, and apparently not much inclined to branch. 3. E. dentata, Mich. Hirsuta, erecta; foliis oppositis alternisve, ovato-lanceolatis dentatis concoloribus; floribus ad summitates congestis. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 171 —Hab. Banks of the Arkansas.—Obs. Stem hirsute and branching from the base; upper surface of the leaves smooth; dentures often uncinate; calicine glands green and cup-shaped; angles of the fruit obtuse. 4. E. hypericifolia. 5. E. thymifolia (E. maculata, Jacquin. Hort. Vind. t. 186, @ *disticha). Foliis distichis approximatis; caule sub- erecto.— Hab. Banks of the Mississippi and Arkansas. 6. E. *herniaroides. Wumifusa prostrata glaberrima; foliis oppo- sitis subrotundo-ovalibus integerrimis; floribus sparsis plerumque ag- eregatis, coccus carinatus—Hab. On the overflowed banks of the Arkansas and Mississippi. Nearly allied to E. microphylla of India.— Obs. Annual. Stem prostrate, diffusely branched, sometimes repent towards the base ; leaves roundish-oval, about the size of those of thyme ; stipules partly ovate, membranaceous; flowers approximating, axillary and terminal, greenish and inconspicuous. 7. E. *maritima. Parvula, glabra; foliis oppositis integerrimis lineari-oblongis brevibus; fioribus sparsis dichotomalibus subsessilibus, fructibus subrotundis; caule procumbente.—Hab. On the sea beach of New Jersey.—Obs. Annual. The plant small, diffusely and dichoto- mously branched, the branches not flaccid; stipules setaceous; flowers green and inconspicuous, approximating towards the summits of the branchlets; styles very short; the fruit smooth and roundish, with the angles almost obsolete, and more than twice the size of that of E. thy- mifolia, though the plant is of nearly the same magnitude, and per- fectly smooth.—This species appears to be somewhat allied to E. poly- gonifolia, and I have introduced it here in pouseyictiee of its affinity to the following. 8. E. *arenaria. Glabra, foliis oppositis integerrimis linearibus oblongiusculis obtusis remotis; pedunculis dichotomalibus solitariis ; corolla alba tetrapetala— Hab. On the sandy banks of the Arkansas and Red rivers.—Obs. Annual. Stem diffusely branched, somewhat glaucous; leaves about an inch long; petals white and conspicuous, as in E. corollata; fruit roundish, the angles obtuse. Flowering in June and July. 9. KE. *heterantha. Caule erecto angulato, opposite ramoso; foliis oppositis lineari-lanceolatis acutis integerrimis ; floribus sparsis dichoto- 172 ' COLLECTIONS TOWARDS malibus luteis monoicis:—Hab. On the sandy banks of the Arkansas, from Fort Smith to Salt river. Flowering in July —Obs. Annual. Stem erect and much branched, one to two feet high; leaves thin, all of the same colour, two to two and a half inches long, and about half an inch wide in a younger state, on the under side as well as the un- expanded flowers slightly pubescent, those of the branchlets very narrow and linear; flowers dichotomal and sometimes partly axillar ; calicine involucrum cyathiform, the border merely 5-cleft, the seg- ments subovate and acute, above yellow, each bearing a cup-shaped gland at its base; very few of the flowers fructiferous; stamens, as in the rest of the genus, articulated, perfecting at different times; fruit smooth and distinctly 3-lobed. ‘The flowers differ materially from those of any other of the North American species. 10. E. *peploides. Umbella subtrifida dichotoma, involucellis reniformi-cordatis ; foliis integerrimis cuneato-obovatis subconfertis erectis; laciniis petaloideis bicornibus.—Hab. From the town of Ar- kansas to the garrison of Fort Smith, in denudated soils. Flowering in April.— Obs. Annual. Stem about a span high, simple or branched towards the summit; leaves smooth, thickly scattered, erect, sometimes subimbricate, sessile, cuneate and partly retuse, the upper ones largest ; umbell 3 or 4-cleft; proper involucrum suboval; leaves of the involu- cell cordate-reniform and obtuse; flowers dichotomal, small and yel- lowish; segments of the involucrum four and five, crescent shaped, with the extremities subulate; capsule 3-lobed, smooth and even. Nearly allied to E. peplus. 11. E. obfusata, Ph. Flor. Am. Sept. 2, p. 606.—Very nearly allied to the preceding. 12. E. marginata.—Hab. On the banks of the Arkansas from the Verdigris to Salt river—Obs. Stamina nume- rous, intermingled with infertile pubescent filaments. 12. E. corollata. AcaLypHa virginica.—Obs. Male flowers minute, disposed in a conglomerated pedunculate spike, arising from the base of the feminine involucrum; calix 4-parted; corolla none; stamina four to eight ?, minute. Feminine flowers three or more together; calix 3-parted; cerolla none; capsule tricoccous, hirsute ; stigmas three, multifid (four, five or more cleft). Tracia *angustifolia. Hirsuta, caule erecto ramoso; foliis inferi- A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 173 oribus subovatis petiolatis acute dentatis, superioribus lineari-oblongis sessilibus; pedicellis bracteis longioribus.— Hab. On the prairies of Red river, in arid situations.—Obs. Perennial. Stem five or six inches high, somewhat branched, and, as well as the other parts of the plant, slightly hirsute and stinging; stipules subulate and minute; flowers often tetrandrous, with a 4-cleft calix; capsule hispid. Nearly allied to T. urens, but the leaves are every where equally toothed, and the plant perennial. 2. T. *befonicaefolia. Hirsuta, caule erecto subsimplici; foliis cor- dato-ovatis petiolatis, acute dentatis; pedicellis bracteis brevioribus.— Hab. With the preceding, to which it is nearly related, and also to T. urticaefolia. This species I have also collected in East Tennessee, and like the former it is perennial. From the figure of T. nepetaefolia, given by Cavanilles, I should have concluded it to be the same plant, only that it is described as an annual, much branched, and with the leaves glaucous beneath, in all which particulars it differs from our plant. 1. Croton glandulosum. 2. C. capitatum. 3. C. ellipticum (Cro- tonopsis elliptica, Willd. ). 4. C. *muricatum. Caule herbaceo ramosissimo; foliis oblongo- lanceolatis integerrimis tomentosis; floribus dioicis, masculis subpani- culatis glomeratis; stigmata multifida; capsula muricataa—Hab. On the sand beaches of Great Salt river, Arkansas. Flowering in Sep- tember.—Obs. Annual. The whole plant covered with a whitish stellate pubescence. Stem much branched, about two feet high; leaves alternate and opposite, petiolate, those of the female plant narrower and green on the upper surface; branches of the staminiferous plant terminating in naked paniculated clusters of flowers, consisting merely of a roundish calix, each containing about ten or twelve uncombined stamens. Female, mostly solitary, dichotomal and terminal; the calix 5-cleft, and divided nearly to its base, with the segments acute ; corolla none; styles three, stigmas about eighteen! capsule subglobose, trico- ceous, tomentose and muricate, with soft protuberances. 'The whole plant, as in most of the genus, aromatic. Crotonopsis linearis, Mich. (Croton?). VOL. V.—2 T 174 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS *Apuyorat. Polygama. Mas. Calix quinquepartitus; petala quin- que; filamentum columnare ; stamina septem, duo interiora; rudimenta quinque, minuta. Fem. Calix major; petala nulla; filamenta quinque, infertilia ; stigmata tria, bifida; capsula tricocca, trisperma. Herba perennis, non lactescens, odore foetida, caule simplici; folia integra exstipulata, alterna; flores racemosi, axillares, bracteolati. Di- taxis affine, sed habitu diversa. A. mercurialina. Caule subsimplici; foliis obtusis pubescentibus ; petalis integris. Descript. Root perennial. ‘The whole plant thinly covered with undivided appressed hairs; stem simple, grooved, from twelve to fifteen inches high; leaves oblong-ovate, entire and obtuse, partly 3-nerved, alternate, sessile and rather numerous, from ten to fifteen lines long and about five lines wide; racemes pedunculate, solitary and axillary, much longer than the leaves; the flowers, which are greenish, sub- tended by minute bracts, the staminiferous ones much more numerous than the others, and sustained by shorter pedicells. Some of the plants produce only male flowers, others female or an admixture of both. Male calix 5-parted, the segments linear-lanceolate, acute and erect; petals oblong, also greenish; filaments united into a column; anthers in two sets, two and sometimes three above the other five, 2-celled. The rudiments of five other filaments appear round the base of the antheriferous column. Female calix producing lanceolate and acute spreading segments, divided to the base, and at least three times larger than those of the male flower; corolla none; infertile filaments five, conspicucus; style very short; stigmas three, short and reflected, partly bifid; capsule tricoccous, pubescent, cells 1-seeded. I have not been able to trace the affinities of this curious plant, which in some respect resembles Mercurialis annua. It bears no affinity to Croton, its pubes- cence is simple and its odour fetid; Ditaxis, to which it is closely allied, is an arborescent dioicous plant.— Hab. In hilly and denudated portions of the calcareous prairies of Red river, near the confluence of the Kiamesha. Flowering in the latter part of May and June.—Obs. + From <9veiz sterility, in allusion to the infertile filaments existing in the flowers of both sexes. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 175 The Croton lanceolatum, Cavan. ic. 6, p. 38, t. 557, f. 2, appears to be a second species of this genus, but produces only five? stamens and five glands exterior to the germ and stamina, in place of filaments; but this species ought perhaps to be re-examined in a living state, as the flowers are minute. *MascHaLantuus.t Monoica. Calixsexpartitus; stamina mona- delpha, tria; torus glandulosus, sex ad duodecim-dentatus; styli tres; capsula trilocularis; loculis dispermis. 1. M. obovatus (Phyllanthus Carolinianus, Mich. Fl. Am. vol. 2, p. 209). Annuus. Foliis obovatis obtusiusculis; floribus subgeminis axiilaribus sessilibus ; caule erecto ramoso tereti. 2. M. *polygonoides. Suffruticosus, humilis ; foliis cuneato-oblongis acutiusculis, stipulis membranaceis subulatis; floribus axillaribus pe- dunculatis subquinatis.—Hab. On calcareous rocks in the plains of Red river. Flowering in May and June.—Qbs. Root woody; stem very short (four to six inches), sending out numerous branches from the base, which towards the root are crowded with sphacelous stipules ; branches filiform, terete and decumbent; pedicells capillary. Mascu- line calix minute, the segments membranaceous on the margins; stamina three, monadelphous; glandular disk 6-toothed?; petals none. Female flowers mixed with those which are staminiferous, or occa- sionally on a distinct plant; the calix larger and foliaceous; petals none. The whole aspect and magnitude of the plant is similar to that of Polygonum aviculare. To this genus ought probably to be referred several other species included in Phyllanthus. *LepipaAnTHus.{ Dioica. Calix quinquepartitus; petala quinque ; stamina quinque, libera; torus glandulosus, decemdentatus; styli tres, bifidi; capsula trilocularis; loculis dispermis. Frutex humilis; folia alterna integra, stipulis minutis; flores axil- lares. L. phyllanthoides. Descript. Shrub much branched, two to three feet high; branches ferruginous and brittle; branchlets striate, a little + From wacydan axilla, and avec a flower, the flowers being strictly axillary, and not produced upon foliaceous expansions of the stem. { From xen a scale or petal, and 2v$cs a flower; in allusion to the existence of petals in this genus which are wanting in Phyllanthus. 176 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS hairy; leaves roundish-oval, entire, very obtuse, subsessile and reticu- lately veined ; stipules minute, ferruginous, pilose and acute ; peduncles filiform; the male flowers growing commonly by three together; the female ones single. Male calix 5-parted; segments oblong, obtuse, and with the margin pubescent; petals five, alternate, yellowish-green, cuneate-oblong, obtuse; glandular ring or torus 10-toothed; stamina five, unconnected ; styles three, abortive; stigmas undivided. Female calix almost exceeding the fruit in magnitude, 5-parted, the divisions roundish-oval, green and foliaceous; petals five, minute, almost like glandular appendages; styles three, bifid ; capsule round and somewhat succulent, 3-celled, cells 2-seeded ; seeds triquetrous, not elastically arillate ? This plant is nearly allied to Phyllanthus, and more particularly to the North American section of that genus. 'The leaves possess in a weaker degree the aroma and flavour of tea.—Hab. In the torrents of the Mazern mountains, towards the sources of the Pottoe and Kiame- sha, as far as the vicinity of Red river; abundant. Flowering in May and June. JatTropua stimulosa, Mich.—In the upland forests of Red river. “Sriturmera *lanceolata. Herbacea; foliis subsessilibus, ovato-lan- ceolatis acutis, serratis—Hab. In the prairies at Belle Point, Fort Smith. Nearly allied to S. sylvatica.—Obs. Spike about three inches long; the flowers yellowish and diandrous; cells of the anthers remote, only partially opening along the margin. Forestiera, Poiret, Encyc. suppl. 2, p. 664 (Adelia, Mich. FI. Bor. Am. t. 48; Borya, Willd. Sp. pl. 4, p. 711; Pursh, 1, p. 22; Bigelovia, Smith, Encyce. Lond. Suppl.). Dioica. Mas. Involucrum tetraphyllum, multiflorum; calix 0; corolla 0; stamina 4—6, decidua, pedicello nudo insidentia iis arti- culata, diverso tempore erumpentia. em. Stigma capitatum ; drupa monosperma obliqua. F. acuminata.—Obs. A large shrub, sometimes bordering upon a tree, and sending out many stems from the same root. Branches not unfrequently terminating in spines. Male flowers irregularly scattered A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. Ler over the branches in sessile buds, which appear before the develope- ment of the leaves; they are destitute of a proper calix and corolla. The inyolucrum consists of nothing more than the four innermost greenish decussated bud scales, the lower ones being smaller, sphace- lous and more numerous. The flowers are aggregated by six, eight, or more together, and the stamina, four to six in number, are articu- lated to a common receptacular pedicell, and exserted beyond the in- volucrum, perfecting at different times; anthers roundish, adnate to the filaments. The singular structure of the flowers, notwithstanding the disparity of the fruit, renders this plant inseparable from the order of Euphorbia.—Hab. In the inundated lands of the Ohio, Mississippi, Arkansas and Red rivers. 2. F. *pubescens. Yoliis ovatis serrulatis pubescentibus subpetio- latis; fructibus oblongis parvulis.—Hab. In the prairies of Red river. — Obs. A low and very much branched shrub, almost similar to a sloe bush; branchlets and leaves pubescent; leaves obtuse or acute, opposite ; fruit cylindric-oblong, black and saccharine to the taste, upon longish peduncles, and scarcely half as large as that of F. acuminata, the nut striated and a little oblique, the shell flexible; embryo flat and erect, immersed in the centre of a cartilaginous albumen. As this plant is now cultivated in the gardens of Messrs Landreth and Bartram, I imagine it to be the same which Mr Pursh saw among the specimens collected by Lyons, which I can by no means reconcile to the descrip- tion of F. ligustrina of Michaux. PLANTAGINEAE. 1, Puantaco major. 2. P. virginica. 3. P. *purpurascens. Foliis lanceolatis dentatis pubescentibus ; spica laxiuscula; stamina exserta; scapo tereti hirsuto.— Hab. On the banks of the Arkansas; abundant. Nearly allied to P. virginica, but with the stamens always exserted, and the leaves often retrorsely toothed.— Obs. Biennial. Almost canescently pubescent; anthers purple. 4. P. *heterophylla. Yoliis linearibus sublaciniatis planis, basi lana- tis ; scapo tereti—Hab. On the banks of the Mississippi and Arkansas ; frequent. Allied to P. maritima, but not succulent, the plant much vou. V.— 2 U 178 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS smaller, with the leaves sometimes almost filiform, and the scape pu- bescent. 5. P. pusilla, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 100 (P. aristata, Mich. Fl. Am. 1,p. 95). 6. P. gnaphaloides, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 100 (P. lagopus, Ph. Fl. Am. 1, p. 99). 7. P. *squarrosa. Stamina inclusa; foliis linearibus striatis glabris ; scapo tereti lanuginoso ; bracteis linearibus longissimis.— Hab. In arid and denudated places in the prairies near Belle Point or Fort Smith.— Obs. Annual. Leaves four or five inches long, two or three lines broad, smooth, shining and arid, attenuated at the base, membrana- ceously sheathing; caudex woolly; bracts from half to three quarters of an inch long, nearly smooth and filiform; calix woolly, segments obtuse; capsule 2-seeded. Allied to P. gnaphaloides. NYCTAGINEAE. 1. Catymenta corymbosa (Mirabilis corymbosa, Cavan. ic. 4, p. 55, t. 379; Allionia nyctaginea, Mich. Fl. Am. 1, p. 100; Ph. Flor. Am. 1, p. 97; Calymenia nyctaginea, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 25). 2. C. angustifolia, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 26. PRIMULACEAE. Awnprosace occidentalis.—Hab. On the rocky summit of a hill in Cedar prairie, ten miles from the garrison. DopecaTHEoN tntegrifolium, 3 *album. Foliis ovatis, integrius- culis, umbellis paucifloris ; bracteis lanceolatis acutis ; floribus albidis.— Hab. In humid prairies near Fort Smith. Flowering in April and May.—QObs. Leaves ovate or lanceolate, sometimes subdenticulate, four or five inches long; segments of the calix and bracts very acute, the latter sometimes acuminated; flowers constantly white, segments elliptic-oblong or oblong-lanceolate, spotted towards the base; incras- sated filaments, sometimes purple. Lysmmacata ciliata. ANAGALLIS arvensis. Introduced. MicrantTHemum orbiculatum. CentuncuLus Janceolatus.—On the margins of ponds near Fort Smith. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 179 Samonus Valerandi.—Near the town of Arkansas. Urricvunaria vulgaris. SCROPHULARINEAE. Prpicuniaris Canadensis.—The flower is here always ochroleucous. Mexamryrum lineare (M. Americanum, Mich.). ScropuuLaria Marilandica. Awntrrruinum Canadense. Veronica peregrina, Willd. Sp. Pl. 4, p. 76; Vahl. Enum. pl. 1, p- 85.—Common. Lerranpra virginica, Nutt. Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 7 (Veronica vir- ginica, Lin.; Callystachya, Rafinesque. A name heretofore employed for another genus). — Couiins1a *violacea. Puberula, foliis ovato-lanceolatis, remote denticulatis; corolla subconcolore; labio superiore inferiore dimidio minore, laciniis omnibus apice bifidis; capsulis subdecemspermis.— Hab. On the hills and upland woods of the Arkansas and Red rivers; abundant. Flowering in April and May. Descript. Annual. Root fibrous; stem terete, oppositely branched, pulverulently pubescent, mostly purple, and from four to twelve inches high; radical leaves oblong-ovate, those of the stem ovate-lanceolate, sessile, opposite, remotely denticulate and acute, of a somewhat thickish consistence and covered with a pubescence similar to that of the stem, the uppermost verticillate in threes; calix subcampanulate, 5-cleft, the base angular, segments ovate-lanceolate acute; corolla bright vio- let (like that cf many species of the genus Phlox), the upper lip paler; segments bifid at the extremity, those of the lower lip partly obcordate, segments of the upper somewhat truncate, and about half the size of the lower; the palate of the upper lip marked with a reniform, yellow- ish and fulvous spot, which is immaculate in the centre ; stamina four, declinate, the rudiment of a fifth at the base of the tube of the corolla; filaments pubescent towards the base; style simple, filiform; stigma minute; capsule roundish-ovate, partly 2-celled, imperfectly 4-valved ; germ about 10-seeded? seeds much smalier than in C. verna. Allied to C. grandiflora of Oregon. 180 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS Mimvuuvs alatus, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 361; Ph. Fl. Am. 2, p. 426. 1. Gprarpia purpurea. 2. G. tenuifoha and @B *parviflora. Flo- ribus minoribus; calice tubo corollae aequali, dentibus acuminatis; fructibus majoribus.— Hab. In the prairies of the Arkansas above the Verdigris river. Apparently a distinct species.—Obs. Annual. The stem is less branched, and inclined to grow taller than G. tenuifolia, whose flowers are larger, with a much smaller calix. 3. G. *longifolia. Caule subsimplici; foliis filiformibus scabris, pedunculo elongato longioribus; floribus maximis; calicis dentibus longe acuminatis.— Hab. On the banks of the Arkansas. Flowering in August and September.—QOhbs. At first sight this species might be con- founded with G. purpurea, although perfectly distinct, and apparently intermediate with it and G. tenuifolia. Annual. Stem twelve to eighteen inches, quadrangular; leaves opposite, from one and a half to two inches in length, and not broader than those of the Weymouth pine; the peduncles a little shorter, opposite and axillary ; calix campanulate, its acuminate segments nearly its length; corolla somewhat larger than that of G. purpurea, purple, with the margins of the lobes pubescent. 4. G. *heterophylla. Foliis scabris lineari-lanceolatis acutissimis, inferioribus sublaciniatis trifidis; floribus subsessilibus; calicinis laci- niis linearibus acuminatis patentibus.—Hab. In the prairies of the Arkansas, near Great Salt river. Flowering in September.—Obs. Annual. Stem angular, about two feet high, and much branched; leaves opposite and alternate, the lower ones trifid or laciniate; the flowers approximating towards the summits of the branches, purple, with the segments pubescent along the margin; segments of the calix linear and very acute, as long as the undivided base, and falcate or spreading. 5. G. auriculata, Mich. Flor. Am. 2, p. 20. 6. G. quercifolia, Pursh, 2, p. 423. 7. G. pedicularia. SEYMERIA macrophylla, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 49.—On the banks of the Arkansas near the garrison. Eucuroma coccinea, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 55 (Bartsia coccinea, Lin. ). 2. E. *purpurea. Foliis cuneatis trifidis sublaciniatis, bracteis rubris consimilibus ; calix corollisque coloratis quadrifidis, unilateralis ; corolla laciniis acutis—Hab. On rocks in the hilly prairies of Red A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 181 river. Flowering in May.—Obs. Perennial. Stem tomentose, the leaves more slightly so; bracts, calix and corolla of a brilliant reddish purple; segments of the calix linear, all inclined to one side, and nearly the length of the corolla; apex of the upper lip of the corolla greenish (no glands at the base of the lower lip); seed covered with a reticu- lated and perforated membranaceous vesicle. Considerably related to E. grandiflora, but differing in the proportions of the flower, and the dilation and brilliant colour of the bracts. 1. Herrestis rotundifolia. 2. H. Brownei.—Banks of the Mis- sissippi. 1. Gratroua virginica. 2. G. pilosa. 3. G. anagallidea, Mich. (G. acuminata, Elliott, Sketch Bot. Carol. 1, p. 15, net of Pursh). 1. Linpernra pyzidaria (L. dilatata, Muhl. Catal.; Elliott, Bot. Carol. 1, p. 16). 2. Li. attenuata, Muhl. Catal.—Obds. The capsule in this genus appears to be generally 1-celled. Cuevone glabra. 1, Pentstemon laevigatum, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 228; Pursh, 2, p. A427. 2. P. digitals. Glaberrimum; foliis caulinis connatis ovato-lan- ceolatis acuminatis repando-denticulatis ; calicibus viscosis, laciniis acu- minatis reflexis; corolla magna subecampanulata, appendice superne barbato.—Hab. In wet woods and prairies; common. Flowering in May.—Obs. Allied to P. campanulata. Perennial. ‘Leaves broad ; panicle naked, trichotomous, few-flowered, ultimate branches and calix viscidly pubescent; corolla similar to digitalis, pure white and minutely pubescent, the tube exserted, orifice inflated, subeampanulate and terete ; the upper lip a little shorter than the lower and coarctate, the inferior 3-lobed and dilated, the margin of the orifice on the lower side some- times bearded; sterile filament or appendage partly exserted, longitu- dinally bearded ; anthers smooth, dark purple. 3. P. *tubaeflorum. Foliis ovatis connatis denticulatis glabris; caule nudiusculo elato; calice corollisque viscoso-pubescentibus, laciniis ovatis; corolla tubaeformi, limbo intus villoso, appendice barbato.— Hab. In wettish prairies, from Fort Smith to Red river. Flowering in May and June.—Ods. Perennial. Radical leaves elliptic-ovate, entire and smooth, cauline all situated towards the base of the stem, VOL. V.—2 V 182 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS lower ones oblong-ovate; stem two or three feet high, the leaves so small and remote above as to give it the appearance of being naked; segments of the calix appressed; corolla of a pure white, not plaited beneath, segments oval; the whole orifice and tube villous. A very beautiful species, with the flowers rather small and crowded as it were in verticillate clusters. 4. P. *Cobaca. Puberulum, caule pumilo; foliis oblongo-ovatis argute serrulatis nitidis; floribus pubescentibus maximis inflatis pur- pureis, intus striatis; calice laciniis ovatis; appendice longitudinaliter barbato.— Hab. In the sterile and denudated portions of the prairies of Red river, in calcareous soil. Flowering in May.—Obs. Perennial. Upper leaves ovate, beneath slightly pubescent ; flowers by pairs ; leaves broadish and thick; calix viscidly pubescent, segments oblong-ovate ; flowers bluish purple, nearly as large, and almost of the same form as those of Cobaea scandens! ; stem about a span high. OroBaNcHE biflora, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 59 (O. uniflora, Lin.).— In the Osage prairie, near the Verdigris river. Caprarra multifida.—Obs. Calix 5-parted, the segments subulate ; corolla tubular, subbilabiate, base of the tube somewhat globose, border 4-lobed; lobes rounded, upper segment emarginate, the lower ones entire; capsule ovate, i-celled, 2 and at length 4-valved; seeds very numerous and minute; duration annual; leaves opposite and ternate, lyrate, partly twice trifid, the segments linear-oblong and obtuse. This genus appears to be divided, and requires revision with living speci- mens. I have elsewhere proposed this plant as a genus distinct from the true Caprarias by the name of Leucospora. Bucunera Americana.—The specimens uncommonly large. ACANTHACEAE. 1. Ruewwia strepens. 2. R. *humilis. Erecta, hirsuta; foliis oblongo-ovatis integriuscu- lis sessilibus; pedunculis 1—3-floris; calicis laciniis filiformibus tubo corollae duplo breyioribus.—Hab. On rocks in the upland forests and prairies.—Obs. Perennial. Stem seldom exceeding a span; the A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 183 leaves and flowers very similar to those of R. strepens, but sessile and not perfectly entire. Flower pale blue, commonly two inches long. 1. Justicia ensiformis, Walter, p. 63 (J. pedunculosa, Mich. Flor. 1,p. 7). 2. J. humilis, Mich. Flor. 1, p. 8.—Around New Orleans. DicuipTeRA resupinata, Vahl. Enum. 1, p. 114 (Justicia brachiata, Pursh, 1, p. 14). Floribus axillaribus subsessilibus pedunculatisque subverticillatis, bracteis bivalvibus subcordatis, foliis ovatis—Hab. In shady alluvial forests throughout the Arkansas territory; common.— Obs. Perennial. Stem erect, low, and considerably branched, hex- angular, and on two of the sides grooved, sometimes striking out roots from its base; leaves in full grown plants from one to two inches wide, and five or six inches long, upon longish petioles, and minutely and unequally pubescent; floral branchlets axillary and terminal, the clus- ters subsessile, irregularly 3 to 6-flowered ; bracts concealing the calix, which is simple and very small, with subulate segments; corolla bila- biate, pale violet purple, rather small, lobes oblong, undivided, reflected, and almost equal in magnitude, the upper slightly tridentate at the extremity and maculate at the base, the lower 2-toothed, the tube compressed and contorted; filaments two, diantheriferous; style undi- vided ; capsule suboval, mucronulate, sessile and compressed, the valves membranaceous, attached to a curved cartilaginous border, which springing apart at the summit, becomes straight, divides the valves in the centre and separates them from their base, so as to present an appearance not very dissimilar to the blades of a pair of shears; reti- naculum divided, springing upwards, each portion 1 or 2-toothed, but seldom more than 1-seeded ; seed orbicular and compressed, brown and hispid. BIGNONIACEAE. 1. Brenonra capreolata. 2. B. radicans. Caraupa cordifolia.—On the banks of the Mississippi, near the set- tlement called the Big Prairie, a few miles below New Madrid, but apparently only naturalized. I have since observed this tree truly indigenous on the banks of the Chatahoochee, near Columbus in Geor- gia, and pretty frequent in West Florida and Lower Alabama. Bi) 184 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS MYOPORINEAE. AyicenniA nitida ?—Near the outlets of the Mississippi, and on the sea islands near the Balize; called improperly, by the fishermen, Mangle. VERBENACEAE. 1. VerBena urticifolia. ‘The root is said to be a tonic, useful in intermittent fever. 2. V. hastata. 3. V. bracteosa. 4. V. stricta. 5. V. Caroliniana. 6. V. rugosa, Willd. Enum. 633. GLANDULARIA, Gmelin. Calix tubulosus quinquedentatus, denti- bus setaceis inaequalibus; corollae limbus quinquefidus subaequalis, lobis emarginatis, ore villoso ; stamina quatuor; stigma bilabiata; semina quatuor. Foliis trifidis laciniatis oppositis ; spica solitaria pedunculata, corolla Buchnerae. 1. G. Aubletia. Assurgens, foliis trifidis incisis hirsutis, seminibus laeviusculis (Verbena Aubletia, Ait. Kewens, 1, p. 33; Mich. Flor. 2, p- 13; Jacq. Hort. Vind. 2, p. 82, t. 176; V. longiflora, Lamarck, Illust. 1, p. 57; Jussieu, Gen. Pl. p. 109; Buchnera Canadensis, Lin. Mant. p. 88; Glandularia Carolinensis, Gmel. Syst. Nat. 2, p. 920). —Hahb. Every where common in elevated prairies throughout the Arkansas territory. 2. G. *bipinnatifida. Suberecta, hirsuta; foliis trifidis bipinnatifidis, laciniis linearibus, seminibus impresso-punctatis.—Hab. On the open calcareous hills of Red river. Flowering in May and June.—Obs. Perennial. Leaves trifid, divisions trifidly pinnatifid, somewhat hirsute ; bracts subulate, longer than the calix; calix tubular, dentures subulate unequal, the lowest segment very short; tube of the corolla nearly straight, longer than the calix; border large and flat, 5-cleft, lobes obcordate and emarginate, with the orifice villous; stamina four, fertile, didynamous and included; style at length exserted; stigma bilabiate, the lobes unequal; corolla lilac blue, the border equal and similar to that of Aubletia, which species the whole plant strongly re- sembles. These two similar species, with several more South Ameri- A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 185 can ones, appear to justify their separation from Verbena, which had formerly been attempted by Gmelin. ZAPants nodifiora. CaLuicarpa Americana.—On the banks of rivers; common. LABIATAE. 1. Satya lyrata. 2. 8. Claytoni, Elliott, Bot. Carol. 1, p. 32. 3. S. *longifolia. Fuberula, foliis lineari-lanceolatis acutis inte- eris, radicalibus villosis serratis ; calice trifido, caule pumilo.— Hab. In the prairies not uncommon.—Obs. Perennial. Nearly allied to S.azu- rea, but bearing flowers of nearly double the magnitude, and of a pale blue. The plant also possesses the fetid odour of Salvia sclarea. 1. Monarpa mollis, Pursh, 1, p. 18 (M. altissima? Muhl. Catal. p. 3).—Obs. Stem two or three feet high, brown and glaucous, some- times pubescent, but with the angles always obtuse ; leaves long, ovate- lanceolate, acuminate and deeply serrate, lighter coloured beneath, but very slightly pubescent; bracts cordate-ovate; clusters of flowers single, uncommonly large; calix glandular and smooth, pilose at the summit dentures very short; corolla pale purple (and in one variety white) ; apex of the upper lip attenuated, remarkably and singularly bearded, so as to be in this way distinguished from every other species.—Hab. From Canada to the southern extremity of the Arkansas territory ; common. 2. M. fistulosa, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 124; Ph. 1, p. 18. 3. M. Russeliana. Gracilis, foliis ovato-lanceolatis acuminatis re- mote serratis brevi petiolatis hirsutis, caule acutangulo, capitulis sim- plicibus, bracteis coloratis, corollis maculatis.—Hab. In shady woods around Fort Smith, Belle Point; common. Flowering in May.—Obs. Perennial. Stem about a foot high, angles acute and somewhat hispid ; leaves hirsute, lower ones cordate-ovate, serrate; bracts pale red; calix equal, pilose, the segments divaricate, glandular and hispid; corolla white, the lower lip spotted with carmine red and undulated, the apex 3-lobed, middle lobe elongated ; tube slender; stamina exserted ; anthers at first red, lobes divaricate ; stigma simple, subulate. VOL. V.—2 w 186 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS (*Coryantuus.)t Corolla ringens; labio superiore fornicato cari- nato, apice emarginato, filamentis subaequali; labio inferiore trilobo. 4. M. *aristata. Foliis lineari-lanceolatis serratis acutis glabriuscu- lis, floribus verticillatis, corollis maculatis, calicis dentibus longissime aristatis, bracteis coloratis multi-seriatis.—Hab. In the plains of Red river, and rarely on the upper part of the Arkansas. Flowering in May and June.—Obs. Perennial and annual; stem obtuse-angular, covered with a minute pubescence, the axills commonly bearing clus- ters of lesser leaves; bracts oblong, purplish-blue, awned and ciliated, consisting of many series; calix cylindric and striated, the orifice closed with villous hairs, the dentures equal with each other, awned, the awns bearded and nearly equal to the length of the calix; corolla almost white, sparingly spetted, and chiefly on the under lip. Allied to M. punctata, and with it forming a subgenus, characterized by the cari- nated upper lip as long as the stamina. 5. M. punctata.—Common on the banks of all the larger western rivers, and in old fields. CuniLta mariana.—From the Cadron to Red river, on woody hills. 1. Hepeoma firta, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 16 (H. hispida, Pursh, Flor. Am. Septent. 2, p. 414).—Hab. In denudated prairies near Belle Point Fort, Arkansas. 2. H. *Arkansana. Caule ramoso; foliis lineari-lanceolatis, antice subserratis, superioribus integerrimus; verticillis subquadrifloris, pedi- cellis ad basin bibracteolatis; floribus tetrandris.—Hab. In moist and rocky prairies near the sources of the Kiamesha river. Flowering in May and June.—Obs. Nearly allied to H. glabra, and possessing the pennyroyal odour; the whole plant smooth and glandular, four to six inches high; pedicells nearly equal to the cylindric calix, the dentures setaceous; corolla subcampanulate, blue, with the palate white. Coxuinsonta Canadensis.—Common. 1. Lycorvus virginicus. 2. L. vulgaris. 3. L. sinuatus, Elliott. Caule simplici; foliis majusculis, omnibus pinnatifidis, laciniis lineari-lanceolatis, acutis, subserratis; calicibus + From xépus a helmet, and 2v$cs a flower; in allusion to the characteristic distinction of this section, the galeated upper lip. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 187 acutis—Hab. On the banks of the Arkansas, occasionally inundated. The plant large, and with the axills many-flowered. Nepreta cafaria.—Introduced and naturalized. 1. Hyssopus nepeloides. 2. H. scrophulariaefolius, Pursh, 2, p. 406. Mentua Jorealis, Mich. Flor. Am. 2, p. 2; Pursh, Flor. 2, p. 405. Tevcrium virginicum, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 22. Guecuoma hederacea, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 85. Lamium amplexicaule, Willd. Sp. Pi. 3, p. 90. Stacuys aspera, Mich. Flor. Am. 2, p. 5; Pursh, 2,p.407. 2. S. hyssopifolia, Mich. 2, p. 4; Pursh, 2, p. 407. Marrvusium vulgare, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 111.—Naturalized. PycNaANTHEMUM incanum, Mich. 2, p. 7; Pursh, 2, p. 409. 2. P. linifolium, Pursh, 2, p. 409. (Brachystemum linifolium, Willd. Enum. p- 623). 3. P. virginicum, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 33 (P.. lanceolatum, Pursh, 2, p. 410). 4. P. muticum, Persoon’s Synopsis, 2, p. 128 (Brachystemum muticum, Mich. Fl. Am. 2, p. 6). 5. P. pilosum, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 33. Meuissa officinalis, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 146.—Naturalized. CaLaminTHA nepeta, Pursh. Fl. Am. 2, p. 413.—Naturalized. 1. DracocerHaLum virginianum, Willd. 3, p. 149, 6 album.— This is the prevailing variety, bearing flowers which are nearly white. 2. D. *intermedium. Floribus spicatis remotis, foliis lineari-lan- ceolatis subdenticulatis, calicibus brevibus.—Hab. On the prairies in moist places, from Arkansas to Red river.—Obs. A much smaller spe- cies than D. virginianum, and more nearly allied to D. denticulatum, but differs in its acute and partly entire leaves, and the peculiar short- ness of the calix; the colour of the flower is of a pale purple, often almost white. Nearly allied to D. variegatum, but with a different flower. Curnopopium vulgare, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 131; Pursh, 2, p. 410. Orieanum vulgare, Willd.; Pursh, Flor. Am. 2, p. 411. 1. Tricnostema dichotoma, Lin. 2. T. linearis, Gen. Am. vol. 2, p. 39..—Hab. On the hills of the Cadron, and precisely similar to the eastern plant. 1. Scurrnuartia lateriflora, Willd. 2. 8. parvula, Mich. Fl. Am. 2, p. 11; Pursh, 2. p. 412.—Obs. In 188 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS this small and very pubescent species, which is not more than three or four inches high, the root presents moniliform tubers and sends out creeping shoots, the leaves are also subserrate, and the flowers very small. It inhabits the clefts of rocks, in somewhat shady places. 3. S. versicolor, 8 *mollis.—Obs. This variety differs considerably from the common species of the western states, to which I applied the name of versicolor, rather than that of cordifolia, given to it by Muhlen- berg, as there are several other species with heart-shaped leaves. ‘The present variety, for such I consider it, is, like the original species, a plant of rather unusual magnitude in the genus, every where softly pubescent, but not glandular, and with the dentations of the leaves rather acute than obtuse; the flowers are also larger, and nearly of a deep and uniform blue colour.—Hab. In the vicinity of thickets on the prairies of Red river; somewhat rare. PruNELLA vulgaris, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 176. Pura leptostachya, Willd. Sp. Pl. 3, p. 179. ASPERIFOLIAE. Myosoris verna, Gen. Am. Appendix.—Obs. Perhaps only a variety of M. arvensis, but certainly indigenous. 1. Cynociossum officinale. 2. C. virginicum, Lin. Sp. Pl. 134 (C. amplexicaule, Mich. Fl. Am. 1, p. 132). 1. Lirnosrermum arvense, Willd. Sp. Pl.; Pursh, 1, p. 131. 2. L. *tenellum. Seminibus glabriusculis convexis, foliis linearibus acutis strigosis, floribus remotis pedunculatis; calicibus foliaceis, laciniis inaequalibus.— Hab. In arid places in the prairies of Red river. Flowering in June.—Obs. Annual. Stem about a span, slender and somewhat branched, and, as well as the rest of the plant, clothed with short appressed whitish hairs; leaves very narrow, and attenuated at either end ; flowers somewhat scattered, small and white ; calix 5-leaved, the leaflets of unequal size; corolla funnel-formed, the border 5-lobed, the lobes oblong, at first plaited; orifice pervious; tube slender, round- ish, and staminiferous towards the base ; stigma small and slightly bifid ; nuts four, externally convex and somewhat pilose, internally connivent A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 189 and angular, attached somewhat obliquely to the inconspicuous base of the style, and with the umbilicus imperforate. Perhaps not precisely a Lithospermum, bearing indeed some affinity to Cynoglossum, and by no means according with the usual character of the fruit of this genus as described by Roemer and Schultes, in their recent and greatly aug- mented edition of the Systema Vegetabilium, vol. 4, p. 6. 1. Barscuta Gmelini, Mich. Fl. Am. 1, p. 130; Pursh, 1, p. 132. —Hab. In the woods of Arkansas and Red river. 2. B. canescens, Mich. Flor. Am.; Ph. 1, p. 132. 3. B. longiflora, which is the Li- thospermum angustifolium of Muhlenberg’s Herbarium.—Obs. All the species of this genus are, with apparent propriety, referred by the cele- brated Lehman to the genus Lithospermum. Putmonarta virginica, Willd.; Pursh. 1, p. 130. Hexiotrorium curassavicum. Foliis oblongo-lanceolatis carnosis glaucis oppositis alternisque, spicis conjugatis compositisve, caule pro- cumbente. (HI. curassavicum and H. chenopodioides, Humboldt and Bonpland; Willd. Enum. Hort. Berol. 1, p. 175, and Sp. Pl. 1,p. 743.) —Hab. On the sandy banks of the Great Salt river, and in similar situations on those of the Arkansas; also on the shores of both the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, chiefly in the tropical regions. Tiarmium. Corolla hypocrateriformis, tubo angulato, fauce coarc- tata quinqueradiata, limbi laciniis undulatis; stylus brevissimus, stig- mate capitato; nuces 4, biloculares, mitriformes, acuminatae, cohae- rentes, basi clausae. Receptaculum commune manifestum nullum. Lehman’s Asperifoliae, p. 13. T. Indicum (Heliotropium Indicum, Lin.; Willd.; Pursh, 1, page 130. Pursuta scabra, Roem. and Schultes, 4, p. 57.—Hab. On hills in the prairies of Red river, and on the uplands of the Arkansas; frequent. —Obs. Both in this species and P. hispida, the segments of the corolla are acute. *Euptoca.t Calix quinquepartitus; corolla subinfundibuliformis, limbo plano plicato quinquangulato, fauce nuda; genitalibus inclusis ; + From zaéx@ to plait; in allusion to the peculiar character of the corolla, VOL. V.—2 xX 190 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS stigma annulata, apice barbata; semina quatuor, per paria approximata, angulata, basi imperforata obliqua, calici affixa. Herbacea; folia aspera alterna; flores sparsi, limbo plicato convolvu- laceo. Messerschmidiae Arguziaeque affinis, sed fructu diversa. 1. E. convolvulacea.—Descript. Root annual, slightly branched ; stem angular, four to six inches high, sending out a few branches, some- times both at the base and the summit; leaves mostly alternate, the lowest ones opposite, and, as well as the most part of the plant, asperate with very scabrous appressed hairs, their form ovate and entire, sup- ported on short petioles; flowers lateral, approximating and subsessile ; calix 5-parted, shorter than the tube of the corolla, the segments linear- lanceolate; corolla white, externally pilose, about the size and form of that of Ipomoea coccinea; the tube ovate, contracted both at its base and summit, the stamina inserted below its middle; border flat, plaited and membranaceous, with five angles; stamina, filaments none; anthers sessile and connivent, situated towards the middle of the tube, ovate and acute, opening internally, with the membranes of the cells narrowed upwards and diagonally plaited; style included; stigma annulate, hir- sutely bearded at the apex; seeds four, hairy, approximating by pairs, externally convex, but flat and smooth at the commissure or point of mutual approximation, with the umbilical hilum situated above the middle of the third and narrowest side of the seed, in immediate con- nection with the quadrifid base of the style; receptacle compressed, and at length separated from the base of the style; cotyledons and radicle incurved towards the umbilicus. Hab. On the sandy banks of the Arkansas. Flowering in June, the flowers of an agreeable odour, and opening towards sunset, as in the Mirabilis! Perhaps this plant ought to be united with the Arguzia of Siberia, which requires ulterior examination; though from the de- scription of Messerschmidia incana of Meyer, said to be closely allied to Arguzia, and of the fruit of which a very minute description is given in the fourth volume of the Systema Vegetabilium of Roemer and Schultes, page 306, our plant is very essentially and generically distinct. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 191 HYDROPHYLLEAE. 1. Exuista *microcalyx. Glabriuscula, decumbens, foliis lyrato- pinnatifidis longe pedunculatis, laciniis paucis (3—5) lateralibus obli- quis inciso-dentatis intermedio trifido obtuso ; floribus solitariis minutis. (Hydrophyllum pusillum, Muhl. Herb.)—Annual. The leaves very slightly hairy, upon long petioles, in three to five divisions; the lateral segments half reniform, toothed, the terminal division nearly entire, but trifid; calix minute; corolla very small, subcampanulate, with five shallow lobes.—Hab. In Arkansas, Alabama, &c. 2. K. *ranunculacea. Subhirsuta, caule procumbente; foliis pin- natifidis subquinquelobatis, superioribus tripartitis, inciso-dentatis ob- tusis longe petiolatis; racemis secundis paucifloris—Hab. In the shady humid alluvial forests of the Arkansas, frequent. Flowering in March. Descript. Annual. Stems diffuse and procumbent, about a span in length; the upper leaves 3-parted, the lateral segments toothed on the lower side (the very reverse of the preceding species), the central seg- ment trifid; racemes 5 to 10?-flowered ; flowers upon longish pedicells; corolla pale blue, cylindric-campanulate, naked, segments suboval and entire; germ hirsute.—Obs. The leaves, which are much less com- pound, differently formed, and furnished with conspicuous petioles, readily distinguish this species from the E. ambigua. HyprorHyiiuM virginicum, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 814; Ph. Flor. Am. 1, p. 134, 1. Puacewia *hirsuéa. Caule erecto ramoso; foliis pinnatifidis, superioribus sessilibus, segmentis integriusculis; calix, laciniis linearibus patentibus; corolla, lobis integris nudis; filamentis basi barbatis.— Hab. ‘In sylvan prairies; common from the Cadron to the garrison at Belle Point, Arkansas. Flowering in April and May.—QObs. Annual and perhaps also biennial. ‘The whole plant hirsute and hairy; stem six to twelve inches high, commonly branching from the base; upper leaves not amplexicaule, but closely sessile, pectinately-pinnatifid, the segments of the lower leaves sparingly toothed and obtuse, those of the upper linear and entire; spike simple, rarely bifid; pedicells longer than the 192 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS calix; calix hirsute, the segments linear ; corolla pelviform-campanulate, purplish blue, 5-grooved, the grooves naked and melliferous; capsule ovate and hirsute, 4 to 8-seeded (the germ 8 to 10-seeded). 2. P. *glabra. Erecta; foliis pinnatifidis, superioribus amplexi- caulibus ciliatis, segmentis integriusculis; calix, laciniis ovatis; corolla, lobis integris nudis; filamentis basi barbatiss—#Zab. In humid and ele- vated woods on the margins of rivulets, near the Dardanelle settlement, Arkansas river. Flowering in April.—Obs. Very similar to the pre- ceding; growing, however, not more than five or six inches high. The stem terete and branched from the base; leaves pinnatifid, the lower ones petiolate, the segments, three or four pair, are somewhat incisely toothed and obtuse; the upper ones amplexicaule, pectinately pinnatifid, with the same number of ciliately acute segments; calix subcampanu- late, the segments ovate and ciliate; corolla lilac blue, pelviform-cam- panulate, rather large and externally pilose, semiquinquifid, the lobes suboval; ten purplish spots at the base of the corolla; stamina some- what exserted, equal with the corolla, bearded at the base; anthers blue; style filiform, bifid; capsule smooth, 4 to S-seeded. Nemopuina. Calix decemfidus, laciniis exterioribus reflexis ; corolla subcampanulata quinquelobata, lobis emarginatis, ad basin foveolis mar- ginatis staminiferis; stamina brevia, filamentis nudis; capsula carnosa unilocularis, bivalvis; semina quatuor. Herba succulenta annua, caule triquetro; foliis alternis pinnatifidis; pedunculi longissimi uniflori oppositifolii et terminales, subracemosi, racemis incurvis fructibus deflexis; corolla aestivatione convoluta. Hydrophyllo affine. N. phacelioides. Root fibrous, annual, bat more commonly biennial ; stem fragile, smooth, somewhat tender and diaphanous, plano-convex, twelve to eighteen inches long, branching from the base and decumbent, possessing a tenacious and elastic centre; leaves alternate, pinnatifid, somewhat succulent, and on the upper surface a little scabrous; segments five or six pair, subovate or lanceolate, acute, partly falcate, and pre- senting a few incisions; petiole ciliated, its internal base lanuginous; peduncles 1-flowered, terete, very long, sometimes near a span, and attenuated towards their extremities, at first remote and coming out opposite the leaves, but at length, as the period of inflorescence advances, A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 193 approximating into a kind of raceme, which is primarily curved ; calix campanulate, 10-cleft, the segments ovate and acute, ciliate, the larger connivent and erect, the exterior much smaller and reflected; corolla pelviform-campanulate, violet-blue, the lobes oval and naked, obliquely emarginated, before expansion convolute; the exterior base producing ten purple spots, the internal base furnished with five foveolate necta- riferous cavities, with tomentose margins bearing the stamina; stamina about half the length of the corolla, the filaments filiform and smooth ; anthers sagittate-oblong, brownish-yellow; style one, bifid, below hir- sute; capsule oval, cevered by the connivent calix, somewhat hirsute, 1-celled, 4-seeded, the seeds by pairs, alternately immersed in a fleshy succulent receptacle, occupying the whole cavity of the capsule.— Hab. In the shady woods of Cedar prairie, ten miles from Fort Smith, and from thence in similar situations to the sources of the Pottoe. Flowering in May. SOLANEAE. 1. Soranum nigrum, Lin. 2. S. Carolinense, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 1043; Pursh, 1, p. 156. 3. 8. triflorum.—Towards the sources of the Arkansas, and near the burrows of the American Marmot.—Dr James. In the same situa- tions grew also a hirsute variety. 1. Puysatis pubescens, Willd. p. 1023; Feuil. Peruv. 3, t. 1 (P. obscura, 3 pubescens, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 149; Pursh, 1, p. 157?). —According to Father Feuille, the fruit is edible, as in the United States. 2. P. *pumila.—Obs. Perennial. Somewhat hirsutely pubescent ; stem erect, twelve to eighteen inches; leaves ovate-lanceolate, appa- rently entire and solitary, attenuated down the petiole, which is very distinct ; segments of the calix acuminate-—The habit very much that of Atropa. 3. P. *longifolia. Glaberrima, caule angulato erecto, foliis solita- riis ovato-lanceolatis acuminatis sinuato-dentatis longe pedunculatis, floribus solitariis pendulis.—Obds. Herbaceous; root perennial; stem angular, about eighteen inches high, and branching above; leaves VOL. V.—2 Y 194 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS smooth, four to five inches long, irregularly, sparingly and sinuously toothed ; flowers, as usual, yellowish, with five brown blotches towards the base; calix much larger than the berry. It bears much the aspect of Capsicum annuum, and, from the diagnosis, appears allied to P. che- nopodifolia.— Hab. On the sandy fn of the Arkansas, near Belle Point. Flowering in June. 4. P. *mollis. 'Tomentosa, incana, foliis geminis suibchoinhiuiGeee ovatis cordatisve sinuato-dentatis longe petiolatis undatis, floribus soli- tariis pendulis.—Obs. Perennial and herbaceous, the root creeping, the whole plant covered with a stellate, short and whitish pubescence. About twelve to eighteen inches high, and branching above; leaves below somewhat cordate-ovate, the upper ones ovate, tending to rhom- boidal acute, the margin unequally and sinuately toothed ; flowers soli- tary, axillary, ochroleucous; calix inflated, larger than the berry. Be- fore flowering, the plant bears very much the aspect of Rivina humilis. — Hab. On the sandy banks of the Arkansas. Flowering in June. Datura stramonium, Lin. 1. Versascum thapsus, Lin. 2. V. blattaria, Lin.—Obs. There is no species of this genus indi- genous to America. CONVOLVULACEAE. 1. Convoiyuius *hastatus. Foliis hastato-pedatis sericeis, laciniis intermediis sublanceolatis caeteris multo majoribus. Descript. Root perennial; stem twining, herbaceous and: pubescent; leaves petiolated, on either surface tonsil with a short, hoary and silky pubescence, the primary ones simply hastate, the rest partly palmated, about two inches long, commonly producing on either side of the base two lateral, reflected and toothed, or almost entire lobes; the central segment more than twice their length, and double their breadth; peduncles solitary, mostly 2-flowered, much longer than the leaves, the pedicells each producing two bracts; segments of the 5-leaved calix externally pubescent, imbricated, oval and obtuse, tinged with purple: corolla rose-coloured?; stigmas two, filiform; capsule 2-celled, cells 2-seeded.—Hab. On the high hills of Red river, contiguous to the A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 195 ~ confluence of the Kiamesha. Flowering in June.—OQbs. This plant differs but little apparently from the C. althaeoides of the south of Europe and Africa, as described by Linnaeus. Clusius observed this species in Spain and Portugal; it grows also on hills in the vicinity of Naples, and in the adjacent islands and continent. 2. C. arvensis, Lin. Sp. Pl. 218; Eng. Bot. t. 312. 3. C. panduratus, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 850.—A variety with entire leaves. 1. Ipomora coccinea, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 880; Plumier Pl. Amer. t. 103; Bot. Mag. 221. 2. 1. lacunosa. Foliis cordatis acuminatis scrobiculatis? basi an- gulatis; pedunculis subunifloris, flore brevioribus. Lin. Sp. Pl. (Ed. III.) p. 228.—Obs. As remarked by Linnaeus, very similar to I. coc- cinea, but with peduncles bearing only one or two pale purple, and in the Arkansas plant, white flowers, short and somewhat campanulate. The leaves are very thin, not scrobiculate (that I can perceive), and with very long acuminated points.—Hab. Rather abundant on the banks of Arkansas. Flowering in midsummer and through the au- tumn. 3. I. mil (Convolvulus nil, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 851). 4. I. tamnifolia, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 885.—Hab. Banks of the Mis- sissippi. 1. EyotvuLus nummularius, Willd. Sp. Pl.—Hab. Banks of the Mississippi. 2. E. pilosus. Erectus, foliis lineari-oblongis utrinque sericeo- pilosis, pedunculis unifloris brevibus. Nuttall’s Gen. Am. Pl. 1, p. 174 (E. Nuttallianus, erectus, foliis oblongis utrinque sericeo-tomen- tosis, pedunculis unifloris brevibus. Schultes, Syst. Veg. vol. 6, p. 198; K. argenteus, Pursh, 1, 187).—Obs. Flowers purplish, coming out about the middle of the stem; peduncle shorter than the calix; calix segments partly linear and acuminate.—Hab. On the high hills of Red river near Kiamesha. Dicnonpra repens. Foliis reniformibus emarginatis subtus pubes- centibus. Willd. Sp. Pl. 2, p. 1353 (D. Carolinensis, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 136).—Hab. Banks of the Mississippi near New Orleans.— Obs. From an inspection of many specimens, compared with Lamarck’s 196 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS figure (ll. t. 183), no difference is discernible, and the leaves of the American plant are more frequently emarginated than otherwise. Cuscuta Americana, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 702. HYDROLEAE. Hyprouea *ovata. Spinosa, puberula, foliis ovatis utrinque acutis, floribus corymbosis laciniis ovatis, calicibus hirsutis. Descript. Perennial. The whole plant covered more or less with a minute and soft pubescence. Stem about eighteen inches high, herb- aceous, branching only at the period of flowering; leaves of the radical shoots almost linear and crowded, those of the stem elliptic, ovate, acute at either end, and entire on the margin; the axills commonly pro- ducing slender solitary spines, being apparently so many abortive branchlets; flowers bright blue, crowded towards the summits of the fastigiate branchlets ; calix 5-cleft, hairy, the segments linear-lanceolate ; corolla pelviform-campanulate, with ovate segments somewhat larger than those of H. spinosa, as figured by Aublet; stamens about the length of the corolla; styles filiform, two and three; capsule 2 and 3-valved ; seeds numerous and minute.—Hab. On the margin of ponds throughout Arkansas. POLEMONIACEAE. Poxtemontum reptans, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 886.—On the banks of the Mississippi; rare. 1. Puuox paniculata, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 839. 2. P. maculata, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 840. 3. P. pilosa, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 840 (Phlox aristata, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 144); Icon. Pluk. Alm. 133, t. 98, f. 1. 4. P. *glomerata. 5. P. reptans, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 144 (Phlox stolonifera, Bot. Mag. 563). Cantua coronopifolia, Willd. Sp. Pl. p. 879 (Cantua thyrsoides, Jussieu in Annales du Mus. 3, p. 119; Ipomopsis elegans, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 141; Ipomeria coronopifolia, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 197 124).—Obs. Differs from Cantua merely by the angular seeds.— Hab. On the elevated prairies of Red river, where the flowers are of a bright scarlet, and spotted with a deeper tinge of colour. JASMINEAE. OLea Americana, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 45; Ic. Catesb. Carol. 1, t. 61.—Hab. On the banks of the Mississippi near New Orleans. GENTIANEAE. Genriana linearis, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 1339 (G. puberula, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 176). Listantuus glaucifolius. Foliis ovato-oblongis sessilibus, pedun- culis elongatis unifloris, laciniis corollae tubo longioribus. Lamarck, Encye. p. 660; Jacquin. ic. rar. 1, t. 33; Collect. 1, p. 64.—Obs. This plant is so accurately described by Lamarck, that any thing addi- tional is almost superfluous. It is a glaucous, somewhat thick and smooth leaved herbaceous perennial, of low growth, with a terete dichotomously branched stem. The peduncles are long, bearing large funnel-formed and somewhat spreading flowers of a violet purple, con- siderably darker at the base and within the tube; the segments are very deep, oval and acute, and the calix segments much acuminated ; the stigma large, capitate and bilamellate; the capsule 2-celled; the seeds numerous, round and punctate, but without margins. The whole plant, by habit, evidently approaches the genus Gentiana.— Hab. On the sandy banks of the Great Salt river of Arkansas; rare. It has flowered at Mr William Bartram’s botanic garden, Kingsessing near Philadelphia, in September, and appeared to be sufficiently hardy to withstand the climate. All the species of this genus (twenty-three in Persoon’s Synopsis), except two in Madagascar, are indigenous to the islands of the West Indies and the kingdom of Peru. 1. Sappatra *campestris. Erecta, foliis ovatis amplexicaulibus, pedunculis elongatis subfastigiatis, calicibus alatis, laciniis linearibus; corollam 5-partitam superantibus. Descript. Annual and bitter; stem angular, about one foot high, VOL. V.— 2 Z 198 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS branches dichotomous, peduncles few, elongated, and forming a strag- gling corymb; leaves ovate, amplexicaule and acute, 3 to 5-nerved ; calix somewhat longer than the corolla, segments linear-lanceolate, the angles of the junction of the segments salient or alated; corolla rosa- ceous, about the form and size of S. angularis, the segments oboval, the base of the corolla marked with a 5-rayed greenish star; anthers revolute; style one; stigma deeply bifid.— Hab. In the open prairies of Arkausas and Red river; common. Flowering in June and July. —Obs. Perfectly distinct from Chironia trinervia of Ceylon, with which, however, it agrees in the artificial character; but the plant of Ceylon produces oval leaves, acute at both extremities, large blue flowers, and is probably a genuine Chironia, a genus not yet discovered in America. 2. 8. angularis, Pursh, Flor. Am. 1, p. 137. Vinuarsia Jacunosa, Venten. Choix de Plant., p. 9 (V. aquatica, Gmelin, Syst. Veg. 447; Menyanthes trachysperma, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 126; Villarsia cordata, Elliott, Sketches Bot.).— Obs. This plant is dioicous and polygamous. In the plant of Mr Elliott, which grows also in the ponds of New Jersey, the leaves are larger and cordate, the stamina effoete, and the stigmas exserted. In the male plant, as com- monly observed, the leaves and flowers are smaller, the anthers perfect, the stigmas small, and the germ infertile. SriceviA Marilandica. Lin. Syst. Veg. p. 197; Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p- 147; Ic. Curt. Magaz. t. 80.—Hab. On the banks of the Arkansas, in the forests near to the first cliffs on the banks of the river. ASCLEPIADEAE. 1. Ascierias debilis, Mich. Flor. Am. p. 116.—Rather common on the banks of the Ohio and Mississippi. 2. A. variegata, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 1265; Jcon. Bot. Magaz. 1182; Pluk. Alm. t. 77, f. 1.—Hab. Near the Cadron settlement. 3. A. obtusifolia, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 115.—Hab. Near the gar- rison at Belle Point. 4, A. quadrifolia, Jacquin, Obs. 2, t. 23 (Apocynum umbellatum A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 199 album, latiore folio, tetraphyllon, ex Terra Mariana, Pluken. Mantis. p. 16).—Hab. Near Belle Point Fort. 5. A. parviflora, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 1267 (Apocynum petraeum ramosum, salicis folio venoso, siliqua medio tumente, Virginianum, Phyt. t. 261, f. 3, mala)—Hab. Common along the banks of the Ohio and Mississippi. 6. A. verticillata, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 116; Icon. Pluk. Mant. t. 336, f. 4.—Hab. Near the Cadron settlement. 7. A. tuberosa, Willd. Sp. Pl. 1, p. 1273; {con. Dillen. Hort. Eltham. t. 30, f. 34.—Hab. Common both in the prairies of the Arkansas and Red rivers. Sometimes nearly scarlet. *Poxtyotust (Acerates, Elliott).t Corolla rotata reflexa; lepan- thium simplex, quinquepartitum, laciniae ovatae concavae absque corniculis basi inauriculatae. Genitalia Asclepiadis, Gompholobio affine, habitu et fructificatione Asclepias. 1. P. *heterophyilus (Asclepias viridiflora, Pursh, Flor. Am. 1, p. 181). Villosus, erectus, foliis oppositis oblongo-ovatis plerumque acu- tis, umbellis globosis caulinis; lepanthium antheridio subaequale. Descript. Root perennial; stem herbaceous, simple, terete; leaves opposite, very shortly petiolate and somewhat rigid, varying in figure from ovate to oblong or elliptic, and either obtuse or acute, sub- hirsutely villous, a little scabrous and undulated on the margin, three inches long, by about one and a half inches broad, reticulately veined and pectinately nerved, the neryes confluent below the margin; um- bells extra-axillary, dense and globose; bracts subulate ; calix segments linear-lanceolate, acute; corolla rigidly reflected, segments oblong, acute, greenish ; lepanthium (or nectary, L..) 5-parted, segments linear- oblong, nearly equal with the antheridium (or staminal crown), of a purplish green colour, closely appressed, concave, and scarcely auricu- late at the base, devoid of awns, originating separately from the base of the antheridium; fissures of the antheridium angularly salient near the summit; cusps small and membranaceous; pollinia (masses of pol- + From woavs many, and Ov-, érée an ear, from the empty and auriculate form of the lepan- thia or nectaries. t This name has been already employed for another genus. 200 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS len) even, longish stipitate, partly club-shaped, cereaceous and hyaline, deciduous, alternating in the receiving cells; follicles two, smooth and even; seeds comose, and attached as in Asclepias—Hab. From Fort Smith to Red river, on rocks and in dry prairies. Flowering in June. Mr Pursh found this species from Pennsylvania to Virginia. Pro- fessor Ives discovered the same plant near New Haven, and likewise described and figured in Silliman’s Journal, a lanceolate leaved variety, which he then supposed to be a new species, but which he afterwards justly regarded as a mere uncertain variety; the leaves of this species varying from oval to ovate, lanceolate and oblong, and are either flat, undulated, smooth or pubescent. ‘The plant of Arkansas differs from that of New Haven more constantly in the colour of the lepanthium, which is somewhat brown instead of yellowish green. 2. P. lanuginosus (Asclepias lanuginosa, Nuttall’s Gen. Am. vol. 1, p- 168). Decumbens, foliis ovatis sparsis, umbellis subsolitariis termi- nalibus.—Ods. Root tuberous; stem four to six inches high; flowers greenish. A dubious species, and requires re-examination in a living or more perfect state—Hab. On dry and gravelly hills, about thirty miles below the confluence of White river with the Missouri. 3. P. longifolius (Asclepias longifolia, Mich. Flor. Am. 1, p. 116; Acerates longifolia, Elliott, Sketches Bot. p. 317). Puberulus, caule suberecto, foliis sparsis praelongo-linearibus acutis, umbelliis caulinis pedunculatis; lepanthium stipitatum antheridio brevius, folliculis vil- losis —Obs. Perennial and herbaceous. Stem two to three feet high, slightly pubescent; leaves half an inch wide and half a foot long, scabrous on the margin, the nerves confluent below the margin, midrib beneath pubescent; umbells many, subglobose, loose; bracts subulate ; pedicells pubescent, nearly an inch in length; flowers smaller, greenish, petals obscure purple at the summit, reflected; segments of the lepan- thium oblong, concave, with a purplish line near the base, shorter than the antheridium, stipitate below, and distinctly inserted; clefts of the antheridium salient at the summit; cusps membranaceous; follicles two, villous, rostrate.—-Hab. On the margins of ponds, and in places overflowed by winter rains, from Illinois and Missouri to [ted river. Flowering in June. Also in swamps near the Atlantic sea coast, from Sussex county in Delaware (v. v.) to Georgia. A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 201 4. P. *angustifolius. Caule erecto, foliis linearibus sub-oppositis, umbellis caulinis subsessilibus; lepanthium antheridio sublongius, ses- sile, foliolis apice tridentatis. Deszript. Perennial. Stem simple, herbaceous and slender, the lower part naked, about eighteen inches high; leaves very long, narrow and acute, somewhat revolute and scabrous on the margin, one to one and a half lines wide, opposite and alternate, nerves confluent below the margin; umbells globular, small, three or four to eight; pedicells about the length of the flowers; flowers greenish, with a mixture of white; segments of the corolla oblong, reflected; lepanthium sessile, divisions linear, longer than the antheridium, tridentate above, the central denture minute, concave and auriculate below; clefts of the antheridium salient from the base to the summit; cusps broad and membranaceous, concealing the stigma; follicles two.—Hab. In dry prairies from Fort Smith to Red river. Flowering in June.—Obs. This species appears to be very nearly related to Gomphocarpus, and also very nearly to Asclepias, particularly A. cinerea, from which it merely differs in the absence of the short internal awn; it may, how- ever, be considered as present in the central, acute and shorter third denture of the segments of the lepanthium. Dubious Species. 5. P. obovatus (Asclepias obovata, Elliott, Sketches, p. 321). Foliis obovatis mucronatis, subtus tomentosis ; umbellis subsessilibus; lepanthium antheridio duplo longius.—Hab. In Georgia. AwnanTHerix, Nuttall, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 169. Corolla subcam- panulata quinquefida; lepanthium simplex, quinquelobum, lobis com- pressis vacuis incurvatis laminula ab apice interiori auctis; antheridium superius interdum pedicellatum. Caetera Asclepias. Caulis erectus, herbaceus; folia alterna aut opposita, subverticillata, interdum axillis spinulosis; flores magni umbellati aut subpaniculati, terminales; folliculi muricati aut laeves. Calotropis affine. 1. A. viridis (Anantherix viridis, Nuttall, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 169; Asclepias viridis? Walter, Flor. Car. p. 107; Asclepias connivens, Baldwin in Elliott’s Sketches, p. 320; Podostigma viridis, Elliott, p. 327). Foliis oppositis sessilibus obovatis oblongis mucronulatis glabri- VOL. V.—3 A ae 202 COLLECTIONS TOWARDS usculis, umbellis caulinis subpaniculatis paucifloris, lepanthii laciniis longissimis.— Hab. In damp pine barrens near St Mary’s. 2. A. *paniculatus (Asclepias viridis? Walter, p. 107; Pursh, 1, p. 1837). Foliis sparsis ovato-oblongis obtusiusculis mucronulatis; um- bellis divisis subpaniculatis ; lepanthium corolla duplo brevius; follicu- lis muricatis. Descript. Perennial. Stem angular and smooth, one to two feet high ; leaves scattered, numerous, ovate-oblong, shortly petiolate, nearly smooth with the margin scabrous, four or five inches long and one to one and a half broad, axills and summits of the petioles producing minute and soft spines; umbells several, terminal, rather loose, branch- ing and few-flowered, with the flowers fastigiate; peduncles about an inch long; calix small, appressed, 5-parted, segments linear-lanceolate ; corolla subeampanulate, deeply 5-cleft, divisions large and ovate, exter- nally depressed lengthways along the centre, at all times connivent and erect, colour yellowish-green ; lepanthium contiguous with the corolla, 5-lobed, variegated purple and white; lobes compressed, obtusely cari- nate, hollow and rounded, and thickened at the summit, with the folds closed, an internal thickish lamella arising near the internal summit closing the fold and longitudinally adnate; there are also five inter- calary, obtuse and somewhat crustaceous dentures interposed betwixt the lobes of the lepanthium; antheridium roundish, obtusely pent- agonal, the lateral fissures situated within the salient angles; the usual membranaceous cusps obsolete ; stigma thick and discoid, pentagonal ; pollinia disposed as in Asclepias, the masses somewhat scymitar-shaped, their stipes articulated ; follicles two, muricated with soft spines ; seeds comose.—Hab. In Cedar prairie near Fort Smith, and also near Red river. Flowering in May. 3. A. *decumbens. Foliis sparsis suboppesitis ovato-lanceolatis prae- longis acutis; umbella subglobosa terminali; lepanthium corollae sub- aequale. Descript. Perennial. Stems numerous, simple, decumbent, some- what angular, twelve to eighteen inches long, and crowded with shortly petiolated, long and lanceolate leaves, acute and scabrous on the margin. The general aspect is similar to the preceding species, but the umbell is solitary, terminal and crowded; peduncles pubescent, about an inch A FLORA OF ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 208 long ; calix as in the preceding ; segments of the corolla the same colour, but shorter, scarcely covering the brown lepanthium, of which the seg- ments are very patulous and incurved, and exceed the antheridium in length; the chasms of the antheridium are remarkably salient, angular and crustaceous; with the follicles I am unacquainted.—Hab. On dry hills near the confluence of Kiamesha and Red river. Flowering in July. Subgenus. Sryzanpra. Laminulae lepanthii nullae; antheridium pedicellatum ; folliculi laeves. 4. A. (S.) pumila (Stylandra pumila, Nuttall, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 170; Podostigma pubescens, Elliott, Sketches, 1, p. 326; Asclepias pedicellata, Walt. p. 106; Pursh, 1, p.182). FFoliis linearibus subop- positis sessilibus, corollae laciniis lepanthio subtriplo longioribus.— Hab. In dry pine barrens, Effingham county, Georgia, Elliott. Near St Mary’s, Dr Baldwin. Near Charleston, Mr Fraser.— Obs. This genus, which will probably prove abundant in species, is very nearly allied to the Calotropis of R. Brown, but differs essentially in the insertion of the lepanthium and the form and character of its segments. Ensutenra, Nuttall, Gen. Am. vol. 1, p. 164. Corolla quinque- partita erecta; lepanthium simplex quinquepartitum petaloideum planum truncatum, laciniis in filum bifidum desinentibus; stigma conica subbilamellata. Caetera Asclepias. Herba volubilis; folia opposita; flores umbellati. EK. albida, Gen. Am. (loc. cit.).—Hab. Near Fort Smith and other places along the banks of the Arkansas. Found also on the banks of the Potomac, and on the banks of the Scioto and Ohio, &c. vr “alii até ot i aati A ia b rT als abit a beret Sqn} ie dd ginhvceais efrdbrt: +38 AL Sangin ase eat Foyle Gi niatp} tarot | ae. ree & ‘ Pid a akiyeeeyid ( thy iat ei oom wpm: ce et ik : SEEK tt NOY o bang 17 Ly : “beable 2 aiked Me ees hidvoains 3 ee ne ae om pean sty Ow 19k ita x — pid neti ee set bate se ae oo hind: tah pis Sites ne pied of tite : ta + j - ARTICLE VII. . Remarkable Arrangement of Numbers, constituting a Magic Cyciovolute. By E. Nulty, Philadelphia. Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 27th, 1834. Tue Magic Circle of Dr Franklin has been long admired, as em- bracing the most ingenious arrangement of numbers ever formed. It consists of five sets of circles, of which the first or principal includes nine circumferences, bounding eight concentric rings. ‘These rings are equally intersected by four diameters or eight radii, on which, and in the middle of each ring, are placed the series of integral numbers from 12 to 75, both inclusive. In addition to this series, there is an auxiliary 12 occupying the common centre of the rings; and the total sixty-five numbers thus disposed, have, as respects the eight rings and eight radii, the following remarkable properties. First. ‘The eight numbers round each ring, with the auxiliary or central number, amount to 360, the number of sexagesimal degrees in a circle. Secondly. The eight numbers along each radius, with the auxiliary number, amount to 360. Thirdly. The four numbers in each semi-ring terminating in a principal diameter, intermediate between two particular radii, with half the auxiliary number, form the sum 180, the degrees in a semi- circle. VOL. Y.—S3 B 206 REMARKABLE ARRANGEMENT OF NUMBERS. Fourthly. Every four adjacent numbers in any two consecutive rings, with half the auxiliary number, give the same amount, 180. As to the four remaining sets of circles and the rings which they form, their centres are at the four points in which the principal diam- eter, and a conjugate perpendicular to it, intersect the least and interior circumference. If our attention, for the instant, be confined to any one of these centres, and to the corresponding set of circles, the bound- ing circumferences of the exterior and interior rings will be seen to touch the greatest and least of the nine principal circumferences, at points in the principal diameter or its conjugate. According to this construction there are five rings between the bounding circumferences of each of the four sets of circles under consideration; and all the twenty rings thus constituted possess the same property with the eight rings first mentioned; or in more specific terms, the eight numbers in each of the twenty secondary rings, with the auxiliary number at the principal centre, form the sum 360. These are the different properties comprised in the Magic Circle, left by its original and sagacious author. ‘They certainly must be regarded as not a little curious, and would seem to require a consider- able familiarity with the powers of numbers. As to the mode of investigation by which they were first discovered, we have seen no account sufficient to enable us to pronounce with any degree of con- fidence. We should not, however, be inclined to think that they resulted either from conjecture or trial, although they are by no means confined to the particular distribution ef numbers published. We should rather be disposed to join in the opinion that they were sug- gested by remarks made on other arrangements previously formed. But still we are forced to believe that they must have been deduced from views which were incapable of embracing in its full extent the general problem, whence originated the present observations. The reasons which justify this conclusion will immediately appear on a glance at the drawing which accompanies this paper, and which may be regarded as a generalization of Dr Franklin’s Magic Circle. The additions made are Volutes, commencing at the extremities of the diameters between the numbered radii; and on which account the drawing may not inappropriately be termed a Magie Cyclovolute. CONSTITUTING A MAGIC CYCLOVOLUTE. 207 To trace one of these curves, commence at the extremity A of the principal diameter AA’, and continue along the circle, of which the centre is a, nearly to the extent of a semicircle; then incline towards the least interior circle, aa’ bb’, and terminate in its circumference. In like manner another volute may be traced in the opposite direction, and thus will appear ¢wo of the volutes originating in the point A. Six similar volutes may be traced from the extreme points A’, B, B'; and all the etght viewed in pairs may be easily recognized by the four different colours in which they are delineated. Besides these volutes, we may trace eighf analogous curves, from the extremities of the diameters intermediate between the conjugates AA’, BB’. In the drawing they may be traced by passing along circular segments, de- creasing and changing their colours, whilst verging towards the interior circumference aa bb’. There will thus appear siz/een similar volutes, in addition to the circles first described; and all these have precisely the same property relatively to the number 360, which forms the com- mon result of the auxiliary 12, and every eight numbers within any two consecutive boundaries. These, we believe, are all the properties of which the arrangement of numbers constituting the cyclovolute appears susceptible; and we intended to subjoin here the investigation which led to them, and to the different changes that may be made in disposing the numbers in the drawing. We have, however, concluded to omit this investigation for the moment, and make it the subject of a supplementary note to be read at a future meeting. Regarding the objects of the Society, this paper is presented without any desire for its publication, and chiefly in compliance with the wishes of a friend. But as the Magic Circle originated, and has, I presume, been completed in Philadelphia; and as it has been considered in Europe as the most ingenious arrangement of numbers ever imagined, the Society may not be disinclined to insert some notice of the subject in their records. 208 REMARKABLE ARRANGEMENT OF NUMBERS. MAGIC CYCLOVOLUTE. Secondary Circles. A A’ B B’ 51 | 37 | 44 | 42 | 49 || 67 | 21 | 60 | 26 | 65 || 27 | GL | 20 | 66} 2 |] 43} 45 | 36 | 50 | 41 NS OS OS Oe ee Oe ES Oe OS ee SS —— — Ee 34 | 59 | 29 | 54 | 32 || 18 | 75 | 13 | 70 | 16 || 74 | 19 | 69 | 14 | 72 || 58 | 35 | 53 | 30 | 56 Dee ee Oe ee Oe Oe eee 36 | 50 | 41 | 47 | 38 || 20 | 66 | 25 | 63 | 22 || 44 | 42 | 49 | 39 | 46 || 60 | 26 | 65 | 23 | 62 53 | 30 | 56 | 33 | 55 || 69 | 14 | 72 | 17 | 71 || 29 | 54 | 32 | 57 | 31 |] 13 | 70 | 16 | 73 | 15 26 | 65 | 23 | 62 | 24 || 42 | 49 | 39 | 46 | 40 || 50 | 41 | 47 | 38 | 48 || 66 | 25 | 63} 22 | 64 —} | ef | | | ef | | | ef | 75 | 13 | 70 | 16 | 73 || 59 | 29 | 54 | 32 | 57 || 35 | 53 | 30 | 56 | 33 || 19 | 69 | 14 | 72 | 17 SS SS ee ee Se ee eee Ee ee 61 | 20 | 66 | 25 | 63 || 45 | 36 | 50 | 41 | 47 |, 21 |} 6O | 26 | 65 | 23 || 37 | 44 | 42 | 49 | 39 ff J ff 12 | 74 | 19 | 69 | 14 || 28 | 58 | 35 | 53 | 30 || 68 | 18 | 7 | 13 | 70 |] 52 | 34} 59 | 29 | 54° SN ee ee Oe ee Oe 12 | 12 | 12 | 12 | 12 || 12 | 121 12 | 12 | 12 |] 12 | 12) 12 | 12] 12 |) 12 | 12 | 12) 12) 12 Volutes. A AY B B’ AB AE a Be ae 51 | 12 |} 67 | 28 || 27 | 68 || 43 | 52 || 12 | 27°) 68 | G7 |) 52 | 51 || 28 | 43 | | | —— J —— | | | | | S| | | — | 34 | 61 || 18 | 45 || 74 | 21 i 58 | 37 || 37 | 18 || 61 | 58 || 45 | 74 || a1 | 34 36 | 75 || 20 | 59 || 44 | 35 || 60 | 19 || 59 | 60 || 19 | 36 |] 35 | 20 || 75 | 44 53 | 26 || 69 | 42 || 29 | 50 |] 13 | 66 || 50 | 53 || 42 | 29 || 26 | 13 || 66 | 69 65 | 30 |} 49 | 14 |] 41 | 54 || 25 | 70 |} 30 | 41 || 54 | 49 || 70 | 65 || 14 | 25 16 | 47 || 32 | 63 || 56 | 39 || 72 | 23 |} 23 | 32 |) 47 | 72 || 63 | 56 39 | 16 “29 | 57 38 | 73 || 62 | 17 || 46 | 33 |} 73 | 46 |] 33 | 22 || 17 | 38 57 | 62 71 | 40 |] 55 | 24 || 15 | 64 |} 31 | 48 || 64 | 71 || 24) 15 |) 40 31 || 48 12 | 12 || 12 | 12 |] 12 | 12 |] 12 | 12 |] 12 | 12 || 12} 12 |) 12] 12 12 | 12 360 Le —— | —— | | ——— | —— | | ARTICLE VIII. Observations to determine the Magnetic Dip at Baltimore, Philadel- phia, New York, West Point, Providence, Springfield and Albany. By A. D. Bache, Professor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry, and Edward H. Courtenay,* Professor of Mathematics, in the Univer- sity of Pennsylvania. Read November 7th, 1834. Tue following observations of the magnetic dip were made at places between the latitudes of 39° 17' and 42° 39' N. and longitudes of 71° 25' and 76° 28' W. In all of thema dipping needle made by Gambey for the apparatus of the Military Academy at West Point was used. ‘This needle is provided with all the adjustments necessary to render its use accurate, and its performance is highly satisfactory. The vertical circle upon which the dip is read, is graduated to fifteen minutes, and can be read with ease to five minutes by the aid of two microscopes attached to the glass case which covers the instrument. . The horizontal circle, which serves to mark the position of the plane perpendicular to the magnetic meridian, and hence to place the nee- dle in the meridian, is graduated to half degrees, and reads by a ver- nier to two minutes. The axis of the needle rests upon two small agate supports, and its uniform position upon them is insured by two * Late Professor of Natural and Experimental Philosophy at the United States Military Academy. é VOL. v.—3 ¢ 210 ON THE MAGNETIC DIP copper y’s, which can be raised so as to relieve the needle from the agate supports, and then being depressed, restore it to its bearings upon them. A sensitive level is attached to the instrument, which is levelled by three foot screws. 'The two needles which accompany the instrument are in the form of very acute rhombs, in length across the longer diagonal about seven and a half inches, in breadth across the shorter diagonal three-eighths of an inch. The method of observation usual with this kind of needle was resorted to. The eccentricity of the axis of the needle in relation to the vertical circle on which the readings were made, was corrected by readings at the two extremities of the needle. The want of paral- Jelism of the zero line and level was corrected by turning the limb 180° in azimuth, and making two readings, one with the limb direct, the other with it reversed. The inclination of the magnetic axis to the axis of figure, was corrected by turning the needle in the y’s; and the error resulting from the centre of gravity of the needle being out of the axis, by inverting the poles of the needle. A detailed example of this method will be given to indicate the degree of accuracy to which the particular instrument in question en- abled us to carry it; no special interest attaching to these details, they are suppressed in other cases: care has been taken that those selected are not culled and put forward on account of any peculiar accordance ef the different parts, but that they fairly represent the series of ob- servations. MAGNETIC DIP AT BALTIMORE, MARYLAND. The dip at Baltimore was observed by one of us when on a visit to that city in July of the present year. The place of observation’ was in the front yard of one of the dwellings in Holliday street, opposite to the theatre; the time about 5 P.M. All the circumstances attend- ing the observations were favourable. The latitude and longitude of Baltimore, as stated in the American Almanac for 1835, are 39° 17' 13" N. and 76° 37' 50" W. AT VARIOUS PLACES IN THE UNITED STATES. Q11 Needle. Observed Dip. | Date of Observation. Observer. Weather, &c. No. 1, 70° 56'.5 July 19th. EK. H. Courtenay. Clear. No. 2, 70 59.7 5 P.M. No. 2, 70 59 .5 Mean, 70 58 .6 MAGNETIC DIP AT PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. These observations were made upon a marble column in the yard to the south of Professor Bache’s dwelling, in Chestnut street near Schuylkill Sixth street. ‘The details of the separate observations are given. The latitude of Philadelphia is 39° 56’ 59''; and the longi- tude, according to the determination given by Mr 8. C. Walker in the fifth volume of the Society’s Transactions, is 75° 11' 31". | Needle. |Limb. Me | Dae Remarks, &e. || Needle. [Limb.| Nec veo Remarks, &c. A Moi 1s alee July 25th, (| E. | W. \71°42’ | August 4th, (23. E. | W. |72 32 1834. (23) W: | E. \72 16 1834. [as || BE.) BE. \71 42 |About 7 P.M.) =| 2.5 )| W.| W.\71 19.5) Finished at oe (| W.| W. |72 13.5 au i LE Ba nies) 8 P.M. isin: | Welch he 7 \ . &| E. | W. |72 31 .5| Weather clear. | 2% |) E. | E. 72 15.5 | 32 I W.| E. |71 23.5) (Cumulus.) [2 24) BE.) W.l71 45.5 (22%| W.| W.|72 16 | Winds. W. Se Wier Bl 72e Saini 2 (| E. | E. |71 52 .5/Tem. 77° Fah. 575° 39".5 — Sum Mean 71° 57’.4 Mean 72° 00’.8 576° 06’.0 (| W.| W. |71°36’ | Observers, (| E. | W. |72°14’.5] Observer, fgel| E.| E. \72 15.5/E. H. Courte-| {34\!| W.| E. |72 01.5] A. D. Bache. _|E24| E.| W. [72 05 |nay and A. D. Ge) W.| W. |71 49 i ~ (| W.| E. |71 56.5/Bache. OS TB I] Ts lobar 1) mw); (| W.| W. 172 01 ea 3 {| E. | W. |72 08.5 Bie) || EE 22, 15).5|0-) 7 82 || W.| Enh 46 (ee EL awe lz) 13). ic oy W.| Wo l7i 41 2 (| W.| E. (71 51 SUL TBs | 18k Wee al Sam ——_—_—_——— Sum 576° 14’ 576° 06'.5 Mean 72° O1’.7 Mean 72° 00’.8 Mean by the two Needles 71° 59’.6 Mean by the two Needles 72° 00’8 Dip by mean of both Observations 72° 00’.2 212 ON THE MAGNETIC DIP MAGNETIC DIP AT NEW YORK. The dip was observed on the green in front of Columbia College nearly in the position in which the observations of Captain Sabine were made in December 1822. The kindness of Professor Renwick fur- . nished the means of rendering the observations effective, and pointed out the locality where those of Captain Sabine were made. The latitude of New York, as given by Mr Paine, is 40° 42’ 40’ N. and the longitude 74° 01’ 08” W. Needle, Observed Dip. Temp. Date of Observation. | Observer. Weather. No. 1, 72° 48’.4 80° Fahr. | August 7, 1834, |A.D. Bache. Clear. No. 2, 72 55.0 95 A.M. Wind N. W, Mean, 7d BN Pf | The dip observed by Captain Sabine was 73° 00’.5. A comparison of the result just given with this, shows a difference of 8.8, which, if we were certain that the decrease had been progressive, would indicate a diminution of about nine minutes in the interval of twelve years. This seems, however, from the results obtained at West Point, and next to be given, not to have been the case, observations there, indicating a slight increase from April to July 1834. The decision of this ques- tion must be left to future observations. MAGNETIC DIP AT WEST POINT, NEW YORK. The greatest number of observations made at any one of the places at which we have observed, were made at West Point, latitude 41° 23’ 35" N., and longitude 74° 01' W. The first set of observations was taken under the shelter of a tent, about the middle of the plain on which the buildings of the Military Academy are situated ; the others on a brick column, raised for these and similar observations, to the north of the residence of Professor Courtenay. The following table contains results obtained between the 15th of April 1833, and July 14th, 1834. It seems to indicate a gradual AT VARIOUS PLACES IN THE UNITED STATES. 213 increase in the dip, and although the differences are small, they are, except in the case of the last observation, in the same direction. The observation made in 1833 is not entirely comparable with those in 1834, having been made in a different locality. _ Observed Dip. No. of | Nee- |—-——-—— Temp. |Date of Observa- Place of Obser- Series.| dle. | Separate Mean nahn tions. Observers. vation. Observs. ; 1 |No. 1/73°26'.4 April 15, 1833. |Professors Courte-|Middle of plain. No. 2/73 25 .2/73° 25'.8 11 A.M. to nay and Henry. 3 P.M. 2 |No. 1/73 35.1 April 22, 1834. |E. H. Courtenay & No. 2/73 35 .3/73 35 .2 3 P.M. A. D. Bache. 3 |No. 1/73 35.1 81° | May 19, 1834. JE. H. Courtenay & No. 2/73 35.5 Assistant Profes-| | Brick column No. 1/73 37 .3/73 36 .0 sor Cram. north of Pro- 4 |No. 1/73 36.6 65 | June 3,1834. |E. H. Courtenay. | (fessor Courte- No. 2\73 36 .4/73 36.5 nay’s house. 5 |No. 1/73 39,2 90 July 9, 1834, |E. H. Courtenay. No, 2/73 39 .6/73 39 .4 6 |No. 1/73 38.7/73 38.7 July 14, 1834. |E. H. Courtenay. |) Mean of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6: 73° 37’.2. MAGNETIC DIP AT PROVIDENCE, RHODE ISLAND 5; AND AT SPRINGFIELD MASSACHUSETTS. The observations at both these places were made under disadvan- tageous circumstances. Owing to the brief stay which it was possible to make at Providence, the observations were unavoidably made in the evening, and a brisk breeze from the south and south west increased the difficulties incident to that time of the day: but for the kind assist- ance of President Wayland, and of Professor Caswell, the observations could not have been completed. Needle No. 1 only was observed. The place of observation was on the green in front of Brown University, and just in rear of the President’s house. Latitude 41° 49' 25"'N. and longitude 71° 25' 26" W. At Springfield no magnet was at hand for reversing the poles of the needie. By comparing, however, the dip observed with needle No. 1 VOL. Y.—3 D Q14 ON THE MAGNETIC DIP at Providence and Albany with the poles direct and reversed, we find for the former place, that the observed dip with the poles direct fell short of that when they were reversed by 1.9 minute, and for the latter place, that the observed dip with the poles direct exceeded that when they were reversed by 1.7 minute, giving a correction for the eccen- tricity of the centre of gravity in needle No. 1 of + 0.9 minute. For needle No. 2 the same correction obtained from the New York obser- vations, where the poles were reversed next before the Springfield observations, and from those at Albany, where they were reversed next after the Springfield results, is +- 4.3 minutes and -++ 3.9 minutes, the mean being + 4.1 minutes. The error from not reversing the poles is thus probably reduced to less than one minute. The place of observation was in the yard attached to the Hamden Coffee-house Hotel. ‘The latitude of Springfield, as stated by Mr Paine, is 42° 05' 58" N., and the longitude 72° 36’ W. Needle. Dip. Temp.| Date of Observation. Place. Observer. Weather. No. 1, 74° 02’.8| 68° | August 8, 1834, | Providence.|A.D.Bache./Clear. Wind 103 P.M. S. and S. W. No. 1, 74 01.1 | 65 | August 10, 1834, | Springfield.|A.D.Bache.| Cloudy. Do. corrected, |'74 02.0 8 A.M. Wind N.E. No. 2, 74 15.3 Do. corrected, |'74 09.4 Mean corrected,|'74 10.7 MAGNETIC DIP AT ALBANY, NEW YORK. The observations at this place with the two needles were divided by a severe thunder storm, which however lasted but fifteen minutes. The facilities for observation were perhaps counterbalanced by this circumstance. After due examination of the positions which Profes- sor Henry had occupied for similar observations ; the want of a proper shelter, and other circumstances connected with changes made since the date referred to, induced the preference of a station in the lower part of the town, in rear of Foot’s hotel. The latitude of Albany is 42° 39’ 03'"'N., longitude 73° 44’ 49" W. Needle. No. 1, No. 2, Mean, AT VARIOUS PLACES IN THE UNITED STATES. Observed Dip.| Temp. 74° 40.8 995 74 39.5 88 74 40.1 2195 Date of Observation. Aug. 11, 1834, 2 P.M. Do. Observer. A. D. Bache. Do. Weather. Cumulus. needle. After a gust. Sun shines near The dip, as observed by Professor Henry and Assistant Professor Cram in the Academy Park in April 1833, was 74° 51'.1, exceeding the above by 11'.1. ARTICLE IX. Contributions to Electricity and Magnetism. By Joseph Henry, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the College of New Jersey, Prince- ton, late of the Albany Academy. No. L—Description of a Galvanic Battery for producing Electricity of different Intensities. Read before the American Philosophical So- ciety, January 14th, 1835. Tue following account of a Galvanic Battery, constructed under my direction for the Physical Department of the College of New Jersey, is submitted to the American Philosophical Society with the intention of referring to it in some communications which I purpose making on the subject of Electricity and Magnetism. It is hoped, however, that the arrangement and details of the instrument, in themselves, will be found to possess some interest, since they have been adopted in most cases after several experiments and much personal labour. The apparatus is intended to exhibit most of the phenomena of Galvanism and all those of Electro-Magnetism, on a large scale, with one battery. It was constructed to illustrate the several facts of these branches of science to my class, and also to be used as a convenient instrument of research in all cases where no very great degree of in- tensity is required. The several parts of this battery are not soldered together forming VOL. Y.—3 E ° 218 DESCRIPTION OF A GALVANIC BATTERY one permanent galvanic arrangement, but are only temporarily con- nected by means of movable conductors and cups of mercury. The whole is constructed in reference to the principle weli understood of producing electricity of greater or less intensity, by a change in the method of uniting the several elements with each other. The apparatus consists of eighty-eight elements or pairs, composed of plates of rolled zine nearly one eighth of an inch thick, nine inches - wide, and twelve inches long, inserted into copper cases open at top and bottom. Eleven of these elements are suspended together from two cross pieces of wood, and the whole number is thus arranged in eight sets, of eleven in each. These are supported by the ends of the cross-pieces in a strong wooden frame, so as to be immersed in eight separate troughs: they thus form as many independent batteries, which can be used separately or together as the occasion may require. Each trough is divided into eleven cells by wooden partitions coated with cement. If one of the cells be charged with dilute acid, a single ele- ment may be excited without producing action in any other part of the battery. Each set or battery may also be lifted separately from the frame by its cross pieces, without disturbing the other parts of the apparatus. The elements remain stationary, while the troughs are raised to them on a movable platform by the common application of a wheel and pinion. The general arrangement of the whole may be seen at once by a reference to the perspective drawing, fig. 1, Plate XXII. aa, &e. represent the cross pieces resting on the upper part of the frame of the machine; ¢ ¢ is the movable platform. A perspective view of one of the elements on a larger scale is given in fig. 8. ad are two cups of cast copper, with a broad stem on the bottom; one soldered to the zinc plate, and the other to the copper ease. The cavity in these cups is about three eighths of an inch wide, a little more than an inch long, and half an inch deep. The cups being well amalgamated and partially filled with mercury, receive the ends of the copper conductors which unite the several elements. For the purpose of suspension, a slip of copper, 6 6, with a hole in it, is soldered to each upper corner of the copper case ; thése fit loosely hd FOR PRODUCING ELECTRICITY. Q19 into a mortice or marrow groove in the cross pieces, and are secured by a pin of copper wire. When the pins are withdrawn, a single element may be removed from any part of the series, without disturbing the remainder. : The zinc plate is fastened into its copper case, without touching, by a piece of wood at each corner, with a groove in it to receive the edge of the plate. The grooves in the two lower pieces of wood terminate at about a quarter of an inch from the lower end, and thus form shoul- ders, which prevent the plate from slipping down; while the wood itself is supported by a flange, formed by bending in the lower edges of the corner of the copper ease. There are two principal sets of connectors; the first is formed of bars of cast copper thirteen inches long, an inch wide, and about an eighth of an inch thick. On the lower side of these are eleven: broad projections, which fit loosely into a row of cups on the plates of zinc or copper. Fig. 4 represents one of these connectors with a thimble soldered on the upper side for the purpose of attaching a conductor, which may serve as a pole. There are two of these for each of the eight batteries, and when in their places, one unites all the zine, and the other all the copper, so that the battery becomes a calorimotor of a single element or pair. If with this arrangement the several batteries be connected, zinc to zine and copper to copper, by conductors reaching from one to the other, the whole apparatus of eighty-eight elements becomes a large calorimotor of a single pair; but if the copper of the first be united to the zinc of the second, and so on, it then forms a calorimotor of eight elements, and by a simple change may be reduced to one of four, or of two, elements. The other set of connectors consists of short pieces of thick copper plate, the ends of which are bent down at right angles, so as to dip into the cups of mercury: they connect the copper of one element with the zinc of the next. ‘Ten of these,intended to unite the elements of one battery, are shown in fig. 5. They are attached crosswise to a slip of harness leather, which, by its pliability, permits them to fit loosely into the cups, while it enables the whole set to be removed as one piece. When these connectors are in their places, and tine several batteries * 220 DESCRIPTION OF A GALVANIC BATTERY united, the copper pole of the one, with the zinc pole of another, and so on, the whole series forms a deflagrator of eighty-eight elements. The different arrangements of the several connectors will be readily understood by a reference to the plan drawing, fig. 2, which exhibits one half of the whole apparatus arranged as a deflagrator of forty- four elements, and the other half as a calorimotor of four pairs.. By closely inspecting the drawing, it will be seen that the connexion in the upper half of the figure is from the copper of the first element to the zinc of the next, and so on through the entire series of forty-four elements. In the lower half the union of copper and zinc takes place only between the poles of the different batteries; the several elements of which are united so as to act as one plate of copper and one of zinc. The four batteries therefore will act together as a calorimotor of four elements. The arrangement, as given in the drawing, is intended to illustrate by one figure the two sets of connectors; but such an arrange- ment becomes interesting in practice in determining the effect of the conjoined actions of batteries producing electricity of different intensities. The circuit of the connexions as given in the figure is complete except at a b; the two plates at this point form the poles of the battery. A set of poles, however, may be formed at any other point of the circuit, by making an interruption at that place. In the same way two or more sets may be formed. It furnishes an interesting and instructive experiment to place a pair of large decomposing plates at a 0b and another at c d. When only one of these is plunged into.a saline solu- tion, the circuit being interrupted at the other pair, no effect is pro- duced; but as soon -as this other is plunged into a similar solution, a copious decomposition simultaneously takes place at both. Also the contemporaneous action in each element of the battery is pleasingly shown by placing at the same time several large magnetic needles on the different parts of the apparatus. These iustantly change their direction when the second pair of decomposing plates touch the solution. At first sight it might be supposed that there would be some diffi- culty in entering the several plates into their respective cells, but this is obviated by the precise movement of the platform on which the troughs stand. Its horizontal position is adjusted by four screws (¢ e fig. 1), and its corners slide in grooves in the upright posts of the FOR PRODUCING ELECTRICITY. QQ21 large frame. Besides this, when the plates are once entered, they are not required to be entirely withdrawn from the cells until the end of the series of experiments; since the acid descends as the plates are with- drawn, and finally fills but little more than three-fourths of the capa- city of the cells. When a plate accidentally catches on the side of the cell, the battery to which it belongs is gently raised in its place and the plate adjusted. This apparatus readily furnishes the means of making comparative experiments on the difference produced by partial and perfect insula- tion. When no higher degree of intensity is required than that afforded by eight pairs of plates, perfect insulation is obtained by the eight separate troughs. In higher degrees of intensity the partitions in the troughs furnish the means of perfectly insulating forty-eight of the elements: this is effected by simply charging with acid every other cell in each of the troughs, and connecting the corresponding element by conductors, which pass over the intermediate elements without touch- ing them: with this arrangement we have six cells in each trough separated from one another by a cell without acid, or in effect by a stratum of air. For comparison with these a set of troughs has been constructed without partitions. The want of perfect insulation is not very perceptible in the com- mon experiments of the deflagration of large and perfect conductors ; but where the decomposition of a liquid is attempted, or the battery required to act on a small or imperfect conducter, the loss of power is very great, the apparatus partially discharging itself through its own liquid, and the intensity at the poles does not increase with a short interruption of the current. There is also considerable loss on account of imperfect insulation even in the case of low intensity, and when the poles are connected by a perfect conductor. In one experiment with an arrangement of five pairs, and the poles united by a conductor composed of thirty strands of copper bell wire, each forty feet long, the loss was found to be at least one seventh, as measured by the quantity of zinc surface required to be immersed in order to produce the same magnetic effect. I would infer from this that the most perfect of all Dr Hare’s ingenious galvanic arrangements is that in which the elements dip into separate glass VOL. V.—3 F 3 229 DESCRIPTION OF A GALVANIC BATTERY, ETC. vessels, as this combines perfect insulation with the power of instan- taneous immersion. A variety of experiments have been made during the past year with this instrument on several points of Galvanism and Electro-Magnetism, which will be communicated to the society as soon as my engagements will permit me to repeat and arrange them for publication. ARTICLE X. Contributions to Electricity and Magnetism. By Joseph Henry, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the College of New Jersey, Prince- ton, late of the Albany Academy. No. LT.—On the Influence of a Spiral Conductor in increasing the Intensity of Electricity from a Galvanic Arrangement of a Single Pair, Sc. Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 6th, 1835. In the American Journal of Science for July 1832, I announced a fact in Galvanism which I believe had never before been published. The same fact, however, appears to have been since observed by Mr Faraday, and has lately been noticed by him in the November number of the London and Edinburgh Journal of Science for 1834. The phenomenon as described by me is as follows. ‘“ When a small battery is moderately excited by diluted acid, and its poles, terminated by cups of mercury, are connected by a copper wire not more than a foot in length, no spark is perceived when the connection is either formed or broken; but if a wire thirty or forty feet long be used instead of the short wire, though no spark will be perceptible when the connec- tion is made, yet when it is broken by drawing one end of the wire from its cup of mercury, a vivid spark is produced. If the action of the battery be very intense, a spark will be given by a short wire; in 224 INFLUENCE OF A SPIRAL CONDUCTOR this case it is only necessary to wait a few minutes until the action partially subsides, or no more sparks are given; if the long wire be now substituted, a spark will again be obtained. The effect appears somewhat increased by coiling the wire into a helix; it seems also to depend in some measure on the length and thickness of the wire. I can account for these phenomena only by supposing the long wire to become charged with electricity, which, by its reaction on itself, pro- jects a spark when the connection is broken.”* The above was published immediately before my removal from Albany to Princeton, and new duties interrupted, for a time, the fur- ther prosecution of the subject. I have, however, been able during the past year to resume in part my investigations, and among others, have made a number of observations and experiments which develope some new circumstances in reference to this curious phenomenon. These, though not as complete as I could wish, are now presented to the Society, with the belief that they will be interesting at this time on account of the recent publication of Mr Faraday on the same sub- ject. ; The experiments are not given in the precise order in which they were first made, but in that which I deem best suited to render them easily understood; they have, however, been repeated for publication in almost the same order in which they are here given. 1. A galvanic battery, consisting of a single plate of zinc and cop- per, and exposing one and a half square feet of zine surface, including both sides of the plate, was excited with diluted sulphuric acid, and then permitted to stand until the intensity of the action became nearly constant. The poles connected by a piece of copper bell wire of the ordinary size and five inches long, gave no spark when the contact was broken. 2. A long portion of wire, from the same piece with that used in the last experiment, was divided into equal lengths of fifteen feet, by making a loop at each division, which could be inserted into the cups of mer- cury on the poles of the battery. These loops being amalgamated and dipped in succession into one of the cups while the first end of the * Silliman’s Journal, vol. 22, page 408. IN INCREASING THE INTENSITY OF ELECTRICITY. Q25 wire constantly remained in the other, the effect was noted. The first length, or fifteen feet, gave a very feeble spark, which was scarcely per- ceptible. The second, or thirty feet, produced a spark a little more intense, and the effect constantly increased with each additional length until one hundred and twenty feet were used; beyond this there was no perceptible increase ; and a wire of two hundred and forty feet gave a spark of rather less intensity. From other observations I infer, that the length necessary to produce a maximum result, varies with the intensity of the action of the battery, and also with its size. 3. With equal lengths of copper wire of unequal diameters, the effect was greater with the larger: this also appears to depend in some degree on the size of the battery. 4. A length of about forty feet of the wire used in experiments first and second, was covered with silk and coiled into a cylindrical helix of about two inches in height and the same in diameter. This gave a more intense spark than the same wire when uncoiled. 5. A ribbon of sheet copper nearly an inch wide and twenty-eight and a half feet long, was covered with silk, and rolled into a flat spiral similar to the form in which woollen binding is found in commerce. With this a vivid spark was produced, accompanied by a loud snap. The same ribbon uncoiled gave a feeble spark, similar in intensity to that produced by the wire in experiment third. When coiled again the snap was produced as at first. ‘This was repeated many times in succession, and always with the same result. 6. To test still farther the influence of coiling, a second ribbon was procured precisely similar in length and in all other respects to the one used in the last experiment. ‘The effect was noted with one of these coiled into a flat spiral and the other uncoiled, and again with the first uncoiled and the second coiled. When uncoiled, each gave a feeble spark of apparently equal intensity ; when coiled,a loud snap. One of these ribbons was next doubled into two equal strands, and then rolled into a double spiral with the point of doubling at the centre. By this arrangement the electricity, in passing through the spiral, would move in opposite directions in each contiguous spire, and it was supposed that in this case the opposite actions which might be produced would neu- tralize each other. ‘The result was in accordance with the anticipation : VOL. V,—3 G 226 INFLUENCE OF A SPIRAL CONDUCTOR the double spiral gave no spark whatever, while the other ribbon coiled into a single spiral produced as before a loud snap. Lest the effect might be due to some accidental touching of the different spires, the double spiral was covered with an additional coating of silk, and also the other ribbon was coiled in the same manner; the effect with both was the same. 7. In order to increase if possible the intensity of the spark while the battery remained the same, larger spirals were applied in succession. The effect was increased until one of ninety-six feet long, an inch and a half wide and weighing fifteen pounds, was used. ‘The snap from this was so loud that it could be distinctly heard in an adjoining room with the intervening door closed. Want of materials has prevented me from trying a larger spiral conductor than this, but it is probable that there is a length which, with a given quantity and intensity of galvanism would produce a maximum effect. When the size of the battery is increased, a much greater effect is produced with the same spiral. ‘Thus when the galvanic apparatus described in the first article is arranged asa calorimotor of eight pairs, the snap produced on break- ing contact with the spiral last described, resembled the discharge of a small Leyden jar highly charged. 8. A handle of thick copper was soldered on each end of the large spiral at right angles to the ribbon, similar to those attached to the wires in Pixii’s magneto-electric machine for giving shocks. When one of these was grasped by each hand and the contact broken, a shock was received which was felt at the elbows, and this was repeated as often as the contact was broken. This shock is rather a singular phe- nomenon, since it appears to be produced by a lateral discharge, and it is therefore important to determine its direction in reference to the primary current. A shock is also received when the copper of the battery is grasped by one hand, and the handle attached to the copper pole of the ribbon with the other. This may be called the direct shock, since it is pro- duced by a part of the direct current. It is, however, far less intense than that produced by the lateral discharge. 10. When the poles were joined by two coils connected by a cup of mercury between them, a spark was produced by breaking the circuit IN INCREASING THE INTENSITY OF ELECTRICITY. QQ27 at the middle point, and when a pair of platina wires was introduced into the circuit with the large coil and immersed ina solution of acid, decomposition took place in the liquid at each rupture of contact, as was shown by a bubble of gas given off at each wire. It must be recollected that the shocks and the decomposition here described were produced by the electricity from a single pair of plates. 11. The contact with the poles of the battery and the large spiral being broken in a vessel containing a mixture of hydrogen and atmos- pheric air, an explosion was produced. I should also mention that the spark is generally attended with a de- flagration of the mercury, and that when the end of the spiral is brought in contact with the edge of the copper cup or the plate of the battery, a vivid deflagration of the metal takes place. The sides of the cup sometimes give a spark when none can be drawn from the surface of the mercury. ‘This circumstance requires to be guarded against when experimenting on the comparative intensities of sparks from different arrangements. If the battery formerly described (fig. 1, Plate XII.) be arranged as a calorimotor, and one end of a large spiral conductor be attached to one pole, and the other end drawn along the edge of the connector, fig. 4, a series of loud and rapid explosions is produced, accompanied bya brilliant deflagration of the metal, and this takes place when the excitement of the battery is too feeble to heat to redness a small platina wire. 12. A number of experiments were made to determine the effect of introducing a cylinder of soft iron into the axis of the flat spiral, in reference to the shock, the spark, &c., but no difference could be ob- served with the large spiral conductor. The effect of the iron was merged in that of the spiral. When, however, one of the smaller rib- bons was formed into a hollow cylindrical helix of about nine inches long, and a cylinder of soft iron an inch and a half in diameter was inserted, the spark appeared a little more intense than without the iron. The obliquity of the spires in this case was unfavourable to their mutual action, while the magnetism was greater than with the flat spiral, since the conductor closely surrounded the whole length of the cylinder. { would infer, from these experiments, that some effects heretofore attributed to magneto-electric action are chiefly due to the reaction 228 INFLUENCE OF A SPIRAL CONDUCTOR on each other of the several spires of the coil which surround the magnet. 13. One of the most singular results in this investigation was first obtained in operating with the large galvanic battery (fig. 2, Plate XXIT.). The whole instrument was arranged as a calorimotor of eight pairs,-and a large spiral conductor introduced into the circuit at ¢ d, while a piece of thick copper wire about five inches long united the poles at a b. In this state an explosion or loud snap was produced, not only when the contact was broken at the spiral, but also when one end of the . short wire at the other extremity of the apparatus was drawn from its cup. All the other short movable connectors of the battery gave a similar result. When the spiral was removed from the circuit and a short wire substituted, no effect of the kind was produced. From this experiment it appears that the influence of the spiral is exerted through at least eight alternations of zinc, acid and copper, and thus gives to a short wire at the other extremity of the circuit the power of producing a spark. 14. The influence of the coil was likewise manifest when the zine and copper plates of a single pair were separated from each other to the distance of fourteen inches in a trough without partitions, filled with diluted acid. Although the electrical intensity in this case must have been very low, yet there was but little reduction in the apparent intensity of the spark. 15. The spiral conductor produces, however, little or no increase of effect when introduced into a galvanic circuit of considerable intensity. Thus when the large spiral used in experiment seventh, eighth, &c. was made to connect the poles of two Cruikshank’s troughs, each containing fifty-six four inch plates, no greater effect was perceived than with a short thick wire: in both cases in making the contact a feeble spark was given, attended with a slight deflagration of the mereury. The batteries at the same time were in sufficiently intense action to give a disagreeable shock. It is probable, however, that if the length of the coil were increased in some proportion to the increase of intensity, an increased effect would still be produced. In operating with the apparatus described in the last experiment, a phenomenon was observed in reference to the action of the battery IN INCREASING THE INTENSITY OF ELECTRICITY. 229 itself, which I do not recollect to have seen mentioned, although it is intimately connected with the facts of Magneto-Electricity, as well as with the subject of these investigations, viz. When the body is made to form a part of a galvanic circuit composed of a number of elements, a shock is, of course, felt at the moment of completing the circuit. If the battery be not very large, little or no effect will be perceived dur- ing the uninterrupted circulation of the galvanic current; but if the circuit be interrupted by breaking the contact at any point, a shock will be felt at the moment, nearly as intense as that given when the contact was first formed. ‘The secondary shock is rendered more evi- dent, when the battery is in feeble action, by placing in the mouth the end of one of the wires connected with the poles; a shock and flash of light will be perceived when the circuit is completed, and also the same when the contact is broken at any point, but nothing of the kind will be perceived in the intermediate time, although the circuit may continue uninterrupted for some minutes. This I consider an import- ant fact in reference to the action of the voltaic current. The phenomena described in this paper appear to be intimately con- nected with those of Magneto-Electricity, and this opinion I advanced with the announcement of the first fact of these researches in the American Journal of Science. They may, I conceive, be all referred to that species of dynamical Induction discovered by Mr Faraday, which produces the following phenomenon, namely: when two wires, A and B, are placed side by side, but not in contact, and a voltaic current is passed through A, there is a current produced in B, but in an opposite direction. ‘The current in B exists only for an instant, although the current in A may be indefinitely continued ; but if the current in A be stopped, there is produced in B a second current, in an opposite direc- tion however to the first current. The above fundamental fact in Magneto-Electricity appears to me to be a direct consequence of the statical principles of “ Electrical Induction” as mathematically investigated by Cavendish, Poisson and others. When the two wires Aand Bare in their natural state, an equi- librium is sustained by the attractions and repulsions of the two fluids in each wire; or, according to the theory of Franklin and Cavendish, by the attractions and repulsions of the one fluid, and the matter of the two VOL. V.—3 H 230 INFLUENCE OF A SPIRAL CONDUCTOR wires. Ifa current of free electricity be passed through A, the natu- ral equilibrium of B will be disturbed for an instant, ina similar manner to the disturbance of the equilibrium in an insulated conductor, by the sudden addition of fluid to a contiguous conductor. On account of the repulsive action of the fluid, the current in B will have an opposite direction to that in A; and if the intensity of action remains constant, a new state of equilibrium will be assumed. ‘The second state, how- ever, of B may perhaps be regarded as one of tension, and as soon as the extra action ceases in it, the fluid in B will resume its natural state of distribution, and thus a returning current for an instant be produced. The action of the spiral conductor in producing sparks, is but another case of the same action; for since action and reaction are equal and in contrary directions, if a current established in A produces a current in an opposite direction in B, then a current transmitted through B should accelerate or increase the intensity of a current already existing in the same direction in A. In this way the current in the several successive spires of the coil may be conceived to accelerate, or to tend to accelerate each other; and when the contact is broken, the fluid of the first spire is projected from it with intensity by the repulsive action of the fluid in all the succeeding spires. In the case of the double spiral conductor, in experiment sixth, the fluid is passing in an opposite direction; and according to the same views, a retardation or decrease of intensity should take place. The phenomenon of the secondary shock with the battery, appears to me to be a consequence of the law of Mr Faraday. The parts of the human body contiguous to those through which the principal cur- rent is passing, may be considered as in the state of the second wire B; when the principal current ceases, a shock is produced by the returning current of the natural electricity of the body. If this explanation be correct, the same principle will readily account for a curious phenomenon discovered several years since by Savary, but which I believe still remains an isolated fact. When a current is trans- mitted through a wire, and a number of small needles are placed trans- verse to it, but at different distances, the direction of the magnetic polarity of the needles varies with their distance from the conducting wire. The action is also periodical; diminishing as the distance in- IN INCREASING THE INTENSITY OF ELECTRICITY. Q51 creases, until it becomes zero ; the polarity of the needles is then inverted, acquires a maximum, decreases to zero again, and then resumes the first polarity ; several alternations of this kind being observed.* Now this is precisely what would take place if we suppose that the principal current induces a secondary one in an opposite direction in the air surrounding the conductor, and this again another in an opposite direc- tion at a great distance, and so on. ‘The needles at different distances would be acted on by the different currents, and thus the phenomena described be produced. The action of the spiral is also probably connected with the fact in common electricity called the lateral discharge: and likewise with an appearance discovered some years since by Nobili, of a vivid light, pro- duced when a Leyden jar is discharged through a flat spiral. The foregoing views are not presumed to be given as exhibiting the actual operation of nature in producing the phenomena described, but rather as the hypotheses which have served as the basis of my investi- gations, and which may farther serve as formule from which to deduce new consequences to be established or disproved by experiment. Many points of this subject are involved in an obscurity which requires more precise and extended investigation; we may, however, confidently anticipate much additional light from the promised publi- cation of Mr Faraday’s late researches in this branch of science. zs Cummings’s Demonferrande, page 247; also Edinburgh Journal, October 1826. * | on a a “he ; sr alae) ees ia os Feet Sal in antebas a} ee an . - * apie ~ a (oi maT | P Peene” we te be -' a re er ereey ty ARTICLE XI. Collection of Observations on the Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834, made at Philadelphia, Haverford, West-Hills, Baltimore, the University of Virginia, Norfolk, Cincinnati and Nashville. Reported March 6th, 1835. Tue Committee appointed to make a collection of Observations on the recent Solar Eclipse, respectfully report the following for publica- tion in the Transactions of the Society. Avex. Dauuas BacHe. Jos. Roperts, Jun. Isatan LUKENS. Memorandum of Observations of the Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834, made at the University of Pennsylvania. By Edward H. Courtenay, Professor of Mathematics in the University of Pennsylvania. During one or two hours immediately preceding the commencement of the eclipse, the sun was frequently obscured by clouds; but these, although not entirely dispersed, had disappeared sufficiently to permit a very satisfactory observation of the commencement. For several seconds (say five or six) previous to the first distinct impression on the sun’s disk, a slight tremulous motion was distinctly observed near that VOL. V.—3 I ‘< 234 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE point of the limb at which the eclipse was expected to commence. This served as an additional guide to the eye, which was accordingly found to be directed very accurately to the point at which the indenta- tion first occurred. The limb of the sun at this time was beautifully defined ; soon after the commencement, the clouds began again to accu- mulate, and at the period of greatest obscuration the sun was entirely concealed. About twenty minutes before the end the clouds had again dispersed, leaving the sun much brighter than at any previous period during the eclipse, and giving promise of a highly satisfactory observa- tion of the end; but at fifteen or twenty seconds before the final sepa- ration of the disks a light fleecy cloud passed before them, alternately concealing the sun and permitting him to be seen. The effect of this was to dazzle the eye,and to render the vision so far imperfect that the instant of separation of the disks could not be fixed as satisfactorily as that of the commencement. ‘The observations were made with a sixty inch refractor by Dollond belouging to the University of Pennsylvania, the diameter of the object glass being three and three-fourths inches. The time keeper was a chronometer of excellent character by Parkin- son and Frodsham, and its error and rate were ascertained by frequent transits of the sun and stars on the day of the eclipse and for several days previous. The limbs of the sun and moon, when not obscured by clouds, were defined as distinctly as could have been desired. The colour of the sun’s disk, as seen through the dark glass used, was a bright orange extremely agreeable to the eye; that of the moon in- tensely black. : The times observed, reduced to the meridian of Independence Hall, were as follows: he’ Seis weds Commencement, | ea (9 ae! ds End, Bi dst Olee Duration, 2. SSMS Observations of the temperature were likewise made with two ther- mometers by Pastorelli (the bulb being uncoated); the one exposed to the sun’s rays on the south side of the university, the other well shel- tered from the sun and haying a north western exposure. The sudden and frequent fluctuations of the thermometer in the sun are attributable to the frequent interposition of clouds. SOLAR ECLIPSE OF NOVEMBER 30, 1834. 235 Therm. | Therm. ou in Sun. |in Shade. 1015 A.M. 64 44 {Very clear. Wind N. W. 10 30 A.M. 64 46 |Very clear. Wind N. W. 1100 A.M. 70 46 |Very clear. Wind N. W. LE 30) A.M. 63 47 |Thin white clouds. 12 00 M. 59 47 {Sun shining through clouds. 12 30 P.M. 54 47 — |Clouds thicker. 1245 P.M. 64 48 |Sun quite bright. 1255 P.M. 66 48 _ |Sun quite bright. 105 P.M. 68 4§ {Sun caffe biihe } Commencement of Eelipee: 145) P MM. 58 48 |Sun considerably obscured. 130 P.M. 55 48 |Sun considerably obscured. 145 P.M. 52 47 |Sun nearly invisible. 200 P.M. 50 47 —_|Sun just visible. 210 P.M. 48 46% |Sun entirely gone. 220 P.M. 48 46 {Sun entirely gone. Greatest obscuration. 230 P.M. 48 46 (Clouds thinner. Sun can be seen. 240 P.M. 48 46 |Sun continues to grow brighter. 250 P.M. 48} 46 |Sun quite bright. 300 P.M. 483 45% |Sun quite bright. 315 P.M. 484 45 |Sun quite bright. 3°30 P.M. 54 46 |Sun very bright. 345 P.M. 50 45 |Sun very bright. Observations of a hollow magnetic needle (by Lukens) suspended horizontally by silk fibres, and placed in one of the west windows of the University. How ae Hour. Pa 1100 A.M. 25' W. 2 OSPaMe 24'W. 11 30 A.M. 2 We 220 P.M. 23 W. 1200 M. 30 W. 240 P.M. 23 W. 12 30 P.M. 28 W. 250 P.M. 23 W. 12 45 P.M. 28 W. 300 P.M. 24 W. LES ait pag 29 W. Gas Eaves 24 W. 130 P.M. 30 W. 3 30 P.M 26 W. 145 P.M. 29 W. 345 P.M 24 W. 200 P.M. 25 W. The divisions pointed out by the needle indicate nothing as to the actual amount of the magnetic vari- ation, but simply the change in variation during the eclipse. J 236 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE Observations on the Eclipse of the Sun November 30th, 1834, made at Fricnds’ Observatory, Fourth Street, Philadelphia. By Joseph Roberts, Jun. The morning was clear and without clouds till about eleven o’clock, when the eastern, western and southern sky became overcast with thin white clouds moving from the west. At noon determined the state of the clock by the fixed transit instrument. The beginning of the eclipse, observed with an achromatic telescope with a power of about 38, happened at 1 h. 0 m. 15.85 sec. mean civil time, corrected for the rate of the clock, determined by transits both before and after the eclipse. ‘The observation of the beginning was very good; but from a few minutes after the beginning till some time after the end of the eclipse there was a constant succession of clouds between the sun and the observer, often so dense as to render the sun invisible; at the time of the greatest obscuration the sun was visible through thin clouds. Determined the magnitude of the eclipse when compared with a mea- sure of the sun’s diameter, taken with a Troughton micrometer near noon of the same day. The obscured part measured 10.755 digits, which differs from the calculation about a three hundredth part of a digit, or five seconds. This observation was made under unfavourable circumstances. The end of the eclipse happened at 3 h. 37 m. 45 sec. mean time corrected. A haze about the sun may have caused the disappearance of the moon a few seconds before the actual end of the eclipse, in which case the latter number should be increased a few seconds. Observations on the Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834, made at Philadelphia and Ger- mantown, Pennsylvania. Communicated by S. C. Walker. The following observations of the Solar Eclipse of November 30th have been communicated to me by the respective observers. They are all expressed in mean solar time of the Hall of Independence, lon- gitude 5 h. 0 m. 43.9 sec., latitude 39° 56’ 59”. SOLAR ECLIPSE OF NOVEMBER 30, 1834. 237 Beginning. : Observer. Place of Observation. sec. | h. ; asst |S : Wistar. C. Wistar’s House, Germantown. Lukens. T. M’Euen. | T. M’Euen’s House, Philadelphia. 10.3 ; C. M’Euen. Young. Third Street, near South Street. 14.2 Espy. 100 south Highth Street. 20.0 Riggs. loko) 15.8 .2 | Walker. Observations of the temperature during the eclipse. By'T. M’Euen. ~ Hour. | Therm, Fahr. Hour. Therm, Fahr. 1 12 50°.5 2 40 45° .00 1 24 50 .0 250 45 .00 1 30 49 .0 2 55 Dew point, 24 .00 1 42 48 .0 3 00 44 .75 1 58 AT .25 gealto 44 .50 2 10 46.5 3 45 44 .50 2 20 46 .0 8 es: 44 .00 2| 30 A5 .25 Note of Meteorological Observations made during the Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834. By A. D. Bache, Professor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. The day of the eclipse was one of a series of days above the ordinary temperature of the season; a thermometer which on ‘Thursday the 4th of December stood in the shade at 2 P.M. at 354° Fahrenheit, stood in the same place on November 28th at 51°, at the same time on the 29th at 48°, on the Ist of December at 51°, on the 2d at 47°, and on_ the day of the eclipse at 454°. During the eclipse the thermometer in the shade fell from 49° at 1 o’clock to 434° at 2h. 22 m., the tem- perature being obtained by swinging the thermometer. On the fol- lowing day, which was cloudy, the clouds being however less dense than on the 30th, the thermometer rose during the same time 23°; and on the 28th, at which time there were fewer clouds, 23°. The | VOL. V.—3 kK 238 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE effect of the clouds in preventing the rise of the thermometer being taken at 2 of a degree, gives, in addition to a rise of 2° prevented, a depression of 54° produced, making 73° for the effect on the air. In the eclipse of 1831 the observed effect on the temperature of the air, not taking into account the rise which would in other circumstances have been produced, was 4?° Fahrenheit, which was, however, much more felt than the present, the fall being from 353° Fahrenheit to 302°. A thermometer with the bulb blackened by writing ink, and con- fined in a plate glass case, fell from 101°, at which it stood at 1 P.M., to 46° at 2h. 30 m., which was the lowest point that it attained, the depression amounting to 55° in one hour and a half, from the effect of the clouds and of the eclipse. In the eclipse of 1831 the depression of a similar instrument not protected from the air was 36°. The variable effect of the temperature of the air renders such comparisons very vague. The time of greatest obscuration from clouds coincided nearly with that from the eclipse, and the varying density of the clouds rendered the photometer of no service, and disappointed me in observations which had been arranged for that instrument. The photometer, which in 1831 exhibited at the time of greatest obscuration a quantity of light from the direct action of the sun amounting to 4° in 56.5, or 3, gave but 2 for the same quantity on the present occasion. This remark applies only to the direct light, for that which was reflected was greater than in 1831. The dew point, which at 7 A.M. was at 28°, fell, on the formation of clouds, and was at 1 h. 40 m. 24°, and at 2 h. 40 m. Q32°. A series of magnetic observations on the dip, intensity and variation were made, and the results will at a future date be communicated. They may have an important bearing on the theory of the diurnal variation. SOLAR ECLIPSE OF NOVEMBER 30, 1834. 239 Observations of the times of beginning and end of the Eclipse of the Sun, 11th month 30th, 1834, made at Haverford School, Latitude 40° 1! 12” North. By J. Gummere, Pro- fessor of Natural Philosophy and Mathematics. lie sy see Beginning, 0. 59 12 End, Bi BG 4 bE The state and rate of the clock were determined by a number of observations of the sun’s meridian passage, including one on the day of the eclipse: the state of the transit instrument, a twenty inch one by Dollond, being carefully examined by observed transits of high and low stars. The observations of the eclipse were made with a forty-six inch achromatic by Tully and Sons, just received. It has four astron- omical eye pieces, but was not accompanied by a statement of their powers, and I have not yet had leisure to ascertain them. The lowest was used; it is probably about forty. At the time of commencement part of a small cloud, too dense to admit of distinct vision through it, obscured the sun for a few seconds, in consequence of which the time of beginning, as given above, may be in error to the amount of three or four seconds. ‘The observation of the end was free from obstruc- tion, and is, I think, accurate. ‘The latitude of our place may be regarded as a near approximation. I have not yet made a sufficient number of observations to consider it accurately determined. Observations on the Solar Eclipse of November 30th 1834, made at West-Hills, Long Island. By F. R. Hassler, Esq. Communicated by Mr John A. Dahlgren, of the United States Navy. By direction of Mr Hassler the following observations of the late solar eclipse, made by him at West-Hills, Long Island, 30th November 1834, are communicated. le ane sec. First contact, 1 09 53.93 mean time, Last contact, 3 45 18.65 mean time, 240 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE Latitude, 40° 48’ 47’.82 N. Assumed longitude, 4 h. 53 m. 52.7 sec. W. The station is one of the principal points of the triangulation selected by Mr Hassler for the coast survey. Observations were made on the day of the eclipse, by order of Mr Hassler, to determine the rate and error of the chronometers and astron- omical clock. ‘The apparent time was deduced from the sun’s Z. D. in series of ten repetitions, each measured by the repeating circle. Altitudes were also measured with a reflecting circle of double repe- tition on Mr Hassler’s principle: but as one of the sets was interrupted by the tremor of the mercury from the motion of some of the spec- tators, the series was rendered imperfect, and could not therefore be used. ‘The latitude was determined by two series on the sun, and seven on « Urse Minoris, being all the weather admitted of during the month of November. Observations of the Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834, made at Baltimore. By Lewis Brantz. The place of observation is about one mile west from Monument Square. ‘The latitude being 39° 17'12" W. The time was observed minutely by a chronometer of Parkinson and Frodsham, whose rate has for some time back been 0”.5 slow, and the local mean time was ascertained by sets of altitudes of the sun, accurately observed on the forenoons immediately preceding and succeeding the eclipse. The contacts were observed by a Dollond’s achromatic telescope with a power of eighty-five, assisted by a lesser one of about thirty. The two observations agreed so nearly as not to admit of any distinction. hint Sec. Beginning, 12 51 58 mean time at Baltimore, End, 3-31 293. ‘do. do. The temperature by a thermometer exposed to the sun, and by an- other in a northern exposure, was as follows: SOLAR ECLIPSE OF NOVEMBER 30, 1834. Q41 Therm. in Sun. Therm. to North. 12 M. 66° Fahr. 50° Fahr. 1 P.M. 66 51 2 P.M. 55 49 3 P.M. 62 50 Times of beginning and end of the Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834, observed at the University of Virginia. By R. MM. Patterson, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Virginia. hy tive SEC: Commencement, 0 41 11 End, 1293) - 43 In 1831 the thermometer in the sun was at 33° Fahrenheit in the middle of the eclipse, and at 51° at the end. On this occasion it was at 544° to 57° at the middle, 70° to 76° at the beginning, and at 66° at the end; two different thermometers being noted. ‘The thermometer in the shade varied only a degree and a half. Register of Observations made at Norfolk, Virginia. By Captain 4. Talcott, of Corps of Engineers. Latitude of station 36° 51/10”. November 30th, 1834. Time by pocket chron. Alt. of sun with 18 inch repeating circle. h. m. sec. 8 32 08.5 ~* IO) Oy OY 83° OW as B 2 SAO 2s Cc 5 Reversed D ) Barom. 30.3 85 44 A A 146° 09' 20" Therm. 48° 36 42 A B 9 45 37 39 A C 9 45 D 9 25 * > Sun’s upper limb ; ~ Sun’s lower limb. VOL. V.—3 L 242 Lost . f Again, { 2 h. m. t) S$. 46 44 " ae 45 fe, Reversed ) 48 50 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE sec. 03.5 ~ 02 00 =—_— -_— 11 10 A, B, C and D same as preceding. A 289° 37’ -30" B 05 Barom. 30.3 C 00 Therm. 48° D 10 After measuring the foregoing altitudes of the sun, the level was clamped, and the following observations for equal altitudes made. sec. 54 A.M. 57 A.M. 59 A.M. 07 A.M. 11 A.M. 14 A.M. Time by chron. h. m. 33 SNS 35 36 Reversed 38 39 39 Again, h. m. Se AY 48 49 Reversed 50 51 52 sec. 06 56 46 10 sec. 48 38 26 56 C1 YD) P.M. Pant, 1 P.M. 01.2 P.M. 50. P.M... Grex ye? (an P.M. ~ 45.2 P.M. 34 P.M. ) h. m, Barom. 30.29 alent 17 | Therm. 48° 26 25 sec. 42.4 P.M. ~ Barom. 30.32 40 P.M. ~ Therm. 50° 38 The lower limb of the sun was obscured by the moon P.M. Alt. of sun with 18 inch repeating circle. A: 289730 10" B 36 30 C 36 35 D 36 50 A 90 26 55 B 27 10 C 27 25 D 27 05 Barom. 30.34 Therm. 48° A, B, C and D as before. 255° 23' 57” 24 00 23 45 A B Cc D 23 40 Barom. 30.34 Therm. 48° SOLAR ECLIPSE 0F NOVEMBER 30, 1834. 243 h. m. sec. 0 49 52 Commencement of eclipse. ) 14 00 Greatest obscuration. 3 30 52 End of eclipse. The vy. sine of crescent measured by 257 divisions of micrometer scale, the value of each division being .45191” or 45''.191 to each thread of the screw. The foregoing observations for time were made by setting the teles- cope of the circle, and taking the transit of the sun’s first limb, and then reversed.. It was thought that the interval, if both limbs were observed, would be too great to allow of taking an arithmetical mean for the time. The second limb was taken after reversing in all but the first morning observation, when the first limb was observed before and after reversing. To correct, if necessary, any inequality in the rate of the pocket chronometer, in the correctness of which I had little confidence, as it was habitually used as a pocket watch, I compared it about every hour with the clock, which was set going for the occasion. The rate of the clock could be depended upon for uniformity, but what that was, was unknown, as it had been moved in the interval of my absence, and there was no opportunity, owing to the bad weather, of ascertaining the true time or rate until Sunday the day of the eclipse. Comparison of clock and chronometer :— heemsesecs h. m. sec. h. m. sec. h. m. sec. Clock, 20 41 00 21 28 OO 22 28 00 24 6O OO Chron. 20 22 10.13 21 09 08.13 22 09 05.6 23 41 01.07 Clock, CO 45 00 1 45 00 3 05 00 4 19 00 Chron. 00 25 58.4 1 25 56 45 52 3 59 48.5 In addition to the foregoing observations, the following measure- ments were made of the chord of the obscured segment of the sun with a spider’s line micrometer. The telescope to which it was applied was not mounted on the equatorial, and the measurements were not therefore made with as great accuracy as they could have been under more favourable circumstances. ‘They are, however, appended, that they may be examined and used if of any value. The value of the micrometer, as before stated, is .45191"' for each division. By taking a mean of several measurements of the sun’s diameter when on or near the meridian, say .452". | 1 44 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE Time by Chronometer. Div. of Micrometer. Time by Chronometer. Div. of Micrometer. hy | ams sec. h. m. sec. OY BF. No 1087 oi iG. 3 2516 53. 20 1288 18 08 2451 54 20.2 1434 19 58.4 2373 yay 1 1530.5 20 36.3 2305 56 822.3 1701 21, 34 2219 a7 96 1844 23 38 1892 58 36.2 1931 24. 22 1827 59 36.2 2040 20. 08 1724 1 00 08.4 2095 25 56 1616 04 «58.4 2489 26 - 30 1520 05 42.3 2543 27 08.4 1409 13 58.4 3064 28 10 1241 14 44 3102 28 52 1053 2 USO 2839 297 2S 946 14 16.2 2750 29 42.4 792 15 30 2647 30 «26 502 Loy 26 2580 The following measurements were made of the versed sines of the unobscured part of the sun’s disk. The difficulty of measuring these accurately, was much greater than of measuring the chords; in those the perpendicular hair could be made to coincide with the angles of the disk, and there was no doubt of the measured line being perpen- dicular to the parallel lines of the micrometer. In measuring the versed sines, the eye alone could decide, except so far as it could be aided by first bringing the perpendicular line to coincide with the angular points, and then moving the telescope in azimuth to bring the parallel wires on the concave and convex parts of the crescent; but this line changed its angle with the horizon so rapidly, that little assist- ance could be derived from this practice. Time by Chronometer. Div. of Micrometer. h. m. sec. 1 17 40 2915 21 12 2762 ah Alfs) 2150 39 — 28 1833 48 16 1381 50). 28 1263 2 os 48 378 14 oO 257 20 24 431 are} Oe 1050 4l 47 1531 3 06 04 2821 09 46 3011 SOLAR ECLIPSE OF NOVEMBER 30, 1834. Q45 Time of beginning and end of Solar Eclipse of November 30th, 1834, observed at Cincin- nati, Ohio. By Elisha Dwelle, Surveyor-General’s Office, and John Locke, M.D. INA Ne GES. Observed time of beginning, Oe ee sOo7/ End, 2 49 39.7 There were a few clouds in the morning, but by eight o’clock they were nearly dissipated, and the weather was in every respect favour- able for observation. The thermometer, in the shade, sunk during the observation from 46° to 44°, but rose afterwards to 48°. Venus was distinctly visible, and Antares and Lyra were seen by some observers. Observations made on the 30th of November 1834, at Nashville, Tennessee. By James Hamilton, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the Nashville University. The day was unusually pleasant, and as not a cloud was visible, the opportunities of observation were very favourable. ‘The situation of observation was at the University buildings, about three quarters of a mile east of south from the public square of Nashville, in latitude 36° 9’ 32’.66, as is believed from many very careful trials, and in longitude about 5 h. 47 m. 16 sec. west. The latitude of the square, as determined by circumpolar stars, is about 36° 10' 7". ‘The local time was obtained by equal altitudes of the sun, taken by a superior sextant, previously adjusted with much care. ‘The time of the sun’s passage through the wires of a transit instrument, not adjusted how- ever precisely to the meridian, but of which the deviation had pre- viously been ascertained, was also noted to obtain the error of the chronometer. The result differed from the former but one-tenth of a second. Unfortunately, in ascertaining the error of the chronometer, the beginning of the eclipse was not observed, but the end was looked for with unremitting vigilance, and occurred at 2h. 41 m. 45.2 sec. vou. V.—3 M 246 COLLECTION OF OBSERVATIONS ON THE The telescope used for observation was one of Dollond’s refractors; the power used was 50, which was preferred to the 80 or 100, because it gave a much clearer view than these latter. Venus was seen during one hour and three quarters. ‘Two ther- mometers, Fahrenheit’s scale, were placed in the stin, one of which had the bulb covered with thin blackened paper. Another thermom- eter was suspended on the north side of a brick building, and was of course in the shade. Thermometer in the Sun. Time. J) ETI, Th SGD, Barometer. Naked bulb. Blackened bulb. h. m deg deg. deg deg 11°23 66.5 82.5 47 29.710 33 67 87 47 710 43 69.5 87 47 700 53% 70.5 87 47 695 R203 72 87 47 670 13 69.5 80 47.5 662 23 66.5 76.5 48 658 $3333 66.5 75 47.25 650 43 66 Meno 48 640 53 66 71 47 638 1 03 63 64.5 46.25 630 eS 59.5 59.5 46 630 23T 56.5 56 45.5 625 33 57 BY 45 618 43 So 59.5 45 610 53 61.5 64.5 46 610 203 64 69 46.5 620 13 66.5 69.5 48 620 23 68 fB 48 610 33 68 73 48 600 43t It will be seen from these observations that the naked thermometer in the sun continued to rise until ten minutes after the eclipse began, when it stood at 72°. That the blackened thermometer had then risen to 87°, and that at the greatest obscuration both had fallen to nearly the same degree; the naked thermometer to 56.5° through 15.5°, * Eclipse begins. + Greatest obscuration. t Eclipse had ended. SOLAR ECLIPSE OF NOVEMBER 30, 1834. QA47 blackened to 56° through 31°. ‘The thermometer in the shade fell only two degrees, from 47° to 45°. ‘The changes of the thermometer in the shade, as well as of the barometer, present some anomalies, no doubt caused in both by the sudden diminution of heat. ‘The descent of the mercury in the barometer generally continues with much uni- formity until about three o’clock, when it reaches the minimum posi- tion. On this occasion it rose a little about two o’clock, and after twenty minutes fell again. At twenty minutes past one o’clock a lens one foot in diameter, whose principal focal length is two feet, was not able to collect sufficient rays to burn blackened paper, though perfectly dry; but when brought to bear upon the bulb of a thermometer for two minutes, caused a rise from 54° to 57°. beep sab ih wegen? aU ale a iwi, a ri hauler: $i mo: Jgialoeds, it ie: vas ee ial inti ott vl? t¢ aeyanntts mn, ‘ th a Ke: PPE hi" nnd 7 Yi Battista sift sia agree 20) ony Roc ttt) sub} he 10 ee ito | r 5 ea Lord agh anes mohbur ahha abba ni Levies lati #0 ey RARE REOS Hivesinayy Toran Mae Ae And Coarunnpit’ bj ona at ba yaa ha’ isin NF aN, Aisne ein as h fat} Bie Nei ; atl seve Fahad iw i A isaiia fanny ign cor pe mca ie bpd bad: Mant t ate ig e) Raed, beni) ele ind ah wi The if +. dt agit ah Pr nd nia Taos ba wer. me A! Eaaeitn Amy pa ARTICLE XII. De Lingua Othomitorum Dissertatio; Auctore Emmanuele Nazera, Mexicano, Academie Litterariey Zacatecarum Socio. Communicated to the American Philosophical Society, 6th March 1835. Waves Pring. InTuENTI mihi, viri gravissimi, antique Mexici victas Divinitates, et quas natura, benigno sub quo primam ego lucem vidi ceelo, liberali manu donavit divitias, vestra hac domu, a vestro nimis noto erga antiqua nationum monumenta studio collectas, pulcherrimoque ordine compositas, atque ibi illius que Anahuac fuit, mihi spolia contemplanti, ita vivida dulcis patriz subiit imago, ut me in ejus sinu potius, quam ab ea exulem, inter pristinas Mexici Penates, magna cum voluptate, esse credebam. Meos anté oculos tune temporis, magnificentissimum Ten- oxtitlanis templum ab impia pietate, cujus nescio, sed cultissimi tamen veterisque populi arte constructum: Cholule columna, multis ab hinc seeculis, ut, jam oblite rei, a natione nunc etiam oblita, memoria num- quam periret, edificata: Popocatepec, albo nivis linteo, quasi chlamyde coopertus, venerabile mari terraeque caput demonstrans: horti, depictis floribus ridentes, 4 lasciviantibus auris suavitér impulsi, statimque re- pulsi, hine illincque aquis, ut Veneris olim filize, supernatantes: horri- VOL. V.—3 N 250 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. dum, lato ore, ignem cineresque evomens, quibus nescio iris, Xurullum : Mexicus, mea illa vita charior Mexicus, lactibus, canalibusque circum- data: ipsi illi lacus, et canales innumeris cymbis, a puellis Indianis, nigro capillo, et nigris oculis pulcherrimis, super fructuim olerumque throno sedentibus, suavi voce, et suaviori lingua, hereditate ab earum avis recepta, antiquas historias, virginaies amores, et Mexici antiqui fata canentibus, lamentantibusque, remigio gubernatis, arati: sacra robora, Hircaniis etate paria, Tenoxtitlanis civitatem, ut vigiles ac custodes, circumcingentia: Chapultepeci mons, cujus in nemore, nihil aliud nisi passerum modulamen, ac rivorum triste murmur, antiquorum regum, quorum ibi silentia oblitaque sepulchra jacent, manes pertur- bat, ex aquis apparentem urbem contemplatur: urbs, denique, Mexicus illa, ubi adhue Moctecuzome regali veste, regali visu, regali majestate conspicui circum augusta umbra vagat; ubi Cortesii strenui, reges debellantis, nationes antiquas expugnantis, gravis, virilisque aspectus, et nunc videri, videtur; ubi miserrimi, non tamen lugendi sed admirandi Guatemozii, ex equuleo, ejus a secretis viro calamitosum eorum casum ipsiusque dolores, ingentibus clamoribus lamentanti, dicentis, “ Num- quid et ego in rosarum lecto occubo?” vox Romano digna, auditur: ubi tandem et quia victor et quia victus, Hispane Leo, rugire tu audire: tuque, Mexicana Aquila, mea dulcis mater, et victa et victrix, tuos sub alis filios congregas ac foves; ubi eo undé venerunt, tot guberna- torum imperia, quot, paucis annis, apparuerunt, repenté arrepta rediisse videmus. En que meos ante oculos, cumulatim pretereunt. Qui non tune Mexicani cordis sensus? quos animus motus non experietur? Nam optimé ille philosophus: vel ipsi patriz lapides cari. Et sic Themistocles, apud Metastasium, regi interroganti, quid tantum amaret in Athenis, mirabiliter respondit: ‘“« Tutto, signor: le ceneri degli Avi, Le sacre leggi, i tutelari Numi, La favella, i costumi, Il sudor che mi costa, Lo splendor che ne trassi; L’aria, i tronchi, il terren, le mura, i sassi.”’ Quis vero, viri gravissimi, ex Mexicanis, ave istis patric exuviis dicat quin et vobis illas conservantibus, gratias, easque quam maximas, referat ? ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Q51 Ecce vobis, que tantum mihi animum tantamque addidit audaciam, ut ante vestram sapientum coronam,ad me, gratum erga vos, exhibendum sistam, rationem. Quod vero, vobis dignum donum, imo, non indig- num, ex me devovere possim? Liceat mihi, et que pauper possum ante Minerva, cujus vos sacerdotio fungitis, aras offerre. De Anahuac que dicturus sum agent, et illa etiam mihi cara, que juventutis oblec- tamenta fuerunt. Sunto nunc exilii spolia opima, ea si vobis placeant. De antiquitatibus ergo Mexicanis orationem habiturus, non semel, sed pluries, dummodo id vos mihi concedatis honoris, ab ea lingua exordiri volo qua, licet magis ab omnibus barbara habeatur, minus recentibus formulis implicata, multe statis, agrestem vultum, multo- rumque seculorum ab hoc nostro, simplicitatem pre se fert. Non enim dulcis, ut Tarasca; non dives, ut Mexicana; non facilis, ut Hu- asteca ; sed ea dura, jejuna, ori ingrata, aurique ingratior: nil in ea non rusticum, nil non vastum, nil non inconditum. Populus, eam qui loquebatur, non cultus, non ullo disciplinarum genere perpolitus, inter septentrionem orientemque, in Anahuacensi plaga, vitam pauperem, feré sylvestrem degebat, nunc vero, hine illincque divisus, a2 prima eorum sede, ab Hispanis exules, non meliorem pristina, miserrimis pagis, vivunt illi. Korum ipsi linguam, Ai@hew nominabant, quod nomen fortassé Germani scriberent Miang-hiung. ia apud eos, quod Latinis sermo; Hiu vero sedere, manere, quiescere, vult. Quapropter Hiahiu, sermo qui quievit, interpretandum, verborum sensus postulat fidus. Quz hujus cognominis causa? Numauid alii inter eos populi iter facientes, alias loquentes linguas, diversos illis sermones sucessive don- arunt? Sed tune illos propriam hospitibus donasse, non alienam ab hospitibus recipisse, credere oportet. An potius illi ipsi, multas dis- tracti per terras, nunc hune, tum illum ediscere sermonem, veterem frequentér exuere, novumque induere, coacti sunt? Sed si eorum lingue, pacis tranquillitatisque nomen imposuére, seipsos errantes, peregrinos, appellaverunt. Othomi enim, ita interpretandum: Otho, nil; mz, sedentes; nomen valde proprium, quibus nec etiam sub Mexica- norum Hispanorumve imperio, sedere licuit. Undé ergo illi? Quas terras peragrarunt? Quas linguas ediscerunt dedisceruntque? Quam tandem Hiu, sedentem, denominabant? En que eorum 4 lingua, 252 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. petenda, si prius ejus natura develanda cognoscendaque erit. Atque iterum, an hee ex earum numero, lingua erit que imminute, vel ex lis que aucte Anahuacensi sub celo haberi debet? Nulla ne ibi soror? Non etiam ejus Mater? Sine dubio, nobis certo certits illud esse potest, Mexicanam, Tarascam, Huastecam, Tarahumaram, Zapo- tecam, Matlatzingam, Pirindamque linguas alias omnino ab Othomitica, alium proindé earum originem esse. A Mexicanis vero eorum domi- nis, Huastecisve eorum vicinis, quod unicé poterant, id acceperunt, nempé, conjugandi artificium ; cetera verd omnia si non integra, saltem incorrupta a patribus recepta, Othomiti, quod postea videbimus, serva- runt. Rudis illa, tamen nescio quid venerabile, antiquum redolens, lingua. Si quis vero, ad barbaros homines, de barbarorum linguis moribus- que, examinationem mandandam credat, ille Terentii dicentis, “nil a me humani alienum puto,” meminerit, et quomod6 homines veteribus fuerunt etatibus, scire non dedignabitur. Preterea, quos antiqui Indi modos, ad linguas perpoliendas ornandasque adhiberunt, Philologia optimé, nune temporis, noscit, historia edocet, philosophia intellexit ; interest ergo ut nunc et quo ille lingue pristino in statu fuerint, eadem perfectione agnoscamus. Neque sua illi Othomitico pulchri- tudo deest: non quidem lenis, luxurians, nitida, sed ut rupes nuda, aut senex robur, ita quid asperum sed sublime videtur. Que quis pul- chra non judicabit? Utrim aliquando scripta hec Othomitorum lingua fuerit, quodve scripture genus habuerit, presenti tempore, discutere, ullo sine fructu, cum certé illa scriptura, si unquam extiterit, cognita non sit, esset. Itaque de lingua numquam scripta, loquuturus, non de litteris, sed de sonis qu de ejus alphabeto dicenda sunt, me agere velle necessum puto. Quingue vocalium literarum, a, e, 7 vel y, 0, uw (uw Hispanici vel ou Gallici), sonos, diversummodé tamen expressos, habent Othomiti. A, enim aliquand6 ex pectore exiens a nasu finalitér exprimitur, aliquand6 vero in gutture incipit, et repentino hiatu secatur, qui sonus agrestis, hispidusque est quem Ludovicus de Neve y Molina, voce Hispanica, hueco, Quintilianus fuscam vocem vocat; aliquando tandem naturali, claroque sono, profertur. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 253 E, tuné longissimé protrahitur, quasi balatum ovium imitans, undé Ludovico Neve y Molina hunc sonum ovejuno, quod Hispanicé ovillum sonat, vocare placuit; nunc vero gutture pectoreque incipiens, gradatim voce elevatur, cumque fortior est, repenté quasi per aera diffusus, dis- paret; quem sonum gutfuralem nominare possumus. Hic enim é gut- ture natus, ascendit ut a nasu occidatur, quem sonum nasalem vocabi- mus; illic verd nulla gradatione, zequali voce, ut ¢ Gallicum et a vel ay Anglicum profertur. I, duplici sono exprimitur; primo quidem naturali nobisque com- muni; secundo vero nasali omnino, ut Anglorum ing. O, nullo vocis gradu modulatur, semperque ut o Gallicum expri- mendum. U, Hispanicum vel Italicum, aut ow Gallicum semper sit ; non tamen eodem modo proferendum. Aliquando nasu profertur, velut ung Ger- manicum; aliquando vero gutturale, quasi grunnitum porcorum imi- tans; denique et naturali vocis motu dicendum est. 1. Quinque itaque Othomiti Indiani intonationibus, ad vocales ex- primendas utuntur. Prima enim que nimis protrahit sonum, utrim pking Sinensium intonationi similis dici potest, sapientes decernent. Secunda vero ex pectore guttureque incepta, cum fortior, tunc evan- escit ; fortassé khin sinico non discordans. Tertia, & nastis opera acta, chang sinensis nomine avocari, a recto non multum devium iret. Quarta ex gutture oborta, non multum durat, cum repenté dum plus valet rumpatur. Eritne ita ut sinicum ji? Alii viderint. Quinta vero, vix intonatio dici potest: non enim vox ex eA aut au- getur aut minuitur, nec ascendit descenditve ullo ex gradu; semper illa, eadem in via, ut ita dicam, decurrit: ut nascitur, ita vivere desinit. Consonantium litterarum soni ita se habent. B,D, ut apud Gallos, G semper durum, ut apud nos anté vocales a et o; H fortiter exspi- ratum, velut ch Germanorum; M, N, ut apud Gallos et Italos; GN ut n Hispanicum; P, K,R, ultima suavis semper, numquam durum ut R Hispanorum; 8, T, Z, ut Gallorum; W, Anglorum, in water; ph nec ut nostra f, nec ut @ Grecum, sonat; X, semper ut ks; CH ut Anglorum in church. Est et alius illis sonus, qui solum ¢s litteris VOL. Y.—3 0 254 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. exprimi potest. K simplex vel duplex est. Duplex Hispano-Mexi- cani grammatici cc castanuelas vocant, quia ejus sonus similis est stridori 4 simia facto, nuces frangenti. Litteris ce, gq, vel gh oculis pingitur. ‘'T’, aliquando etiam duplo sonitu effertur. Non tamen id satis, cium multa verba incipiunt finiuntque, cimque duobus ex syllabis unum verbum faciunt, medio verbo, et gutturis et nastis, et anhelationis hiattisque intonatione, vocem modulant; que, quomod6 nostris litteris exarari notarique possent? Qua de causa, illi qui pritis de lingua difficile onus scribendi sibi assumpsére, aliquando h, aliquando ng aliquand6 nn, et etiam nug, mm, litteris, ad illa expri- menda usi fuére. Hine enim, liquido constat illud, ni fallor: 2. Nostris, nee Hebreis, Grecisve litteris fing us illa scribi, non nisi difficillimeé potest. 8. Deindé, nulla via nos homonyma verba, quorum varia significa- tio, seu gestibus, seu levi modulatione, expressa, etiam cum loquuntur, nisi ex circumstantibus distingui nequit, separare aut annotare pos- sumus. 4, Sua itaque sui generis scriptura indigeret Othomitorum lingua, si scribenda foret. 5. Ita illius generis scriptura invenienda, que non modo litteras, sed et intonationes ipsas depingeret; nam diversa intonatio uni verbo diversum sensum donat. (Vide annotationem, in fine, sub littera A). Et hoc licet punctis, ut Massoreticis, exempli gratia, assequi, haberi- que possemus, tamen adhuc vacuum nobis implendum esset; nam multa verba iisdem sonis iisdem et intonationibus, non idem significant. He enim, exempli gratia, mons; Aé glacies; he fingere, est. Mout cor: moui anima: mout animi indoles: mouwz animi motus. Vheaw bonus: nheau pulcher: nheau aptus: nheau justus: nheau perfectus: nheau urbanus, aliaque innumera; quapropter: 6. Othomitica lingua, eo scribendi genere indigeret, quo et diversus verbi sensus ex diversis signis animadverti posset. 7. Hoe forsitan, sinicis signis, obtineri liceret. 8. Est, itaque quedam inter utramque linguam analogia. 9. Proindéque, earum natura, non multum dissimilis credenda. Quod quidem, nec affirmare, nec negare audeo; hoe verd quomodd ON THE OTHOME LANGUAGE. 255 possem? illud nolo; sed facta solum exponere meum est; quisque ex iis que sequantur, ea mecum considerabit. 10. Nomina aut una aut duobus constant syllabis, perpauca tribus; hee vero post dominationem Hispanam, ut puto, composita. Que diversis hisce syllabis componuntur ita generis sunt, ut queeque syl- laba pristinum sensum earum quelibet retineat, ac servet. Unde, nomina, que plures quam unam, syllabas habent, ex syllabis aliquid significantibus antea, preexistentibusque, et in compositione earum sig- nificationem haud amittentibus, formantur. (Vide Annot. A.B. et C). Nullum inflexionis genus illa nomina cognoscunt: eumque idem quod nomen, id verbum; idemque, ut nomen substantivum habeatur, particula na, que in ista lingua wnwm, ac etiam, pronomen Zlle, illa, illud, significat, undé articuli vices gerit, afficitur. Non tamen id, nisi cum dubii, vel zquivoci periculo adest. Plurale a4 singulari nomine, cum ya, vel ye aut e discernitur. Ye, vel é pluviam significat, ya particule significatio ignoratur. 10. Una itaque particula sensu carens esse dici potest. 11. Et nomina omnino flexionibus carentia. 12. Nullum nominibus genus. Quod adjectivum, id et substanti- vum est (vide not. D). Adjectivum substantivo preit. Cum adjec- tivum pro substantivo ponitur, na in sa mutatur, ut na nheau, bonitas ; sa nheau, bonum ; na nheau yeh, bonus homo. Sa nil per se significat, significationem adjectivam designat. Particularum auxilio que et tempus et personam indicant, verba conjugantur. ‘Triplexcuilibet tempori particula: que in singulari, ille in plurali numero; unde hic ab illo, pronominum he, nos; wi, vos; yu, ille, auxilio distinguitur. Quatuor supra decem particule ille sunt, sensuque, nunc temporis saltem, ut que apud sinenses vacuz vocantur,* earent. Indicandi, imperandique modos solum Othomiti cognoscunt. Secunda imperativi persona, nulla omnino nota, particulave afficitur, sed diversimodé illa formatur: aliquando enim, verbo repetito, ut Zé, facere, Tete, fac: aliquando veré vel nomine vel verbo adjuncto, non absimili significatione separato, ut O recordari, Op’ho recordari et cognoscere, recordare tu, nempé serzbe (id enim sibi vult Op’ho) et * Remusat, Grammaire Chinoise, p. 35, sect. 62. 256 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. non semel tandem verba illa, facere, exequi, uti, exercere, in executionem mandare, verbo jungenda erunt; sic O recordari sibi, supra ut vidimus, vult, et Kha facere; Okha memento. Quod quidem eam personam conficiendi artificium, ante particularum inventionem usumque, et in- ceptum, anteaque inventum, quis non videt? Undé, 13. Tempus fuit, quo conjugationis, ut nune, artificium in eorum lingua non haberent Othomiti. Veteris forme tempora distinguentis vestigia, adhuc lingua retinet. Quod quidem omnibus Anahuacensibus linguis accidit, ut pristine na- ture non omnia amittant, licet longissimé ab earum origine sint; quod - et aliquando futurum, ut discordiz horridus ille Diabolus, Mexicum cruciare, turbareque fatigatus saltem desistat, mei concives, linguarum earum, proindéque Indorum ortum itineraque reperturos, credere, spe- rareque nos monet. Quamobrem Indi Othomiti, presenti et nunc tem- pore, verborum conjugationi; ma, ni, na adjectiva, aliquando addunt. Non quidem frequens hic usus, antiquior etided. a, preterita res; mi preesens ; mi ventura; ma pa preterita dies, ni pa presens dies ; na pa, futura dies. Illi ergo non semel ita dicunt ni di ma, ego amo: ma da ma ego amavi: na ga ma ego amabo, quod superfluum inutileque est, nam di ma, da ma, ga ma, idem ac sine illis adjectivis, expri- mit. Neque vero, quis illos elegantiz ergo hee addere putet; non enim illi elegantes se curant, neque euphonie causa id faciunt; nam raro illa nomina addunt, et se miseros putarent, si ita essent delicati ut euphoniam quererent! Fortassé multa lingue pars, ut Itali dicunt, se n’andarebbe nella limatura. Eodem conjugandi artificio, Othomiti ac Mexicani ecrum Domini, et Huasteci eorum confines, utebantur, quod animadvertere a re alie- num non est. Eorumne omnium linguz eundem fontem habuerint? eademne, illi ex radice rami germinarunt? Id impossibile, illas cog- noscenti, videbitur. Non enim Othomitos formam eam ad verba con- juganda, initio vidimus habuise. Aliundé quidem illam receperunt; i Mexicana, nempé vel Huasteca, ut videre hac ex collatione, est. En triplex illarum linguarum conjugandi artificium. Chihua apud Mexicanos, Zahja/ apud Huastecos, J’ apud Othomitos, idem tria illa verba, quod facere apud Latinos, sunt. Quo quilibet ex eorum, arti- ficio, ad eum conjugandum utebantur, videamus. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. ~© Mexicanus, Ni chihua Huastecus, V tahjal Ego facio. Othomitus, Di te Mexicanus, Nite chihua ya Huastecus, In tahjal itz be faciebam. Othomitus, Di té hma Mexicanus, Onitla chiuh Huastecus, v tahjamal £ Pe feci. Othomitus, Xta té Mexicanus, Onical chiuh ca Huastecus, V tahjal ace feceram. Othomitus, Xta te hma Mexicanus, Ni chihuaz ? Huastecus, quia tahja faciam. Othomitus, Ga te § Mexicanus, Onitla chiuh Huastecus, Vv tahjamal free Othomitus, Ga xta té Imperativo nulla omnino inter illa et Othomitica verba artificii similitudo. Sed in triplici illa lingua modus infinitivus non invenitur, et in eis futurum imperfectum pro infinitivi.temporibus vices gerit. Ita enim, exempli gratia, hee oratio, Hgo volo facere, reddi oporteret ; in Mexicano, Nieniqui chihuaz in Huasteco, Vie quia tahja in Othomito, Di ne ga té id est, Volo, faciam. Tanti momenti res, ut verba conjugandi artificium, tam simile in linguis sua ex natura tam diversis, casu efformari quomod6 potuisset ? Ejusdem effectus, eadem causa. Ejusdem lingue filias, Othomiti et Mexicani linguas quis credet? Una igitur ex iis linguis ab alia, formam illam, imitatione recepit. Ab Othomitis, vix ad duos conjugationis modos sequendi capaces, Mexicani mille conjugandi verbi modis, gene- ribusque onusti emendicarent? Othomitine sua in linguad omnis com- positionis expertes, verborum formularum donum, Mexicanis syntheti- carum formarum peramantibus et Polysyntheticam linguam vel infan- tem loquentibus, fecissent? Absit. Iterumque hic videmus, quod, VoL. V.—3 P 258 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 14. Ab alienis, Othomiti conjugandi formam receperunt, ac, 15. Suo initio proindé, lingua illa conjugationis formis caruit. Si quis vero, Othomitos Indos conjugandi formam a juvene illa lingua Mexicana, quam et culta natio perfecit, qua miserrimus ille et rex et philosophus Tezcocanus Netzahualcoyotl elegiaco versu, sublimi plectro, ejus omnisque humanitatis casus deploravit, quamque tandem Hispani, floridam, phaleratam, ornamentis luxuriantem, divitiis afflu- entem admirarunt, non recepisse contendat, is veri metam fortassé attinget, etiam si conjugandi artificium Othomitis, agrestem, senem. rugis aratam, voce rusticanam illam que olim in utero, nescio quibus 4 regionibus, Mexicanam illam, gratiosam, et pulchram portavit, quam- que mundo in Anahuac edidit, dedisse existimet. Sed de hoe alias, nil enim ad presens. Mexicana lingua, altera antiquior, conjugare verba Othomitos docuit: esto: quid deindé? cujuscumque illud jus sit, illud rapiat, aut vindicet; non cum eo disputabimus; quanto enim magis, pluresque lingua, primum illarum formarum dominium vindi- cent, tanto certius illud erit, Othomitos aliquando non habuisse has formas, ab eorum lingua alienas, ab eaque proindé, cum de ea judicare velimus, rejiciendas. 16. Othomiti non nisi activa verba conjugant ; non illis passiva, non compulsiva, non casualia, non denique ullum eorum verborum que sive nostris, sive aliis Indianis linguis inveniuntur, genus. 17. Verba illa, unius sunt syllabe, aut ad summum, ducbus syllabis constant (ut videre est in annotationibus sub litteris A et C. 18. Verba que sua ex natura sunt, plures quam unam nunquam syllabam habent; undé imperativi secunda persona alio cum verbo formatur. (Vide Not. C.) Hoc secundum verbum, sensum primo analogum, vel illum intensiorem ut ita dicam, vel extensiorem, secum portat ; quapropter : 19. Omnia verba una tantum syllaba constant, imperandi tempus si excipias, in secunda persona: 20. Secunda hee persona duplici syllaba, duplicem sensum evolvy- ente, constituitur. Preterea, omnia nomina verba esse possunt. Cum enim, substan- tivo verbo careant Othomiti, verbi illius sensus, idem ac attributum, sive, ut scholastici vocant, predicatum, putant; aut ut clarius dicam, ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 259 ad existentiz ideam a re existente distinguendam cum impares sint illi Indi, una simul utramque ideam involutam considerant. Itaque, si Othomitus vult dicere, ego sum bonus, ex nomine nheau, bonus, ver- bum esse bonum significans format, idque conjugat, ut Di nheau, vel Dna nheau, ego sum bonus; undé cum frequenter illa nomina ex - duobus syllabis, ut que ex duplici significatione composita sint, verba habemus duplicis spllabz quidem, sed duplicis sensus etiam conjuganda ; quapropter : 21. Verba ex nominibus facta, dupli syllaba duplicem sensum evolvente, conjugantur, si duplices illa syllabe sint. Cumque hujus- modi verbis, non usus, ut ceteris, secundum verbum vel nomen desig- narit, cumque sine eorum aliquo imperativi persona efformari queat, hee in casu Indi we, quod es vel esto dici potest, nomini in verbum commutato addunt, ut nheau we, bonus esto. ‘Triplex syllaba tunc, sed etiam triplex sensus habebitur, si nomen duplici syllaba constabit, ut memthi, dives, di memthi (aut memthi, et fortasse melius) sum dives, memthi we, dives esto. 3 Sed qua ratione, quis petet, in parvis que de Othomitica lingua, vocabulariis vel lexicis habemus, ut plurimum, verba duplici constant syllaba? Quia, eorum auctores, imperativi secundam personam, ut que pro secunda syllaba, ab aliis homophonis verbis, et distinctior, et determinatior est, ibi posuére, eo, quidem, modo quo nos, nostris vocum indicibus, verborum infinitivum inscribimus. Sanum, laudeque dignum consilium. Non tamen illud, dicet quis, auctores isti, patefecerunt, aut explanarunt. Fecére utique, atque ut alios qui et postea et illius sequentes vestigia scripserunt, ut Sanchez et Rangel omissos faciam, eum, qui melius, hac de lingua scripsit, Ludovicum de Neve et Mo- lina (Anno MDCCLXVII), consulamus. Ile enim, natione Othomi- tus, in ejus de hac lingua institutionibus, pag. 122 animadvertit, ver- bum per secundam imperativi personam cognitum fieri, ut quod hac in persona nil additum illi, nilve subtractum futurum iri credit. Quod ut melius intelligatur, opere pretium est animadvertere, illum impe- rativum quasi radicem verborum credebat habebatque; ex illo enim alia tempora formari voluit. Quo factum fuit, ut obscuré, difficillimé, verbi artificium exposuisset. Nec mirum; omnes enim qui de Indorum linguis scripserunt (paucos recentiores si excipiamus, ut Sandoval, 260 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Avila, aliosque), et institutiones efformarunt, Antonii Nebricensis ves- tigiis adherentes, eas Latinis sub formulis explanare, totis viribus insudarunt. 'Tempora illa ita ferebant. Nec tam eos bené de mea patria deque litteris merentes reprehendendos, quod summe audacize temeritatisque esset, quam ad eos explanandos, istius generis laboribus manum apposul. Sed bene, repones, illis in lexicis, quedam verba illa sine secunda syllaba inveniuntur. Id ut verum fateor: ita enim ea verba a lexicis exhibentur, ut que nec in imperativo, alterum verbum recipiant. Que illa, paucissimo quidem numero, sint verba, et rei causam intelli- gemus. Sunt enim illius illa generis quibus frequentits utitur, et quorum sensus cum alio confundi nequit: ea etiam que difficiliter analogo alio adhererent, ut ¢s¢, manducare; suntque tandem illa que familiari sermone nunquam imperantur, ut fe, senire, dou, mori. Non enim illi miserrimi Othomiti sermone figuris loquente utendi ocasionem habuerunt, non poesi ut Tarasci indulsére; non denique orationes ad populum, ad regum ccetum, ad principes, ut Mexicani, faciebant. Duo hic animadversione digna, sese consideranda offerunt ; unum idque primum, maximo rusticitatis statu Othomitos, longo temporis tractu degisse, alterum, priusquam verba temporibus distinguerent, fuisse tempus, quo nec imperativum distinguendi modum habuissent. 22. Triplex verborum, Othomitorum in lingua, considerandus status, primus cum nullum tempus, nullus modus, nulla persona, in verbis distinguebantur; secundus, cum alii verbi auxilio, verborum imperati- vum formarunt; tertius, cum alienam conjugandi formam receperunt. . Que cum contemplantur, quis non Othomitorum sermonem mini- mé a pristino statu remotum videt? Non temporis spatio confectus, sed ex natura totus ut Minerva a Jovis capite, si me ita explicare liceat, ortus. Praterea, quam non illa sermonis forma antiqua! Quis ergo, quousque in szculis, lingue Othomitice vetusta etas attingit, dicere potest? Utut hee sint, ad verba illa redeamus: ipsa enim nimis sterilitate laborant. Non ex lis participia, non gerundia, non abstracta nomina spectes. Quem enirfi ad modum, quod apud eos adjectivum quando illis placet, substantivum fit, ut sa nheau bonum; na nheaw bonitas, ita eliam verbum ipsissimum, nomen abstractum est, ut madi, amare, ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 261 madi, amor. Hoc enim a madi, secunda persona imperativi sumitur. Inter has voces. differentia, aliquando sententiarum contextu, frequen- tis vero vocis labore procedit. Grammatici leves has articulationis differentias, cum duplici ¢¢, vel litera A, distinguere tentant; sed vani hi conatus; iste vocis differentia, chartee commendari haud facilé pos- sunt. Concreta nomina, verbo #2, facere, hie substantive intelligendo, duo- bus modis formantur; verbo: ista syllaba additur, ut mafe, amator, amans; aut imperativi secunde persone verbum /2 adheret, ut madi (di et fe idem feré significantes), dummodo alterum verbum sensu non repellat: itaque creafor, exempli gratia, dicitur fe¢e, nam ridiculum esset dicere ¢efefé, quod idem esset ac actionis factor factor. Solemne apud eos est, ut foo, qui (relativum), quod hujus modi nomi- nibus preponant, ut too mate qui amat, velamans. Ex dictis liquet, 23. Nulla verbalia proprié dicta, verba habere, et 24. Que sunt, syllaba addita, verbum significans recipere. 25. Adverbia adjectivis a nominibus non. alia sunt. Omne adjec- tivum, igitur, adverbiali sensu intelligi potest, ut.nheau, bonum; nheau, bene, Aliquando, et aliud -adjectivum addere. licet, nempé, theav, omne, ut nheauw theau bonum omne; quod:sonat ut. apud nos bene. est. En puram,ut puto, lingue,Othomitice imaginem: si qui-Indi illius naturam simplicem, ornamenti varietatisque ergo, vitiare conantur, quid de illis parvi momenti adhtc mutationibus judicare debeamus, ex Domino de Neve audiamus...“'Todo Jo qual no pertenece a lo substancial precisamente, nial general uso de todos los nativos, sino a la mayor energia con que hablan los mas cultos, por lo cual, aunque no se observaran estas, reglas, no, por eso. dejaria, de. entenderse lo que se quiere decir,” id est, “Que quidem mutationes ,(nempe. litterarum commutationes, ut ¢ prod in;quorundam verborum preteritis, aliaque hujusmodi), non conveniunt lingue, sua, ex natura :, neque communis loquendi apud Indos usus,,eas; tolerat, nee fert... Noya hee formule, elegantiores ab Indis cultioribus. addite sunt,,ornamenti elegantiaque gratia; id tamen: illis, parvipensis, nequid detrimenti, sensus.linguaye accipiunt.” Quibus in verbis initia corruptionis, linguam deformantia videmus, nam ut illa, melius capiantur, nos-illud scire.debemus, eulti- ores ladinos, hoc est, Latinos, eos Indos in Mexico vocari, non, qui,in VOL.—y. 3 qQ_ a 262 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. eorum linguis instructiores, eorumque morum tenaciores, sed qui et melius hispané sciunt, qui et Hispanorum sermonis formulas et mores affectant. } Que cum ita se habeant, quod de lingua ea judicium faciendum videamus. Nomina, Othomitos apud Indos aut unius sunt syllabe, aut si plures habent, quelibet ex iis sensum pristinum non amittunt (ex paragrapho No. 10), etearum omnia aliquid significant. (Ex numeris 17,19, 21, 23.) Verbalia nomina que vocari possent, aut nullam verbo syllabam addunt, aut si addunt, et sensu nova syllaba haud caret. (Ex numeris 25, 26.) | Adverbia aut ipsissima adjectiva sunt, aut si alteram syllabam reci- piant, hec nomen significans est. (Ex numero 25.) Quotquot itaque syllabe in Othomitica lingua sunt, earum queli- bet, sive per se sit, sive alteri unita adhereat, semper significat, pristi- numque sensum retinet, demptis tamen sex supradecem particulis que, ut apud sinenses, dici possunt vacuis. Cumque ea lingua, cujus omnia verba aut monosyllabica sunt aut ex syllabis pristinum sensum non amittentibus constent, quin pauce exceptiones, cujus pristina sig- -nificatio lapsii temporis oblita est, ad id afficiant, (ut mihi vobisque optimus, preses ille vester, Petrus Stephanus Duponceau, dixit in pri- mis), ut lingua monosyllabica dici debeat, Othomitorum lingua mono- syllabica vocanda habendaque est. Cumque id omnino possibile non sit, ut monosyllabica lingua, a synthetica, minusque a polysynthetica ortum ducat; sine hic fallendi timore, hee stabilire licet. Othomitice lingue origo alias omnino a Zapotece, Huastece, Mexi- cane, Tarasce, Tarahumareque linguarum Anahuacensium, cum hee nunquam monosyllabice fuisse videantur, origine querenda est. Diverse itaque illorum Indorum, nempé Othomitorum, dictarum- que supra tributim, aut siab hine retro multis seculis unius familie filii fuerunt, multis seeculis etiam ab hine retro sejuncti, diversas terras peragrarunt, non eademque via ad Anahuac celum petendum, iter fecére eorum utrique. Othomiti preterea, alicujus nationis, verbis monosyllabis loquentis, aut posteritas, aut hospites. Que illa natio? quo id tempore? Erit ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 263 aliquand6, cum philologia, que secreta illa historiam fugerunt inveniat, ac doceat. Si enim Othomitica lingua monosyllabica dicenda, multa illi homo- phona esse verba necesse est; et sunt quidem illa. Vocalia, non zequali sono dicenda; nec intonationibus, preter sonos, Othomiti indi- gent. Cum vero ille plures esse nequeant, nec illis homophona omnia verba distingui possunt. Qua propter, ex partium dispositione aliisque circunstantibus, verborum, cum lingua voce effertur, significatio pen- det, et notis, ill scripta, ad significationem designandam, opus est. Nostris id nos litteris prestare non possumus. Itaque, sua ille scrip- tura peculiaris invenienda. Ac proindé non ex Hebrei, non ex Greci, nec denique ex recentioribus linguis illa petenda. Non itaque Otho- mitorum lingua, ex iis, undé Hebrea, Greca, Latina recentioresque lingue, fontibus exivit. Ex dictis illud videmus, non monosyllabice nomen linguam eam demereri. . Sed, si ita esset, suo initio omne compositionis genus abhorruisset ? Et quidem cum solum quod illi est, nempé conjugandi artificium, ab exteris alienisque receperit, nulla illi sua ex natura synthetica forma, ac proindeé, nulla hujus generis compositio. Deindé, cum sinensium lingua, monosyllahica, unius nature, ut ita dicam, utraque lingua con- sideranda, atque tune fieret, ut Othomitorum illa sinicis notis scribi posset? Certum id; sed et illud, sinensium scriptura, optimeé excellen- térque prestandum, si opus esset, vidimus. Quapropteér, nec hisce ex partibus, ut monosyllabica habeatur, jure Othomitica spoliatur. Bené se ita res habeant: sed que de lingua Othomitica institutiones sunt scripte, alitér videri videntur de e& eorum auctores cogitasse? Nequaquam, viri gravissimi, sed aliam ab hac illis viam, ut se expli- carent, eligere placuit. Anté omnia, illi linguam ut scriptam consi- derarunt, illi et etymologiam et orthographiam adaptarunt, deindé illas cum orali lingua comparantes, cum unam Niobem, ab alia toto aliquando ccelo distinctam vidissent, ut utraque unam facerent, quod alitér non poterant explicare, syncopen appellarunt. Ego de lingua vocali, illi de scripta, ut loquatur, scripsérunt. Preterea, non in rebus, sed in verbis formulisque, illas explanantibus, eos inter et me est dis- cordantia. Solemne fuit illud de Anahuacensibus linguis scriptoribus, ut eas ad Latinum compararent, totisque viribus coaquarent, nec id > 264 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. solum, sed et Antonium de Nebrixa (celebrem apud Hispanos lingue Latine Grammatices auctorem), ducem sequentes, constantérque imitantes, omnia ad hujus doctissimi viri de Latino institutiones, et regulare et explanare voluére. | Ipsas illi loquendi formulas, quarum magna ex parte, nee ab ipsis Mexicanis comprehenduntur, ex parvulis ‘ chartis a magistris, Nebricensem opus explanandi gratia, scriptis, - assumpsérunt. Hine enim et verborum in Huasteca lingua, passiva vox erupit: et quinque Mexicanorum declinationes, et alia innumera, quz infinitum esset recensere. Que quidem eorum virorum qui nobis multa bona et fecerunt, et curarunt ne perirent, pace dicta, et velim et opto. Neque quis nisi injustitia, impudentiaque plenus homo illud illis vitio vertere audebit. Quis enim Grecos, quis Romanos, barbaros habebit ex eo quod acum nauticam, quod Copernici, Linnei, Neutonii detectiones, ignorarunt? Novum, quidem, iter a Philologia monstratum est; nunc vero tempus, quo et que illos preteriére cog- noseere, et que solum prospexérunt, meridiana luce ponere, et que obscurarunt, dilucidare nune possunt sapientes. Quod quidem quam multi ex Mexicanis, suis illis Anahuacensibus linguis prestabunt, non dubito, illi postquam id cognoscant, quanti apud vos, viros sapientissi- mos, istius generis labor habetur; nam nil apud Mexicanos, tam cordi est aut unquam fuit, quam:eorum patrie et honor, et gloria. Itaque bené si vobis ego, mea fortuna, vestraque indulgentia nunc audierim, quos non ex meis concivibus, vobis de Anahuacensium linguis, historia, natura, e& qua mihi eloquentia, doctrina, et philosophia non licet, erunt loquuturi! . Mihi satis glories obtigisse, si eos anté viam quam illi floribus spargent, irem, et aliquandd ipsos una vobiscum, nobis et linguarum originem, et hominum qui anté nos hoe in novo orbe fue- runt, iter indigitantes, naturaque divitias que, nostris sub solis, affluunt, demonstrantes; et videam et audiam. Utinam, et sub pacis alis et umbra; vestro exemplo,;in Anahuac, sapientes una congregati, quod vos hic pro relligione, pro patria, pro: humani generis salute, facitis, allie: terrarum, aliquando agere: incipiant!)' Me felicem, cim ‘et ut mwestra, mex in Patria, altera academia vestra soror, vestra et amica, -e@ que vosi gloria ‘circumfundit: non indigna;stabilienda erigendaque erit!)) Nascatur illa quantocits; tu verd, hujus Reipublice ornamen- ‘tum et columen, ESTO, PERPETUA: ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 265 Pars Altera. Licer tota in id incumbat Historia, viri gravissimi, ut humani gene- ris acta, sive mortua scripture voce, sive viva populorum traditione, posteritati salva integraque servet, mille tamen de causis, quarum magna nobis pars adhuc est incognita, accidit, ut memoria de multis omnino deperierit, et alia non nisi fabule cantu, nostras ad aures usque, pervenerint. Et multa quidem tenebris sic undequaque fusa sunt, ut nostros oculos fugiant, et quam ea prospicere, potitis nobis suspicari, et vix id, liceat. ‘Tempus invidum, naturaque haud semper sibi constans, foedus inter se, ut quamplurima obliterata facerent, iniisse videntur. Non pauca ex iis philosophia, divinationis quodam, ut ita dicam, numine duce, inveniit: multa in pristinum, multis, eheu! laboribus, sudoribus- que restituit: multa tamen, a longé contemplabat, neque qua via lucem ad ea cognoscenda ducere posset, licet id multotiés tentavit, adhuc detegere potuit. An non hujusmodi, generis humani emigrationes itineraque sunt? Quid enim nobis de hominibus Americam olim habitantibus, antequam noster hic orbis a nostris inveniretur patribus, philosophia hucusque notum fecit? nil, nisi aborigines illos, quos Indos vocamus, licet alio magna ex parte colore (cum alba cutis colore non desint Indiane tribus) eadem ac nos natura homines fuisse. © Qui, vero, illi homines? undé venerunt? qua iter fecére? Hee illam ex- cruciabant: ipsa vero hesitabat, nee que ignorabat docere poterat. Ad historiam illa tune sese vertit; antiquas horum populorum tradi- tiones, confusas, obscuras, et ut sybille oracula, vera falsis miscentes, quesivit, et diligentér indagavit, ac Indorum mores, vetera Anahua- censia monumenta, nunc simplicia et rustica, ut que Abrahami Jaco- bique temporibus erigebantur, tum AXgyptiorum majestate pollentia, et non pauca Greca suavitate et elegantia perpolita, Philosophie His- toria indigitabat ; sed quid aliud, illa ex Mistle Palenqueque Templis, sepulchris, domibus, ubi non Zapotece, non Tcholi, sed alii istis antiquiores populi nobis ignoti, falsas divinitates adorarunt, mortuos VOL. V.——-3 R 266 ON THE OTHOME LANGUAGE. sepeliebant, et vitam degére, nisi illa nuda, solitaria, mutaque facta, philosophiz apparuit? Nihil omnino. Nec ideo tamen philosophia desperavit; sed novam sibi viam aperuit. “ Populi illi,” (sibi ipsi secum illa cogitans, menteque revolvens), dixit : “muti non sunt; illi loquuntur: bené se res habeat; ego eos adibo, auditura ero eorum linguas, aliis et inter se illas comparabo, et ad eos tandem cognoscendos perveniam. Lingue non mentiuntur.’* En novum philosophie munus, et nova humani generi ex philoso- phia beneficia! Quz non ex tune illa, philologie sub nomine, per- fecit! Quot homines celebres non reddidit! Quas eo ex tempore, veritates in lucem prodidit! Nondum enim opus absolvit; illud pro- sequitur, et ad finem usque tandem aliquandd deducet. De linguis enim Anahuacensibus, aliisque illis vicinis, nonne philologiz judicium adhue desideratur? Nobis opus, ut eas illa audiat, comparetque, ut quid tandem de illis sentiendum proferat, decernat, precipiat. Et quo, deus optime, nos illa deducet! quas ipsa veritates omnino novas, incognitasque explanabit, ac docebit! Quis enim unquam Peruvianos inter et Anahuacenses JIndos commercium extitisse, ex historia audivit ? Tamen, tantam inter Tarascam et Quichuam linguas affinitatem, imo potius et cognationem invenimus, que casui ille solum attribuet, qui casualitér ipse cogitet. Quid de Mexican, Hebraiceque linguarum similitudine dicam? _ Illa, licét maxima inter eas sit, adhuc quam pro- bata, potitis suspecta, aut odorata fuit. Itaque, Othomitorum linguze genere jam cognito, illius cum quibusdam aliis novi orbis, deindé veteris etiam linguis comparatio, tim ut ejus natura cognoscatur, cum ut illius origo investigetur, opere pretium est. Illa, ut prima ex parte hujus dissertationis vidimus, Othomitorum lingua monosyllabica ha- benda est; nec cum Mexicana, Cora, Tarahumara, Huastecave aut Zapoteca que per particularum anté et postpositionem, nee cum Qui- chua, Tarasca, et Matlatcinga que per earum interpositionem, non modo synthetic, sed polysynthetice sunt vocande, comparari potest. Unde igitur ejus origo? Est enimverd alia Anahuacensis Monosyl- labica, Mazahut nempé lingua, que ita Othomitice simillima, ut potius que inter eas cognatio, quam comparatio querenda ; quod alio * Languages do not lie.—Horne Tooke. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 267 et tempore et dissertatione, Deo favente, prestabo. Una alterius aut mater aut soror, undé ad alias oratio et mens vertenda sunt. Nihil, igitur, in novo hoc orbe, hujus modi invento, mens statim ad antiquam, venerabilemque Confucii linguam advolat, ac curiositate nimis affecta, earum comparationem instruere desiderat. Si enim Othomita illius roboris ramus avulsus fuit, Indos illos, qui talem ser- monem habent, loguunturque, aut sinensium filii, aut hospites fuisse credi, vel saltem suspicari possunt. En scopum philosophie dignum! Utinam hee facta investigare et has linguas comparare mihi liceret! Sed, me miserum, qui linguam sinensem vix extremis labiis degustavi! Auxilio, tamen, istius lingue grammatices, ab illustri viro Abel Re- musat composite et in lucem editz, aliquam comparationem hance lin- guam inter et Othomitam tentare audeo. Pro sinensi loquetur ipse Remusatius; ego de Othomita solum tractabo. Ultra petent alii; memorem esse me decet veteris sententia : “ne sutor ultra crepidam.” Operi manum admovere incipio. 1. De lingua Sinensi ita Remusatius loquitur, in libro lucidissimo cui. titulus: “ Elémens de la Grammaire Chinoise” (Edit. Paris. 1822), p. 35, sect. 60. “Les mots pris séparément, sont tous invariables dans leur forme; ils n’admettent aucune inflexion, aucun changement, ni dans la prononciation, ni dans lécriture.” Othomitice lingue omniaetiam verba, nulla inflectione mutantur, et ut plurimum, nec diversa effer- untur pronuntiatione, nisi quedam, non multa quidem, que uno modo, cum nomina, alio cum verba sonant, ut ma, amare, et nma, amor, quasi na ma, ille amor, Gallicé, ? amour. Vide supra quod dixi in prima parte hujus Dissertationis, de particula na, que articuli vices gerit. Notanda tamen est hic differentia, sinensem linguam inter et Othomi- tam ; nempé quod prima articulo caret, in altera nunc saltem, si sic in veteri lingua non fuerit, multotiés invenitur. 2. Ibid. sect. 61. “Les rapports des noms Chinois, les modifica- tions de tems et de personnes des verbes, les relations de tems et de lieux, la nature des prépositions positives, optatives, conditionnelles, ou bien se déduisent de la position des mots, ou se marquent par des mots séparés.” Que eadem omnia et evenire in Othomitica lingua jam vidimus, ex prima parte hujus Dissertationis, et iterum ex annot. D. videbimus. 268 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 3. Ibid. sect. 63. “Beaucoup de mots Chinois peuvent étre pris successivement comme substantifs, comme adjectifs, comme verbes, quelquefois méme comme particules.” Idem Othomiticam linguam prestare jam vidimus, ex prima parte hujus Dissertat. Num. 10, 12, 21, et post ex Annot. F. videbimus. 4, Ibid. sect. 70. “Il y a des mots Chinois qui sont toujours ad- jectifs ou substantifs, d’autres qui sont tantét noms et tantét verbes.” Que conveniunt optimeé Othomitice lingue. 5. Ibid. sect. 70. “Le sens des verbes se déduit de la position respective des mots.” Hoc vero in antiqua sinensium lingua, in re- centiori (Remusat, ibid. p. 133), particule tempus verbis designant; quem quidem admodum, pristina etate, ab Othomitis fieri utebatur: nunc vero et personas et verborum tempora particulis Indi isti dis- tinguunt. En secundam, utramque inter linguam distinctionem. 6. Ibid. sect. 71. “Il n’y a pas de signes pour les genres. Beau- coup de noms spéciaux marquent les sexes dans les animaux. On détermine le sens de ceux qui sont communs, quand cela est nécesaire, par laddition de certains mots tels que fou (pater), mou (mater), jin (homo), niz (mulier).” Neque in Othomi ullum ad genus distingu- endum signum. Animalia aut diverso nomine, diverso esse genere cognoscuntur, propriumque illis pro genere nomen, aut verbis fa mas- culus, et niow femina, distinguuntur, ut fa yo canis masculus, niou yo canis femina. 7. Ibid. sect. 72. “Onn ajoute ordinairement aucun signe pour distinguer le singulier du pluriel; on dit indifféremment jin homo, aut homines.” Hoc de antiquo sinensium sermone. In novo quidem (ex sect. 297, p. 112): “ Le pluriel se marque, soit par les particules préposées tehoung ou ftchou, soit par les noms de nombre indéfinis, soit enfin par les particules postposées, toi et hia.” Inter Othomitos, pluralis 4 singulari numero particula ye (pluvia) vel ya, vel e discerni- tur. Singularis suam etiam particulam, na vel ma aut ra, habet, qua sinensis caret, undé hic, parvi momenti quidem, inter eas tertia tamen differentia oritur. 8. Ibid. sect. 79. “Quand deux noms sunt en construction, le terme antécédent se place aprés le terme conséquent, comme ho toung ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 269 fluvii oriens.” E contra vero in Othomitica lingua. Na me nsu, mater virginis. Quarta hic notanda differentia. 9. Ibid. sect. 80. “La régle précédente s’applique a tous les noms composés; ainsi 1 on dit fhidn fsev, cceli filius, hoe est impera- tor.” Othomiti aliquandd hoe oppositum faciunt. Met Dominus divitiarum, id est, dives; Mate amoris factor, id est amans. '. 10. Ibid. sect. 83. “Le substantif, sujet d’un verbe quelconque, ou complément d’un verbe actif, ne prend aucune marque particuliére. Le premier se place avant, et le second aprés le verbe.” Hoc etiam in © lingua Othomitica accidit. Ma dai mé@ na nho, rex amat bonitatem, Indi, ut Sinenses dicunt. (Vide not. F.) 11. Ibid. sect. 84. “Le terme d’une action se marque par des prépositions différentes, suivant les idées d’ ablation, d’ addition, de séparation, ou de réunion qu’elle exprime;” id tam apud Othomitos quam apud Sinenses obtinet. (Vid. not. G.) 12. Ibid. sect. 93. “Ilya des mots qui par eux mémes ont la signification adjective, tels que ¢d, magnus; siad, parvus; hao bonus; ngo malus: quod apud Othomitos idem est, ut da, magnus; ¢s?, par- vus; nho bonus; fso, malus. 13. Ibid. sect. 94. “D’ autres sont des substantifs qui, joints a @ autres substantifs, expriment un attribut, comme ¢hidn ming, celi mandatum :” et hoc Othomiti etiam proprium, ut sz fha cortex patris, nempeé avus. 2 14. Ibid. sect. 95. “Les adjectifs sont soumis 4 la régle des noms attributifs et se placent presque toujours avant le substantif auquel ils se rapportent, comme ching jin, sanctus homo: Othomiti semper adjec- tivum anté substantivum ponunt, ut ka ye sanctus homo. 15. Ibid. sect. 96. “ Quelques adjectifs peuvent étre pris comme verbes, et alors il arrive souvent que l’accent change pour marquer cette nouvelle acception, comme hdo bonus, hao amare; hoc etiam in Othomi, Aa lucescit, hia dictum. 16. Ibid. sect. 98. “’Tous les verbes forment des adjectifs par V addition de ¢ché, comme ssé servire, fché ssé serviens: quod addito fé Othomi prestant. Pe, servire; pe ¢é serviens. 17. Ibid. sect. 97. “Les adjectifs peuvent étre employés comme noms abstraits; ¢@ magnus, thidn td, celi magnitudo:” idem Otho- VOL. V.—3 § Ste. 270 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. miti, da magnus; na da hetsi, magnitudo extensionis in circum, nempé ceeli. 18. Ibid. sect. 100. “Le comparatif s’ exprime par ladjectif au positif, avee ii, hiaz iz, sapiens pre, sapientior.” In Othomi idem cum nra habetur: nho bonus, nra nho melior. 19. Ibid. sect. 103. “ Le superlatif se forme en placant avant I’ ad- jectif un des mots suivans, Ai summum; chin, valde, tchi, summe; tsout, multum:” apud Othomitos etiam superlativum nomen, ex éza, ise multum, summum, antepositione formatur: nho, bonus; fza nho, op- timus. 20. Ibid. sect. 119. “ Les trois pronoms de la premiére personne, les plus usités anciennement, sont Wg0, Ngo, iw.” ‘Triplex etiam pro prima persona, Othomitice lingue pronomen - nga, nga-nga, ngwi. (Vide not. H.) 21. Ibid. sect. 120, “ Pour éviter le pronom de la premiére per- sonne, on se sert quelquefois de son petit nom ;” Othomitis etiam, pro- nominis loco, humili utuntar nomine, si ad superiorem; autoritatis, si ad inferiorem ; amicitie et benevolentiz,si ad equalem loquantur: ut, ni bete bi ye wi. Mi, tuus; bet, servitii factor, id est serviens ; bi, ille, ye, obediet ; wz, tibi; que omnia hee significant: ego obediam tibi. Mi tha i e wi, tuus pater precipit tibi; pro, ego precipio tibi: Mi be ima wi, tuus amicus amat te; id est,egoamo te. (Vide not.I.) Quem loquendi modum et Mexicani aliique Indi, Mexicanas habitantes terras habuerunt servantque: nec mirum; antiquis mos ille populis, ut He- breis, fuit. (Vide not. H.) 22. Ibid. sect. 126—129. “Les pronoms de la seconde personne ne sont guére plus fréquemment usités que ceux de la premiere. Ceux qu’ on trouve ordinairement dans les livres sont evil, jou, jo, tseu ; dans la langue moderne ni (sect. 317, p. 119).” Ab Othomitis se- cunde persone pronomen hujusmodi exprimitur: Au, vel wi, tu; n-wi, nuvi, wi, tu; nec major apud Indos, cum ad superiores loquuntur, quam apud Sinenses usus. 23. Ibid. sect. 132, “Le pronom de la troisiéme personne s’ ex- prime par khi, 7, ou kioue, et tehi.” Hoc in veteri sina; in novo vero, (Sect. 321, p. 122.) “Le pronom de la troisiéme personne est tha.” ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Q71- Tertium Othomi pronomen est nu, ni, wi, vel 7. Bi et wi, ille, et illi et illum significant. 24, Ibid. sect. 321, page 122. “Le pluriel se marque en ajoutant, aprés le pronom personnel ou I appellatif qui en tient lieu, l’ un de ces mots, mén, mei, quilibet; pét, ordo; ngo ego; ngo mén nos:” quod de recenti Sinensi lingua intelligi oportet, nam in veteri, nil simile nobis apparet. Pluralis pronominum numerus ita apud Othomitos fit: prime persone additur he, ut nga, ego; nga he, nos: secunde terti- que persone pronomen, si bis repetatur, pronomina pluralia habebimus. N-we, tu; N-wewe, vos; hu, tu; n-wehu, vos; wi tu; nui tu, nurwe vos; nu ille; ni ille; nunt Wh; wi ille; nw, illi. Aliquando vero, quod illis singulare, id plurate. 25. Sinensis lingua possessiva pronomina non habet; Othomiti vero illis non carent: ma meus, ni, tuus, na suus. Quinta hic differentia inter illos habemus sermones. 26. Ibid. sect.145. “ Le prouiom conjonctif, sujet de la proposition incidente, se rend par la particule fche, placée a la fin de cette der- niére.” In Othomi vero fa vel we, anté incidentem posita, relativa pronomina sunt. Hic sexta (minima quidem) notanda est differentia. Q7. Ibid. sect. 151. “ Les verbes que les Chinois nomment ho fseu sont, comme les substantifs, de deux sortes; les uns toujours verbes par eux mémes, et les autres alternativement verbes, noms abstraits, adjec- tifs, ou méme particules, suivant la place qu’ ils occupent dans la phrase, et les marques de rapports, qui peuvent s’ y trouver attachées.” Etiam in lingua Othomiticaé quedam verba sua ex natura verba sunt, ut fe, senire ; ma, amare; alia vero et nomina substantiva et adjectiva, et verba et adverbia sunt: ut nho bonus, nho bonitas, nho bene, nhd bonus esse. (Vide not. E.) Sed, non ex positione, sed ex particulis, in Othomi distinctio facienda; na nho, bonitas; sa nho bonus; di nho bonus sum; nho, bené: etiam aliquando ex sensu vel positione, eorum natura cog- noscenda; ut ma nho, mea bonitas: nu nho ye ille bonus homo: di buy nho, ego vivo bene. Undé neque hac via tam longé a Sinensi, Otho- mitus sermoest. Minus enim erit,si animo illud advertimus, quod in recentiori Sinensi lingua: 28. Ibid. sect. 302, page 113. “les adjectifs (in nova lingua Sinensi) sont souvent accompagnés de la particule ¢i.” Sic in Othomi WT gt Se aes Q72 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. particula sa, aliaque conjunguntur. Ac preter dicta illa, ut in novo Sina ait Remusat, page 136, 137, esse signa temporum, et sic est in lingua Othomitorum ; hoc tamen discrimine, quod hec in Sina tempus solim, in Othomi et tempus et personam indicant; (Vide not. C.); quod cum Othomite lingue, sua ex natura, minimé convenit, sed ab aliena, ut jam vidimus, probabilitér ortum est. Septima hec inter utrosque sermones differentiam adnotari meretur. 29. Ibid. 152,153. “On a coutume de faire |’ ellipse du verbe substantif, toutes les fois quil s’ agit seulement @’ attribuer une qualité 4 un sujet. Quand il s’ agit d’ attribuer plus positivement 4 un sujet une qualité qui emporte I’ idée d’ une action, on se sert du mot wéi qui peut se rendre par éfre.’ Hee in Sina; in Othomi, duplici illo casu, triplicitér fit; aut ellipsi oratio afficitur, ut nga méti, ego dominus divitiarum ; id est, ego sum dives; aut adjectivum particulis ad verbum transit, ut di vel ga méti; aut we particula utitur; hoc rard, tamen, nga we méti. 30. Ibid. sect.169. “ L’adjectif verbal actif se forme par l’addition de tché.” Sic apud Sinas; apud Othomitos per ¢é additionem, ut non semel dictum est. 31. Ibid. sect. 170. Particula kho verba sinica passiva facit; quod verborum genus Othomiti non habent. Octava et hec inter eas linguas enumeranda differentia. 32. Ibid. sect. 174. “Il y a des mots Chinois qui ont par eux mémes le sens adverbial, soit qu’ ils marquent des circonstances de temps ou de lieu.” Et id Othomitica habet. (Vide not. K.) 33. Ibid. sect.176. “On forme a volonté des adverbes, en ajoutant aux adjectifs ou aux verbes la particule yan, qui signifie ainsi.” Omnia adjectiva apud Othomitos, adverbia sunt, cum loquenti placet: cognos- cunturque in oratione, sive eorum ex positione, sive ex hd, (omne) nominis additione. 34. Ibid. sect.177. “Comme les adjectifs et les autres noms attri- butifs se placent ordinairement avant le sujet auquel ils tiennent lieu de qualificatifs, de méme les verbes et les expressions simples ou compo- sées, modificatives ou circonstantielles, ont coutume de précéder le verbe dont ils spécifient action. Cette observation fait voir comment des substantifs ou des verbes peuvent étre pris adverbialement, d’aprés ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Q73 la place qu’ ils occupent dans une phrase, et sans qu’ il soit besoin d’ aucun signe particulier.” Quid simile Othomi habet: homo bené loquitur ; ita reddi potest hee oratio: ye hia nho ; ye, homo; hia, loqui- tur; nho, bené, aut bonum: ye nho hia; ye, homo; nho, bonus; hia, loquitur: homo bonus est (dum) loquitur. Sed frequentius adverbium, verbum modificans illi postponitur, ut primo viditur in exemplo. 35. Ibid. sect. 179. “Les prépositions proprement dites veulent en général étre placées immédiatement avant leur complément.” Hoc ipsissimum in Othomi evenit. 36. Utraque earum lingua conjunctivis eodem utitur modo. 37. Ibid. sect. 371. “Les interjections les plus usitées sont au commencement de la phrase.” Hoc in Sinico recentiore; et illo etiam in loco in Othomi collocantur interjectiones. 38. Ibid. sect. 284, page 107. De recentiore lingua iteram, Re- musatius dicit: “Pour obvier aux inconvéniens qui resulteraient, dans la langue parleée, de la multiplicité des termes homophones, et des mots qui peuvent étre pris comme verbes ou comme substantifs, on y fait fréquemment usage de mots composés, lesquels sunt formés d’aprés divers procédés. Les plus communs sont formés de la réunion de deux termes synonymes, dont I’ un n’ ajoute rien au sens de l’autre, mais sert seulement a le déterminer, parce que I’ équivoque, possible a l égard de chacun d’ eux en particulier, ne |’ est pas a l’ égard du mot dissyllabique qui resulte de leur groupement.” Hoe etiam apud Othomitos componendi artificium invenitur; ita tamen, ut non nisi cum dubii et equivoci periculum est; itaque si dixero di ne de, impossibile est ut quo ego indigeam intelligatur, De enim, et aquam, et ovum, et vestem significat. Dz ne opto; de, et aquam, et ova, et vestem? Hac de causa, dicitur, deke; he frigus, et frigidum significat; ye longus, deye vestis est; et ita feré omnia nomina: sed inter Othomitos secundum nomen, non nisi quando equivocum fieri potest pronuntiatur. Itaque non dicam di tsi dehe ego bibo aquam, sed solum di tsi de, quia nec ova, nec vestem bibere possum. En quidem totius hujus Indianz lingue inextricabilem labyrinthum, @ quo vix sese liberare potuerunt qui de hujus lingue grammatica in- stituére. Hoc tamen intellecto, facillima illa, et pulchra etiam apparet, yoL. V,—3 T Q74 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. lingua, et ab antiquis Mexicanis, et 4 novis, tamquam barbara despecta, ab exteris ignorata, aut incognita. 39. Quem quidem ad modum nomina componuntur, ita etiam verba, utraque in linguacomposita sunt: Sic Remusatius de recentiori lingua Sinensium, sect. 343 p. 130, loquitur: “On réunit fréquemment en- semble deux verbes synonymes ou trés analogues dans leur significa- tion, comme cela a lieu pour les substantifs, et par le méme motif.” Ita apud Othomitos etiam fieri ex prima parte hujus operis vidimus; hee tamen cognoscenda differentia, quod a quibusdam Othomitis, hoe solim ad imperativum formandum prestatur, ab aliis omnibus id tem- poribus servatur. Quare, et ipsi scriptores eum sequuntur usum, quem apud diversos Indorum pagos invenerunt. Andreas Olmas,* qui reli- gionis elementa in Othomi, seculo decimo sexto, explanavit, dissylla- bicis loquitur verbis ; Ludovicus de Neve et Molina,t unica ea syllaba conjugabat; Yepes,{ priusque illo Ramirez,? eos audierunt Indos, qui magistrum habuerunt, eumque Andreas Olmas. Itaque, quidam Indi dicunt, di madi, ego amo: alii vero di ma: ma@ enim amare, et di exequi, est. Mirum quidem, tamen certum; in Othomi et veteris et novi Sinensis vestigia inveniuntur. (Vide not. T.) 40. Preter ea, in novo Sinensi imperativo nulla particula est, et id etiam in Othomi. 41. Ibid. sect. 358. “L’impératif quand on parle a des inférieurs s’exprime en mettant le pronom de Ja deuxiéme personne avant le verbe;” in Othomi tamen, licet eadem sit, hee verbi forma, pronomen aut antea aut postea ponitur. 42. Ibid. sect. 359. “ Par urbanité on fait ordinairement précéder Y impératif du mot thsing qui signifie prier, inviter.” Othomiti im- perativo verbum sa, placeat, vel da concede, anteponunt. * Oraciones y Doctrina Cristiana, en Lengua Otomi. Mexico 15—. Hoe opus in Bib- liothecis civitatis Philadelphie non invenitur. + Reglas de Orthographia, Diccionario y Arte del Idioma Othomi; breve instruccion para los principiantes, que dicté el L. D. Luis de Neve y Molina, Catedratico, &c. = Mega; 1767. In Bibliotheca Societatis Philosophice Americane. + Catecismo y Declaracion de la Doctrina Cristiana en lengua Otomi, compuesto por el R. P. Fr. Joaquin Lopez Yepes, Predicador apostolico, &c, Megico, 1826. In Bibliotheca Dni Duponceau. § Ramirezii opus Philadelphie non invenitur. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Q75 43. Ibid. sect. 367, p. 141. “On fait fréquement usage (in novo Sina), d’adverbes composés, soit de la répétition d’ un méme mot, soit du groupement de deux verbes synonymes.” Id ipsissimum apud Othomitos contingit. (Vide not. K.) Nil momenti hac de re omissum credo; feré quidem totum Re- musatii opus doctissime societatis ob oculos posui. Octo solum ex capitibus he due lingue discordant; in aliis plerumque concordes esse videntur. De numeris nil diximus, quia nulla inter utriusque linguz numeralia nomina existit affinitas in sonis (Vide not. L.) Quod evidentér probat Othomitos illa nec a Mexicanis, nec a Huas- tecis accepisse. Quid hoc sibi vult ignoro ego, et ingenueé fateor; fortassé cum alia dissertatione, de hujus ees historia agam, con- jecturis investigare aliquid licebit. Sed fortassé querendum est, utrum nulla in utriusque lingue verbis, ut in grammaticze ents, et linguarum natura cognatio? De hoc judicent alii; prasertim quia lingue Sinensis vera pronuntia- tio nunquam meas pervenit ad aures; aliqua tamen verba vobis offero, ex Remusatii grammatica fidelitér extracta, que cum analogis verbis Othomiticis juxta positis, comparare poteritis; quod difficillime fiet igno- tis vocalium sonis, qui litteris exprimi nequeunt; accentus, aliaque signa paulum adjuvant. Qui voces Sinarum Othomitorumque non audierunt, haud facilé de similitudine inter sonos earum judicare pos- sunt. Ou Gallicum hic stat in Othomi pro w Hispanico. Sinice. Othomitice. Latine. Cho To Qui. Y N-y Plaga. Teou Gou, Mou Caput. Siao Soui Nox. Tien Tsi Dens. Ye Yo Lucidum. Ky Hy Felicitas. Kou Dou Mors. Po Yo Non, ne Na Ta Masculus. Niu Nsou Femina. 276 Sinice. Tseu Tso 'Touan Siao Pa Tsoun Hou Na Hu Mian Kouei Kou Si Y, Medicus Kian Kou Ye Hoa Man Kho Khi Tsoui Jin Ka Ngo Ni Tha Ti i Te Lou Sie Khiu, Lai Hao Othomitice. Tsi, Ti T'sa Khouani Sa Da Nsou Hmou Na He Hmi Ekhoua, Koua Ko I I Te i medicine factor Hia Mou He Hia Ma Nho Tsi Khe, yehe Nho ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Latine. Filius. Perficere. Verus, veré. Irridere. Dare. Honor. Dominus. Ille, a. Frigidus, frigus. Vultus. Diabolus. Vetus. Dolere. Medicina. Medicus. Videre. Dominus. Et. Sermo. Plenus. Dignus. Comedere. Ebrietas. Homo. Audere. Ego. Tu: Tile. Quod, quid? Qui, que. Posse. Iter. Paucus. Venire. Bonus, ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 27/7) Sinice. Othomitice. Latine. I Moui Animus. Ta Da Magnus. Li Ti Lucrum. Pa Pa Capere. Pa Da, ma, na Dimidius. Ho To Quis. Mai Ma Emere. Pa Pa " Desinere. Mou, Mo Me Mater. Qualis ille Othomitorum populus, ex ejus lingua, alia dissertatione, Deo volente, una mecum judicabitis. Nunc vero, ut quanti philologia sit facienda magis ac magis cognoscatur, pauca de illo dicenda. Deum Optimum, Maximum, sublimi nomine appellabant. Okha nempé; O, recordari, et Aha, sanctus, divinus. O etiam apud eos, presenti tempore, aliquid cognoscere significat. Si illud nomen non tam magnificum ut quo Tarasci Deum cognoscebant, nempé Avanda (Ratio personificata), sine dubio tamen, et Mexicano Zéot/ (princeps, excelsus), et Quichu- ano Capac (dives) sublimius est. Licet cceli nomine, non felicitatis locum, ut Idhuicac Mexicanorum, nec rationis domum, ut Mvandaro Tarascarum, intelligant, tamen Mahetsi (latitudo, et extensio in circum), illud vocant; nam hominem immortalem credebant. Nullus enim, quod sciam ego, ex Indorum Mexicanas habitantibus terras, populus, qui hane doctrinam, humanitatis solatium, virtutis adjutricem, crimin- isque extirpatricem et terrorem, pro religione non haberet. O! eum virum philosophiz amantem beatum, cum generis humani traditionem hance ille, hie et ubique terrarum diffusam invenit! Othomi enim, sudi, nempé mortuorum umbras vel manes, religionibus, ut Huasteci elot suos, placabant. Nil tam solemne Othomitis quam commercium inter coelum et terram credere. Illi enim et incantatores venerabant, eosque Yekha, manus sacra (potestas superior) appellabant. _Ilis, idem sapiens qui Magus; undé uno utrosque nomine Bad cognoscunt, quod et Huastecis commune, quibus Huifom et sapiens et Magus est. Cujus in memoriam non et eadem multorum Asiz populorum consue- VoL. ¥.—3 U Q78 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. tudo venit, et cum extensionem celum vocare audit, non sublimem illius canentis sententiam “extendit ccelos sicut pellem” recordatur? Preterea, Othomiti Diabolum, mali principium auctoremque habe- bant; eum @, (maleficum) dicebant; nescio adhuc tamen, utrum illi, ejus ministros, quive illi fuerint, ut Mexicani, qui Bubones ( TZecolo/?), Bubonum duces, Hacailecolotl, i. e. Diaboli, hominum generi quod vo- luntatem pessimam, infensam, interpretes significare adjudicarunt, per- timerent. Nulla usque ad presens, in Othomitorum lingua vestigia, ut cog- noscamus, utrum Indi isti ccelum terramque animatos, ut Mexicani, cogitabant; neque illud invenire possumus, an ut Tarasci Huastecique, Astra, Laresve, quod eorum ex linguis, licet id historia ignoret scimus, adorarent. Othomiti enim Solem, Madi, (lucescere, lux), dicebant; diem HMiaizi, (lux paulatim veniens); stellas vero ¢ze (fulgentia cor- pora) et lunam rzana (corpus rotundum in dimidias partes divisibile), et istius curs menses numeravant. Populus ille numerabilis, quia parvus erat; ut de alio Horatius ceci- nit, eorum ex paucis sunt, qui non sese matrimonii fcedere cum aliis Indorum, Hispanorumve, vel Africanorum nationibus miscuerunt. Eorum paupertas, miseria et ignorantia, non minores quam abhince tri- bus seeculis fuerunt; eorum lingua, sine dubio, ad multa de iis est illis in causa. Faxit D. O. M. ut illi meliora habeant! Olim quidem, eos qui ad Deum é medio tollendum ad barbarorum testimonium appellabant, ad barbaros, irrisionis ergo, Ludovicus Racine, poeta Gallicus, relegabat. Viveret nunc, et philologia eum, miris de rebus que inter barbaros invenire ac detegere potuit, docuisset, certé, barbarorum judicium iste non recusasset, illique ab eo damnati ex tune non fuissent. Sapienter Verulamius, scientias omnes germanas sorores- que, et ab uno omnes illas arbore ramos pronuntiavit, et hoc philologia satis probat. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Q79 Appenvsir. Licet ulterits et temporis et operis, de Othomitice linguz scripto- rum historia instituere mihi sit in animo; quedam, tamen, non multa quidem, nune temporis consideranda sunt. Atque in primis, ut melius quod a me scriptum est, judicari, exami- narique possit, ea animadvertenda sunt. Verba que duplicem syllabam habent, quibusdam Othomitis ab Indis, duplici syllaba conjugari, ut nune fit in Tzecu, et videre est in Joachimi Yepes opere; ab aliis vero, ut Xilotepec degentibus, una tantum syllaba, excepto imperativo, con- jugari, quod Ludovicus de Neve y Molina docet: deindé Lexica illa ita multa nomina scripsisse, ut que, cum monosyllabica sint, dissylla- bica appareant, quia ex nomine et particula unum nomen coalescunt et formant, ut ex sa, vel xa, adjectivi signum, et nho adjectivum no- men, bonum significans, sanho vel zanho effecerunt. Et hae de causa, dicunt illi scriptores, multa in verbis aut nominibus, aut elici aut sup- primi, per syncopen, aliasque figuras. Deindeé, illud evenit, ut ita Othomitam Grammaticam explanarent, ut qui vellent omnia per Nebricenses linguz Latinz institutiones docere. Quid mirum? An non idem in sua de Sinensi lingua grammatica Pater Varo effecit? Sed, possibile ne est, ut monosyllabicam illam Othomitorum linguam esse, illos scriptores fugisse? Ita fuit ut mul- tos de Sinensi seriptores, mandarinum inter et vulgarem sermonem distinguere fugit; primus enim qui distinctionem illam animadvertit, Pater Prémare fuit. Non enim antiqua tempora nostris judicanda sunt. Quare, adhuc genuina veraque Othomitice lingue grammatica desideratur. Faxit enim D. O. M. ut in alicujus Mexicani mentem voluntatemque veniat, ut opus illud aggrediatur! Facilé, optiméque ille sese expediet, si Sinensis Remusatii grammatices vestigiis adhereat. Multi enim, ex meis concivibus, ad id et ad alia etiam majora apti, capaces que sunt. Nec enim nobis desunt viri qui Confucium legunt, intelligunt que, neque illa Mexicanorum ignorantia tanta est, ut qui- dam, qui Mexicum neque geographicis chartis viderunt, pretendere audent, et quidam Mexicani degeneres, (pudet id!) venditant. Quo id consilio, nescio, illi scient; fortassé, id volunt dicere quod Phariszeus 280 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. predicabat: “Non sum sicut ceteri homines.” Eheu! quanta mee miserrime patrie infelicitas! ‘Tempus tamen erit, cum magna illa natio vocabitur habebiturque. Cum enim illa ita se habeant, mirum non est de Othomitica lingua scriptores, sapientes multos fefellisse. Quo enim modo isti viri recté de lingua judicare possent? Hac de causa et Abel Remusat illud statuit, omnes linguas scripturam non habentes, in mutationes, com- positiones, derivata que affluentes et abundantes esse; Petrusque Du- ponceau, in hac Septentrionali Republica Americana, Indianz littera- ture pater, meusque magister, omnes Indianas linguas polysyntheticas pronuntiavit. Abel Remusat, Petrusque Duponceau ; qui iliviri, Deus optime! Quis enim illos, nostre etatis ornamenta, litterarumque columina, ignorantiz accusare audeat? Illi quod scripserunt alii judi- carunt; quod illi scribere debuissent, divinare humanitus non potue- runt. Quod e6 quidem tendit, ut nemo me, sex lustris natum, litterarum- que tyronem, impudentem audacemque habeat, illud agitans, me ut illis meis magistris, (utinam eos ita appellare non demerear!) contra- dicam, scripsisse. Hoc enim et mihi et meo Mexicodebeo. Preterea veritati, gratitudini, et illius debitor sum, ut animadvertam et Petrum Duponceau viam mihi ad hoc scribendum indigitasse, et librorum et magistrature copiam fecisse, ac ipsum tandem, ipsissimum, Societati Philosophice Americanze meum utcunque opusculum, luci mandan- dum commendasse. Nescio enim, utrum senex ille, quinque supra septuaginta annos natus, sua scientia, aut sua hac bona fide major appareat. Hoc quidem illi solum faciunt qui veritatem querunt et amant. Ut melius intelligatur natura, structuraque istius lingue Othomitice, Anacreontis Oden undecimam, in illam vertere ac scholiis illustrare tentavi; que versio invenietur in annotationibus, sub litera M, qua cum fiet conclusio hujus operis. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 281 Arartotandsa. A. In h&e annotatione, queedam homophona, ve! feré homophona verba, exempli gratia adhibentur. Vocalium litterarum nasalem sonum hoc signo (—) designabimus; gutturalem illo (*): protractum, qui dicitur ovillum et solum ad litteram e pertinet, illo (’‘). O lon- gum aliquando signo 0, vel Gallico modo litteris eau, (ut nheaw vel nho, bonus) nota- tur. Soni naturales signis non indigent. Ceteri vero nec litteris, nec signis, nec ullo quidem medo oculorum opera, auribus eorum qui hane linguam non audiére, prastari possunt. A. A meta; scopum attingere. A (a) respirare; vigilare; 4somno revo- care. A (a) dormire; profundus; profunditas; fovea. B. Ba_ uti; usus; mamilla; uber; lac. Ba gignere; genitus; filius; cognatus (Gallicé parent, Anglicé relation) ; vendere. Ba scire. Bay stare ; morare; vivere; arbor. Be furari; fur; a vid recta deflectere. Bé tela. Bé agnatio; cognatus. Bi timere; tremor. Bi sub; infra. Bu insufflare. Buy _habitare. D. Da magnus; decoctum; digerere. Da semen; maturari; maturus; robustus; appositus. Da _oculus; dux; unire. De ovum; aqua; vestis; operire. Dé ardere; senire; jugum; accensus. Dé facere. Do sine; carere; lapis. Du vel tu mori. VOL. V.—3 V G. Ga ego, me, mihi. Go Dominus; Domina ; go thi, Domine Pater. H. Hee littera semper gutturalis ut z et 7 Hispanum, et ch Germanorum ante @ et o. Ha _tollere; portare; debitum. Ha _ et; prohibere. Hay terra. He vestis; aqua; speculum. Hé glacies; gelidum; frigus; frigidus. Hé mons; fingere; fictor. Héy ludere; excavare; veneri operam dare. Hi _sonare; ordiri; texere. Hi aliquid. Hia inquirere; sermo; aspirare; lux. Hia cuniculus. Hiaé turpis; spectare; pandiculari. Hie speculum. Hié anté; supra. Hin non. Hing facilis. Hio latus; decipi; occidere. Hmi facies. Hmu Dominus. Ho _ blandire; occidere. Hog dulcis; honestus ; probus ; nobilis actionibus (Anglicé gentleman ; Gallicé homme comme il faut). 282 Hu nomen; nominare;-clibanus; fornax. Hu uti. Hua ala. Hua _piscis. Huy stabilire; ponere; accedere. Te I venerabilis; dexter, a, um. I (i) dolor. K, Ka sese inclinare; gignere; laborare; uti; exercere. Kay cubare; lectum petere. Ke, ki, khi venerahilis. Tha khy vel Tha-y, Pater (venerande Pater). Kha _ aecipere; adesse; in; apud; habere; evenire, accadere; arripere. Kho colligere; possidere. Kho abesse. Khu manu prehendere. Ki venerabilis; removere. Ké me; mihi; tollere; plumas evellere; excoriare. Ko strepitum facere; sonare; cadere; imago. Koy representare. Ku levis. Kuo (monos.) ira; irasei; iratus; via, (cujusque rei spatium quo alia induci potest.) Kuy (monos.) sapere; sapor; aliquid facere; currere. M. Ma _ emere; vendere; dic; portare, afterre, latus, a, um; excellens; multus, a, um; preteritus; Ma he, mei, x, a, in plurali numero; he significat nos; itaque sensus est meus nos; ut ma tha he, mi pater nos; i. e. pater noster. Ma_ idem ac 7a, articulus nomen substan- tivum designans. Quibusdam in locis ma; in aliis na dicitur. Ma vel na etiam signifieat medius, a, um. Ma displicere; fastidiri; repleri; plenus. * ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Mai _palmex; tradux. Me_ non coctus, a, um. Mé durus, a, um. Mé mater. Mé spissare; densare; cujusque rei domi- nus; mé ngu, habitator domus. Mi facies; sedere; requiescere ; proper ; unus post alterum successive. Mi nasci; summus, a, um; cujusque rei extremum. Mia (monos.) lectus; grabatus. Mo curvus; flectus; flectere. Mu _avunculus; levis. Muy (monos.) cor; anima; animi in- doles; nudus, a, um. N. Na_ unus, a, um; ille, a, ud; articuli vices gerit. Na e¢ra unus, a, um. Nae#fma_ medius, a, um. Naé (monos.) insulsus; inconditus. Nay _(monos.) jacere. Nbo intus. Ndo_ os, ossis; grando, inis. Ndu_ardere. Ne aacies. Né os, oris; ambulare; movere. Né montis radix. Nea (monos.) qualis, e. Néy (monos.) saltare; saltator. Nga* spica; spicos colligere. Ngai suavis; remissus. Nga vel ngaga vel ngwi Ego Ngo festivus. Ngu_ spica; domus; mus; ut; secundum; juxta. Ngwé vel simplicittr € caro. Nhag infra; post. Nhé cunabula. Nhey difficilis. Nhéy _ profundus. Nhi_ lavare se ipsum; balneum accipere; vestiri. Nhie speculum, scilicet ze cum articulo na prefixo. Potits quam littera sonus hic mg putandum est intonatio, et sic scribi posset ’a, ’e, ‘i ’o ’u- ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Nhiu _ gravis. Nho bonus; pulcher; aptus; perfectus ; justus ; urbanus, aliaque innumera, ut supra dixi. Hoc verbum hic aliquando scribitur nheau, orthographie Gallice quam in inceptu hujus operis eligebam, et maximé sequutus sum gratia. Obser- yandum est tamen quod w et ew, sonos linguze Gallice in hae lingua non inve- niuntur. Ergo littera w semper Italico vel Hispanico more pronuntiari debet, ai et ay, semper duplici sono, ai. Nkha amare. Npa calefacere. Nrsai assuescere; evenire; aptus, a, um. Nsa ac Nia fcetidus; corruptus. Nsu (monos.) foemina; feemineum; nox esse. Nsti nutrix. Nsi, virgo; virginitas; honor; verecundia. Nsuy (monos.) nox. Nto vagina; operire. Ntsay (monos.) platea. Ntso malus; turpis; foedus; deformis. Ntt_ os, oris. Nu _ videre. Nua (monos.) iste, a, ud. Nuta (monos.) annuntiare; novitas; novus. Niy (monos.) tu. N Hiispanicum, quod scribitur fi, et ut gn italicum et Gallicum sonat. Na (fia) loqui; exaggerare. Na (fa) crudelis; absconditus etiam par- ticula negativa, quasi 2m apud Latinos, ut badi, sapiens ; fiabadi, ignorans, non sapiens. Na (fia) caput. Néy (fiéy) medicus. Nu (fu) plenus; iter; via. O. O inimicus; recordari; recordatio. O camera; cubiculum. P. Pa vendere; notare; sapor; dies; cunque temporis spatium. quod- 283 Pa _febris. Pe _ exerceri; texere. Pé pellucere. P’he furari, fur. P’hé gubernare; gubernator. P’ho sordidus; scire; cognoscere. Pong curvus; arctus; angustus. R. eequalis; similis. Re columna. Rsa asseverare; obtinere; sanare; assues- cere; periculum facere. Rsa_ lignum. Rsé carere, Rsé ardere; accendi; rare. Rsi manducare. Ra _ dulcis. Ra ignem facere; ado- S. Sa unguis; mané; madefactus; humiditas; protegere; objurgare; extrahere; aquam haurire. Sai benevolus; benevolentia. Say terminare, finire. Se frustum. Se pars; frustum. Sé deformis; non pulcher; auctus; impe- tus. Aliquando prepositio, que anté illius nomen vel descriptionem, cui utili- tas vel damnum est, ponitur; Mahéntsz sé nho, celum justis. Sey foramen; aperire; excavare. Si planus; color; crusta; folium; exten- dere ; cutis; etidm particula interroga- tiva, ne, numquid ? Si clamare; clamor. So latus, extensus. Sta capillus. T. Ta albus; masculus. Tai emere. Tchi humerus. Te quis? quid? ut? quomodo ? Té vivus; creare; facere. 284 ON THE Té crescere; altus; nobilis. Tes aliquis; aliquid. Téi pascua; palea. Tha pater. Thai debere; pharetra. Ti ebrius, bibere usque ad ebrietatem ; offuscare; confundere. To herba; virga; tegmen. Tod qui, que, quod. Si relativum ra- tionalis rei nomen representet, melius est uti pronomine wé, quod vide. Tsa mere; proprié; sanare; salutem ha- bere ; cuspis; ints; interior; acutus; divisus. Tsai vel Tse multum. Tsa placere. Tse planta; multum. Tsé frigus; frigidus. Tsé redire. Tsi vel Ti parvus; germen noyum, sur- culus; dens; cujusque rei extrema pars ; concio ; in concionem vocare,edere. Tsi minuere aliquid; stridere. Tso parvi pendere; sese precipitem dare; profundere. Tsu timere; timor; succum extrahere. Ti vel Di mori. Td horreum. U. U | sal; nunc. W. Wa_ piscis; hic (adv.) OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Wae_ perdere; amittere. Way descendere. We avunculus; viscus, eris. We, wea qualis. We tu. WE qui, que. Wey preparare. Wi tu; simul. ~e Ya _hepar; plaga; ulcus; pus. Ya virga; aperire; viam in montibus fa- cere arbores secando. Yai irrigare; aquam profundere. Ye operam dare; pluvia. Yé viridere; homo; malitia; perversitas; exsiccari. Yé manus; admirare; stupefieri. Yo non, ne (vetantis); ut Yo édé, cave ne audias. Yo lumen; extendere; inferior; grex; agnus; lana; tegere; ambulare. Yu rugire; radix; via; iter facere; res. Z. Za rotundus; rotunditas; arcus; arcum zedificare. Za lignum; ligna secare. Ze paryus. Zo cadere. Ztsa posse. Ztsi_ seligere; bibere. Ztso vel Ztsa experiri. B. VERBORUM COMPOSITIO. Damé Da, maturus Mé, mater Vir, maritus. Dans Da, maturus Nst, femina Mulier, uxor. Tinsu, yel Tzinsi Ti,vel. Tzi.surculus Nsi, femina Filia. Batzi Ba, genitus Tzi, surculus Filius. Sitha Si, cortex Tha, pater Avus. Méti Mé, dominus Ti, divitia Dives. Tasi Kasti Hétsi Mahétsi Sahi Hogkhai Sikei Mohe Dahe Ehmi Yohmi Meti Etho Sine Kuane Yuhe Nehia Pche Datsa Hémé P’hoyé Thiga Dodo Dogua Gawi, vel Wawi Goda Hiadi Hiatsi Thuado Wida Ngétsi Ngéde Zana Razana Sitho Hae vid, omnia nomina composita distingui separarique possunt. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Ta, alba Ka, flava Hé, distensum Ma, datum Sa, benevolens Hog, dulcis Si, pellis Si, superficies Sti, supenficies Tsi, tn circum Hetsi, circtim disten- sum Hi, interior Khai, gens Kei, corpus Mo, terre preruptum He, aqua Da, mulia E (é), zratus Yo, duplex Me, carens E (é), perfectum Si, fjolium Kua, apud Yu, via 1 Ne; os Pe, scaturire Da, floridus He, jingere P’ho, ornare Thi, pendere Do, petra Do, petra Ga, strepitus Go, petra Hia, Jucere, lux Hia, lucere, lux Thu, occendere Wi, succus E (é), caro E (é€), caro Za, rotunda Ra, wna Si, folium He, agua Hmi, facies Hmi, facies Ti, bonum, divitiz Tho, omne Ne, os Ne, os He, aqua Hia, verbum He, aqua Tsu, femina Me, mater Yé, manus Gu, auris Do, petra Gua, pes Wi, simul Da, oculus Di, efficere Tsi, facere Do, lapis Da, oculus Tsi, dens De, operire Na, dimidia Zana, luna Tho, omne 285 Argentum. Aurum. Circumdans. Ceelum. Amica (in malam par- ~ tem). Homo bone indolis. Cutis. Lacus. Flumen. Inurbanus homo. Perfidus. Mendicus. Pulcherrimus. Labia. Lingua. Aque ductus. Loquax. Fons. Puella. Matertera. Annulus. Inauris. Stultus. Claudus. Bellum. Ceecus. Sol. Dies. Cos. Lacryme. Gingiva. Muliebris cyclas us- que ad talos. Luna. Mensis. Vitrum. Verbalia vero cum sint, ex imperativi secundé persona composita sunt, ut ddd, scito; bddi, scientia ; De illis in annotatione que immediate sequi- tur. Alia yerd composita sunt, non quod sensum habendum queratur, sed ad vitanca eequivoca, ut ye homo, he gignere, yehe homo ; de aqua, he frigus, dehe aqua; ts? jilius, ba genitus, batsé filius, quod quidem alids explicabitur. VOL. V.—3 W badi, sapiens; vel verbum cum 72 facere. “< — Tw Sa 286 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. MODUS CONJUGANDI. Diversimodé verhorum imperativi persona secunda formatur ; aliquandd #2 verbo, ut in sequentibus nune conjugandis. Di te, ego facio, Tete, facere facere, id est, Fae. Gui hé, fw corrumpis, Hété, corrumpere fucere, Corrumpe. Y kue, tlle conglutinat, Kueté, conglutinare facere, Conglutina. Di hé, nos fingimus, Hété, fingere facere, Finge. Gui tza wi, vos murmuratis, Tzate, murmurare facere, Murmura. Gui we ha, vos apponitis, Wete, apponere facere,* Appone. Y te ya, 2li lambunt, Tete, dambere facere, Lambe. En presentis temporis artificium. Dz, gut, y vel 7, particule, tempus et personam una indicantes. Wz nos; gui* et wi vel hu vos, yz illi significant. Videtur ergo quo- modo hee verba monosyllaba sunt. Queedam verba cum verbis éza, ¢ze imperativum formant. Frequentils tamen in tzi verbo illud desinit. Zza posse et evenire; ¢ze efficere et virtutem habere; ¢zz ferre significant. EXEMPLA EX TEMPORE PRETERITC. Da sai, extraxi, Saitza, exirahere posse, id est, Extrahe. Ga hé, cozist?, Hétze, coquere efficere, Coque. Bi é, odzit, Etza, odisse evenire, Odi. Da gue he, prximus, Guetzi, preire ferre, Prei. Ga hid wi, posuistis, Hiatzi, ponere ferre, Pone. Ga sa hin, evulsistis, Satzi, evellere ferre, Evelle. Bi te yi, ascenderunt, Tetze, ascendere virtutem habere, Ascende. Da, ga, bi vel etiam Xta, Xa, Sta, Sca, Sa, preteriti perfecti particule sunt. Sic idea temporis idez persone jungitur. Alia verba imperativum cum verbis nz exigere; z germinare; Az intls esse; Az in- troire, componunt. EXEMPLA EX PLUSQUAM PERFECTO. Sta hid hma, /ragraveram, Yuni, fragrare germinare, Fragra. Sta yé hma, curaveras Yéhi, curare introire ; Cura. b>] 3 3 Sa mé hma, meritus erat, Méni, mereri exigere, Merere. Sta p’hé hma, cogitaveramus, P’héni, cogitare germinare, Cogita. Sea é hma wi, malefeceratis, Ehi, malefacere intiis esse, Malefac. Sea dé hma ht, florueratis, Déni, florere germinare, Flore. Sa ci hma yu, gustaverant, Cihi, gustare intius esse, Gusta. * Que, qui, semper pronuntiari debent ut ke, hz. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 287 Sta, sca, sa, hma plus quam perfecti particule sunt, tempus et personam indicantes. Aliquando vero, imperativi persona cum verbis ¢z vel dz formatur, et hic est fre- quentior usus. 77% et di expedire, exequi, pervenire significant. EXEMPLA EX PRETERITO IMPERFECTO. Di fia ma, promitiebam, ati, promittere exequt, Promitte. Gui hma hma, manifestabas, hmadi, manifestare exequt, Manifesta. Y né hma, calcabat, néti, calcare exequt, Calca. Di a nma he, petebamus, Adi, petere exequt, Pete. ‘Gui ma hma wi, amabatis, Madi, amare exequt, Ama. Gui tza hma ha, assequebamini, Tzudi, assequi expedire, Assequere. Y hia hma ya, videbant, Hiadi, wdere exequt, Vide. Gui, y, di, hmd, preteriti imperfecti particule, nil per se significantes. Quamplurima verba, alio verbo, non multtim dissimili significatione, imperativum componunt ; alia etiam nomine, alia adverbio, aliquandd modum, aliquando effectum vel causam exprimentibus ; sed hee nomina et adverbia etidm verba sunt et ut verba reddi possunt. EXEMPLA EX FUTURO. Ga sa, sudabo, Sa he, sudare aqua, Suda. Gui ze, visttabis, Za wa, visitare hic, Visita. Da hie, dimittet, Hie wi, dimittere simul, Domitte. Ga zé he, ave dicemus, Zé gua, ave dicere pes,* Saluta. Gui ca wi, edificabitis, Ca do, xdificare petra, A. difica. Gui za hi, volabitis, Za wi, volare simul, Volato. Ga ya yu, erunt longe, Ya bu, esse longe 1b2, Longé esto. Alia verba in imperativo repetuntur. EXEMPLA EX FUTURO IMPERFECTO. Guaxta ne, voluero, Néé, velle velle, Volito. Guasca té, feceris, Tete, facere facere, Fac. Guasa pe, fererzt, Pepe, texere texere, Texe. Guasta he he, fuss¢verimus, Héhe, tussire tussire, Tussi. Guascea hu wi, nominaveritis, Hu hu, nominare nominare, Nomina. Guasca tzu hii, Zemueritis, Tzutzd, d2mere timere, Time. Guasa té yu, tetigerunt, Tété, tangere tangere, Tange. Alia verba composita-ex duobus syllabis sunt, quee ctim aliquid simile significent, ut idea composita exprimatur, duz syllabe unum verbum constituunt ; ut Awehia, res- pirare ; Awe enim exhalare, et Aza halitum, et hee licet videantur non monosyllabica, sunt quidem, ut jim exposuimus. * Othomiti Indi, cum quemque salutant, pedem retro movent, corpusque inclinatum habent. = ‘oe pie ae 288 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. ANTIQUA OTHOMITORUM CONJUGANDI FORMA; CUJUS ET VESTIGIA NUNC IN EORUM LINGUA MANET. Preesens. Ni rza, evenire (nunc temporis). Preteritum. Ma vel mi rza, evenisse (ante). Futurum. Na rza, eventurum (in futuro). Presens. Mi é@, senire (nunc temporis). Preteritum. Ma vel mi é, senisse (anted). Futurum. Na @, seniturus (in futuro). Imperat. Eé, senito. Plur. £wi, vos senite. Hoc imperativi artificium usque nunc conservatur. QUODLIBET NOMEN ADJECTIVUM UT VERBUM CONJUGATUR : QUHMDAM HIC EXHIBENDA, Di vel dna yé, Ego sum humanus. Ye we, Humanus esto. Na (fia) vel guinhd, Zu es bonus. Nho we, Bonus esto. Na vel y hai, /le est terreus. Hai we, Terreus esto. Di vel dna otho he, Nos sumus nihil. Otho we, Esto nihil. Na (fia) ved gui meti wi, Vos estis divites. Meti we, Dives esto. Na (fa) ved gui dodo hi, Vos estis stultz. Dodo we, Stultus esto. Na vel y hui ya, Li sunt tres. Hit we, Triplex esto. Dna vel do ra mha, Ego eram unicus. Ra we, Unus esto. Na (fia) ved guinyé mha, 7’ vacuus eras. Nyé we, Vacuus esto. Na vel y na mha, L/le erat otiosus. Na we, Otiosus esto. Da vel sta né, Ego fui strenuus. Né we, Strenuus esto. Ga vel sca hmi, Tu fuisti virgo. Umit we, Virgo esto. Di vel sa hmu*, Lille fuit dominus. Hmut we, Dominus esto. Sta te hma, Ego fueram aliquid. Te we, liquid esto. Ga o, Ego ero inimicus. O we, Inimicus esto. Gasta entho, Ego fuero pulcherrimus. Entho we, Pulcherrimus esto. Ex supra dictis, non modo verba in Othomitorum lingua monosyllabica esse, sed et illos verbo substantivo carere omninod patet. Nam, qua illi de causa, quo nunquiam uterentur verbum habuissent ? Tarasci enim verbo enz (esse) et Mexicani verbo ca, quod idem significat, licet non frequentér, tamen aliquandd, et primi illi verbis ex, substantivo enz compositis, multotiés utuntur. Hoc mihi certum, Hispanos ex parti- eula we, verbum illud, quod solim in Hispanorum Othomité loquentium sonat, totum confecisse. Non tamen Indi illud inventum receperunt, sed poterimus ne illam divinam sententiam Ego sum qui sum Othomité reddere ? Possumus quidem, et itd, ni fallor : ma hu nga, ‘*meum nomen ego.” Lingua illa, sua ex natura, illud non repugnat; sed intelligeretur vel ne ab Indis hee sententia? hoe nimirum nescio, et nemo, nisi prils experiatur, scire potest. * Hmu, dominus, et hmu, virgo, sunt homonyma, sed variis modis distingui possunt, additione syllaba- rum significantium, ut apud sinenses, vel usu synonymorum, quorum multa sunt in hac lingua, ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 289 D. ORATIO DOMINICA OTHOMITE VERSA CUM SCHOLIIS. Ut melits hujus linguz indoles cognoscatur, orationis Dominice versionem ab An- dread Olmos scriptam, 4 Ramirezio* deindé, et 4 Joachimo Yepes postremo correctam adducere placuit ; illamque, duobus aliis modis, quibus lingua ea facere posset, addam. Latina translatio Iltteralis omnino est. 1. Ma tha he ni buy mahétsi 1. Noster pater habitas ccelum 2. Da ne ansi ni haha 2. Vocabunt sanctum tuum nomen, 3. Da éhé ga he ni buy 3. Veniet erga nos tua habitatio, 4. Da kha ni hnee 4, Facient tua voluntas 5. Ngut wa na hay 5. Et ita hic terra 6. Te ngu mahétsi 6. Sicut coelum 7. Ma hmé he ta na pa 7. Noster panis queeque dies (cujusque diel) 8. Ra he na ra pa ya 8. Da nos unus dies nova (hodié) 9. Ha puni he 9. Et parce nos 10. Ma dupaté he 10. Nostra debita 11. Téngut di puni he 11. Sicut nos parcimus 12. U ma ndupaté he 12. Nune debitores nostri 13. Ha yo wi hé he 13. Kt cave ne permittere nos 14. Ga he kha na tzo cadi 14, Labemur in turpis actio 15. Ma na pehe he hin nho. 15. Sed salva nos non bonum, (4 non bono). 16. Da kha. 16, Facient, (hoc est Amen). SCHOLIA. 1. Ma tha he ni buy mahétsi. Ma, meus; thd, pater; he, nos (meus pater nos, z. e. noster pater); m2, tu, tua; buy, habitare, habitatio; ma, latus, latitudo; A@, extensus, extensio; ¢sz¢, in circlm, Zz. e. ccelum. 2. Da ne ansi ni haha. Da, futuri indicativi tertize persone particula; ne, vocare; wnsu, ab Hispano Santo; ni, tu, tuum; hv, nominare, nomen, hic bis repetitum cultts gratia. 3. Da ehé ga he ni buy. Da, futuri signum; é, venire; é, accedere; ga, erga; he, nos; nz buy, tua habitatio (regnum tuum, ccelum). 4, Da kha ni hnee. Da, (ut supra); kha, facere; ni, tua; Anee, voluntas, (facient tuam voluntatem). 5. Ngi wanahay. _ Ngt, tanto, itd; wa, hic; na, illa, (pronomen articuli vices gerens); hay, terra, (ita hic 77 terra). * Oraciones y Doctrina Cristiana en Othomi, aprobadas por el tercio Concilio Mexicano; Mexico 16—. Hic in Bibliothecis hoe opus non inyenitur. VOL. V.—3 xX 290 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 6. Te ngi mahétsi. Te, quod; ngw, tantd, ita; mahéts?, vide supra, No. 1., (quod sonat, sicut in lato spatio, i. e. ccelo). 7. Ma hmé he ta na pa. Ma, meus; hmé, panis; he, nos; ta vel da, queque; nd, da, queeque; pa, dies, tem- pus, epocha, (panem nostrum omnium dierum, omnium temporum, i. e. quotidianum). 8. Rahe nara pa ya. Ra vel da, dato; he, nos; na, particula, vide supra, No. 5.; 7a, una; pa, dies; ya, nova (da nobis in hac die nova, i. e. hodié). 9. Ha puni he. Ha, et; pu, dimittere; mz, germinare; he, nos. Hic figura Othomiti utuntur; di- mitte germinare; non permittas crescere; dele, extingue, (dimitte nobis). 10. Ma dupaté he. Ma, meus; du, debere; pa, vendere; z2, facere; sic formatur dupat?, debere vendere fazere, i. e. debita; he, nos, i. e. nostra. © re Hec sententia litteratim sonat : meus nods debere vendere facere (debita nostra). 11. Téngt di puni he. Té, quod; ngw, iti; dz, presentis indicativi prime persone signum ; pwni, vide supra, 9; he, nos.—Hoc litteratim: quod (sicut) dimittere vel parcere nos (dimittimus). :12. U ma ndupaiéthe. U, nunc; ma, meus; ndupate, vide supra, 10.; he, nos. Litteratim : meus debitor venditor factor nos, i. e. debitoribus nostris. De modo loquendi ‘‘ meus nos,” vide | supra, No. 1. : 13) Ha yo wi hé he. Ha, et; yo, non, ne; wi, tu, et secunde persone futuri particula; Aé, consentire; he, nos, (et nos non permitte). 14.*Ga he kha na tzo cadi. Ga, labi; he, nos; kha, in, apud; na, articulus; ¢z0, turpis; ca, perficere; di, exequi. Hoc litteratim sonat: labi perficere exequi in turpe, i. e. turpé agere. 15. Ma na pehe he hin nho. Ma, sed; na, potiis; pe, redimere, salvare; he, nos; hin, non; nko, bonum. Sed salva nos 4 non bono, (libera nos a malo): Posset etiam illa Oratio sic verti. Go sna tha To wi buy Hé tsi Dama ka ni ha Dadi ni hne Hai he hétsi Ma hmé ta pa Sa da he ni Ha puni ma thay he Ngu i pu ma thay ti he Ha yo ho he ga zo tzo di Domine meus pater Qui tu habitas Extensionem incircum (ceelum) Dicent sanctum tuum nomen Exequatur tui voluntas Terra (in) et caelo Meus panis queque tempus Placeat (si) da nos nune Et parcere germinare mea debita nos Sieut parcimus meus debiti factor nos (nostros) Et cave ne consentire nos labi provocare exequi. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 29] Tertia versio, particulis expressis facta. Ma tha hi* he Meus pater venerabilis nos We wibuyt kha hetsi Qui moras apud ecelum Kha ni hu Divinum tuum nomen Dadi ni hne Eexequatur tui (tua) voluntas Bi kho na hay Infra in illa terra Ra fia kha hétsi /Equaliter (ac) supra in ccelo Dada set he ma hmé he Da, concede ad nos (nobis) meus panis nos (panem nostrum) Yo gazo sec§ tzodi Cave ne cademus (cadamus) propter tenta- tionem. E. Omnia adjectiva, abstractaque nomina, verba et adverbia; omniaque verba et abstracta nomina, adjectiva, substantivaque esse possunt. EXEMPLA. 1. Na nho nho ye i nho he nho. Na nho, bonitas; nho, boni; ye, viri; 2, verbalis particula; nhd, bona (est); he vel ha, et; nho, bené. Bonitas boni viri bona est et bené. 2. Hiatzi i hiatzi hiatzi hiatzi tho. Lux lucescit lucens lucidé. 3. Da sa na tso _ tsd. Arridebo impietas impius. Arridebo impietatem impii. 4. Madi na badi : na badi méhi. Ama _ sapientiam : sapiens felix (est). 5. Madi Okha: na madi Okha: na madi Okha hi he buy. Ama Deum: amator Dei: amor Dei _ felicitas et vita. * Ta ki, pater venerabilis; sed ke, kz, 2, nihil adjuncto, ad equales, cultts gratia, applicatur ; tamen Sandoval, et hoc in loco, eo usus est. Rectits ma kha ta, vel ka ta, vel sam mi, Divine Pater, Sancte Pater. Vide not. 1. ; + Dissyllaba dividenda sunt, particule hic solum adjunguntur ut verborum numerus in textt et versione zqualis sit. Idem est ordo verborum in ambobus. ¢ Particula se, utilitatem damnum habenti designans, persone adherere potest; undé equivalens illa Hispano para, Anglo to vel for, Gallico pour vel d, et Sinensi particule iu. Feré ea nunquam, nec alia Indi utuntur. § Sec, propter; utitur etiam pro a vel ab inter Latinos, ut yeow apud Sinas. 292 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. F. <¢ Le substantif, lorsqu’il est sujet d’un verbe quelconque, se place avant, et quand il est complément d’un verbe actif, aprés le verbe.”? Remusat, Sect. 83. Hoc etidm in lingua Othomitica accidit. EXEMPLA. 1. Do snu he fia ca di Petra caput et absconditum sapere exequl Hoc est : Caput petreum (stultus, vel dativé, stulto) et absconditum, i. e. illi abscon- ditum est, nequit; sapere exequi, 1. e. sapere; dz, facere vel exequi, particula verbalis est. Stultus non est sapiens. 2. To i ma ya* tza ya Okha do snu — Quis culpat ~—_—consilia Deorum stultus (est) Qui Deorum consilia culpet, stultus, inscitusque est.-—Plaut. in Mil. Glor. Act. III. Se. 1. 3. Na tzu i so ya du kir muy. Timor arguit degeneres viles animos, (my, cor). Degeneres animos timor arguit.—Virg. Ain. 1. 6. G. VARIZ PREPOSITIONES. Ga, ex; 62, sub; se, ad; wz, simul; se, supra; ha, in, apud; aliaque hujusmodi. Ngu ga do, Domus ex petra. Nea he ni wi, Ego et tu simul. Ngu bi ngu, Domus sub domo. Ngu se ngu,; Domus supra domum. Ngu se he, Domus ad nos (nobis). Kha ngu, Apud domum, in domo. Ee Nec solim inter Anahuacenses nationes, Othomiti fuére, qui triplex pro prima per- sona pronomen habuerint, habent et Mexicani; en illorum lingua cum Othomitica com- parata. Sic #go exprimitur : Mexic. Nehuatl, nehua, ne. Othom. nga, nga-nga, ngwi. * Ya vel ye, signum pluralis. ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 293 FORME AD CULTUM VEL REVERENTIAM PERTINENTES. Apud equales dicitur : Ni ho wi ma vel 1 ma na buy. Tua dignatio -amas amat vitam. xf en : f any ay i.e. Tu vivis. Tua veneratio vivit hic Ad superiores senesque, sic Othomiti loquuntur : Rzu ki a : 2 Cie. Tu dormis. Altitudo venerabilis dormit Ad nobilem feminam, et etiam ad zequalis qualitatis mulieres : Ti nsu ma : : ; ee rai i.e. Tu dic. Divitiz femininz ee Ad inferiores vero : Tsi nsu ma 3 : i.e. Tu dic. Surculus femineus Hoan: Tsi vel Tu ma ?. Reena A eee ; ae i. e. Fili mi, dic. filius . feat , K. NONNULLA ADVERBIA. Buy, ita; nkha, sicut; nkha buy, ita; nw, iste, hic; wa, hic; nuwa, hic; nz, illue; nuni, illtc. L. COMPARATIO NUMERALIUM IN LINGUA SINICA ET VARIIS LINGUIS ANAHUACENSIBUS. Sinicé. I Bal OO DN OO ae IS ° ( —_ Othomiticé. na, ra yo, ho hid go ki-tto rato (unus et quinque) yoto (duo et quinque) hiatd (tres et quinque) goto (quatuor et quinque) reta VOL. v.—3 Y Mexicané. ce ome Yeys naul macuilli chiquace chicome chicuey chicunaui mactlactli Huastecé. hun tzab ox tze bo acac buc huaxic belleuh lahu. “ 294 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. M. "ANAKPEONTOZS—.Ody IA’. Haud novi, hoc autem novi, Ris Feaderiy. Quod seni tanto magis Acysoty ai yuvaines Convenit jucundé ludere, “Avaxeéwy, yeeay ei: Quantd propior ez mors sit. ““Aabwy ercarrpov, aOees “Kouas wey oux er aloas : “Finoy de ceu weTewrov.” VERSIO OTHOMITICA. Eyo dt Tas uGuas MeV, e Y = ove ats, aie eeaaUe, Na dusu réta n-ra. Ovx vide rsro Poida, NA NACREO. Qs ta yeeorrs tAACY Tigre: Ta teparva wail, Ga bice. Ocw rinas Ta Moigus. 1. Ye nsu tsi di mi-i 2. Go Nacred, a nde: BARNESII LATINA VERSIO. 3. Sa kuti na hié nuti ANACREONTIs.—Ode xi. 4, Y khso na sta De se ipso. 5. Ha fia ni dé Dicunt mzhi femine, 6. Khuani di him phd «¢O Anacreon, senex es : 7. Maz ye sta sa kha «¢ Accepto speculo, contemplare 8. Gua nly spi ma «¢Comas quidem non amplils existentes, 9. Haai pa nua «“ Glabramque tuam frontem.” 10. Yho gu manra na da skhoo Ego sané, quod ad comas attinet 11. Da bity ha da khd hia Utrim sint, an abierint, 12. Ngu, da cu na du. Scholia. Na dusu réta n-va na Nacreo: Anacreontis Ode undecima. Na, pronomen z/le, a, ud, articuli vices gerens; dusw, canere vel cantus; réta de- cem, decimus; n-7a, unus; na Nacreod, ille Anacreon, sensu genitivo audiendus, ut in veteri lingua Gallicd usus fuit, et adhuec 7’ Hotel-Dieu pro l’ Hotel de Dieu, dicitur. Ille cantus undecimus Anacreontis. ; Ga bi cé: De se ipso. Ga, prepositio, quasi ez apud Latinos; bz, accusativum et dativum nana pronominis personalis; c@, pronomini unitum, demonstrativum facit. Ovr.— Linea prima. Ye nsu tsi di md-i: Juvenes foeminz dicunt mihi. Ye, signum pluralis, p/uviam™ significat; nsu, genus foemininum designat; sz, sur- * Character Sinensium tw, pluviam significans, qui inter radicales 173 numeratur, quatuor aque gutta- ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. 295 cnlus, metaphoricé, aliquid tenerum; ye new tsi, juvenes foemine; dz, particula verbum designans; md, dicere; z, signum pluralis, ye repetitum et abbreviatum. Pluyia (multitudo) surculorum tenellorum (juvenes fceminz) dicere ille, (id est, dicunt): mzhz subauditur. Linea secunda. Go Nacreo, a ndé: Domine Anacreon, senex es. Go, particula reverentialis, que nominibus propriis affigitur; Macred, Anacreon, quod sonat Domine Anacreon ; a ex gua abbreviatum, est pronomen personale secun- dz persone, tu ; ndé, senex; (es subauditur, quia heec lingua verbo substantivo caret). Domine Anacreon, tu (es) senex. Linea tertia. Sa kutti na hié nuti. Sa, verbum: reverentiale, si vis, placeat tibi; Autti, hut, sumere, accipere; 72, facere, exequi; na, articulus; Azé, speculum; nwztz, contemplare facere, forma imperativi. Placeat tibi, vel si tibi placeat, accipe speculum, et contempla. Linea quarta. Y khoo na std. Na std, capillus, capiilamentum; hoo, abesse; y, particula pre- fixa, signum tertiz persone singularis preesentis indicativi. Abest ille capillus, vel illud capillamentum. Linea quinta. Hara ni dé. Ha, et; dé, frons; nz, tua; 7a, nuda. Et nuda frons tua (es?). ; Linea sexta. Khuani di him pho. Khuani,verum, vere, 4 kha, veritas, realitas, quod existit ; di, particula verbis preefixa, primam personam presentis modi indicativi, in numero singulari indicans ; Aim, particula negativa, non; pho, scire; di pho, scio; di him pho, nescio. Veré, ego nescio. Linea septima. Maz ye sta sa kha. _ Maz, utrum; ye std, capilli, (ye, pluvia, signum pluralis) ; kha, adesse, opponitur kha vel khou, abesse; vide lineam4. Sa, particula preefixa, preteritum indicans. Utrum capilli adfuére. Linea octava. Gua nu-i spt ma. Gua, adverbium, aut, vel; nii-i, prenomen demonstrativum et relativum, z//e, a, wd; 7, affixum, signum pluralis, 4 ye, vide lin, 1.; ma, volare, fugire; sp7, verbalis particula, tertiam personam preteriti indicans. Aat sz illi volarunt vel fugerunt. Linea nona. Ha-a ipa nia. Hada, particula affirmativa, si Hispanicum, et yes Anglicum, hic vero pro sed, vel autem utitur; 7 pa vel di pa vel di pho, scio, vide lin. 6.; nwa, hoe, illud, quod; (vide lin. 8). Hoc autem novi. rum imaginem continet; quatuor etiam guttas, sed diversé positas, habet character chi, omnes, signum pluralis. Quz hic similitudo idearum Sinenses inter et Othomitos ! 296 ON THE OTHOMI LANGUAGE. Linea decima. VY ho gu ma nra na da skoo.. Yho, decet; ho, convenire, y signum persone, vide lin. 4.; gu, contractio ab angu, tantum, tantd; nra, contractio 4 manra, magis; na, articulus indefinitus, unus, a, um, Anglicé a, an ; da skhoo, A da, florens, flori- dus, et khoo, abesse, absens, (vide lin. 4.), homo qui florescere desinit, senex. Florem absentem (senem) tanto magis decet. Linea undecima. Da biy ha khohia. Da biy, (unasale) buy, vivere; da, particula prefixa, tertiam personam futuri temporis indicans, quod hic infinitivi vices gerit, et sic dicitur wt vivet, pro ut vivat, hee lingua etiam modo subjunctivo carens. Ha, (conj.) et, vide lin. 5, 9; khohia, esse vel stare in luce, metaphoricé, jucundé vivere; da, signum futuri, ut supra dictum. In luce stare (jucundé vivere). Linea duodecima. Ngu da cunadu. Ngu, contractio ab hangw, minus, quod hic pro magis utitur. In bae lingua, magis nunquam sibi opponitur. Tantd magis illum amas, tantd minus (magis) te odit. Minus hic distantiam denotat, et tantd minus ejus odium distat 4 tuo amore, hec sententia significat. rgd in hoe versu, tanto minus mors 4 te distat, Othomitus dicere vult, quamvis verbum appropinguare mox sequatur. Nadu: du, nomen substantivum, mors; 2a, articulus prefixus, ut supra sepé dictum. Da cu: cu, contractio 4 cuattu, appropinquare; da, signum futuri, vide lin. 11. Quanto hic subauditur, ut tanto in Greco. Mints (quanto magis) mors appropinquat, i. e. guanto minus mors aé zllo distet ; quanto a minor distantia mors illi appropinquet. 7; ERRATA. 252, 1. 7 a capite, alium lege aliam. 255, 1. 17 a capite, dele 10. 256, 1. 8d calce, eadem lege eadem. 263, 1. 11 a capite, Hebrei lege Hebreea. . 268, 1. 11 a capite, Greci lege Greca. 264, 1, 14 d calce, quos lege qui. . 266, 1. 13 @ calce, alba lege albo. flush fg Be J Sy) ARTICLE XIII. Practical Rule for Galculating, from the Elements in the Nautical Almanac, the Circumstances of an Eclipse of the Sun, for a Particular Place. By John Gummere, Teacher of Natural Philosophy and Mo- thematics in the Friends’ School at Haverford, Pennsylvania. Read March 6th, 1835. Tue following rule, deduced from a known formula, gives, with little labour, the different circumstances of an eclipse of the sun, very nearly ; the greatest error in time seldom exceeding half a minute. it also furnishes certain data that facilitate the exact calculation, when this is required. ‘The multiplication of quantities by the sine, or co- sine of an are or angle, is performed by a Traverse Table, as in Hen- derson’s method of Predicting Occultations, given in the fourth vo- lume of the Memoirs of the Astronomical Society of London. The rule is adapted to the use of the traverse tables usually contained in treatises on Surveying. In these tables, the difference of latitude and the departure are given for every quarter of a degree, of course, from 0° to 90°; and but little error results, if the required quantity is taken in the column corresponding to the course which is nearest to the given angle, without correction for the difference between the two. It is, however, easy to estimate and apply the proportional part, corresponding to this difference; and it is better to do so. When the VOL. V.—3 Z 298 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING given angle exceeds 90°, it must be subtracted from 180°, and the remainder taken as the course. In calculating the parallaxes, the products of ten times the distance of the given place from the earth’s centre, by the cosine and sine of its reduced latitude, are used. These products being constant for a given place, serve, when once obtained, for all calculations of eclipses of the sun, or of occultations for that place. Let them be denoted, respectively, by X and ¥Y. Then, to obtain them, add respectively, to the logarithmic cosine and sine of the latitude of the place, the loga- rithms x and y, taken from Table I. of the annexed tables, with the latitude of the place as the argument, and reject 10 from the index of each sum. ‘The results will be the logarithms of X and Y. These logarithms are used in the exact calculation of the parallaxes. The natural numbers corresponding to them, taken out to two decimal places, are the values of X and Y, that are used in the approximate cal- culation. These values are given in Table II. for each degree of lati- tude. In the addition and subtraction of quantities, except those which are in time, the algebraic rules for performing these operations are to he observed. Wherever the rule directs the root of a quantity to be taken, it is the positive square root that is implied. The quantities, denominated in the rule, parallaxes in right ascen- sion and declination, are not strictly those quantities ; they, however, differ but little from them, and are the quantities required in_ this method of calculation. RULE. 1. Consider north declinations and north horary motions as +-, and south ones as —. Find the difference of the sun’s and moon’s decli- nations, by subtracting the declination of the sun, as given in the ele- ments, from that of the moon. In like manner find the difference of the horary motions of the sun and moon, in right ascension, the differ- ence of their horary motions in declination, and the difference of their equatorial horizontal parallaxes. 2. Multiply the difference of the sun’s and moon’s declinations, re- THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 299 duced to seconds, by 10, and divide the product by the difference of the parallaxes, also reduced to seconds, extending the quotient to two decimal places, and denote it by g. Do the same with the difference of the horary motions in right ascension, denoting the quotient by P’; with the difference of the horary motions in declination, dencting the quotient by g'; and with the sun’s semidiameter, denoting the quo- tient by rv. With the moon’s declination, as a course, and P' as a dis- tance, enter the traverse table, and taking the corresponding difference of latitude, mark it +-, and denote it by p’. Then will gq, p',g' andr, respectively express the difference of the declinations, the difference of the horary motions in right ascension, the difference of the horary motions in declination, and the sun’s semidiameter, in such parts as the difference of the parallaxes contains 10; the difference of the horary motions in right ascension being reduced to the parallel of declination passing through the moon’s centre. Let p denote the dif- ference of the sun’s and moon’s right ascensions, expressed in similar parts, and reduced to the same parallel. At the time of conjunction in right ascension p = 0. 3. Denote the Greenwich mean time of conjunction in right ascen- sion by T. Find from the Nautical Almanac the corresponding equa- tion of time, and apply it to T, so as to obtain the apparent time. ‘To the apparent time apply the longitude of the given place from Green- wich, in time, by adding when the longitude is east, but subtracting when it is west, and convert the sum or remainder into degrees. If the result is less than 180°, it will be the hour angle at the time T, and will be +. If it. exceeds 180°, subtract it from 360°, and the remainder will be the hour angle, and will be —. Denote the hour angle by H. With the sun’s declination as a course, and the value of Y for the given place as a distance, enter the traverse table, and take the cor- responding difference of latitude, marking it + when the latitude of the place is north, but — when it is south, and denote it by b. ‘Take also the departure, marking it with the same sign as the declination when the latitude is north, but with a contrary sign when it is south, and denote it by f. 4. The values of p’, q', 7, b, and jf, may be regarded as constant 300 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING during the continuance of the eclipse. But the value p = 0, and the values of g and H, found as above, appertain only to the time T. To find them for another time T’, proceed thus. As 60 minutes : diff. of Tand T’:: p’:p. If T" is later than T, the value of p is +, but if earlier, itis —. Again, as 60 minutes : diff. of T and T’:: q:a quantity with the same sign as q’, which, added to the value of q, at the time T, when T’ is later than T, but subtracted from it when 'L' is earlier, will give the required value of g. Also, as 60 minutes : diff. of T and T': : 15° : a quantity, which added to the value of H, at the time T, when T" is later than T, but subtracted when it is earlier, will give the required value of H. 5. With the value of H, at the time T, as a course, and the value of X, for the given place, as a distance, enter the traverse table, and take the corresponding departure, marking it with the same sign as H, and denoting it by u. Take also the difference of latitude, marking it +, when H is less than 90°, but —, when H exceeds 90°, and de- note it by C. With the sun’s declination as a course, and C as a dis- tance, find the departure, marking with the same sign as C when the declination is +, but with a contrary sign when it is —, and denote it by c. Subtract c from 0, and denote the result by v. Then will wand v be the parallaxes in right ascension and declination, at the time T. Using Table IV., add together the squares of (p — u) and (q — v), denoting the root of the sum, which need not however be taken out, by M. Then will M denote the apparent distance of the centres of the sun and moon, at the time T. 6. Take a time T', an hour earlier or later than T, according as the value of ( — w) at the time ‘I’, is + or —, and find for this time, by the preceding articles, the values of p, g, H, u, C, c, and wv; and thence the square of the apparent distance of the centres, denoting the root by M’. Subtract, respectively, the values of (jp — wv) and (¢ — v) at the earlier of the times T' and T’, from their values at the later time, and denote the results by (p'— w') and (q'— v'). Add together the squares of (p'— wu’) and (q'— v’), and taking from the table the corresponding root, denote it by n. Then will m express the horary motion of the THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 301 moon from the sun on the apparent relative orbit. To the square of n add the square of M, and from the sum subtract the square of M’, denoting the remainder by N*. Multiply N* by 30, and divide the product by the square of n, extending the quotient to one decimal figure. This quotient will be an interval in minutes of time, which, being added to the time T, or subtracted from it, according as T" is later or earlier than T’, will give the time of greatest obscuration. 7. Taking now T’, to represent the time of greatest obscuration, find for this time the values of p, q, H, u, ©, c, and v. Also, when taking c from the traverse table, take the corresponding difference of latitude, and marking it with the same sign as C, denote it by g. With (f+ g) as the argument, take from Table IX., to two figures, the correction of r. Subtract this correction from r, and denote the remainder by r’. ‘To 7’ add 2.73, the moon’s reduced semidiameter, and denote the sum by &. Now adding together the squares of (p — u) and (q — v), take the root of the sum, and denote it by m. Then will m express the least distance of the centres. Multiply (k — m) by 6, and divide the product by 7’. The quotient will ex- press the digits eclipsed ; on the northern limb if (¢ — v) is ++, but on the southern if it is —. If m is equal to, or greater than k, the eclipse will not be visible at the given place. From the square of & subtract the square of m, and taking the root of the remainder, denote it by A. Then, asn:h:: 60 minutes: an interval of time, which being subtracted from the time of greatest ob- scuration, and added to it, will give approximate times of the beginning and end of the eclipse. 8. Taking T” equal the approximate time of beginning, find as before, for this time, the values of p, g, H, u, ©, c, g, v, 7', and &k. Also with the sun’s declination as a course, and w as a distance, find the corres- ponding departure, marking it with the same sign as uw, when the de- clination is ++, but with a contrary sign when the declination is —, and denote it by E. Then with C and E, respectively as arguments, take the corresponding quantities from Table II., marking each with the same sign as its argument, and denote them by w' and v'. Then will w and v' express the horary changes of the parallaxes in right as- cension and declination, at the time T". VOL. Y.—4 A 302 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING From the square of k, subtract the square of m, and taking the root, denote itbyh. Add together the squares of (p — wu) and (¢ — v), and from the sum subtract the square of m. ‘Take the root of the remainder, and denote it by h'. Add together the squares of (p' —w’') and (q' — v'), and taking the root of the sum, it will be the value of n, at the time T’. Then asm: diff. of A and h' :: 60 minutes : a cor- rection, in minutes, which being added to 'T’, or subtracted from it,’ according as /' is greater or less than /, will give the corrected time of beginning. 9. The corrected time of end is found in exactly the same manner, except that the correction is to be subtracted from T’, the approximate time of end, when hf’ is greater than A, but added to it when A’ is less than h. | 10. From the values of (p— wu), (¢ — v), wand »v, at the approxi- mate time of beginning, find, by means of their horary changes (p' —w'), (q’ — v'), w' and v’', their values at the corrected time of beginning. Then taking the values of (p —w) and (¢— pv), divide the less by the greater, extending the quotient to three decimal places, and marking it + when the signs of (p—w) and (¢ —v) are alike, but — when they are different. 'Then with the quotient as the argument, take the corresponding are from the proper column of Table V., as denoted by the remarks at the head of the table. If (p—vw) is +, denote this are by P, but if it is —,add 180° to the arc, and denote the sum by P. With the values of wu and v, proceed in the same manner to find another are, denoting it by Q,if wis +, but adding 180° to it if w is —, and denoting the sum by Q. Subtract P from Q, increasing the latter by 360° when it is less than the former, and denote the remainder by V. Then will V express the distance from the sun’s vertex to the point of the disc at which the eclipse commences, measured on the circumfe- rence of the disc, from the vertex to the right hand. 11. The times of beginning, greatest obscuration, and end, found as above, are expressed in Greenwich mean time, and may be changed to mean time of the given place, by adding or subtracting the difference of meridians in time, according as the place is east or west from Green- wich. Note 1. The calculation will be facilitated by having two small THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 303 tables, containing the values of w and C, for each degree of the hour angle, and 6 and f for each degree of declination, calculated for the place, from the expressions w = X sin. H, C = X cos.H, b — Y cos. Decl., and f= Y sin. Decl. ‘These tables will also be equally convenient in the calculation of occultations. Tables VI. and VII. contain those values, calculated for the latitude of Philadelphia. 2. If only a near approximation to the circumstances of the eclipse is required, the value of 7 may be used instead of 7’, and the values of h and n at the time of greatest obscuration may be taken, in finding the corrected times of beginning and end. Also in finding the point of the sun’s disc at which the eclipse commences, the values of (p— wu), (¢—v), uv and v, at the approximate time of beginning, may be used without correction ; consequently, in this case f, g and E need not be found. The error thus produced in the time of beginning or end will seldom exceed a minute; and the error in the magnitude of the eclipse cannot amount to a tenth of a digit. As an example, let it be required to calculate for Philadelphia, lat. 39° 57' N. long.,5 h. Om. 44 sec. W., the circumstances of the eclipse of November 30th, 1834. For Philadelphia X = 7-68’and Y = 6°39. In the following calculation, the values of b, f, uw and © are taken from Tables VI. and VII.; the same values will, however, be easily obtained from the traverse table, with perhaps occasionally a difference of a unit in the last decimal figure. From the elements in the Nautical Almanac we obtain: Greenwich mean time of conjunc.inR. A. Nov. 30d. 6h. 32:9m. Moon’s declination, : é ae 9 200% 45° br Sun’s declination, : : ; ; ~— 21 41+ 05 Sun’s SET, . : 16 15 Diff. of sun’s and moon’s declinations, = = if 52) 62" = + 3172" Diff. of their hor. motions in R. A. =-+35 40 + 2140 Diff. of their hor. motions in irene =— 8 48 — 528 Diff. of their eq. horizontal parallaxes, = 60 14 = 3614 Ie! 304 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING 3172 x 10 ; 2140 x 10 ; . 528 x 10 975 x 10 p' = + 5°54, Go a eae oe eee r= 8614... — 2°70: he im: fl bs 5 = 6 32:9 Eq. of time, + 1H i | 6b = + 5:93 6 44:0 Long. W. — 5 O07 f = — 2°36 Il 2B)8" (al. x + 25°.8 us=+ 3:34, C=+691, c=—2°55, v = + 8°48. ° p—u=—334 sq. 11°16 g—v =+ 0:30 sg. 0°09 M. sq. 11°25 ie =m: T’ =7 329 pHt+554, g=+ 7:32, H = + 40°83 u= +502, C= + 581, p—u = + 0°52 qg—v=— 0°76 M’ 30 N? _ 26:42 x 30 nm 16°02 he am: m. = 49°5 sq. 0.27 sq. 0°58 sq. 0.85 m neem: ¢ =—215, v=-+ 8:08 p' —w = + 3°86 sq. 14:90 gq —v’ =+ 1:06 sq. 1:12 n=400 . sq. 16-02 Moles, thee me egb ae 27°27 M’ : ; - sq. 0°85 N : - - sq. 26°42 6 32°9 + 49°5 = 7 22-4 = time of greatest obscuration. 6 (k — m) r! 4:81 x 6 = — 2-69 h. m. TY = 7 224 758, H= +43 8°°2 + 6:03, c=—2:23, g=+ 554, v= + 816 2:69, k= 5 p—u=— 018 g—v = — 0°58 ™. = 0°61 *42 sq. 0:03 sq. 0°34 sq. 0°37 = 10°7 = digits eclipsed on southern limb. THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 305 k = + 5:42 sq. 29°38 ie aie: sq. 0°37 h= . 5:39 sq. 29-01 m. h. m. 4:00 5:39 60 1 20:8 h. m. h. m. h. m. 7 224—1 208 =—6 1:6 = approx. time of beginning, 7 224+ 1 20°8 =8 43:2 = approx. time of end. ch. m. T’=6 1°6 = —2°89, g=+ 9:54, H= 18:0, u c= + 237, C=+ 7:30 =—2-70, g=4+ 678, 0 =+863, ffe= 442; r’= 2-68 = 541, E= —0-88, ui = +191, » ©. =— 0-24, = 5:41, sq. 29-27 - p—u=—526 sq. 27°67 sq. 0:37 qg—v=+0°91 ‘sq. 0:83 = 5:38 sq. 28:90 28:50 — 5°30 m sq. ©: 0:37 = 0:08 h! = 5:30: sq. 28-13 p—w =-+ 363 sq. 13-18 q’ —v' = — 1:22 sq. . 1:49 n = 3°83 sq. 14:67 m. m. 3°83 0:08 60 1:3 h. m. m. h. m. 6 1:6— 1:3 =6 0°3 = corrected time of beginning. heey T’=8 43:2 = + 12:08, g=-+561, H= 584, u= +654, C= + 4-02 =— 149, g=+3-74, v =+742, ftg =1:38, v' = 2-69 = 5:42, E= —2:42, w=+1:05, v= — 0:63, = 542, sq. 29°38, p— tu —)-- 0:49, sq. 30°14 Sq. 0.37, q—v= —1'8I, sq. 3°28 = 5°39, sq. 29-01, 33°42 m sq. 0°37 =+ 449, sq. 20°16, i= 5:75, sq. 33°05 =— 0°83, sq. 0°69, A= 5°39, 4°57, sq. 20°85, Diff. = 0°36. m. m. 4°57 0:36 60 4:7 IN ia), m. h. m. 8 43:2 — 4:7 = 8 38:5 = corrected time of end. VOL. V.—4 B a aay 306 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING h. m. At. 6 0°3 p—u=— 534, g—v = +094, u= + 2:33, v = + 8:64 (Ie I SALES SG sey Lee pay alae ee P = 280°-0 U + 2:33 fg 5 > SG en 269 (By lea V=Q—P= 951 Changing the Greenwich mean times into Philadelphia mean times, we have, h. m. Beginning, 0 59-6 Greatest obscuration, Q2 21-7 End, 3 37°8 The first part of the calculation, by note 2d to the rule, is the same as the preceding, except that fneed not be found. The subsequent part, after the time of greatest obscuration is obtained, is as follows :— h. m. T’= 7 22-4 p=+ 457, g= +758, H = + 38°°2 u= +475, C=+6:03, c = — 2-23, v= + 8:16 p—u=— 018 sq. 0:03 q—v = — 0°58 sq. 0°34 1D — 0.61 sq. 0.37 6(k—m) _ 482+ 6 sed 3 a i a digits eclipsed. k = 5:43 sq. 29-48 m sq. 0°37 =) 5-40 sq. 29°11 Wie) hewn: 4:00 : 5°40::60: 1 21:0 hiesam\ he m. hens 7 #224—1 21:0 =6 1:4 = approx. time of begin. 7 #22:4-+4+ 1 21:0 = 8 43-4 = approx. time of end. p=—291, q u = + 2°36, C hiss mie e==36) oe == + 9-55, H = 17°°9 = + 7°30, c = — 2:70, v = + 8°63 THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 307 p—u=— 5:27 sq. 27°77 qg—v = + 0:92 sq. 0°85 28°62 m sq. 0:37 h’= 5°31 sq. 28°25 h = 5:40 Diff.= 0-09 m. Mm. 4:00 : 0:09 : : 60: 1°3 hee ms m. No TER 6 14—1:3 = 6 0-1 = near approx. time of begin. hey me T’=8 43-4 p= + 12:05, g = + 5:60, H = 58°-4 u=+ 654,C=+4+ 402, ¢c =—1:49,y = 4+ 7-42 p—u=4+ 551 sq. 30°36 q—v = — 1°82 sq. 3:31 33°67 m sq. 0°37 h'= 5°77 sq. 33-30 h = 5:40 Diff. = 0°37 m. m. 4:00 : 0°37 : : 60: 5°5 Naas. PHC ngs sir 8 43:-4—5°5 = 8 37:9 = near approx. time of end. h. m. At6 1-4 (=O + 0°92 we : ea . pu ea = 1, P = 2798 u 2°36 Fa Ie aes oe ae eR Q= 15°-2 V=Q—P= 95°-4 If it is required to find the times of beginning and end with greater precision than by the foregoing rule, let T’ represent the corrected Greenwich mean time of beginning, taken to the nearest minute, and find from the Nautical Almanac the corresponding sidereal time, ex- pressing it in arc. To the sidereal time thus expressed apply the lon- gitude of the place, also in arc, by adding, if the longitude is east, but 308 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING subtracting if it is west, and denote the result by Z. Find also, for the time T’, the sun’s right ascension in arc, denoting it by A; the sun’s declination, denoting it by D ; the moon’s right ascension, in arc, denoting it by a; the moon’s declination, denoting it by d; and the moon’s equatorial horizontal parallax. ‘Take the difference of the sun’s and moon’s parajlaxes, and denote it by G. Also denote the sun’s semidiameter by R. Then find the values of p, q, 7, u, and v, to four decimal places, by the following formulas. __ 10 sin. (a — A) cos. d sin. G 10 sin. (d — D : : a 1p sin. D sin. (a — A) __ 10 tang. R cos. (d — D) cos. (a — A) ee sin. G u = X sin (Z — A) v = Y cos. D— X sin. D.cos. (Z — A) Find the value of g, for the time T, as directed in the preceding rule, and with the argument (f//-++ g) take the correction of r from | Table IX.,and subtracting it from r,obtain 7'. Take the moon’s semi- diameter from Table VIII., with the equatorial parallax as the argu- ment, and adding it to 7’, the sum will be the value of k&. The square - of m, and the value of n, at the approximate time of beginning, found in the preceding calculation, although extending only to two decimal ~~ places, will be sufficiently accurate for the present calculation. Using a common table of squares, and proportioning for the last two figures of the roots, find the values of / and A’, as directed in article 8 of the foregoing rule, and thence a second correction; which being applied to T’, as there directed, will give the true time of be- ginning. A similar calculation for the corrected time of end, will give the true time of end. The corrected time of beginning of the eclipse just calculated, has been found to be 6h. 0-3 m. ‘Take therefore T= 6h.0m. The sidereal time corresponding to this time is 339° 7' 22”.2, expressed in are. Hence for Philadelphia, long. 75° 10' 59” W., we have, Z = 263° 56' 23.2, at the time T’. We also find A = 246° 21’ 7.8, D = THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 309 — 21° 40' 51".5, @ = 246° 1' 33".1, d = — 20° 43' 8'.1, moon’s parallax = 60’ 23'.3, and R = 16° 14".8. Hence Z — A = 17° 35' 15",a —A = — 19’ 384".7,d —D = + 57’ 43".4, and G = 60' 14’.6. . With these values we obtain, p = — 3:0398, g = + 9°5787, r = 2°6965, u = + 2-3195, and »v = + 8°6398. The value of g, for the time T", is + 6-80, and consequently (f + g)=-+ 4-44. This gives 0:0210 for the correction of r. Hence r= 26755. The moon’s semidiameter taken from Table VIII is 2°7315; consequently k = 5:4070. ‘Then, k = 54070 sq. 29°2357 p— uv = — 53593 sq. 28°7221 m sq. 0°3700 q—v= 0:9389 sq. 0°8815 h = 5°3727 sq. 288657 29°6036 h’ = 5:4068 m sq. 0°3700 Diff. = 0:0341 — h' = 5:4068 sq. 292336 TM, Ts sec. 3°83 : 0°0341 : : 60: 0°53 = 32 Hence the true time of beginning is 6 h. 0 m. 32 sec., in Greenwich mean time. For the end take T’= 8h. 38m. Then we shall find Z = 303° 32' 52''.6, A = 246° 28' 13".3, D = — 21° 41' 55.3, a = 247° 42' 41.8, d = — 21° 7' 4”-3, moon’s parallax = 60' 21''.6, and as be- foreR = 16' 14'.8. We also find g = 3-88, and consequently f + g— 1°52. Hence p = + 11:5373,g = + 5°7414, r = 2°6975,r' = 2-6903, k = 5-4218, wu = + 6:4435 and v = + 7-4782. k = 5:4218 sq. 29:3959 p—u = + 5:0938 sq. 25:9468 m sq. 0°3700 g—v=—1°7368 sq. 3:°0165 h — 5°3876 sq. 29-0259 28:°9633 h’= 5:°3473 m sq. 0°3700 Diff. = 0:0403 h'= 5:°3473 sq. 28°5933 Meee Myer |SeCs 4:57 : 0:0403 : : 60: 0°53 — 32 Hence the true time of end is 8 h. 38 m. 32 sec. in Greenwich VOL. V.—4 C ee ee ee ee 310 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING mean time. The true times of beginning and end, expressed in Phi- ladelphia mean time, will be iis Saami? See: Beginning. 0 59 48 End, 3. 37 48 It thus appears that in the present example the time of beginning, as found in the foregoing rule, differs only 12 seconds from the true time, and that the time of end exactly corresponds with that obtained by the exact calculation. In these calculations no allowance has been made for irradiation and inflexion. ‘To make this allowance we must diminish /, by subtract- ing from it the quotient of ten times the assumed value of these quan- tities, divided by the difference of the parallaxes in seconds. If we assume an irradiation and inflexion, amounting to 5”, its effect in the present eclipse will be to make the time of beginning, at Philadelphia, 13 seconds later, and the time of end 11 seconds earlier than as above obtained. ‘Thus we should have lye ees: Beginning at E aOeneit End at 3-37 37. THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 311 TABLE I. TABLE I. TABLE III. Logarithms x and y. Valucs of X and Y for each Degree of Values of u' and v’. Arg. Latitude of Place. Latitude. Arg. C for w’. Arg. E for v’. Arg.| Log. x. | Log. y.- Lat.| Xe Ye: [Lat. x | Y Arg.|u’orv'| Arg. wore’ 0°} 1:00000 | 0-99718 0°} 10-00 | 0:00 | 459) 7-08 | 7-04 0:0 | 0:00 | 5:0 | 1-31 2 | 100000 | 0:99719 1 | 10:00 } 0:17 | 46 | 6-96 ) 7-16 0-1 | 0:03 | 5-1 | 1:34 4 | 1:00001 | 0-:99719 2| 9:99 | 0:35 | 47 | 6:83 | 7-28 0:2 | 0:05 | 5-2 | 1-36 6 | 1-00002 | 0:99720 3 | 9:99 | 0:52 | 48 | 6-70 | 7-40 0:3 | 0:08} 5-3 | 1:39 8 | 1-00003 | 0-99721 4 | 9:98 | 0-69 | 49 | 6-57 | 7-51 0-4] 0:10} 5-4 | 1-41 10 | 1-00004 | 0-99723 5 | 9-96 | 0-87 | 50 | 6-44 | 7-63 0:5] 0-13 | 5:5 | 1-44 12 | 1-00006 | 0:99725 6 | 9:95 | 1-04 | 51 | 6-31 | 7-74 0-6 | 0:15 | 5-6 | 1-47 14 | 1-00008 | 0-99727 7_| 9:93 | 1-21 |/52 | 6:17 |-7-84 0:7 | 0:18 | 5-7 | 1-49 16 | 1-00011 | 0.99729 8} 9:90 | 1:38 | 53 | 6:03 | 7-95 0:8 | 0-21 | 5:8 | 1-52 18 | 1:00013 | 0:99732 9] 9-88 | 1:55 | 54 | 5:89 | 8-06 0:9 | 0:24 | - 5-9 | 1:54 20 | 1:00016 | 0:99735 10} 9-85 | 1-73 | 55 | 5-75 | 8-16 1:0 | 0:26 | 6-0 | 1:57 22 | 1:00020 | 0:99738 11] 9:82 | 1-90 | 56 | 5-60 | 8:25 1-1 | 0:29} 6-1 |.1-60 24 | 1-00023 | 0:99742 12} 9-78 | 2:07 | 57 | 5-46 | 8-35 1-2 | 0:31 | 6-2 | 1:62 26 | 1:00027 | 0:99745 13 | 9-74 | 2:24 | 58 | 5:31 | 8-45 1-3 | 0:34 | 6-3 | 1-65 28 | 1-00031 | 0-99749 14] 9-70 | 2-40 | 59 | 5-16 | 8:54 1-4 | 0:37 | 6-4 | 1-68 30 | 1:00035 | 0:99754 15 | 9:66 | 2:57 | 60 | 5-01 | 8-63 15 | 0°39 | 6-5 | 1:70 32 | 1-00039 |.0:99758 16 | 9-62 | 2:74 | 61 | 4:86 | 8-71 16 | 0-42] 66 | 1:73 34 | 1-00044 | 0-99762 17 | 9:57 | 2:91 | 62 | 4-71 | 8-79 1:7 |°0-45 | 6-7 | 1:75 36 | 1:00048 | 0:99767 18} 9-51 | 3:07 | 63 ; 4.55 | 8-87 1:8 | 0-47 4 6-8 | 1:78 38 | 1:00053 | 0:99772 19 | 9-46 | 3:24 | 64 | 4-40 | 3-95 1:9 | 0:50} 6-9 | 1-81 40 | 1:00058 | 0:99777 20 | 9:40 | 3:40 | 65 | 4-24 | 9-03 2:0 | 0:52} 7.0 | 1:83 42 |} 1-00063 | 0-99781 21 | 9:34 | 3:56 | 66 | 4-08 | 9-10 21 | 0:55 } 7-1 | 1:86 44 | 1-00068 | 0:99786 22 | 9:28 | 3:72 | 67 | 3:92 | 9:17 2-2 0:58 { 7-2 | 1:88 46 | 1-:00073 | 0:99791 23 | 9-21 | 3-88 | 68 | 3:76 |. 9-24 23 | 0-60 | 7-3 | 1-91 48 | 1:00078 | 0-99796 24 | 9-14 | 4-04 | 69 | 3:59 | 9:30 24 | 0-63] 7-4 | 1:94 50 | 1-00082 | 0-99801 25 | 9:07 | 420 | 70 | 3:43 | 9:36 2:5 | 0:65 | 7-5 | 1:96 52 | 1:00087 | 0:99806 26 | 899 | 4:36 | 71 | 3:27 | 9-42 2:6 | 0-68 | 7-6 | 1:99 54 | 1:00092 | 0-:99810 27 | 892) 4:51 | 72 | 3:10 | 9-48 27 10:71 | 7-7 | 2:02 56 | 1:00097 } 0:99815 28} 8-84 | 4-67 | 73 | 2:93 | 9-53 2:8 | 0:73 | 7-8 4 2:04 58 | 1:00101 | 0:99820 29] 8-75 | 4:82 | 74 | 2:76 | 9:58 2:9) 0-76 | 7-9 | 2:07 60 | 1:00105 | 0:99824 30 | 8-67 | 4:97 | 75 | 2:60 | 9-63 30 | 0-79 | 8-0 | 2:09 62 | 1:00110 | 0:99828 31 | 8:58 | 5:12 | 76 | 2-43 | 9-67 3:1 | 0-81 | 81 | 2:12 64 | 1:00114 | 0:99832 32 | 8:49 | 5:27 | 77 | 2:26 | 9-71 13:2 10:84] 82) 2:15 66 | 1-00117 | 0:99836 33 | 8:39 | 5:42 | 78 | 2:09 | 9:75 3°3 | 0:86 | 8-3 | 2:17 68 | 1:00121 | 0:99839 34} 8:30 | 5:56 | 79 | 1-91 | 9-78 34 | 0:89 | 8-4 | 2:20 70 | 1-00124 | 0-99843 35 | 8:20 | 5°70 | 80 | 1-74 | 9-81 35 | 0:92 1 8:5 | 2:23 72 | 100127 | 0-99846 36 | 810 | 5:85 | 81) 1-57 | 9°84 36 | 0:94 | 8-6 | 2:25 74 | 1:00130 | 0:99848 37 | 8:00 | 5:99 | 82 | 1:40 | 9:87 3:7 | 0:97 1 8:7 | 2:28 76 | 1-:00133 | 0:99851 38 | 7:89 | 6-12 | 83 | 1:22 | 9-89 3:8 | 0:99 | 8-8 | 2:30 78 | 100135 | 0:99853 39 | 7:78 | 6:26 | 84 | 1:05 | 9:91 39} 1:02] 8-9 | 2:33 80 | 1:00137 | 0-99855 40 | 7-67 | 6-39 | 85 | 0:87 | 9:93 40 11:05 | 9-0 | 2:36 82 | 1:00138 | 0-99856 41 | 7:56 | 6:53 | 86 | 0-70 | 9-94 4-1} 1:07] 9-1 | 2:38 84 | 1:00139-} 0:99858 42 | 7:44 | 6-66 | 87 | 0:53 | 9-95 4:2} 1:10} 9:2 | 2:41 86 | 1:00140 } 0-99859 43 | 7-32 | 6-79 | 88 | 0:35 | 9-96 4:3) 1:13 ] 9:3 | 2-43 88 ; 1-:00141 | 0-99859 44) 7-20 | 6-91 | 89 | 0-18 | 9:97 44|)1:15] 9-4 | 2-46 90 | 1-00141 | 0:99859 45 | 7:08 | 7:04 | 90 | 0-00 | 9:97 : 45 | 1:18} 9-5 | 2:49 Vote.—In the calcula- 4-6] 1:20] 9-6 | 251 tion of the above Table, 4-7 | 1:23} 9-7 | 2:54 the earth’s compression 4-8 | 1:26] 9-8 | 2.57 1 4-9 | 1:28] 9:9 | 2:59 was assumed to be 509. 5-0 | 1-31 | 10-0 | 2-62 SSNLASLASBSSLSSRSSALASHSSBSSRSSASSSSRASISRSRR SSS SAAHRRISSSRSVLS i=) ip me re See BB ASR ARRAN RASARREBSABSRBSSISSGIISSSSSEBE SBE ESS Sal CiwNSOMCMOMOMOM SHSM nAYnOCNVQrerAVDOO sh SCMnONrMD CoM ny NYO rit 0 © i—) r) S RESSSSSASRABBSIRBSSHLHHSSSCSRS ARASSERSSRASSSSSACARBSIGSRSRLBHSS OD HID SO ODS rs OOD SH 19 Om DD DN? oD Reis DBOHODBARRARBHAREOAS SRABSISLSBRESSSRL APS PSSSSSAGHARSS SIS SSSSR ESL SSSS SA saIRsssGasssee RAD at PP Cee Magan! oiutl Spa ly way et DLare ee ePRsaed “sat en cey Maen Atta en at ee eet Ve ee Veh at etm at Kee eee) ae BA eee Geen eee ht a ieee Sse el pune et Bie Ae HO > LN DOMOANAHOCMOANODAAROMOSOMOANOAG NOD ix S TESRRESSSSSRIESBBSSSSSs se FAS AARMARABSHSI SH SBSSSERRDHLSSSSSHar Ra SAO % sth ~ OD SoneN ss IW OSmeDOOSMNMH19OCwODOHDOANS MDOMmDADANMDANINSOMDRONANMAHMNOKMDAS RARRADA A Ramos es od BOG OHH aA aH HHA IDIO eo nN S5BS8SS8833 SO t SHANA IDODHONMAODOCDOAHINAHOSOHMOMO Om Ds Ov SMNAODONAODONMAKROH 1 SMe ans BESSFQIISSSSR BBs 3 Rx DDO AARBRRS OD CO “Sh SH Squares of Numbers to two Decimal Places. PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING TABLE IV BNMOAMWOOMDAGCHANAMAHMOCHRDOAS Sonne DOr DAOHMNYH HINO KHDHDOMNM Hid Or DO MOM H19 O > aD Omwoo SESS5SSRRERERRRERDDODDOOD SBSaRSstSE58ES TNO DOADSHN Hr > OD HID Oh DD Ono CSrDao ARRARARRBBRABS 2aSaR ae} Bidipinia oe Xr — (op) THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 313 TABLE IV. CONTINUED. Squares of Numbers to two Decimal Places. Root. | Square. | Root. | Square. Root. | Square. Root. | Square. Root. | Square. 3°60 12:96 4:20 17-64 4:80 5:40 29°16 6:00 36°00 3°61 13-03 4:21 17-72 4-81 5°41 29:27 6-01 36°12 3°62 13:10 4:22 17-81 4:82 5-42 29°38 6:02 36°24 3°63 13-18 4:23 17-89 4-83 5:43 29°48 6:03 36°36 3°64 13-25 4:24 17-98 4-84 5:44 29°59 6:04 36°48 3°65 13:32 4:25 18-06 4:85 5:45 29°70 6:05 36-60 3.66 13-40 4:26 18:15 4:86 5:46 29°81 6-06 36°72 3°67 13:47 4:27 18-23 4:87 547 29°92 6 07 36 84 3°68 13-54 4:28 18°32 4:88 5-48 30:03 6:08 36°97 3°69 13-62 4:29 18-40 4:89 5:49 30:14 6:09 37-09 3°70 13-69 4:30 18:49 4-90 5:50 30°25 6:10 37:21 371 13-76 4:31 18-58 4-91 5-51 30°36 6-11 37°33 3:72 13-84 4-32 18-66 4-92 5:52 30°47 6-12 37-45 3:73 13-91 4-33 18-75 4-93 5:53 30°58 6-13 37-58 3°74 13-99 4:34 18-84 4:94 5:54 30°69 ‘6:14 37:70 3°75 14-06 4:35 18-92 4:95 5:55 30:80 6-15 37-82 3°76 14-14 4:36 19-01 4:96 5:56 30°91 6-16 37-95 3°77 14-21 4:37 19-10 4:97 5:57 31:02 6:17 38-07 3°78 14-29 4:38 19-18 4:98 5:58 31:14 6-18 38-19 3°79 14-36 4:39 19-27 4-99 5:59 31:25 6-19 38-32 3°80 14-44 4-40 19-36 5:00 5:60 31:36 6-20 38-44 3°81 14-52 4-41 19.45 5:01 5-61 31-47 6-21 38-56 3°82 14-59 4-42 19-54 5:02 5:62 31-58 6:22 38°69 3°83 14-67 4-43 19-62 5:03 5:63 31-70 6:23 38°81 3°84 14-75 4-44 19-71 5:04 5:64 31-81 6:24 38°94 3°85 14-82 4-45 19-80 5:05 5:65 31:92 6:25 39-06 3°86 14.90 4-46 19-89 5:06 5:66 32°04 6:26 39-19 3:87 14-98 4:47 19-98 5:07 5:67 32:15 6:27 39:31 3.88 15-05 4-48 20-07 5:08 5:68 32:26 6:28 39-44 3°89 15-13 4-49 20-16 5:09 5.69 32:38 6:29 39-56 3°90 15-21 4:50 20-25 5-10 5:70 32:49 6:30 39:69 391 15-29 4-51 20-34 5-11 5:71 32:60 6:31 39-82 3°92 15-37 4:52 20-43 5:12 5:72 32:72 6:32 39-94 3°93 15-44 4:53 20-52 5-13 5:73. 32:83 6:33 40:07 394 15-52 4:54 20-61 5:14 5:74 32:95 6:34 40:20 3°95 15-60 4.55 20-70 5:15 5°75 33:06 6-35 40:32 3°96 15-68 4-56 20:79 5:16 5:76 33°18 6:36 40-45 3:97 15-76 4:57 20:88 5:17 5:77 33-29 6:37 40:58 3:98 15-84 4-58 20:98 5:18 5:78 33°41 6:38 40:70 3°99 15-92 4:59 21-07 5:19 5:79 33°52 6:39 40:83 4:00 16-00 4-60 21-16 5:20 5:80 33-64 6-40 40-96 4-01 16-08 4:61 21:25 5:21 5:81 33-76 6-41 41-09 4:02 16-16 4-62 21:34 5°22 5:82 33:87 6-42 41°22 4:03 16-24 4-63 21:44 5:23 e 5:83 33:99 6:43 41:34 4:04 16-32 4-64 21-53 5:24 27-46 5:84 34-11 6:44 41:47 4:05 16-40 4-65 21-62 5:25 |, 27-56 5:85 34-22 6:45 41-60 4:06 16-48 4-66 21-72 5:26 27-67 5:86 34-34 6:46 41-73 407 16-56 4-67 21-81 5:27 20-77 5:87 34:46 6:47 41:86 4:08 16-65 4-68 21-90 5:28 27:88 5:88 34:57 6-48 41:99 4:09 16-73 4-69 22:00 5:29 27-98 5 89 34-69 6:49 42-12 4:10 16-81 4-70 22.09 5°30 28-09 5:90 34-81 6:50 42:25 4-11 16-89 4:71 22:18 5°31 28:20 5:91 34-93 6:51 42:38 4:12 16-97 4:72 22 28 5:32 28:30 5:92 39:05 6-52 42:51 4:13 17-06 4:73 22:37 5:33 28-41 5:93 39°16 6:53 42:64 4:14 17-14 4:74 22:47 5°34 28°52 5:94 30°28 6°54 42°77 4:15 17-22 4:75 22:56 5°35 28:62 5:95 39:40 6:55 42:90 4-16 17-31 4:76 22-66 5:36 28:73 5:96 30:52 6-56 43-03 417 17-39 4:77 22:75 5:37 28:84 5:97 30°64 6:57 43°16 4:18 17-47 4:78 22:85 5°38 28:94 5:98 39°76 6:58 43°30 4:19 17-56 4:79 22:94 5:39 29:05 5:99 30°88 6:59 43:43 4°20 17-64 4:80 23:04 5-40 29:16 6-00 36-00 6-60 43:56 VOL. V.—4 D 314 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING TABLE IV. CONTINUED. Squares of Numbers to two Decimal Places. Root. Square. Root. | Square. Root. Square. Root. Square. 6:60 43°56 7:20 51:84 7:80 60°84 8:40 70-56 6-61 43-69 ntl 51:98 7-81 61-00 8-41 70:73. 6-62 43-82 7:22 52:13 7-82 61:15 8-42 70:90 6-63 43-96 7:23 52:27 7-83 61:31 8-43 71-06 6-64 44-09 7-24 52-42 7-84 61:47 8-44 71-23 6-65 44-22 7:25 52:56 7:85 61:62 8-45, 71-40 6-66 44°36 7:26 52:71 7-86 61-78 8-46 71-57 6-67 44-49 7:27 52-85 7:87 61-94 8:47 71-74 6-68 44-62 7-28 53-00 7:88 62-09 8-48 71-91 6-69 44-76 7-29 53:14 7-89 62:25 3-49 72:08 6-70 44-89 7:30 53:29 7-90 62-41 8:50 72:25 6-71 45-02 731 53:44 791 62:57 8-51 72-42 6-72 45:16 7:32 53°58 7:92 62:73 8-52 72:59 6-73 45°29 7:33 53:73 7 93 62-88 8:53 72:76 6-74 45-43 7-34 53°88 7:94 63-04 8-54 72-93 6:75 45-56 7°35 54:02 7:95 63-20 8-55 73°10 6-76 45-70 7-36 54:17 7:96 63°36 8-56 7327 6-77 45°83 7:37 54-32 7-97 63:52 8-57 73°44 6-78 45-97 7-38 54-46 7-98 63-68 8-58 73°62 6:79 46-10 7-39 54-61 7.99 63:84 8-59 73°79 6-80 46:24 7.40 54:76 8-00 64-00 8-60 73°96 6-81 46-38 7-41 54-91 8-01 64-16 8-61 74:13 6-82 46-51 7-42 55:06 8-02 64:32 8-62 74:30 6-83 46-65 7-43 53:20 8:03 64-48 8-63 74:48 6-84 46-79 7-44 5d°30 8-04 64-64 8-64 74:65 6-85 46-92 7-45 55°50 8-05 64-80 8-65 74:82 6-86 47-06 7-46 55-65 8-06 64-96 8-66 75:00 6-87 47-20 7-47 59°80 8:07 65:12 8-67 75:17 6-88 47-33 7-48 55-95 8-08 65:29 8-68 75°34 6-89 47-47 7-49 56:10 8-09 65-45 8-69 75°52 6-90 47-61 7-50 56-25 8-10 65-61 8-70 75°69 6-91 47-75 7-51 56-40 8-11 65:77 8-71 75°86 6-92 47-89 7-52 56-55 8-12 65-93 8-72 76:04 6-93 48-02 €53 56-70 8-13 66-10 8-73 76-21 6-94 48-16 7-54 56-85 814 66 26 8-74 76:39 6-95 48-30 7-55 57:00 8:15 66:42 8-75 76:56 6:96 43-44 7-56 57-15 8-16 66:59 8-76 76:74 6-97 48-58 7-57 57-30 8:17 66-75 8-77 76°91 6-98 . 48-72 7-58 57-46 8-18 66-91 8-78 77:09 6-99 48:86 7-59 57-61 8:19 67-08 8-79 77-26 7-00 49-00 7-60 57-76 8:20 67-24 8-80 77-44 7-01 49-14 7-61 57-91 8-21 67-40 8-81 77-62 7-02 49-28 7-62 58:06 8:22 67:57 8-82 77-79 7-03 49-42 7-63 58-22 8:23 67:78 8-83 77-97 7-04 49-56 7-64 58 37 8:24 67-90 8-84 78:15 7 05 49-70 7-65 58-52 8:25 68-06 8-85 78-32 7-06 49-84 7-66 58:68 8-26 68-23 8-86 78:50 7-07 49-98 7-67 58-83 8-27 68:39 8-87 78-68 7-08 50-13 7-63 58-98 §:28 68:56 8-88 78-85 7-09 50-27 7-69 59-14 8-29 68-72 8:89 79-03 7-10 50-41 7-70 59-29 8:30 68-89 8-90 79-21 Tl | 50-55 7-71 59-44 8-31 69-06 8-91 79-39 7-12 50-69 7-72 59-60 8:32 69-22 8-92 79-57 7-13 0-84 7-73 59-75 8:33 69:39 8-93 79-74 7:14 50-98 7-74 59-91 8:34 69-56 8-94 79-92 7-15 51-12 7-75 60-06 8:35 69-72 8:95 80-10 7-16 | 51-27 7-76 60-22 8:36 69-89 8-96 80-28 TAZ | 51-41 7-77 60-37 8-37 70-06 8-97 80-46 7-18 51-55 7-78 60-53 8:38 70:22 8-98 80-64 7-19 51:70 7-79 60-68 8:39 70°39 8-99 80-82 7-20 | 51-84 7-30 60-84 8-40 70:56 9-00 81-00 THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 315 TABLE V. p—u u q—v 0 pu q—v? ov ATE: Gy > Eh ree TG Arg Ra a Se aes Ola Arg. | Arg. 4- | Arg.— | Arg. + | Arg. — Arg. | Arg. | Arg. — | Arg.-+- | Arg. — -00 0°-0 180°-0 90°-0 90°:0 50 26°-6 1539-4 63°°4 116°-6 -O1 0 6 179 4 89 -4 90 -6 ‘ol 27 -0 153 -0 63 -0 117 -0 02 1-1 178 -9 88 -9 91 -1 52 27-5 152 -5 62 -5 117 °5 03 1-7 178 -3 88 -3 91-7 53 27-9 152 +1 62 1 Ines) “04 2:3 177 -7 87-7 92 °3 “o4 28 -4 151 -6 61 -6 118 -4 05 2-9 177 +1 87 +1 92 -9 5D 28 -8 151 2 61 -2 118 -8 “06 34 176 -6 86 -6 93 -4 56 29 2 150 -8 60 -8 119 -2 07 4-0 176 -0 86 -0 94 -0 57 29-7 150 3 60 -3 119: <7 -08 4-6 175 -4 85 -4 94 -6 58 30 -1 149 -9 59 -9 120 -1 09 51 174 -9 84 -9 95 -1 “59 30 5 149 -5 59 -5 120 -5 10 57 174 3 84 +3 95-7 -60 31 -0 149 -0 59 -0 121 -0 ‘11 6 3 V3 ee 83 -7 96 -3 “61 31-4 148 -6 58 6 121 -4 12 |~ 6°8 173 :2 83 -2 96 -8 62 3h -8 148 -2 58 -2 121 -8 13) 7-4 172 -6 82 -6 97 -4 “63 32 2 147 -8 57 8 122 :2 14 8 -0 172 -0 82 -0 98 -0 “64 32 °6 147 -4 57 4 122 -6 15 8-5 171-5 81 -5 98 -5 “69 33 -0 147 -0 57 -0 123 -0 16 G)ici 170 -9 80 -9 99 -1 -66 33 -4 146 -6 56 -6 123-4 17 o) w 170 -4 80 -4 99 -6 67 33 8 146 -2 56 -2 123 :8 18 10 -2 169 -8 79 8 100 -2 68 34 -2 145 -8 50 °8 124 -2 19 10 -8 169 -2 79 -2 100 -8 -69 34 -6 145 -4 50 4 124 -6 20 11 3 168 -7 Zi} SY 101 -°3 “70 39 -0 145 -0 55-0 125 °0 “21 11-9 168 -1 78 -1 101 -9 “71 30-4 144 -6 54 -6 125 -4 22 12 -4 167 -6 77-6 102 -4 72 35 8 144 -2 54 2 125 °8 23 13 -0 167 -0 77 -0 103 -0 ‘73 36 -1 143 -9 53-9 126 +1 “24 13 5 166 -5 76 5 103 5 74 | 36:5 143 +5 53 °5 126 -5 29 14 0 166 -0 76 -0 104 -0 ‘75 36 -9 143 -1 53 ‘1 126 -9 26 14 6 165 -4 75-4 104 -6 76 37-2 142 -8 52 8 127 -2 27 15 +l 164 -9 74 9 105 -1 77 37 6 142 -4 52 -4 127 -6 28 15 6 164 -4 74-4 105 -6 78 38 -0 142 -0 52 -0 128 -0 29 16 -2 163 -5 73 °8 106 -2 79 38 3 141 -7 51-7 128 -3 “30 16-7 163 -3 73 °3 106-7 | “80 38 °7 141 33 51 -3 128 -7 “31 17-2 162 -8 72 8 107 -2 31 39 -0 141 -0 51 -0 129 -0 “32 17-7 162 °3 12-3 107 -7 82 39 4 140 -6 50 -6 129 -4 33 18 3 161 °7 ZL oe 108 -3 .83 39-7 140 -3 50 °3 129 -7 34 18 8 161 -2 71-2 108 8 -84 40 -0 140 -0 50 -0 130 -0 “39 19 °3 160 ‘7 70-7 109 °3 85 -| 40 -4 139. -6 49 -6 130 -4 “36 19 ‘8 160 -2 70 °2 109 -8 “86 40 -7 139 -3 49 3 130 -7 “37 20 -3 159 “7 69 -7 110 -3 87 41 -0 139 -0 49 0 131-0 “38 20 8 159 -2 69 -2 110 8 “88 41 -3 138 -7 48 -7 131 -3 39 21-3 158 -7 68-7 111 3 “89 41 -7 138 -3 48 -3 131-7 -40 21 °8 158 -2 68 2 111 8 “90 42 -0 138 -0 48 -0 132 -0 “41 22 3 157 -7 67 -7 112 3 “91 42 -3 137 -7 47-7 132 -3 “42 22 8 157 -2 67 2 112 -8 “92 42 -6 137 -4 47 A 132 -6 43 23 °3 156 :7 66 -7 113 3 -93 42 -9 137 -1 47 -1 132 -9 “44 23 °7 156 -3 66 -3 113 7 “G4 43 -2 136 8 46 -8 133 :2 45 24 2 155 °8 65 °8 114 2 95 43 +5 130 -5 46 5 133 -5 46 |. 24-7 155-3 65 °3 114-7 “96 43 -8 136 -2 46:2.) 133 °8 47 25 -2 154 8 64 8 115 -2 “97 44-1 135 -9 45 -Y 134 -1 48 25 -6 154 -4 64 -4 115 -6 98 44 -4 135 -6 45 -6 134 -4 49 26 -1 153 -9 63 -9 116 -1 “99 44 -7 135 °3 45 -3- | 134 -7 50 26-6 153 -4 63 -4 116 -6 1:00 45 -0 135 -0 45 -0 135 -0 | 316 PRACTICAL RULE FOR CALCULATING TABLE VI. TABLE VII. Values of u and C for Latitude of Philadelphia. Values of b and f for Lati- Arg. The Hour Angle H. tude of Philadelphia- Arg. Sun’s or Star’s Declin. Arg. Arg. u. C Arg Arg Arg. b. i 180° 0° 0:00 7-68 90° 90° a° 6:39 0-00 179 1 0-13 7-68 89 91 1 6:39 0-11 178 2 0:27 7-67 88 92 2 6:38 0-22 177 3 0-40 7-67 87 93 3 6:38 0°33 176 4 0:54 7-66 86 94 4 6:37 0:45 175 5 0:67 7-65 85 95 5 6°36 0-56 174 6 0:80 7-63 B4 96 6 6:35 0-67 173 7 0-93 7-62 83 97 7 6:34 0-78 172 8 1:07 7:60 82 98 8 6:33 0:89 171 9 1:20 7:58 81 99 9 6:31 1-00 170 10 1-33 7-56 80 100 10 6:29 1-11 169 11 1:46 7-54 79 101 iW 6°27 1:22 168 12 1:60 751 78 102 12 6:25 »1:33 167 tls: 1:73 748 Chi 103 13 6:22 1-44 166 14 1:86 7-45 76 104 14 6-20 1:55 165 15 1:99 7Al 75 105 15 6:17 1:65 164 16 2:12 7:38 74 106 16 6:14 1:76 163 17 2:24 7-34 73 107 17 6-11 1:87 162 18 2:37 7:30 72 108 18 6-08 1:97 161 19 2-50 7:26 71 109 19 6:04 2:08 160 20 2-63 7-21 70 110 20 6-00 218 159 21 2:75 717 69 111 21 5-96 2-29 158 22 2-88 7-12 68 112 22 5-92 2:39 157 23 3:00 7:07 67 113 23 5-88 2-50 156 24 3:12 7-01 66 114 24 5:84 2:60 155 25 3:24 6:96 65 115 25 5:79 2-70 154 26 3°36 6:90 64 116 26 5:74 2-80 153 27 3:48 6:84 63 117 27 5:69 2-90 152 28 3-60 6:78 62 118 28 5:64 3-00 151 29 3:72 671 61 119 29 5:59 3-10 30 5:53 3:19 150 30 3°84 6:65 60 120 149 31 3:95 6:58 59 121 148 32 . ae 6:51 58 122 147 33 4-1 6:44 57 123 146 34 4:29 6:36 56 124 TABLE VII. Moon’s reduced Semidiame- 145 35 4-40 629 55 125 ter. 144 36 4:51 6-21 54 126 Arg. Moon’s Horizontal Pa- 143 37 4-62 613 53 127 rallaz. 142 38 4-73 6:05 52 128 Se se es 140 40 4:93 5:88 50 130 53) 92-7324 139 Al 5:04 5:79 49 131 5A 9-7393 138 42 5:14 5-70 48 132 55 29-7321 137 43 5:24 5-61 47 133 56 92-7320 136 44 Dido 5:52 46 134 57 2-7319 135 45 5:43 5:43 45 135 58 2:7318 ibe (| re SO 59 2-7316 60 2:7315 Cc u. 61 2-7314 62 2:7313 THE CIRCUMSTANCES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN. 317 a AE ce TABLE IX. Correction of r, the Sun’s Reduced Semadiameter. Arguments, (f + g) at the Top, and Sun’s Semidiameter at the Side. 15'46”| -0046 yoL. y.—4 E ene ga ii re ey i * in ae ry F , f ep rm og iene tat ~ tg ea onal) a gem ee ee) es ee sey et ns et 8 DON eis GE eS, ee ie, vet eee * J Bes Se ei Say F wa 7 Y * ARTICLE XIV. Contributions to the Geology of the Tertiary Formations of Virgi- nia. By William B. Rogers, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Virginia, and Henry D. Rogers, Professor of Geology in the University of Pennsylvania. Read May 5th, 1835. I. GEOLOGY OF A PORTION OF THE PENINSULA BETWEEN THE JAMES AND YORK RIVERS. “1. The region of which we are about to treat, comprises the coun- ties of Elizabeth City, Warwick, York and James City, and the lower extremities of New Kent and Charles City counties. Its length in a north west direction is about fifty, and its mean breadth about fourteen miles. In Elizabeth City and Warwick counties, and the eastern portion of York county, the general level of the surface is but little elevated above tide. ‘The country is a uniform flat, in some places subject to be oecasionally overflowed. The rest of the region in ques- tion has an elevation above tide, varying from twenty to eighty feet. But few points, however, in the district have a level corresponding to either of these extremes, and by far the larger portion of the surface preserves a height of from forty to fifty feet. 2. The surface of this more elevated portion, though preserving a general level of remarkable uniformity, is deeply channelled by in- numerable ravines. ‘The smaller of these connect themselves with large ones, and these with the wider and deeper excavations forming 320 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE GEOLOGY OF the beds of the creeks flowing into the James and York rivers. The system of ravines connected with one river, are separated by a narrow central tract from those connected with the other, and in a general view of the district, the two systems present the appearance of mere creeks or inlets, subordinate to the two great rivers bounding the peninsula. 3. The superficial stratum of the region we are describing is an argillaceous and ferruginous sand, of a yellow, and sometimes of a red- dish colour, in which are occasionally found, at or near the surface, pebbles and small boulders of sandstone, rarely as much as six inches in diameter. The nature of these boulders would indicate that they were most probably derived from the sandstone formation which ranges along the eastern boundary of the primary ridge. In some places this stratum consists of little else than a white silicious sand ; in others, the admixture of ochreous clay is so considerable, as to fur- nish a suitable material for the manufacture of bricks. 4, Beneath this superficial layer, beds of a very argillaceous clay occasionally occur, sometimes of considerable depth and extent, and of a texture to be useful in puddling. Its colour is various, being in some places a dark blue or green, in others a bright red or dingy yellow. Wherever found, its upper boundary is remarkably even and horizon- tal; but where it rests upon beds of fossil shells, its lower limit con- forms to all the irregularities of surface which those beds usually present. Its appearance, in some places, is that of a steep, almost per- pendicular wall of smooth surface, and divided by very narrow lines running horizontally. These narrow lines, at a distance of from five inches to a foot asunder, are formed by a more ferruginous and silicious clay. At Bellefield, on the York river, seven miles from Williams- burg, this deposit may be seen overlying the stratum containing shells, in some places having a thickness of from twelve to fifteen feet, and then gradually fining out and passing into a light coloured and coarser mass. The upper surface is horizontal, and the lines of division above alluded to are perfectly parallel and regular. 'The lower surface of the clay conforms to that of the shell stratum upon which it rests. In many places these argillaceous beds consist of a yellowish clay, beau- tifully variegated by streaks of red and blue. THE TERTIARY FORMATIONS OF VIRGINIA. $21 5. A thin stratum of red ferruginous stone, containing a large pro- portion of oxide of iron, is found in this region, running horizontally below the beds of clay before described, and generally separated by only a few feet from the underlying masses of shells. This stratum, which is very generally present, varies in thickness from an inch to a foot. Its texture is sometimes cellular, sometimes compact and fibrous, like that of certain varieties of hematite. 6. The matter, which, in most cases, rests immediately upon the shells, is a yellowish brown sand, frequently containing a large pro- portion of clay. Throughout this mass, and often extending to the distance of five or six feet from the shells, particles of green sand, or the silicate of iron and potash, are more or less abundantly dissemi- nated, and in the immediate vicinity of the shells these particles are generally condensed into narrow stripes, conforming in flexure to the irregularities of the bed beneath. Even where a deep hole exists in the layer of shells, the stripes of green sand are seen still following the depression and rise of the surface, and preserving a uniform distance from it. Sometimes these thin layers are so much indurated as to have almost the appearance of stone. In none of the strata above de- scribed have fossils of any description ever been discovered. 7. The materials with which the shells are intermixed, or in which they are embedded, have various characters. In some cases they consist principally of a nearly white sand; in others the argillaceous matter greatly predominates, and the mass is a somewhat tenacious clay. Frequently much oxide of iron is mingled with the earthy matter, giving it more or less of a yellow or brown appearance, and this is the aspect which the upper beds containing shells most usually present. Very generally the lowest visible fossiliferous stratum is composed of a green silicious sand, and a bluish clay, which being always very moist, is soft and tenacious, and presents a dark blue or black colour. At the base of the cliffs on the James and York rivers, this stratum may be traced continuously for considerable distances, rarely rising more than two or three feet above the level of the water, and presenting an eyen horizontal outline. In the deep ravines, and low down in the banks of shells, generally, throughout this region, a VOL. V.— 4 F 322 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE GEOLOGY OF similar dark bluish-green argillaceous sand is observed, enclosing fre- quently a great number and variety of shells. The very general existence of the lower stratum, here described, forms an interesting and prominent feature in the geology of the Mio- cene Tertiary districts, as well of eastern Virginia as of Maryland. Throughout all the upper fossiliferous strata, as well as in the argilla- ceous beds just mentioned, will be found disseminated, greenish-black grains of silicate of iron and potash, identical with those already de- scribed as existing in the stratum immediately overlying the shells, and having the same form and composition with the granules contained very abundantly in an older Formation, both in this country and Eu- rope. Insome beds of the marl, or shells, these particles so abound as to give a very decided colour to the whole mass. In specimens from James City and York counties, as much as thirty-five per cent of the green sand has been found, and occasionally shells are seen filled with this substance almost alone. 7. The surface of the strata containing shells is usually irregular. Sometimes it rises abruptly, in the form of a hillock; then it is scooped out into depressions ofa few feet in depth. These irregularities, how- ever, are apparently of two kinds; the one the original form of the deposit, the other produced by denuding action upon the surface. Thusin many places the same stratum may be remarked rising with more or less abruptness ; then again descending, and perhaps preserving a nearly horizontal line for some distance, marked at its upper surface by a clear and unbroken outline, and presenting no indication of violent abrasion from above. In other places, and this is a very frequent oc- currence, deep and irregular furrows and cavities are seen, such as would naturally arise from the action of the currents and eddies of a large mass of water in rapid movement. 8. Having thus given an account of the nature and arrangement of the strata overlying the shells, as well as those in which they are im- bedded, we will now describe the general condition and disposition in which the shells occur. 9. Condition of the shells in the tertiary deposits. In general, the state of the shells, and their arrangement in the earth, are such as to indicate their tranquil deposition at the spots in which THE TERTIARY FORMATIONS OF VIRGINIA. 323 they are found. Thus the corresponding valves are very often found together and closely shut. Many of the smaller shells, such as Arca centenaria, Arca incile, Nuculae, Venericardia alticosta, and Chama congregata, which are most usually thus found, are often either en- tirely empty, or contain a small quantity of clay that is quite impal- pable; indicating plainly that they have been exposed to no violence, and that only such solid matter as could pass between the edges of the closed valves had obtained access to the interior. Whenever such shells, however, have been previously drilled, as is very frequently the case even with the largest and thickest shells, the interior is found entirely filled with sand, clay, green sand,and small fragments of shell. In most cases the larger species of shells, even when their valves appear to be in accurate juxtaposition, is thus filled, and in this case it cannot be supposed that the contained matter has entered through the holes thus drilled, since in many instances shells of considerable magnitude are found imprisoned within. Such shells, no doubt, after the death of the animal, remained open, or at least partially so, and received the sand, clay and other materials which they contain by the genéle action of the waves. The ligament at the hinge in the mean time would decay, until at length yielding to the pressure of the accumulating matter above the shell, in favourable circumstances would collapse into its natural closed condition. The very common occurrence of the valves in juxtaposition, is a striking proof that during or subsequent to their deposition they have not been exposed to violent agencies. ‘This becomes even more remarkable in the case of such shells as the Panopea reflexa, which almost in every instance is found with the valves properly united. The connection between the two valves in this shell is the slightest imaginable after the destruction of the natural organic bond, and an inconsiderable force would have sufficed to separate and break the valves. 10. The admirable preservation of the shells in many cases is also an interesting fact, and affurds another evidence of the absence of all violent agencies at this period. The most fragile species of Natica, delicate Tellinae, Mactra tellinoides, the shell and processes of the Crepidula, the minute and sharp angles of the Fusus tetricus, the thin 324 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE GEOLOGY OF and hollow Fissurella are found in perfect preservation in many places. The state of the shells seems to depend chiefly upon the mechanical texture and chemical character of the materials with which they are mixed, and of which the overlying stratum is composed. In the moist blue clay the shells are generally found in a very soft condition. In a highly ferruginous clayey bed they are found either partially or en- tirely dissolved, and beautiful casts remain in their stead. 11. In many places entire banks occur, composed of casts of Chama and other shells, sometimes separate, sometimes cemented together so as to form a species of rock. These appearances occur chiefly near the surface, and when the soil is porous and ferruginous. The casts thus formed often consist chiefly of carbonate of lime,.and in many specimens as much as eighty per cent of this substance is found. Casts of this kind belong mostly to the smaller shells, and by far the most common are of the Chama congregata. These, as already stated, are often found nearly or quite empty, and we may, therefore, con- ceive, that as the matter of the shell in an extensive bank of Chamas is gradually dissolved, the water charged with carbonate of lime enters the cavities, and slowly deposits the carbonate mixed with fine parti- cles of clay and sand. ‘Thus by degrees the cavities are filled. In the mean time the shell disappears, frequently leaving on the surface of the cast a chalky covering, like the decomposed inner film of shelly matter. In support of this explanation it may be added, that in many casts beautiful crystals of carbonate of lime are found, forming a por- tion of the cast, and having the appearance of Dog-tooth Spar. In some cases the shelly matter appears to have been dissolved, and its place supplied by the crystallized carbonate, encrusting the earth for- merly contained within the shell. Sometimes, too, a thin film of oxide of iron surrounds the cast, showing very distinctly all the mark- ings of the inner surface of the shell. In many localities, presenting a series of beds differing in composition, the shells will be found perfect in some of them, while in others immediately above or below only casts remain. Thus at the College Mill, about one mile from Wil- liamsburg, the upper fossiliferous layer is a yellow silicious sand, con- taining perfect shells. Below this is a brown ferruginous clay, filled with the most beautiful casts of Chama, Pectunculus, Turritella, &c. THE TERTIARY FORMATIONS OF VIRGINIA. 325 The shelly matter has entirely disappeared, and the casts lie loosely in the cavities produced by the removal of the shells, entirely distinct from each other, and covered by a film of oxide of iron. The layer beneath, consisting of bluish-green silicious clay, is full of well pre- served Pectens, Pernas, and a variety of other shells. 12. In general, the various species of shells are found associated in colonies or groups, but as in the case of banks of recent shells, these colonies contain many scattered specimens, differing from the general contents of the group. ‘The two species of Chama, the C. congregata and C. corticosa, which are found in almost every deposit of shells in this region, in many cases form extensive beds, with a very small ad- mixture of other genera. The best agricultural marl, of a purely cal- careous nature, which is used in lower Virginia, is derived from these beds of Chama, the friable texture of the shell upon exposure to the air rendering this species of marl more easy of application to land, and more prompt in its ameliorating effects. Crassatelle often form an extensive deposit, and the large Pectens occur in continuous layers of considerable depth and extent. ‘The different species of Arca, Arte- mis, Crepidula, &c., present a similar arrangement. Even those shells which are of comparatively rare occurrence, are usually found in little groups. ‘Thus the Isocardia fraterna is found, to the extent of a dozen or twenty, closely packed together. This gregarious assemblage of shells of the same species is what would naturally be anticipated in the absence of violent agencies during or after their deposition, and furnishes another very striking proof of the comparatively tranquil condition of the sea or estuary in which they were allowed to accu- mulate. 13. Disposition of the fossils. In nearly all the vertical sections of the deposit we are now describ- ing, a series of beds or strata may be observed, each distinguished by the predominance of one or more species, and the order of superposi- tion of these beds frequently continues without interruption for some distance. It does not appear, however, that in localities remote from each other the arrangement of the shells is always alike, although in many instances there appears to be a striking correspondence. In a majority of cases in the neighbourhood of Williamsburg the upper layer VOL. V.—4 G 326 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE GEOLOGY OF is composed principally of Chama congregata. In many localities also, the large Pectens mingled with Ostrea Virginica occupy the highest place. But generally, the same shell reappears as a predominant constituent of one or more of the subjacent beds; and such is the diversity of ar- rangement, even in places but a few miles distant, that it is obvious that no general order of succession exists. ‘Thus in a range of three miles we find Perna maxillata in some localities in the lowest stratum of dark blue argillaceous sand ; in others, forming an upper or even the highest layer of the series. At Waller’s Mill, three miles from Wil- liamsburg, this fossil overlies the other shells ; whereas at the College Mill, as already stated, it forms a part of the lowest visible stratum. So far, therefore, as relates to the tertiary beds of the district of which we are now treating, and indeed of Virginia generally, there is no such constancy in the position of this fossil in the series, as to warrant the theoretical inference of its belonging to a different tertiary period, de- duced by Mr Conrad from its relation to the other tertiary fossils in certain districts in Maryland. 14. With the view of conveying more precise ideas of the disposi- tion of the fossils in this region, as well as describing some interesting facts peculiar to certain districts which have been investigated, we an- nex the following details in relation to some of the more important localities. 15. King’s Mill, one of the most interesting fossil localities in the neighbourhood of Williamsburg, is situated on the north bank of the James river, about twenty-five miles fromitsmouth. The cliffin which ‘the shells appear is abrupt, and has a height varying from twenty to forty-five feet above the water. The strata of shells extend along the river with slight interruptions, when the cliff sinks nearly to the level of the water, fora distance of between two and three miles, and they are found in a somewhat similar order of superposition for some dis- tance inland. Their general direction is horizontal, but the outline of any one stratum is frequently very irregular, the surface rising and falling with a steep inclination. This irregular outline is particularly remarkable with the beds of Chama, which are very thick at some points, and then fine out rapidly and again expand. 16. This deposit of shells is covered to the depth of from four to THE TERTIARY FORMATIONS OF VIRGINIA. 327 a six feet by a brownish yellow sand, intermixed with stripes of clay. Beneath this is a thin layer of about one foot, of very argillaceous and ferruginous clay of a red colour. This rests upon a few inches thickness of gravel, consisting of water-worn quartz, rarely larger than a pea. Beneath this isa layer, from one to two feet thick, consisting of yellow sand, containing a great deal of the green or chloritic sand, arranged in narrow stripes. Next follows a layer of the same sand, con- taining principally Chamaand Venus deformis. ‘This is from two to three feet in thickness. Immediately belowis a stratum consisting almost ex- clusively of Chama, with a few Arca centenaria, &c. ‘Thisstratum, vary- ing from three to four feet in thickness, isa mass of compacted shells, with but little earthy matter intervening. ‘The earthy matter contains a very large proportion of the chloritic sand. ‘The next stratum is composed chiefly of large Pectens, and has a thickness of from one to two feet. Below this is another dense stratum of Chama, together with Arca cen- tenaria, Panopea reflexa, &c., and also very richin the green sand. 'Thick- ness, from four to six feet. ‘Then follows a second layer containing Pectens with Ostrea compressirostra, one foot in thickness. A third stratum, in which Chama predominates, follows next, in thickness from two to three feet, and at the base of the cliff is a layer containing Pec- tens, Ostrea compressirostra, &c., four to five feet in thickness. 17. Thus through a height of more than twenty feet in some places, the cliff consists principally of shells, of which there are a great many species, besides those mentioned as predominating in the several beds. On the extensive contiguous estates of King’s Mill and Little- town, these shells are largely used as a manure: and for this pur- pose the first and second beds of Chama are preferred on account of the immense amount of calcareous matter, and the large proportion of green sand which they contain. Judging from the occasional appear- ance of bluish green-clay on the line of the beach, and in some places immediately at the base of the cliff just described, it is highly probable that a continuous stratum of this substance lies beneath the other beds throughout the whole extent observed. A horizontal bed of yellow- ish clay extends for some distance along a lower portion of the cliff, in which there are no fossils, running within a few feet of its upper edge, and beneath this bed, and parallel to it, is a thin layer of the iron ore 328 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE GEOLOGY OF * formerly described. At the foot of this cliff appears the underlying stratum of clay. 18. Description of the cliffs at Yorktown, on the York river. The elevation, abrupt form, and peculiar structure of the cliffs at this point, and for some distance both above and below, render it an interesting spot to the geologist. A dry and ample beach, uninter- rupted by creeks or inlets for several miles, affords a ready access to the banks ; while the river’s edge, strewed with fossils which have fallen from the cliff, exposes a considerable variety of interesting spe- cimens. Immediately at York, the river is only three-eighths of a mile in width, but both above and below, it expands to a breadth six or seven times as great. At Wormley’s creek, about two miles below the town, the cliff about to be described begins; but from this point down to the extre- mity of the peninsula, the banks are uniformly flat and low. The cliff here consists at bottom of a bluish sandy clay, containing immense numbers of Turritella alticosta, Cytherea Sayana, and many smal! uni- valves, over which lies a layer of brownish yellow sand, with very few shells, and those chiefly Nucula limatula and a few other species. To this succeeds a stratum composed almost entirely of Crepidula costata, so closely packed together as to leave little space for sand or other earthy matter. The whole is covered toa variable depth by a stratum of coarse sand of various strong tints,and evidently highly ferruginous. ‘The ele- vation of the cliff increases, and the nature of its contents gradually changes, in approaching York. 'The lower stratum disappears entirely after continuing for something less than half a mile, previous to which, however, its fossil contents are changed; the layer of the Turritelle being replaced by Crepidula closely packed together. Cre- pidula still runs on horizontally above, and the intermediate stratum is now densely filled with Pectens, Venus deformis, Ostrea, and a great variety of small shells frequently connected together so as to form hard masses of considerable size. Still higher up the river the deposit assumes the character of successive layers composed of comminuted shells, connected together so as to form a porous rock. These frag- ments are generally so small and so much rubbed and water-worn, as to render it impossible to ascertain the species of shell of which they THE TERTIARY FORMATIONS OF VIRGINIA. 329 once were portions. Many small shells, and occasionally large ones, particularly Pectens, are found mingled with the other constituents of the rocks; and in some places thin layers of shells, such as Venus and Crepidula, intervene between the adjacent strata. The height of this fragmentary rock amounts in some places to forty feet. In most places it has a highly ferruginous aspect, though this is not invariably the case. Frequently shells of considerable size, such as Lucina anodonta, are seen coated with, or entirely changed into, crystalline carbonate of lime, firmly cemented inthe mass. The texture of the rock is vari- ous, at some points admitting of being readily excavated by the pick and spade, so as to form caves which have been occasionally used by the inhabitants ; in other places exhibiting a hard and semi-crystalline structure, and having the compactness of some forms of secondary limestone. ‘The lower portion of the cliff, having less cohesion than the rest, has been scooped out by the action of water so as to give it, occasionally, an impending attitude. Above the town the stratum of fragmentary rock becomes much thinner, being now reduced to about ten or twelve feet.

@° 4B Gree =.000.180 6 seer Se a= "OOS Mean m = .000,117 . It appears distinctly, from comparing these results, that the change of intensity of the needle’s magnetism is greater at the higher tempera- tures than at the lower, for equal changes of temperature. ‘The value of m, deduced from observations between 72° and 90°, is the greatest ; next the value obtained between 34° and 90°, and last that between 34° and 72°. This change would have appeared greater if no cor- rection had been made for the daily variation. The second and third sets of observations on needle A, before re- ferred to, are given in the annexed table. The object of these sets has already been explained. TABLE No. III. Observations for the Correction for Temperature of Needle A. ; 6s 3 s 3 Sam 8 a S 5 5 a Se ks 2s € | Times of Beginning ga8 = Ep S [8s B& zs a a ong Sngme: BAS 35 2 as 88 =2] <5 | Place of Observa- RG 4 s Ss o j 2 es 5 2 2 £ ss tion, &e. . 2 eS i=} 2) z Hours. |Min.|Secs.| Fah.° | Inch. A Fah.°} Sees. |Fah.°} Secs. P.M. 4] 10 | 47.6) 31 Tn small Observatory, 5. 22 | 45.2) 292 4 | 200) 30.2/ 35.88) 30.2) 35.880} out of doors, Dec. 7, eS eee —— | ——_— — —-,—— 1835. Bache. P.M. 5] 31 |36.0} 86 43 |40.0| 90 |-+4*! 200) 88 | 36.20 5| 46 |48.8) 92 6. 58 |53.2} 92 |+4 | 200} 92 | 36.24/ 90.0) 36.220) Bache. PoMig 74) 49° 22.4) scsi 8} OL |20.8} 382 |+4 | 200) 31.5] 35.92 8} 04 |42.8) 32 z a 16 |42.2} 31 |+4 | 200) 31.7} 35.97) 31.6] 35.945} Bache. P.M. 11} 08 |10.6) 86 In the house, Feb. Ist, 23 |05.6} 80 33| 250) 84.0] 35.80 1836. 11} 26 |26.4; 80 8. 38 |21.6) 72 |+4 | 200) 76.0] 35.76] 80.0! 35.780} Bache. A.M. 12| 18 |02.4| 523 Feb. 2d. 24 154.4) 50 |+4 | 200) 50.8) 35.60 12| 26 |27.4) 50 9: 38 |20.4| 48 |+4 | 200) 49.2] 35.65] 50.0) 35.625] Bache. * This sign denotes that the gauge was above the mark to which the sign is prefixed. ae OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM AT SEVERAL PLACES, ETC. 44] A comparison of observations 5 and 7, after correcting the latter by an approximate coefficient for temperature, gives the amount of daily variation to be allowed for. Assuming the progress of this variation to be in proportion to the time, a correction is deduced for number 6, which is in the right direction, though small in amount. The coeffi- cient deduced from 5 and 6 ism = .000,147. The coefficient be- fore obtained was m = .000,117. It would certainly be rash to infer from the small difference thus rendered evident between the values of m, deduced under different circumstances,. that the difference resulted from these circumstances. ‘The times of vibration at corresponding temperatures, are greater in the second set of observations than in the first, as well as the differences for a given number of degrees. It is possible that the needle may have undergone a slight change between October and December, a question which future observations may de- termine. As far as the application to the observations which are to follow is concerned, these coefficients are so near to each other that either might be adopted without sensibly affecting the results. ‘The difference would amount to but .01 second in ten vibrations, for ten degrees of temperature. From 8 and 9 uncorrected for diurnal varia- tion, m = .000,145. The times of oscillation being nearly equally before and after midnight, about which time the march of the intensity begins to change its direction, a correction deduced from preceding observations, would probably render the results less accurate than they are without it. The very close agreement of the two numbers just given for the coefficient, strengthens the opinion, that the difference from the num- ber found in October results from a slight change in the magnetic state of the bar: the circumstances in the second and third sets of observations having been so very different as to local magnetism. We infer from a comparison of the three values of m, that a co- efficient for the correction for temperature, obtained under the circum- Stances of the second and third sets of observations, may safely be applied to correct, for temperature, the observations made during the summer and autumn. The following table contains the observations made to obtain the correction to apply to needles C and B. The former has so small a 442 ON THE RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES correction that the observations upon it were quite laboured. It will probably be better not to go into the same detail in stating these re- sults as in the former ones. With this impression we present the fol- lowing table. The first column contains the number of the observa- tion; the second, the designation of the needle; the third, the mean time at which the set of observations was made; the fourth, the num- ber of oscillations from which the time of ten contained in the sixth has been calculated; the fifth, the mean temperature; the seventh, re- marks, &c. TABLE No. IV. Observations for the Correction for Temperature of Needles C and B. > i) =I oo pear io Pare spy Vel WN 2 |-ss S {4 Ee) Remarks, &c. 2) s o Sh i=| S| Ep Sle | 2s 6 | 8 Ss @ | Fah.°| Secs. Bache, observer. Oe 550) 47.8) 32.005) February 1, 1836. In doors. Gauge 33 to +4. 2 1226, 87.8) 32.044) Jar leaks much, frequently exhausted. Sets.of from 3 400) 65.5; 31.980} Gauge 32 to 4. [150 to 250 observations. 4 450) 48.0) 31.930 <¢ 4 and above. Bache, observer. 5a Be 400) 37.7) 48.230} Indoors. February 4th. Gauge about 4 inches. 6 320) 89.9' 49.085) Gauge 32 to 4. 7 284 45.2| 48.260 ‘© above 4. Jar leaks badly. Needle B presents a curious case of correction for temperature. The diurnal variation shown from observations 1 and 3 is greater than the correction for eighteen degrees of temperature. This fact was per- ceived during the experiments, and led to the very frequent repeti- tions of the experiment at 87.8°, No. 2 of the table. Using observa- tions 1 and 4 for the correction for change of intensity, and assuming that change to have been regular, observations 1 and 2 give for the coefficient of the correction for temperature, m = .000,049, And 1 and 3 give m = .000,056 Mean m = .000,052 OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM AT SEVERAL PLACES, ETC. 443 The progress of intensity within doors, as shown by observations 1 and 4, is contrary to that of the ordinary diurnal variation. ‘This was correct, however, as was shown by six sets of observations between 3 h. 51' and 5 h. 49’, at temperatures between 83.3 and 91.8°. The time of ten oscillations diminished from 32.115 to 32.035. The same fact recurs in the observations on the 4th of February. From these, numbered 5, 6 and 7, allowing for the diurnal change of intensity deduced from 5 and 7, the value of m, for needle B, is, m = .000,357. This supposes 7 to be reduced to the temperature of 5, by an ap- proximate coefficient. The correction obtained in 1834 for this same needle was m = .000,277. It would seem to be rather more susceptible to changes of tempera- ture now than at the former time. The difference however is small, amounting to about .04 of a second in ten vibrations, for ten degrees of the thermometer. The coefficients used in correcting the observations which follow, are brought together in the following table. TABLE V. Correction for Temperature of Needles 1, 2, B, A and C. First Series. Value of m. Second Series. Value of m. Needle No. 1 -000,436 Needle A .000,117 Oo 2 .000,423 a C -000,052 “ 3 .000,277 | « 3 (B) .000,357 As far as we may be allowed to infer from these observations, the correction for temperature depends for its amount upon the degree of hardness, or temper, of the material of the needle; in other words, upon the same property which causes a needle to retain or to lose a charge once given to it. Nos. 1 and 2, of different dimensions, but of the same material, have sensibly the same correction. C, which is certainly the hardest of the set, has a very small correction. ‘The prismatic bar A has a correction intermediate between the two cylinders C and 3 (B), which VOL. y.—85 0 444 ON THE RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES are similar in their general proportions. ‘The effects of figure and of relative dimensions seem to be without influence upon the result. In all cases pains were taken to allow the needles time to arrive at the temperature of the inclosure, but observations made at intervals during the heating or cooling seem to show that this precaution was not essential. These observations conclusively show the importance, and indeed the necessity, of determining a specific correction to be applied-to each needle used in.a series of observations for intensity. They confirm in this respect conclusions to which the observations of captain Sabine for obtaining the same correction, would seem to lead. The variation of these coefficients from each other, as well as from those of captain Sabine, and from that quoted as having been determined by professor Hansteen, agrees in the conclusion to which they lead. It is the more necessary to call special attention to this point, because the coefficient of professor Hansteen has been applied in the reduction of the observa- tions (Royal Soc. Trans. 1828) for the relative intensities at Paris, London and Edinburgh, and more recently in a very extensive series of observations by M. Quetelet of Brussels, whose activity in this branch has of late years been particularly prominent. A further inference may be deduced from these observations, viz. that a sensible change in the maguetic state of a bar, will be attended by a change in the correction to be applied for temperature. So that a cor- rection once obtained should not be used after such a change has taken place in any considerable degree. In an extensive series of observa- tions, it would therefore be necessary to investigate this correction during the time of making the observations, or before the series was commenced and after its completion. In applying the correction for temperature, it is convenient, and generally admissible, to take for the multiplier of the coefficient just determined, a mean time of vibration, instead of the actual time in a given Case. That is, to take for the value of T, T= T —T’.m( —®)), where ‘I'’ represents the mean time referred to. When the correction OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM AT SEVERAL PLACES, ETC. 445 is not large, on account either of the value of m, or of tf’ — f, the dif- ferences will fall much below the errors in the observed times of oscil- lation. CORRECTION FOR ARC. In many observations in the Firsr Series, the horizontal oscilla- tions were performed through ares of very different extent. With needle No. 1, the semi-are of vibration at the commencement of the experiment was, in some cases, 30°, and in others not more than 20°, the arc at the conclusion of the experiment depending, of course, upon its duration. Similar variations occur with the other needles. The most simple method, therefore, of rendering the results compara- ble is to reduce the times of oscillation to what they would have been in indefinitely small arcs. ‘The formula for this purpose is the same with that investigated by Borda for the pendulum.* — By applying the known values of the ares observed at beginning and ending the experi- ment, the times are reduced in the tables which follow. Some error is, no doubt, introduced, particularly when these arcs are large, by the difficulty of observing accurately the extent of the arc of vibration, To diminish these, as far as possible, the arcs of vibration should be reduced to the smallest practicable limit, in order that the times in the different arcs may not vary too rapidly. The practice of oscillating in different arcs leading to a troublesome correction, is to be avoided. We find as the greatest semi-arc of observation suitable to be employed in such observations about fifteen degrees. The oscillation in a rare- fied medium permits this to be much reduced. In the Szconp Serres all the observations were made within the same arcs, and are directly comparable. Needle A made 300 oscilla- tions between the semi-arcs of 4° and 2° when the mercury gauge stood at three inches. At the same pressure C and B made 300 oscil- lations, between 6° and 2°. In such small ares, the difference in the * Sin. (A + a). Sin. (A — a) Pd ees A een Ne ee Nee ( . 382M (Log. Sin. A — Log. Sin. a) in which T’ is the reduced time of a given number of vibrations; T, the observed time; A and a@ the ares at beginning and ending; M, the modulus of the common logarithms. 446 ON THE RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES times of vibration resulting from differences of arc are entirely in- sensible. We proceed now to give the observations and calculatioris for the magnetic intensity at the several places named in the title of our me- moir. RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES AT PHILADELPHIA AND WEST POINT. Before giving the tables of observations at these two places, we pro- pose to state the different occasions on which the observations were made. First Series. The first observations were made at West Point on the 21st of April 1834, with needle No. 1. This needle was then taken to Philadelphia, its rate ascertained (May 16th and 20th), and the needle returned to West Point, where it was observed, at intervals, during five weeks (from June 2d to July 8th). In this last period 3558 os- cillations were observed. The same needle was oscillated at Philadel- phia on the 5th of August, at West Point on the 13th, and again at Philadelphia on the 20th of the same month. These repeated trans- fers completely guard against the effect of change of rate in the needle. No. 3 was first oscillated at West Point on the 23d of April, and again between the 28th of May and 9th of June. It was then trans- ferred to Philadelphia, where it was observed on the 26th of June and 12th of July. It was taken to West Point and oscillated on the 7th and Sth of August, and finally observed at Philadelphia on the 20th and 25th of August. This series comprises 6478 oscillations at West Point, and 7069 at Philadelphia. The observations at Philadelphia were made at two different places in the city. In part of the series the apparatus was placed in the open air upon a marble column, and in the other part, in a smail ob- servatory; both in the yard attached to professor Bache’s dwelling. The observations at West Point were made upon a small brick column, north of professor Courtenay’s house. OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM AT SEVERAL PLACES, ETC. 447 It is certain, that considerable differences in local attraction exist at different positions of this highland station. The place of observation is at the base of the hills which inclose, on the west, the table land upon which the buildings of the Military Academy are situated. _ The series embracing observations at different hours of the day, with different states of weather, &c., are the more valuable, as presenting a nearer approximation to the mean intensity. In all the remarks and calculations which follow, the intensity is assumed to be constant. The times, at West Point, were observed by a chronometer by Par- kins and Frodsham, of excellent character: those at Philadelphia by a pocket chronometer by Barraud, and by one by French, both of good character. The daily rates were too:small to produce any sensible difference by correcting the observations for them. In the following table, No. VI., the first column contains the number of the observation ; the second, the designation of the needle; the third, the date of observation; the fourth, the time of beginning; the fifth, the duration of the experiment; the sixth, the number of vibrations; the seventh, the mean temperature; the eighth, the arcs at beginning and ending; the ninth, the duration of experiment corrected for arc; the tenth, the duration corrected for arc and temperature; the ele- venth, the time of ten vibrations corrected for are and temperature ; the twelfth, the state of the weather; and the thirteenth, the names of the observers. The table of observations at West Point, No. VII., is arranged in a very similar manner to that just described. The temperature to which the results are reduced is 60° Fah. yoL. V.—5 P 448 ON THE RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES TABLE No. VI. Observations at Philadelphia.—First Srrigs. ee ° a oss Ss .| gy Re Slt aims) 8 g 2. CSS [Sk laa alse slo. 8 B63 at 22 4.3 |Timeof Beginning) 85 [2 a/F 3) as |S ee|§ eS S|2— 8] State | Observers’ AE 25 Al 3 Experiment. 25 28 ste as ao Sesls ese 3 3=| ofthe Names. S Bl eo og Ea |oS| 3 Es 50/553 /8— | Weather. . 6s eek is A ls |= |*4 Aas aB2 8% Z a Qa FAs) (SESS eS a PR P| Hours.} Mins. | Sec.| Sees. Fah.°|} Degs. | Secs. | Secs. | Secs. - : Clear. |H. D. Rogers 1 | No. 1.] May 16)P.M. 6} 13 | 13.8) 22098] 480} 60.0/35to 5 |2198.1) 2198.1 45.79 Gumulissand Beene 2} « | « ao] « 5] 29 |429|2049.8) 440] 85.7] « — |oo38.9| 2015.7 | 45.81| Hazy. | Bache. 3| « Aug. 5/A.M.7| 21 | 09.6 3035.6 654] 83.5 [20to 3 |3029.9| 2998.4 | 45.84| Clear. « 4} « | «© «| & “g) 33 | 04.8|1035.6| 232] 87.520 10 |Jo81.3| 10681 | 46.04] — « « 5] « | « «pm. 7 04 |56.0/2372.0| 510| 872/20« 3 |a367.5| 2339.2 | 45.87] — « « 6| « | « 20] « 3) 58 |10.8}20824] 452] o2.9}19« 3 loovs.s) 20487 | 45.33], Clear. ze 7 oc cc “) ¢ 68) «14 | 12.0) 2486.8) 538} 93.5 |20 34)'2481.7] 2444.9 | 45.45 ee < 8 os ce ] -& 10) 24 | 33.6] 2212.4] 486) 55.5|20 3 | 2208.2) 2212.6 | 45.53 “ ce 9 oe “ 25) “ 8 10 | 05.2) 1660.4] 356) 99.1 |20* 5 |1656.1] 1627.4 | 45.71] Cloudy. Be 10 Me ne “) 6 1) 51 | 16.4] 1684.4} 362) 98.0/20* 5 |1680.0} 1651.7 | 45.63 G3 OJ 14 | No. 3.| June 26P. M. 7| 10 | 000} 1086.8) 220) 82:5|30** 5 |1082.1) 1071.3 | 48.68 Bache. 15 “ July 12 4 31 | 28.0) 1411.8} 290) 84.515 * 2 |1410.4) 1395.1 | 48.11} Cloudy. we 16 ee Bs “) & 5! 14 | 00 0) 1460.8} 300) 83.5/15« 3 |1459.0) 1443.8 | 48.13 ec. 17 ue Aug. 20] “ 6} 04 | 39.6] 1290.8) 264) 84.4/20« 3 |1288.4| 1274.5 | 48.28] Clear. we Is| « | * 25] « 9 51 |22.91 894.0] 182402.2/20« 5 | so1.7| 875.0 | 48.08] Cloudy. aoe oS Needle No. 1. Whole No. of Vibrations 4510; Whole time, 20,604.8 Secs.; Mean Time of Ten Vibrations, 45.687 Secs. 3. ce 1256 ; x 6 1059. 2on 48.246 “ TABLE No. VII. Observations at West Point.—First SERIES. yee Pe Pee ae eS eee eae Pot os] 2. | sh] 3 [88 |Oe tleeslead eer s a B ga ° 8 25/3 aa s aa S2ulsee Es 38 za Observers’ Names. a) ele SSS 2° Se JEeslIe we siés = 2 2 =) x) S& (Asari ak 8/0 ° A Secs.| % |Fah.°) Degs. | Secs.| Secs. | Secs. 1 | No.1.|April 21) 953.8] 200} 63 22 a15 | 945.6) 944.3 | 47.22| Courtenay and Bache. 2 ce sé 22) 752.5) 160] 49 (25a 103) 758.4) + 752.1 | 47.01 es 3] « |June 2] 960.5/200| 74. |30a15 | 952.2! 946.5 | 47.32 Courtenay and Cram. 4 a ce ‘1 1142.4] 238] * oe 1132.6) 1125.8 | 47.30 a 5 a oS 9} 971.7) 200 | 89.2 of 963.3) 950.8 | 47.54 ae 6 a “ “11018.7| 210} 4 1010.0} 996.9 | 47.47 f 7 g 14) 1958.5) 410} 665 |80a 5 |1950.0) 1944.6 | 47.43 sf 8 “ July 1/1913.7/400) 74 |380a 4 |1906.3) 1894.9 | 47.37 Courtenay. 9 . a *11916.5) “ | 79 |30a 5 |1908.2) 1892.1 | 47.30 uw 10 ae So 3} 1919.2) * | 743 Wo 1910.9) 1899.0 | 47.47 a 11 ae J 7| 1926.8] “ | 82 [30a 65)1917.2) 1898.5 | 47.46 of 12 02 Ke 8}1924.0} <“ | 81 id 1914.4; 1896.4 | 47.41 ae 13 a 12] 955.5} 200} 71 |20a105) 951.5) 946.9 | 47.34 ce 14 “c « «&) 955.7) “ | 78 [20a 7 | 952.8) 945.3 | 47.26 a 15 a x “) 956.0] “ | 725 [20a 7%) 953.1] ~947.9 | 47.39 “ 16 « jAug. 12) 1675.5) 348) 86 (20a 3 |1672.3) 1653.0 | 47.50} Courtenay and Bache. 25 | No. 3. April 22) 515.5)100| 52 (30a14 | 501.4) 502.5 | 50.25 a 26 “ (May 28) 515.2) “ | 64 |40a19 | 508.0} 507.4 | 50.74) Courtenay and Cram. 27 oe cc 30) 516.1) “ | . 40a22] 508.1) 507.5 | 50.75 do 28 « {June 2 517.0) “ | 71$ |40a17 | 510.4) 508.8 | 50.88 oh 29 a a 9} 520.7) © | 894 |89a21 | 513.1) 508.9 | 50.89 ac 30 « {Aug. 7} 1537.8) 300} 82 [30a 4 | 1531.9) 1522.5 | 50.75 Courtenay. 31 2 as 8] 1543.9| “ | 84 sé 1537.9) 1527.5. | 50.92 ss Needle No. 1. Whole No. of Vibs. 4566; whole time, 21,635.0 secs.; Mean time jof 10 Vibs. at 60° 47.381. 3. 1100; « 5,585.1 50.774. a ee ee OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM AT SEVERAL PLACES, ETC. 449 The horizontal intensities deduced from a comparison of these last results with those obtained at Philadelphia, are, from No. 1, .92977; and from No. 3, .90290, the horizontal intensity at Philadelphia being assumed as unity. The relative weights of the observations with the two needles, taking the whole number made with each needle as be- longing to one set of observations, will be, according to the formula of Gauss,* : 4566 x 4510 For No. iL 2X——9076. == 4540; 1100 x 1256 And for No. 3, 2X——9356 ° = 7A. The mean horizontal intensity thus deduced is, .92424. An arith- metical mean of the two intensities would have given .91633, a num- ber differing sufficiently from that just found, to make the calculation worth pursuing, notwithstanding that it is less than the difference of the intensities determined by the two different needles. SECOND SERIES. These observations were made on the 7th and 8th of September 1835, at West Point, and in September and October in Philadelphia. They were made in the vacuum apparatus, and although the number of observations is not equal to that of the first series, the mean error is so much diminished by the superior accuracy of the results in the rarefied medium, that the weight of the observations is very much greater than that of the more numerous ones of the first series. The following tables, Nos. VIII. and IX., are arranged nearly as the — preceding ones, and require no specific description. | The table for Philadelphia contains observations with needle No. 3 (B), for comparison with others with the same needle at different places. This needle was not oscillated at West Point. * Baily in Trans. Astr. Soc. Lond., Vol. II. p. 19. 450 ON THE RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES TABLE No. VIII. Observations at Philadelphia.—Seconp Series. - ' : = we 5 : ee ee ere |e = a8) (Sle les peod 2 18 3 eb 6s Bsja lus wWeos Rosle] 2 ae a ssim|°s (fae Weather and Asis] O88 oF ES, BUS! | eto e iogeneuey Bak Observer, &c. coe 5 Pee) =m a Hm |e @ ae emarks. olan} S = Aa j= |S lge6 Boss eee eed a Hours. | Mins. eet Fah.° = |Secs.| Secs 1835. | | 1; A |Sept. 19} P.M. 5.4] 18 {00.2} 68.2} 300) 36.01; 36.02 \Cloudy. E. Nimbus. Bache. Zo \f ue « 30; “ 3.5] 18 {00.6 63.9] 300) 36.02} 36:05 |Cloudy. Wind N.W.\ Place of 3] « “ “ “ 3.8} 15 {00.4 63.1) 250 36.02; 36.05 Cumulus. Observation, aoe Oct | eS) om 4.2} 18 |01.4) 72.0) 300 36.05| 36.04 [Cloudy. N. E. wind. Small 5] & BTS 3 26 18 {01.2 71.2) 300) 36.04; 36.04 Cumulo-stratus. Magnetic 6.) “ ce ce ‘ 6.5! 14 158.0) 33.7| 250) 35,92} 36.07 [In ice. Observatory 7} « | « «! « 79! 17 156.4) 33.7] 300) 35.88) 36.03 | « in rear of Shies eet ee 7 18° 100.4) 61.7] 300) 36.01] -36.05 ; * Prof. Bache’s Ory xc CCCs ee 9.0! 18 {01.0} 62.9} 300 36.03) 36.06 “ dwelling, 10 a oe « 10.5] 15 |03.6) 91.2] 250) 36.14; 36.05 |Heated by lamps. Chesnut St. 11 } wc ec} 644.2} 18 105.0} 88.5} 300) 36.17} 36.05 “ near Schu’kll 12} « 2 af ee 3.9 12 02.4 77.2 | 200, 36.12} 36.09 |Cloudy. S.E. Sixth. a 13 | C (Sept 1s} P.M. 5.3) 16 |05.2| 69.4| 300 32.17| 32.17 |Clear. S. E. Cirro- Bache. ee “ “ ¢ 5.6] 16 {05.6} 68.1} 300; 32.19} -32.19 Cumulus—rare. Place 15] « | « 49} « 3.9} 16 |06.4 69.5| 300 32.21! 3221 | Cloudy. Nimbus. of 16} ¢ a ce « 44! 16 |05.4) 69.0} 300) 32.18) 32.18 Wind E. Observation ifale Be a cc D:0i 90s 24.4! 68.0 | 250 Bie! 32.18 | < as above. 18 |. B jOct. 5) P.M. 3.3 | 20 | 26.0) 74.0) 250 49. 04| 48.97 \Clondy. N. E. Bache. 19 | « ¢ Bic C 3.6| 20 |27.2) 73.4 ory 4Y. 09) 49.03 ce Same Place o | | | Observation. Mean Time of Ten Oscillations at 70° Fah. by A, 36.053 in Semi-ares of 4 a 2°. Total No. of Vibs. 3350. ‘“ C, 32.186 &e 6 a 2°. ce 1450. “c B (3) 49.000 “ “ “e “6 500. TABLE No. IX. Observations at West Point. —SrEconp SERIEs. | L 5 Qe — : a | fo = ) Pee to ee 2 Se jes |S lea Bess |o o a ras Eg Oo S a) =zsS 1 | oo 2 aD ce HS (|S |/us [eB os Iselses] as one a8 =a lbelllp ree pet IA § #9 Os aa E32 26 | |e |$*5 2 g) Weather, &c. | Observer, &c. SR] a= 5 iA BIO }.82 Beso S o s 2 = cl a re | AO 1 08a Z a S | ——— — | : ———— A Hours. { Mins.| Secs. |Fah.°| 2% | Secs.| Sees. al) A Sept. 7{P.M. 5.0} 18 } 48.4 | 69.9 |300] 37.61] 37.61 |Clear. Wind N.| Bache and ates’ SEH ace 5.3} 18 | 47.6 | 66.8 | “ | 37.59] 37.60 | of W. Courtenay. 3 ce “« 8{/A.M. 10.1] 18 | 44.7} 64.0 | “ | 37.49] 37.52 /Clear. W. Same locality as SS nS So eee eee OS eS Se in former Ob- 4 C | Sept.8 |/A.M. 10.9} 16 44.6 | 70.3 |302| 33.27} 33.27 jClear. W. servations. 5 ke keg cee RF 16) | 826) 69% 1200 oe2o) | oa 6 “ & %)} © 11.6] 16 | 44.6 | 71.9 |302| 33.27] 33.27 Mean Time of Ten Oscillations at 40° Fah. by A, 37.577 in Semi-ares fr. 4 to 2°. No. of Oscillations 900. Cc 33.263 6 to 2°. ze 904. OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM AT SEVERAL PLACES, ETC. 451 The horizontal intensity compared with that at Philadelphia is, from A, .92053, and from C, .93630. ‘The relative weights to be attached to the results with the two needles are, respectively, 1419 and 1113. We now proceed to compare the horizontal intensities, deduced from both series of observations, to obtain the mean. As the methods of observation in the two series are liable to different errors, and the number of observations are different, we have allowed to the results obtained by them, weight in proportion to the number of observations directly, and the square of the mean error inversely. ‘The mean error is hardly attained, even in the case of the greatest number of sets of observations of the second series; but an approxi- mation to it will afford a far more satisfactory mode of deducing the mean intensity than could be obtained by an indiscriminate mean of the results. The numbers found for the weight of the observations with each needle in the two series, have been of course used instead of the num- ber of observations, as referred to in the preceding paragraph. And a mean error has in like manner been deduced from the combined observations with each needle at the two places. Using these num- bers, we have obtained the following for the relative wails of the observations with each needle. First Series. No. 1, 2728 Second Series. A, 29319 « 3. ATG cs C, 1136. By the use of these numbers, and of the horizontal intensities al- ready obtained, we have for the mean, A' = .92156. The superiority of the method in the rarefied medium, cannot bet- ter be shown than by stating, that the mean error with needle A, sup- posing it reached in the observations, was .022 seconds in about 364 seconds, while, with No. 1 in the first series, it was .129 seconds in about 46 seconds, or six times the former. The probable error* in the time of ten vibrations of Needle A is, -0005 second. | * Deduced from the formula P = Ca Young, Phil. Trans. 1819, p. 77. VOL. V.— 5 Q 452 ON THE RELATIVE HORIZONTAL INTENSITIES RELATIVE INTENSITIES AT NEW YORK AND PHILADELPHIA. The observations to be presented belong to both series. Those of the first are retained as second in number to the Philadelphia and West Point observations of the same series. The observations of the first series were made in April and in August 1834. In the first set [ had the kind assistance of professor Renwick; the times were ob- served with a pocket chronometer belonging to him, the rate of which was ascertained, but was not such as to affect the results sensibly. At his suggestion the observations made at Columbia College green were checked by a set made near Bellevue. Another set was made in the north part of the city, but there appeared no difference of local attrac- tion in the three places. The pocket chronometer used in the Au- gust observations was of good character. TABLE No. X. Observations at New York.—First Serizs. Ga ro) ey : . Cia aevlgea ln S58 S = wi |2 2 les Be ese = S pa BS iz 3 Sal, SEE S og a os eu |O as Se gseeoe aa | eq Ee BS hk |e 8 [24.5] 2S =! Weather, &c, |Observers and Places of ES ms BS =o 2.8 2 bo (Se Beroee Uae tr Observation. os, aye AS) Ga Wee 2 3s | 8 Bla ioverio &| PS ae 5 zs a Hours. |Fah.°/A4 | Degs.| Secs. Sees. 1334. | No. 1./April 25) A. M. 8.0}. 42 | 330/25 a 5) 46.03) 46.24 |Wind N. W._ |Prof. Bache & Renwick. “cc ce oo tense 8.5} “© | 320) “ | 46.05} 46.26 |Nimb. & Snow.! Col. College Green. ee «P.M. 12.6} 44.5) 350) 46.20} 46.36 |Slight Rain. |Bache. Rose hill. anal Semele " AES, | | et te F . M q a ; > ) ha | ad ahh PL. W Vol. 5 Unio subglobosus. Unio capsafurmis. Drawn by J.Drayton. ae Se Ta eer, ere re y Parnas. i } : a Wr) ¥ 12 : l \ wer i ’ vy ® J _ a: 7 j { i 4 1 ‘ ‘on iV i fa ’ \ ‘ i 3 ith ae ie ii 1 } 1 I ~ f, tl i “ ‘4 i F i j ; i i vat Ly \) od pee Ar io t i; . EC e r : ' ‘ Mi ji yy y va van 7 f vr , i ~ y ey ree Fe AS nai frie ’ 4 se am. ii i Pa Ve Ae u 5 | fot rs Lay wo’. Diy Ie Weleda s Scoewerreent my = mee ee ive pe arto CORAL SE Unio Murchisonianus . Unto Htldrethianws. aes se ; yf Unio Ravanelranis - Unio Haystonius . Univ dschooleraften«cs Drawn by Jf Tt Jy NCU: rina Sette a Symyphay nta glhosa Unto geometricus Unvo Drawn ky TDrayton . Tartans . Wh, Wa Wello dis Symphynota magnifica . Symphynota Woodrana. Drawn by J.Drayiwn. Brown» Z e7/> 1 ‘i Sl ; * ‘ i aN AAG Oe ary a p Cie” Beye : ay > . zl bs * ¢ - i" ae my “a 3 . . a \ ‘e vr; . ; ne ; o ? , : ; Wns eee me PJ ' ‘1 ’ he 4 } ' ] i * PL.VI Vol.5- Anadonta tmeerta . Anadonia Ferussacana . Anadonta Stewartianu: - Drawn on stone by J Draytor. (ith by ED Lrope re ; PVs Valero Ay y - "RIAN Sal lnc faoeea Anadomta plunda. B; Lith Drawn bry J.Drayton 70 C2 PA'S Le PELE . ; . " 2 ; Zz < Oo, wi a ¥ i at . > ' ' } ree din a — m U \ . j A * / { ih a * ue ' ‘ ’ ‘ “ ‘ i 5 : ’ ‘ i ' - r . 7 y . t y = ’ : PL.VM@ Vol.5. 20 Unio parallelopipedon . Unio lacteclis . Unio Cooperianus , Drawn om stone by J. Drayton , Breer YY 3 - 6 iy - ee = ee at ’ i pris T t ; fi ol \ end A ed yo i at x fr r od Van ¥ r Veh eis ee r fA v Pie ee te tee it J a a uy a Tey ry Pn aay, A ! bi, iy a i 1 : j ny; ’ * an cra ‘ jim y i A, , heen ye} 4 yes * . , = i « 2 ‘ < * - “aon uy ie EXeeoleror 24 Dune aneanne Unio divarica tis . ginatus Unie Grayanws r. + . ? Unio Conradicus Unio Corrtanus ; E Drawn on stone by J. Drayton 5 v B teres Lt * ii 3 = 4 1 1 £ a iP fs call M i , ii) i h } ; é - . fi * is = ‘i - Ke ’ " : ie aaa ' iy ' ‘ ve A J i } he y q - ry vor vl pul ae hi 1 ’ o ‘a ; ; yey ‘ ‘ a Ws i.e fei ae Ne 7 " j wal, iV : 4 sd f RA ~ j re vn ren iti: ; Vs al i — ;. i < , ay ar me 4 § - fy ; 7" Y : 4 H if i, | 7 7 3 ee ty rae Wiad PS f j i Sw ae z | -) ph 7 Ped et Pere iy ae mi hd Sa a ey be i od . = % : ' ii ly i : , 3 eed Le ‘es in f ” * } 6. 7 ‘ i ty j ‘ f aay f 7 i ) \ i a i 4 , en av = He rr ey 4 4 i 4 = i; y y a i # *i . ih ie ~ - * , :f * -— + r = pa if ‘ ' | . “ e y ‘ ' - ' + yi i = ‘al " J 4 "y fipg " ‘ ' ‘ \ . , . ry Se a 4 TEAL Wolke Mo Onto Sowerbianus . Unio dromas . Unio Burroughtanus . ino Troostenscts Drawn by J. Draytor 4, g j , e Ty, DE WO). Te Unio picts. Unio perdtc . Symphynota discon e * Drawn by J. Drayton. Brows Lith v Y UF i i oe “vy en, ‘ i ; ie i uh ¥ 3: ea mn ae wir" } ie oe ‘haan I wets ; ee) ae é i | ss f } 1 ay RAL ye PL .XI Vol.5. Anodonta Blawvilliana. Anodonta lato-muargimata. inodonta tenehricosa Drawn by J Draytor . \ Nr A oe FR. PL. XM Vol.5 ese 33 Unzo Shepardianius. 39 Unto fulvus. Anodonta Mortontana. Unio modiolaformas. Drawn by £DPraytor Becky a ee . . = 4 - vi « es , ue + ~ z a > ~ ' i . ‘ * = . * ae? 4 ° h ‘ . © - | 9 a - . * ‘ 5 7 - * | ’ ie ’ ; « ‘ < ‘ vf if , are wi 4 vr ty af 7 bai Are 7 oy OM “he y ve ds i ig4 a jst » ’ Law ‘ ¢ + by e - Ya - <= : : i % j heal * - 1 ‘ } \ tlt : Pk - if n wy ee Da 1 ~ < \ > 4 . . , 7 - PY. XIV Vol. 3. Wreo Paranensts - U0 Lartlandiawes . Unto Nashyvidlzanis. Vrawn hy JDruaytum, ONLO Car lis. Unio Grofftniaiues . ' 2 wee | 4( i ian y HN at ‘dey Pi ge / im r i" i a ry uo i f vi ve ‘ nee eae se yy ' La PL.XVI Vol.5- wee Symphynota Benedictensts Anodonta Burroughiane- Unio confertis. Drew by TDrayurn a le » ais be —. s » a ” 2 ee P< J Una) { fc PL, XVU Vol.3. eo socrsncig nes ere PERG Cuvoena rotradata - Cyproria Say ers Maryarttank BLvgqgeiane . Druwte by Firayton , . ‘ ¥ + * . “ TR oh ’ , as . ¥ « - ‘ - . * ~ - ey & Gas a, 7 Cy rena turycdd . Brewin by S Dray taw. PL XVI Vols Aphrodite columba CyTeana Woodeiana 56 Helicana _.._ lens Bhp cee. 225 5 (QUE RERRE ML GB oy so = EGLO 59 Hele. _ _.. mauascayviwne 0, _ ___.. purpuragulic Gli, 2. - OLN Regie 62 ,, ... ...-. monodonta : (Eo _. __. eyelostomopsts 64 Heli 65 66 67 > 0 Paludena PL .XIX,VolL5 mantle Te Meant _. dtaphata WB Lymncew Aimalaien TA Melaropots ... VCSUCH nae 55 Z cunclia 76 Aurtcula Woodcana 11 Cuclostoma .. globula 78 Achat At moniltfera WD He Drawn by J Drayton Ueuleies _ Umypertadtes princeps maculats Tuscigula SOPTAMM Veere2Ure Leask spin OSA b0° Paludina 81 Layne O25 83 Phijsa___..-. 64 Ae 85 Paludina B6 Siecined > , L1U7OLGNZ AN CULE I 1 C8 _cllap lee Ho petoreciests Georgtuanid PELIOSTL ~~" = - el a 00 28 i PL. XX, Vol.5 “e020 239,900" ‘ : a || co) 5 = Ww: y — ———- — SS Be SoA NEIA, A aa? as Fig 3. PLATE XYXU. VOL. V. AW \||AA : Drawn by S Rufus Mason . 00” WW Yi | | : te } Gia | my FE j " “ A, \ ii : reve eal ™ Tay tip ifn | Statens SA ara Bae ! 5 wr pal J 5 mm 7 bi ‘ % “¥ : Te Bsa a i ; i a a } my) hi . ai iy f ae ee ior wae 3 ay ale * ye vr 2 Eki eee oo be es UA Br aves i eae Fig 1. ae : 5 PLATE XX. _ WOOD of M* M.S.GARRETSON. oS Scale as or tig 4. G , fig A. G5 i WU) yoy yi A HO aa Pie pe ‘ a E og : Den af Fig .2. OUT HOUSE of ae D. ) POLTEMUS . Seale of Yards. p _10_ 20 30 40 50 <> he 190 E 290 Fig 3. DWELLING &e. and ORCHARD of M# D.POLHEMUS. Scale of Yards. 40 50- icebpl 8 PLATE XXIV, = et ‘ N Ratters from the main house found in this field . : Fig .6. DWELLING & GROUNDS OF MEDDUNN . @ — Trees tromthis field ; Scale of Yards P 25 5 ) LB. Carried eastwardir. = Z 42 — t008 5 is = 13 1S 13 19) : is Uu iA if NS iN oS 0 DS Se s . Le Ss iz eee ‘ ss °p is x i iS pati Ww MW Veeok 9 \& nreces } re et SK ie is eof se 1 cs a ee Peeters ‘ ae ; IN . i arN Nz 5 S F: 2 AN 3 i RS ees gh & = ae § AQ Hh - Fig.7 / WOOD TO THE EAST OF BRUNSWICE, Seale as of rig 4. at direction or Storm Probable Seale as of fig 4. . satan re Pata ne — Pop ee! lis aha see els Realy cn ghahe york bate all Leh ae a be bape ne chaos! a s - iW — ; . ere Cid nies 2 te a , “Woes Aa a eet saline he a hails ee wrath gr caer PME Amar Aires at tye ‘ VR Se rae |, a, 1 ae ci * : P i ae ah WL AACR eee te , ; x or - er de ai i ae ayy sailed etal t) bd 2 seen Mae y meine CSE RDN ace i ll ia fa cage ti ath ais eee pal penis, Oe . W ' PPE TPE | os ow ae 44 - tell n ue Pa © ba ’ i ae dee, Cee ea SY Ue j i Me maa | 1 penis tao oe ‘hm nerEY a Naat and bit we say cere Re op ois adie pt are Re en ae ’ Neel Shy A 1 a aa Rt SS areas PL. 1» Vol. 5. | | | | 1 1 i Thirntom tek y jefe, | Oy \heaqrr ih L| Garpededye. hit nk Valley. i ale | hs ae aya \ | | | || \ | Pare | | | tL Ca Mololedealed wht ella el | ae, | i | LIT MNOMAEL route), SL gasses tS | ese | t | 1} | Poth i i} Ho lz nhimn | remo 4 7e | Vee | | | | | WN | i c . Needle, Magnetic | SAolweh 1 7UECS, | |} LL : lo x 72. nN ———— LODZ ELK. ~ Q = ASN SS Tabb CO errr TT ON g Thevrmomcder “ ia} amy, he kee babe ae Me v ‘al \ a nl ee pa Sil ae, * ; + we r uy 2 > 4 . ry af “ ae > H- ewe Mey ihe i {dt “3 7 ‘ « yates ae . yy re - ’ 5 4 mn 4 & & Z ead ¥ * > ae " 4 oi ee - - bei . ¥ - ti < vas | ae > $ “4. Ly fy eet, Me e e ‘ee ~ Par ~~ bia ' 6 yal ka ¥ FF ie ate Ait é inex ‘ as ? Miami Z th Vipin ” outa * “ toe ~*~ f ie ve = « a iia aes Pe pera gibi ake Z &. 5 : 6 Syn d bY walsh ‘ ¥ A Sohne So es ro ~ oe ere eerie oa * LB AAS teeny atlas 3 7 Dy islee) 1e alae “ oie cia a - - a: Se Sey ‘ , ak: Se cS ee a) eal i | ae | al re eas has i ‘ pt a ? r n + 4 - »¥ . ‘ ye % s owe, . ~~ ¥ ae + ’ i 7) ste oy ie i i . , 's 3 ‘ Wit sable in lt a vd * we 45 ee? Ww ia ie oe cee ee j F & \ i foals 4 7 yes 4 hehe bbe Ati rats cL 4 > yee iene Dakss : i ‘ ‘ . y 3 ~ = ~~ od im = V id i c , ' 4 “lt -. MPS i, 2 OEY Alida cs ae Le ae re a | 1 ‘ i vs “, Py s A a { ' i: ; iy HbA Ce ae Re 4 w st leo saye eee ae AA ha ang 4 ~ ‘ ~ eee wis « Yo Pl al ; “ + Mae Als 4 4 = » ya * a Re - - me ‘ So ae P hlreieal > “ i-A aS oe ee ‘ on see + thie we aed ~ RA oe te : . * - * = & rd sin aie? ey ‘ Fi ' f + == ee we Ne Myre Ae - ae . “ t a1 | iv « , Ca a ean De apes Ne ibe GNI epi li pen oe ae ae neha ancy eT NS) she de m i m sive sta eal r ie i me, v y ‘ oy a Kahy ee AL A f es * us ae 8 hehe walst a bj ig ‘ + . £ oped ae ay b - i - ‘ ‘ fe , it 4 ‘4 q ‘ “sonata ee are) 2 (e-ee e ' =i ee. A age A . . a Pus hye ft doe My al “r 5 2 « 4 epithe aul Mea < 4) Anton , ’ r) Romy, * Se ‘ ¥ 4 Xe t ce ie M Beal e ag q , ' / lees il ape * eer. ie Jz " 4 - J k 2 ei ’ ow am = as Widwwee 4 x . ie ae began UE : 3 pb J : * i. mr M - ' , 3 R ie [ la ) Ee 4 erence! Pa Ph q oh, ie Sih % ob 7 We Ay Fie ‘ 4 5 mkt ea nee we si siotclohan Din ae ee ee eee en ar = A a i t i ayews app ges ied tpl . ‘ : . , ‘ ‘ P 3 i { - * " « 4 ij eg : jm) a i i PL.ILx Vol. 5. ALE ne . ¢ oe © 2 © o S Ss /, alt yi . > Sy =e 2/= ES q = Waa CLIN. TRE bee eee , : = zy M. XI leu <= = Nets NE \rezere CE yl N 4 N >| We Neko « PT Nee Tale TTT \ = SN S LLL = Ses SE f N ages wae) | | | WO) OChecgns Bede. \ jx} 1 N ~~ = = St x > Cale here | ||| | | UZ Lele Ce i > 2 S = Ss S ~ (2c DED A eee > SN S S Sas iN LS Q to Sales SS SSS Se ES S _ S S ay S ES Ss PET toledo TTT TN RIS (| Sopp ea ane ina i x! dhe fs ail 5 7) ae re. end spies ond he srk ogee We : ? ”~ * £ ee iy tm Pet AOS Se he aunt eran Fae a fn Ub grees _ sep ae, palin tet ha se me et dae oS OTL ee -Sre we =a PUR Lasagne eto rere oe ate ba Ss eit on oe ae fae e am Se a ee Se ae Te marerettin «ale hope 7 ssbb fe Teel x te the Geeta reales “ . J Seite see phi lied ry my st w tala Pl . ‘ ry ‘ bs . ‘ as ; ee Fearon in Deck aya ee ee age laloangren = ent ineniicnn ache ; aay t +o a Celene bol : Paeke ’ b oy ee ae por Dhan ewe vs Rome ae PEA We A ried Ealed ee oft pet ey # Nee en ary | Le ree abies eur aey eae => S&S >. . Tie. ci DX XL M XM LPM} HT T “4c Ads. ° Needle. mL igi. Therm: a+} 4 ¢ oy peje 5 I Meade a6 3 | 4 / a Nt . A ~ | CULE aad ANAL Pan y 7 th ie y God is DEED EVR C ECE E COOC CORD SECC E OCDE Resa TAA x : . 4 PNT PN teers ETT TTT (207 (CBRE COLIC SE CECE aes eee cee y IS 7 TTT TET TT sme oT eT PERSIE SCC WOME SMES DARREN AeA Nae N iN \ ass X CORB OC UD AREER ee JCAL E CNSR SORENSEN \ 7 slam PTT stra pe HTT ei STON hs Si] USOC COREE AERO EES BAe LS ~ > IN, ~ = LS ~ KSulataa lec ~ S = 5 > S A aT COC Cee ERC Ee A et = 7 PUTTS epee LE ea AN CELL BN od SS x = ~ ~ s S S UL UCT USC TS EE DARN ATL AE ti IL Aalle TX PT i >| t A Y A] > S Wool seTs SP inne . paperamecinit we A Fier wee = Serene ck) 01s Ee eee st evecsteetanene Dap nie pehacbam leer i STSTEAONHW: SESEGUEDMRERRVSES? » . . a s. aoe ' ray ry? By j - + DE es Nii ats fi an es be mM”. jn rceiepenitaninen aero n . > | i p 3 Yes m9; a oe pel at ie Ub UDR: WDA TUNRENREDEENE > rw - p "7 ) y | upenenees WE SRRERETA ls: lah nl gripe rn oli sctbothnde bate ite ss : oe ines hd i ab Be | SURF CRRA ERROR i ; ooh, tT hee: ‘ i ede tee i-e ee Bin mapb nba Here npeiepee maha z , : . pics, BRRCRA INES w-- - ee 0 ete Lda ome arte bili ponmneveh _ dichab-tinedpesctaesened . : Perera , EEE eye i ia ain mnie See ee ed cipal ink wuieebie mace eel oe ne toe 4 ; “ 1 Pa Te! Ph 4 > re ie = hop lvenas arden == 4 : é ; f ' aa te p oe ee em et me wb sonst aay i ~~ spawtee Po ee +e * a Yemiw sf : ' ‘ ' ! mf oF a ee De Let te eine hon ete te nd ate thee | diene Siam heer tay = eho sig mie rf lees ne tel : : A : . : \ be : , } ‘ { | ee te eli aor he deere-sooni rnin peste dp yatta om OME pry eid ns f ia ve ' ' MI bk woul ‘ihn ieee ha Le Dy ne Oe ee ae i da aie | ee ae a @ fi be a a> eeres | aan a erry | saneace peat) i { 7 | ! o— praben gerd ee Oe deneelkh | a eT ceils ee es eee a pee coe 4 , ; x } : $2 $ apn NT ee heh cee hed oe oe ee ee vn tenis enlpeetotarsit ah feeder tpt - ; L) a. $ ‘ } ' q \ : a ¥ ——— __ seis ctireh np Chiangmai itaniinds ntpin $tke Mame os Geng jc iph meegy bf z : ; 7 , oO f : 1} i‘ 4 sear" > dey hit, shrill ee en a ares 1 i ‘ie wor tala apt : 77 Z i — y ; ' 5 LA a i Ca a ne hick 6 oe ee preety at thie ot = : : . ‘ a : \ a My tr ; a 2 ds - te oe yen a tn nen anaes Tea I fortes bee da bare 4 od ey yr penn ig a petted Y ! , 5 f i b al } t t ; Db wee H i ; aes oe [Oe ee eee es ined Ian nee La ae ee a ‘ i . f ‘ ‘ et r 7 Fe . . | 5 P 4 a y ee ey ee ial —- read ip, nin ical mage hi Sota ate e AD WATTp * a earth . | { rue q g a 4 : J ’ | ¥ = er win ‘ eatin elnr nm stented sien r-denctoatnas cher emi ent A ee te iadea ath ad Soe tad ome . y { 19 ' 4 yr? ; : : b . i 4 i ‘ i i 4 d Saeeees So an al ee See ee ee omnia ety: ee Serre t t . { ‘ _ ‘ a va snes ee eee ee aan een eel a hank re ea ee : ye Me " . ; : = . | t ’ ! { \ ; io i 1 i 0 J q to i simone pee acntyeemt inee P prt IR aaeriem f cyto 5 j 4 Y ; , rs ‘ oo a. Sr ah eee a bik allan artnet oo a4 ee Libby a: d nanny? 1 ometbnanen he poate Erie a hpi del ae > : : ; ' Fa ; e i . i ' ae = ——eE— |, ee ns aie ane a es a thtnpe tet Zi j : : p ~ —— = pal er feretiewititomnlhelpacediey ements fen ep + -e4 pay he” eet J or - f < J 3 x : a ie ee ~~ ee et oe ee re shits 4 alot ae etre eas p } J 4 ¥ Mw. A - a ee 1 pinameae goa web nhntatemiuet etn Aye + ms tor cre remit Bom we ote rete nee p= Bam : a ‘ p sw atte? : roth ill ‘ sien is lem nde ihn ee hee cat te to alg meee canes ceeneee ~—— f he a ’ eg. veer ‘ + « ete ee de ore 7 Ee ee as rrren ys A d _ S t » | ‘ 7 } ‘ oe ee 4 ‘ F i > . t \ “e dente g- aorta ee de fo ~All = WF —ad a inland 4 Senna Biel , we ‘ ae * 4 ; F dala Jubaanen ae = + oe ee bag? . ~~ one o>) ees rT vinege » } Lapa ar ee at oe (eat ethene penser papers th ——= So me mpantendade paleo ener 4 F . i . L ‘ i > } re & - fae wie Gute orn ” — —_—s i cdhecdhes Abiacp anal ane bent i oa F + f ni * ; | > <0 pod ‘ ne | sap tye al orm ane ee ath moon pay re ie etn cn ae 4. oe ‘ in ~ oy ete 4 ah genet pendent ‘ — . a ae ‘ . 5 ) " . x ' . , . ' . , . ” ” “ : s , , ‘ a) ° . ; 1070-8 rennet : ' , * 4 ; . ~ ets : . , -" , - , ; : re ”» eae - “awe ore mone Pe ewes ee err et : ‘ wwe epee one ems er verre eee waved ay vers er one ee + ner ret ees rarer rer er a eT eee , oe eee